Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 4wd
Engine and year
V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0010
For diagnosis of code P0010 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 9
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 10
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0011
For diagnosis of code P0011 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 11
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 12
P0010 - P0014: Testing and Inspection P0012
For diagnosis of code P0012 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0010 - P0014,
( P0011 P0012 P0013 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0010 > Page 13
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0020
For diagnosis of code P0020 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 18
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 19
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0021
For diagnosis of code P0021 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 20
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 21
P0020 - P0024: Testing and Inspection P0022
For diagnosis of code P0022 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0020 - P0024,
( P0021 P0022 P0023 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0020 > Page 22
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040
P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0040
For diagnosis of code P0040 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 27
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 28
P0040 - P0044: Testing and Inspection P0041
For diagnosis of code P0041 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0040 - P0044,
( P0041 P0042 P0043 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0040 > Page 29
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053
P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0053
For diagnosis of code P0053 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 34
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 35
P0050 - P0054: Testing and Inspection P0054
For diagnosis of code P0054 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0050 - P0054,
( P0051 P0052 P0053 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0053 > Page 36
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0055 - P0059,
( P0056 P0057 P0058 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0055 - P0059: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0059 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0060 - P0064,
( P0061 P0062 P0063 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0060 - P0064: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0060 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0000-P00ZZ > P0065 - P0069,
( P0066 P0067 P0068 0065 0066 0067 0068 0069 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0065 - P0069: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0068 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0102
For diagnosis of code P0102 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 51
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 52
P0100 - P0104: Testing and Inspection P0103
For diagnosis of code P0103 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0100 - P0104,
( P0101 P0102 P0103 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0102 > Page 53
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0106
For diagnosis of code P0106 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 58
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 59
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0107
For diagnosis of code P0107 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 60
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 61
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0108
For diagnosis of code P0108 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 62
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 63
P0105 - P0109: Testing and Inspection P0109
For diagnosis of code P0109 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0105 - P0109,
( P0106 P0107 P0108 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0106 > Page 64
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0112
For diagnosis of code P0112 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 69
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 70
P0110 - P0114: Testing and Inspection P0113
For diagnosis of code P0113 refer to chart
Bxxx - P0113
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0110 - P0114,
( P0111 P0112 P0113 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0112 > Page 71
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0116
For diagnosis of code P0116 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 76
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 77
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0117
For diagnosis of code P0117 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 78
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 79
P0115 - P0119: Testing and Inspection P0118
For diagnosis of code P0118 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0115 - P0119,
( P0116 P0117 P0118 0115 0116 0117 0118 0119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0116 > Page 80
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0121
For diagnosis of code P0121 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 85
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 86
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0122
For diagnosis of code P0122 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 87
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 88
P0120 - P0124: Testing and Inspection P0123
For diagnosis of code P0123 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0120 - P0124,
( P0121 P0122 P0123 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0121 > Page 89
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0125
For diagnosis of code P0125 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 94
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 95
P0125 - P0129: Testing and Inspection P0128
For diagnosis of code P0128 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0125 - P0129,
( P0126 P0127 P0128 0125 0126 0127 0128 0129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0125 > Page 96
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0131
For diagnosis of code P0131 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 101
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 102
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0132
For diagnosis of code P0132 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 103
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 104
P0130 - P0134: Testing and Inspection P0133
For diagnosis of code P0133 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0130 - P0134,
( P0131 P0132 P0133 0130 0131 0132 0133 0134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0131 > Page 105
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0135
For diagnosis of code P0135 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 110
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 111
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0136
For diagnosis of code P0136 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 112
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 113
P0135 - P0139: Testing and Inspection P0138
For diagnosis of code P0138 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0135 - P0139,
( P0136 P0137 P0138 0135 0136 0137 0138 0139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0135 > Page 114
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0140 - P0144: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0141 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0140 - P0144,
( P0141 P0142 P0143 0140 0141 0142 0143 0144 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 118
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0145 - P0149: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0148 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0145 - P0149,
( P0146 P0127 P0148 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 122
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0151
For diagnosis of code P0151 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 127
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 128
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0152
For diagnosis of code P0152 refer to chart
P0116 - P0152
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 129
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 130
P0150 - P0154: Testing and Inspection P0153
For diagnosis of code P0153 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0150 - P0154,
( P0151 P0152 P0153 0150 0151 0152 0153 0154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0151 > Page 131
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0155
For diagnosis of code P0155 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 136
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 137
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0156
For diagnosis of code P0156 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 138
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 139
P0155 - P0159: Testing and Inspection P0158
For diagnosis of code P0158 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0155 - P0159,
( P0156 P0157 P0158 0155 0156 0157 0158 0159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0155 > Page 140
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0160 - P0164: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0161 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0160 - P0164,
( P0161 P0162 P0163 0160 0161 0162 0163 0164 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 144
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0171
For diagnosis of code P0171 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 149
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 150
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0172
For diagnosis of code P0172 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 151
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 152
P0170 - P0174: Testing and Inspection P0174
For diagnosis of code P0174 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0170 - P0174,
( P0171 P0172 P0173 0170 0171 0172 0173 0174 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0171 > Page 153
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0175 - P0179: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0175 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0175 - P0179,
( P0176 P0177 P0178 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 157
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0180
For diagnosis of code P0180 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 162
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 163
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0181
For diagnosis of code P0181 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 164
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 165
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0182
For diagnosis of code P0182 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 166
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 167
P0180 - P0184: Testing and Inspection P0183
For diagnosis of code P0183 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0180 - P0184,
( P0181 P0182 P0183 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0180 > Page 168
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0190
For diagnosis of code P0190 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 173
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 174
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0191
For diagnosis of code P0191 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 175
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 176
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0192
For diagnosis of code P0192 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 177
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 178
P0190 - P0194: Testing and Inspection P0193
For diagnosis of code P0193 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0190 - P0194,
( P0191 P0192 P0193 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0190 > Page 179
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0196
For diagnosis of code P0196 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 184
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 185
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0197
For diagnosis of code P0197 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 186
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 187
P0195 - P0199: Testing and Inspection P0198
For diagnosis of code P0198 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0100-P01ZZ > P0195 - P0199,
( P0196 P0197 P0198 0195 0196 0197 0198 0199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0196 > Page 188
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0201
For diagnosis of code P0201 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 194
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 195
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0202
For diagnosis of code P0202 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 196
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 197
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0203
For diagnosis of code P0203 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 198
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 199
P0200 - P0204: Testing and Inspection P0204
For diagnosis of code P0204 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0200 - P0204,
( P0201 P0202 P0203 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0201 > Page 200
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0205
For diagnosis of code P0205 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 205
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 206
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0206
For diagnosis of code P0206 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 207
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 208
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0207
For diagnosis of code P0207 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 209
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 210
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0208
For diagnosis of code P0208 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 211
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 212
P0205 - P0209: Testing and Inspection P0209
For diagnosis of code P0209 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0205 - P0209,
( P0206 P0207 P0208 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0205 > Page 213
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0210
For diagnosis of code P0210 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 218
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 219
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0211
For diagnosis of code P0211 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 220
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 221
P0210 - P0214: Testing and Inspection P0212
For diagnosis of code P0212 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0210 - P0214,
( P0211 P0212 P0213 0210 0211 0212 0213 0214 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0210 > Page 222
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0215 - P0219: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0219 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0215 - P0219,
( P0216 P0217 P0218 0215 0216 0217 0218 0219 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 226
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0221
For diagnosis of code P0221 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 231
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 232
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0222
For diagnosis of code P0222 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 233
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 234
P0220 - P0224: Testing and Inspection P0223
For diagnosis of code P0223 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0220 - P0224,
( P0221 P0222 P0223 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0221 > Page 235
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0230
For diagnosis of code P0230 refer to chart
P0153 - P0230
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 240
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 241
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0231
For diagnosis of code P0231 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 242
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 243
P0230 - P0234: Testing and Inspection P0232
For diagnosis of code P0232 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0230 - P0234,
( P0231 P0232 P0233 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0230 > Page 244
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0297
For diagnosis of code P0297 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 249
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 250
P0295 - P0299: Testing and Inspection P0298
For diagnosis of code P0298 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0200-P02ZZ > P0295 - P0299,
( P0296 P0297 P0298 0295 0296 0297 0298 0299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0297 > Page 251
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0300
For diagnosis of code P0300 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 257
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 258
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0301
For diagnosis of code P0301 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 259
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 260
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0302
For diagnosis of code P0302 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 261
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 262
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0303
For diagnosis of code P0303 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 263
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 264
P0300 - P0304: Testing and Inspection P0304
For diagnosis of code P0304 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0300 - P0304,
( P0301 P0302 P0303 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0300 > Page 265
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0305
For diagnosis of code P0305 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 270
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 271
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0306
For diagnosis of code P0306 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 272
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 273
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0307
For diagnosis of code P0307 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 274
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 275
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0308
For diagnosis of code P0308 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 276
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 277
P0305 - P0309: Testing and Inspection P0309
For diagnosis of code P0309 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0305 - P0309,
( P0306 P0307 P0308 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0305 > Page 278
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0310 - P0314: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0310 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0310 - P0314,
( P0311 P0312 P0313 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 282
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315
P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0315
For diagnosis of code P0315 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 287
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 288
P0315 - P0319: Testing and Inspection P0316
For diagnosis of code P0316 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0315 - P0319,
( P0316 P0317 P0318 0315 0316 0317 0318 0319 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0315 > Page 289
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0320 - P0324: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0320 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0320 - P0324,
( P0321 P0322 P0323 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 293
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0325
For diagnosis of code P0325 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 298
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 299
P0325 - P0329: Testing and Inspection P0326
For diagnosis of code P0326 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0325 - P0329,
( P0326 P0327 P0328 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0325 > Page 300
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0330
For diagnosis of code P0330 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 305
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 306
P0330 - P0334: Testing and Inspection P0331
For diagnosis of code P0331 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0330 - P0334,
( P0331 P0332 P0333 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0330 > Page 307
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0340 - P0344: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0340 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0340 - P0344,
( P0341 P0342 P0343 0340 0341 0342 0343 0344 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 311
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349,
( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0345 - P0349: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0345 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0345 - P0349,
( P0346 P0347 P0348 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 315
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0350
For diagnosis of code P0350 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 320
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 321
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0351
For diagnosis of code P0351 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 322
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 323
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0352
For diagnosis of code P0352 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 324
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 325
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0353
For diagnosis of code P0353 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 326
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 327
P0350 - P0354: Testing and Inspection P0354
For diagnosis of code P0354 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0350 - P0354,
( P0351 P0352 P0353 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0350 > Page 328
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0355
For diagnosis of code P0355 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 333
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 334
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0356
For diagnosis of code P0356 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 335
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 336
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0357
For diagnosis of code P0357 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 337
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 338
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0358
For diagnosis of code P0358 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 339
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 340
P0355 - P0359: Testing and Inspection P0359
For diagnosis of code P0359 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0355 - P0359,
( P0356 P0357 P0358 0355 0356 0357 0358 0359 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0355 > Page 341
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0360 - P0364: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0360 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0300-P03ZZ > P0360 - P0364,
( P0361 P0362 P0363 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 345
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0400
For diagnosis of code P0400 refer to chart
P0231 - P0400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 351
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 352
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0401
For diagnosis of code P0401 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 353
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 354
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0402
For diagnosis of code P0402 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 355
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 356
P0400 - P0404: Testing and Inspection P0403
For diagnosis of code P0403 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0400 - P0404,
( P0401 P0402 P0403 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0400 > Page 357
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405
P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0405
For diagnosis of code P0405 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 362
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 363
P0405 - P0409: Testing and Inspection P0406
For diagnosis of code P0406 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0405 - P0409,
( P0406 P0407 P0408 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0405 > Page 364
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0411
For diagnosis of code P0411 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 369
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 370
P0410 - P0414: Testing and Inspection P0412
For diagnosis of code P0412 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0410 - P0414,
( P0411 P0412 P0413 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0411 > Page 371
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0420 - P0424,
( P0421 P0422 P0423 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0420 - P0424: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0420 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0430 - P0434,
( P0431 P0432 P0433 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0430 - P0434: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0430 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0442
For diagnosis of code P0442 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 382
P0440 - P0444: Testing and Inspection P0443
For diagnosis of code P0443 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0440 - P0444,
( P0441 P0442 P0443 0440 0441 0442 0443 0444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0442 > Page 383
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0445 - P0449,
( P0446 P0447 P0448 0445 0446 0447 0448 0449 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0445 - P0449: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0446 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0451
For diagnosis of code P0451 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 391
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 392
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0452
For diagnosis of code P0452 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 393
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 394
P0450 - P0454: Testing and Inspection P0453
For diagnosis of code P0453 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0450 - P0454,
( P0451 P0452 P0453 0450 0451 0452 0453 0454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0451 > Page 395
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0455
For diagnosis of code P0455 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 400
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0456
For diagnosis of code P0456 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 401
P0455 - P0459: Testing and Inspection P0457
For diagnosis of P0457 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0455 - P0459,
( P0456 P0457 P0458 0455 0456 0457 0458 0459 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0455 > Page 402
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0460
For diagnosis of code P0460 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 407
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 408
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0461
For diagnosis of code P0461 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 409
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 410
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0462
For diagnosis of code P0462 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 411
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 412
P0460 - P0464: Testing and Inspection P0463
For diagnosis of code P0463 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0460 - P0464,
( P0461 P0462 P0463 0460 0461 0462 0463 0464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0460 > Page 413
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0480
For diagnosis of code P0480 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 418
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 419
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0481
For diagnosis of code P0481 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 420
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 421
P0480 - P0484: Testing and Inspection P0482
For diagnosis of code P0482 refer to chart
P0401 - P0482
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0400-P04ZZ > P0480 - P0484,
( P0481 P0482 P0483 0480 0481 0482 0483 0484 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0480 > Page 422
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0500
For diagnosis of code P0500 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 428
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 429
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0501
For diagnosis of code P0501 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 430
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 431
P0500 - P0504: Testing and Inspection P0503
For diagnosis of code P0503 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0500 - P0504,
( P0501 P0502 P0503 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0500 > Page 432
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0505
For diagnosis of code P0505 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
NOTE 16: Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions Chart for Descriptions,
Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 437
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 438
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0506
For diagnosis of code P0506 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
NOTE 16: Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions Chart for Descriptions,
Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 439
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 440
P0505 - P0509: Testing and Inspection P0507
For diagnosis of code P0507 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
NOTE 16: Refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Descriptions Chart for Descriptions,
Possible Causes and Diagnostic Aids for the DTC in question.
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0505 - P0509,
( P0506 P0507 P0508 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0505 > Page 441
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514,
( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0510 - P0514: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0511 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0510 - P0514,
( P0511 P0512 P0513 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 445
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0525 - P0529,
( P0526 P0527 P0528 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0525 - P0529: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0528 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0525 - P0529,
( P0526 P0527 P0528 0525 0526 0527 0528 0529 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 449
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0530 - P0534: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0534 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0530 - P0534,
( P0531 P0532 P0533 0530 0531 0532 0533 0534 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 453
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537
P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0537
For diagnosis of code P0537 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 458
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 459
P0535 - P0539: Testing and Inspection P0538
For diagnosis of code P0538 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0535 - P0539,
( P0536 P0537 P0538 0535 0536 0537 0538 0539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0537 > Page 460
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0552
For diagnosis of code P0552 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 465
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 466
P0550 - P0554: Testing and Inspection P0553
For diagnosis of code P0553 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0500-P05ZZ > P0550 - P0554,
( P0551 P0552 P0553 0550 0551 0552 0553 0554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0552 > Page 467
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0602
For diagnosis of code P0602 refer to NOTE 7:
NOTE 7: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instruction refer to the Flash VID
Block Procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 473
P0600 - P0604: Testing and Inspection P0603
For diagnosis of code P0603 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0600 - P0604,
( P0601 P0602 P0603 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0602 > Page 474
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605
P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0605
For diagnosis of code P0605 refer to NOTE 10:
NOTE 10: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing PCM. For
Electronic Throttle Control vehicles, P0606 may be set with other DTC's indicating a specific failure
in that system, and repairing those DTC's will fix the P0606. (Follow DTC chart for DTC's) For
diagnosing P0606 alone, an internal fault in the PCM is indicated, and the PCM should be
replaced. For replacement, refer to Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
(EEPROM). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0605 - P0609,
( P0606 P0607 P0608 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0605 > Page 479
P0605 - P0609: Testing and Inspection P0606
For diagnosis of code P0606 refer to NOTE 10:
NOTE 10: Be sure to check for aftermarket performance products before replacing PCM. For
Electronic Throttle Control vehicles, P0606 may be set with other DTC's indicating a specific failure
in that system, and repairing those DTC's will fix the P0606. (Follow DTC chart for DTC's) For
diagnosing P0606 alone, an internal fault in the PCM is indicated, and the PCM should be
replaced. For replacement, refer to Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
(EEPROM). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620
P0620 - P0624: Testing and Inspection P0620
For diagnosis of code P0620 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620 > Page 484
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620 > Page 485
P0620 - P0624: Testing and Inspection P0622
For diagnosis of code P0622 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0620 - P0624,
( P0621 P0622 P0623 0620 0621 0622 0623 0624 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0620 > Page 486
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649,
( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0645 - P0649: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0645 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0645 - P0649,
( P0646 P0647 P0648 0645 0646 0647 0648 0649 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 490
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0660 - P0664: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0660 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0600-P06ZZ > P0660 - P0664,
( P0661 P0662 P0663 0660 0661 0662 0663 0664 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 494
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0703
For diagnosis of code P0703 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 500
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 501
P0700 - P0704: Testing and Inspection P0704
For diagnosis of code P0574 refer to chart
P0500 - P071x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0700 - P0704,
( P0701 P0702 P0703 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0703 > Page 502
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0705
For diagnosis of code P0705 refer to chart
DTC Index B2472 - U1262
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Instrument Cluster, follow this link: See: Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 507
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0707
For diagnosis of code P0707 refer to chart
Part 3 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 508
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 509
P0705 - P0709: Testing and Inspection P0708
For diagnosis of code P0708 refer to chart
Part 3 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0705 - P0709,
( P0706 P0707 P0708 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0705 > Page 510
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0712
For diagnosis of code P0712 refer to chart
Part 6 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 > Page 515
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 > Page 516
P0710 - P0714: Testing and Inspection P0713
For diagnosis of code P0713 refer to chart
Part 6 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0710 - P0714,
( P0711 P0712 P0713 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0712 > Page 517
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0715
For diagnosis of code P0715 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 522
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 523
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0717
For diagnosis of code P0717 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 524
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 525
P0715 - P0719: Testing and Inspection P0718
For diagnosis of code P0718 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0715 - P0719,
( P0716 P0717 P0718 0715 0716 0717 0718 0719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0715 > Page 526
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Manual Transmission
For diagnosis of code P072x refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 531
-
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Note: "x" = any number 0 thru 9
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 532
P0720 - P0724: Testing and Inspection Automatic Transmission
P0720
For diagnosis of code P0720 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 533
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0721
For diagnosis of code P0721 refer to chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 534
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
P0722 ( P 0722 )
For diagnosis of code P0722 refer to chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 535
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0720 - P0724,
( P0721 P0722 P0723 0720 0721 0722 0723 0724 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Manual Transmission >
Page 536
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0731
For diagnosis of code P0731 refer to chart
Part 2 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 541
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 542
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0732
For diagnosis of code P0732 refer to chart
Part 3 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 543
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 544
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0733
For diagnosis of code P0733 refer to chart
Part 3 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 545
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 546
P0730 - P0734: Testing and Inspection P0734
For diagnosis of code P0734 refer to chart
Part 3 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0730 - P0734,
( P0731 P0732 P0733 0730 0731 0732 0733 0734 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0731 > Page 547
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0740
For diagnosis of code P0740 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 552
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 553
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0741
For diagnosis of code P0741 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 554
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 555
P0740 - P0744: Testing and Inspection P0743
For diagnosis of code P0743 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0740 - P0744,
( P0741 P0742 P0743 0740 0741 0742 0743 0744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0740 > Page 556
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0750
For diagnosis of code P0750 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 561
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 562
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0751
For diagnosis of code P0751 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 563
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 564
P0750 - P0754: Testing and Inspection P0753
For diagnosis of code P0753 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0750 - P0754,
( P0751 P0752 P0753 0750 0751 0752 0753 0754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0750 > Page 565
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0755
For diagnosis of code P0755 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 570
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 571
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0756
For diagnosis of code P0756 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 572
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 573
P0755 - P0759: Testing and Inspection P0758
For diagnosis of code P0758 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0700-P07ZZ > P0755 - P0759,
( P0756 P0757 P0758 0755 0756 0757 0758 0759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P0755 > Page 574
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814,
( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P0810 - P0814: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P0812 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P0800-P08ZZ > P0810 - P0814,
( P0811 P0812 P0813 0810 0811 0812 0813 0814 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 579
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1000
For diagnosis of code P1000 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
NOTE 1: DTC P1000 is ignored in KOEO an KOER Self-Test. Disregard DTC P1000 and continue
as directed.
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 585
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 586
P1000 - P1004: Testing and Inspection P1001
For diagnosis of code P1001 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1000-P10ZZ > P1000 - P1004,
( P1001 P1002 P1003 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1000 > Page 587
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1100
For diagnosis of code P1100 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 593
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 594
P1100 - P1104: Testing and Inspection P1101
For diagnosis of code P1101 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1100 - P1104,
( P1101 P1102 P1103 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1100 > Page 595
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1110 - P1114: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1112 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1110 - P1114,
( P1111 P1112 P1113 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 599
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1116
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1116
For diagnosis of code P1116 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1116 > Page 604
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1116 > Page 605
P1115 - P1119: Testing and Inspection P1117
For diagnosis of code P1117 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1115 - P1119,
( P1116 P1117 P1118 1115 1116 1117 1118 1119 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1116 > Page 606
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1120
For diagnosis of code P1120 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 611
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 612
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1121
For diagnosis of code P1121 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 613
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 614
P1120 - P1124: Testing and Inspection P1124
For diagnosis of code P1124 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1120 - P1124,
( P1121 P1122 P1123 1120 1121 1122 1123 1124 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1120 > Page 615
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1125
For diagnosis of code P1125 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 620
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 621
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1127
For diagnosis of code P1127 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 622
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 623
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1128
For diagnosis of code P1128 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 624
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 625
P1125 - P1129: Testing and Inspection P1129
For diagnosis of code P1129 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1125 - P1129,
( P1126 P1127 P1128 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1125 > Page 626
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1130
For diagnosis of code P1130 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 631
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 632
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1131
For diagnosis of code P1131 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 633
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 634
P1130 - P1134: Testing and Inspection P1132
For diagnosis of code P1132 refer to chart
P072x - P1132
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1130 - P1134,
( P1131 P1132 P1133 1130 1131 1132 1133 1134 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1130 > Page 635
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1137
For diagnosis of code P1137 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 640
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 641
P1135 - P1139: Testing and Inspection P1138
For diagnosis of code P1138 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1135 - P1139,
( P1136 P1137 P1138 1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1137 > Page 642
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1150
For diagnosis of code P1150 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 647
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 648
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1151
For diagnosis of code P1151 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 649
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 650
P1150 - P1154: Testing and Inspection P1152
For diagnosis of code P1152 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1150 - P1154,
( P1151 P1152 P1153 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1150 > Page 651
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1157
For diagnosis of code P1157 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 656
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 657
P1155 - P1159: Testing and Inspection P1158
For diagnosis of code P1158 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1155 - P1159,
( P1156 P1157 P1158 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1157 > Page 658
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1168
For diagnosis of code P1168 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 663
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 664
P1165 - P1169: Testing and Inspection P1169
For diagnosis of code P1169 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1165 - P1169,
( P1166 P1167 P1168 1165 1166 1167 1168 1169 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1168 > Page 665
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1180
For diagnosis of code P1180 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 670
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 671
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1181
For diagnosis of code P1181 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 672
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 673
P1180 - P1184: Testing and Inspection P1184
For diagnosis of code P1184 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1180 - P1184,
( P1181 P1182 P1183 1180 1181 1182 1183 1184 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1180 > Page 674
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1100-P11ZZ > P1195 - P1199,
( P1196 P1197 P1198 1195 1196 1197 1198 1199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1195 - P1199: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1197 refer to chart
DTC Index B2472 - U1262
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Instrument Cluster, follow this link: See: Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1232
For diagnosis of code P1232 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 683
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 684
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1233
For diagnosis of code P1233 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
NOTE 6: Got to Information Bus for REM (Rear Electronics Module ) Self-test diagnostics. See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 685
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 686
P1230 - P1234: Testing and Inspection P1234
For diagnosis of code P1234 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
NOTE 6: Got to Information Bus for REM (Rear Electronics Module ) Self-test diagnostics. See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1230 - P1234,
( P1231 P1232 P1233 1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1232 > Page 687
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1235
For diagnosis of code P1235 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 692
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 693
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1236
For diagnosis of code P1236 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 694
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 695
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1237
For diagnosis of code P1237 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 696
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 697
P1235 - P1239: Testing and Inspection P1238
For diagnosis of code P1238 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1235 - P1239,
( P1236 P1237 P1238 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1235 > Page 698
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1240 - P1244,
( P1241 P1242 P1243 1240 1241 1242 1243 1244 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1240 - P1244: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1244 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1245
For diagnosis of code P1245 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 706
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 707
P1245 - P1249: Testing and Inspection P1246
For diagnosis of P1246 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1245 - P1249,
( P1246 P1247 P1248 1245 1246 1247 1248 1249 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1245 > Page 708
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Charging System
DTC Index P1246
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Charging System diagnostic information, See: Starting and Charging/Charging
System/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1260 - P1264,
( P1261 P1262 P1263 1260 1261 1262 1263 1264 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1260 - P1264: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1260 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1270 - P1274,
( P1271 P1272 P1273 1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1270 - P1274: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1270 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1285
For diagnosis of code P1285 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 719
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 720
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1288
For diagnosis of code P1288 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 721
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 722
P1285 - P1289: Testing and Inspection P1289
For diagnosis of code P1289 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1285 - P1289,
( P1286 P1287 P1288 1285 1286 1287 1288 1289 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1285 > Page 723
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1290 - P1294,
( P1291 P1292 P1293 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1290 - P1294: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1290 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1200-P12ZZ > P1295 - P1299,
( P1296 P1297 P1298 1295 1296 1297 1298 1299 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1295 - P1299: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1299 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1305 - P1309,
( P1306 P1307 P1308 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1305 - P1309: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1309 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1335 - P1339,
( P1336 P1337 P1338 1335 1336 1337 1338 1339 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1335 - P1339: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1336 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1380
For diagnosis of code P1380 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 741
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 742
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1381
For diagnosis of code P1381 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 743
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 744
P1380 - P1384: Testing and Inspection P1383
For diagnosis of code P1383 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1380 - P1384,
( P1381 P1382 P1383 1380 1381 1382 1383 1384 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1380 > Page 745
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1386
P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1386
For diagnosis of code P1386 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1386 > Page 750
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1386 > Page 751
P1385 - P1389: Testing and Inspection P1388
For diagnosis of code P1388 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1385 - P1389,
( P1386 P1387 P1388 1385 1386 1387 1388 1389 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1386 > Page 752
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1300-P13ZZ > P1395 - P1399,
( P1396 P1397 P1398 1395 1396 1397 1398 1399 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1395 - P1399: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1397 refer to NOTE 17:
NOTE 17: Refer to Charging System and diagnose the charging system concern. See: Starting and
Charging/Charging System/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1400
For diagnosis of code P1400 refer to chart
P1137 - P1400
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 761
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 762
P1400 - P1404: Testing and Inspection P1401
For diagnosis of code P1401 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1400 - P1404,
( P1401 P1402 P1403 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1400 > Page 763
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1405
For diagnosis of code P1405 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 768
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 769
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1406
For diagnosis of code P1406 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 770
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 771
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1408
For diagnosis of code P1408 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 772
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 773
P1405 - P1409: Testing and Inspection P1409
For diagnosis of code P1409 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1405 - P1409,
( P1406 P1407 P1408 1405 1406 1407 1408 1409 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1405 > Page 774
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436
P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1436
For diagnosis of code P1436 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 779
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 780
P1435 - P1439: Testing and Inspection P1437
For diagnosis of code P1437 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1435 - P1439,
( P1436 P1437 P1438 1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1436 > Page 781
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1440 - P1444,
( P1441 P1442 P1443 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1440 - P1444: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1443 refer to chart
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450
P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1450
For diagnosis of code P1450 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 789
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emissions System
DTC Index P0442 - P1450
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Evaporative Emissions diagnostic information, See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 790
P1450 - P1454: Testing and Inspection P1451
For diagnosis of code P1451 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1450 - P1454,
( P1451 P1452 P1453 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1450 > Page 791
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1460
For diagnosis of code P1460 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 796
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 797
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1461
For diagnosis of code P1461 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 798
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 799
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1462
For diagnosis of code P1462 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 800
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 801
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1463
For diagnosis of code P1463 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 802
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 803
P1460 - P1464: Testing and Inspection P1464
For diagnosis of P1464 refer to the system experiencing the problem.
Computers and Control Systems
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1460 - P1464,
( P1461 P1462 P1463 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1460 > Page 804
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Heating and Air Conditioning
DTC Index P1460 - P1479
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete Heating and Air Conditioning diagnostic information, See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1465 - P1469,
( P1466 P1467 P1468 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1465 - P1469: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1469 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1470 - P1474,
( P1471 P1472 P1473 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1470 - P1474: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1474 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1477
For diagnosis of code P1477 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 815
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 816
P1475 - P1479: Testing and Inspection P1479
For diagnosis of code P1479 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1400-P14ZZ > P1475 - P1479,
( P1476 P1477 P1478 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1477 > Page 817
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1500
For diagnosis of code P1500 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 823
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 824
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1501
For diagnosis of code P1501 refer to chart
P1401 - P1501
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 825
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 826
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1502
For diagnosis of code P1502 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 827
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 828
P1500 - P1504: Testing and Inspection P1504
For diagnosis of code P1504 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1500 - P1504,
( P1501 P1502 P1503 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1500 > Page 829
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1506
For diagnosis of code P1506 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 834
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 835
P1505 - P1509: Testing and Inspection P1507
For diagnosis of code P1507 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1505 - P1509,
( P1506 P1507 P1508 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1506 > Page 836
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1516
For diagnosis of code P1516 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 841
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 842
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1517
For diagnosis of code P1517 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 843
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 844
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1518
For diagnosis of code P1518 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 845
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 846
P1515 - P1519: Testing and Inspection P1519
For diagnosis of code P1519 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1515 - P1519,
( P1516 P1517 P1518 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1516 > Page 847
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1520 - P1524: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1520 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1520 - P1524,
( P1521 P1522 P1523 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 851
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537
P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1537
For diagnosis of code P1537 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 856
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 857
P1535 - P1539: Testing and Inspection P1538
For diagnosis of code P1538 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1535 - P1539,
( P1536 P1537 P1538 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1537 > Page 858
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1545 - P1549: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1549 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1545 - P1549,
( P1546 P1547 P1548 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 862
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1550 - P1554: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1550 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1550 - P1554,
( P1551 P1552 P1553 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 866
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1565
For diagnosis of code P1565 refer to Cruise Control. See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 871
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1566
For diagnosis of code P1566 refer to Cruise Control. See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 872
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1567
For diagnosis of code P1567 refer to Cruise Control. See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1565 - P1569,
( P1566 P1567 P1568 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1565 > Page 873
P1565 - P1569: Testing and Inspection P1568
For diagnosis of code P1568 refer to Cruise Control. See: Cruise Control/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1570 - P1574: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1572 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1500-P15ZZ > P1570 - P1574,
( P1571 P1572 P1573 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 877
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1630 - P1634: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1633 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1630 - P1634,
( P1631 P1632 P1633 1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 882
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1635
For diagnosis of code P1635 refer to Emission Control Systems, See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 887
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1636
For diagnosis of code P1636 refer to Note 14:
NOTE 14: DTC P1636 indicates the PCM has lost communication with the Inductive Signature
Chip. Replace PCM. If replacement is necessary refer to Flash Electrically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory (EEPROM). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1635 - P1639,
( P1636 P1637 P1638 1635 1636 1637 1638 1639 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1635 > Page 888
P1635 - P1639: Testing and Inspection P1639
For diagnosis of code P1639 refer to Note 7:
NOTE 7: The Vehicle ID (VID) Block must be reprogrammed. For instruction refer to the Flash VID
Block Procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1640 - P1644: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1641 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1640 - P1644,
( P1641 P1642 P1643 1640 1641 1642 1643 1644 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 892
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1650
For diagnosis of code P1650 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 897
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 898
P1650 - P1654: Testing and Inspection P1651
For diagnosis of code P1651 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1600-P16ZZ > P1650 - P1654,
( P1651 P1652 P1653 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1650 > Page 899
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1702
For diagnosis of code P1702 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 905
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 906
P1700 - P1704: Testing and Inspection P1703
For diagnosis of code P1703 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1700 - P1704,
( P1701 P1702 P1703 1700 1701 1702 1703 1704 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1702 > Page 907
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1705
For diagnosis of code P1705 refer to chart
Part 1 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 912
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 913
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1706
For diagnosis of code P1706 refer to chart
DTC Index B2472 - U1262
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Instrument Cluster, follow this link: See: Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 914
P1705 - P1709: Testing and Inspection P1709
For diagnosis of code P1709 refer to chart
P1502 - P176x
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1705 - P1709,
( P1706 P1707 P1708 1705 1706 1707 1708 1709 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1705 > Page 915
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1711
For diagnosis of code P1711 refer to chart
Part 6 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 920
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 921
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1713
For diagnosis of code P1713 refer to chart
Part 6 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 922
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 923
P1710 - P1714: Testing and Inspection P1714
For diagnosis of code P1714 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1710 - P1714,
( P1711 P1712 P1713 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1711 > Page 924
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1715
For diagnosis of code P1715 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 929
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 930
P1715 - P1719: Testing and Inspection P1718
For diagnosis of code P1718 refer to chart
Part 6 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1715 - P1719,
( P1716 P1717 P1718 1715 1716 1717 1718 1719 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1715 > Page 931
Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1742
For diagnosis of code P1742 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 936
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 937
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1743
For diagnosis of code P1743 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 938
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 939
P1740 - P1744: Testing and Inspection P1744
For diagnosis of code P1744 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1740 - P1744,
( P1741 P1742 P1743 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1742 > Page 940
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1746
For diagnosis of code P1746 refer to chart
Part 2 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 945
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 946
P1745 - P1749: Testing and Inspection P1747
For diagnosis of code P1747 refer to chart
Part 2 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1745 - P1749,
( P1746 P1747 P1748 1745 1746 1747 1748 1749 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1746 > Page 947
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1750 - P1754: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1751 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1750 - P1754,
( P1751 P1752 P1753 1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 951
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1755 - P1759: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1756 refer to chart
Part 5 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1755 - P1759,
( P1756 P1757 P1758 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 955
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1760 - P1764: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1760 refer to chart
Part 2 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1760 - P1764,
( P1761 P1762 P1763 1760 1761 1762 1763 1764 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 959
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1780
For diagnosis of code P1780 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 964
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 965
P1780 - P1784: Testing and Inspection P1781
For diagnosis of code P1781 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
NOTE 13: Go to Transfer Case. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Testing and
Inspection
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1780 - P1784,
( P1781 P1782 P1783 1780 1781 1782 1783 1784 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1780 > Page 966
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1788
For diagnosis of code P1788 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 971
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 972
P1785 - P1789: Testing and Inspection P1789
For diagnosis of code P1789 refer to chart
Part 4 Of 6
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Transmission Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1700-P17ZZ > P1785 - P1789,
( P1786 P1787 P1788 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P1788 > Page 973
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P1900 - P1904: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P1900 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P1900-P19ZZ > P1900 - P1904,
( P1901 P1902 P1903 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 978
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004,
( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2000 - P2004: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2004 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2000 - P2004,
( P2001 P2002 P2003 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 983
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2005
For diagnosis of code P2005 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 988
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 989
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2006
For diagnosis of code P2006 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 990
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 991
P2005 - P2009: Testing and Inspection P2008
For diagnosis of code P2008 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2005 - P2009,
( P2006 P2007 P2008 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2005 > Page 992
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014,
( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2010 - P2014: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2014 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2010 - P2014,
( P2011 P2012 P2013 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 996
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2015 - P2019: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2019 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2015 - P2019,
( P2016 P2017 P2018 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1000
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070
P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2070
For diagnosis of code P2070 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1005
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1006
P2070 - P2074: Testing and Inspection P2071
For diagnosis of code P2071 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2070 - P2074,
( P2071 P2072 P2073 2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2070 > Page 1007
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2075 - P2079,
( P2076 P2077 P2078 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis
P2075 - P2079: Testing and Inspection
For diagnosis of code P2075 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2000-P20ZZ > P2075 - P2079,
( P2076 P2077 P2078 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 1011
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2195
For diagnosis of code P2195 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1017
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1018
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2196
For diagnosis of code P2196 refer to chart
P177x - P2196
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
-
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1019
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1020
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2197
For diagnosis of code P2197 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2100-P21ZZ > P2195 - P2199,
( P2196 P2197 P2198 2195 2196 2197 2198 2199 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2195 > Page 1021
P2195 - P2199: Testing and Inspection P2198
For diagnosis of code P2198 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257
P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2257
For diagnosis of code P2257 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2255 - P2259,
( P2256 P2257 P2258 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2257 > Page 1027
P2255 - P2259: Testing and Inspection P2258
For diagnosis of code P2258 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2270
For diagnosis of code P2270 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1032
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2271
For diagnosis of code P2271 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1033
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2272
For diagnosis of code P2272 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > A L L Diagnostic Trouble Codes ( DTC ) > Codes by Number > P2200-P22ZZ > P2270 - P2274,
( P2271 P2272 P2273 2270 2271 2272 2273 2274 ) > System Information > System Diagnosis > P2270 > Page 1034
P2270 - P2274: Testing and Inspection P2273
For diagnosis of code P2273 refer to chart
P2197 - Uxxx
If there is no link in the chart then:
- This code is not a valid code for this vehicle
- Or information published by the manufacturer for this vehicle did not include this code
For complete diagnosis of the Engine Control system, follow this link: See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1041
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1042
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1043
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm
Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Audio
Control Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Audio Control Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Audio
Control Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1050
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Controlled Functions
General Module: Description and Operation Module Controlled Functions
MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
The multifunction module consists of the generic electronic module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Controlled Functions > Page 1056
General Module: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The generic electronic module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern
is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
General Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Fuse
- Wiring harness
- Connector(s)
- Circuitry
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
- NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint
Tests
- SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate system to continue
diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1059
General Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1318
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1060
DTC Index B1319 - B2494
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1061
DTC Index B2495 - C1962
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1062
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1063
General Module: Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A: NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE
(GEM)
Test A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1064
Test A2-A3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1065
Test A4-A5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1066
General Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1067
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > General
Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1068
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1075
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 1087
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1088
Seat Heater Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1089
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1090
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar climate controlled heated power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition install the original part and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1091
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1092
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1096
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1097
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the root opening panel module
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1107
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1108
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1109
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1110
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1111
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1112
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1113
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1114
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1115
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1116
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1117
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1118
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1119
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1120
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1121
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1122
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1123
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1124
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1125
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1126
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1127
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1128
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1129
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1130
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1131
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1141
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1142
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1143
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1144
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1145
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1146
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1147
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1148
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1149
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1150
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1151
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1152
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1153
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1154
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1155
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1156
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1157
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1158
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1159
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1160
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1161
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1162
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1163
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1164
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 1165
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1170
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1171
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1172
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1178
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1179
View 151-12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1180
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1183
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1184
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 1185
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1186
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1187
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1192
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1193
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1194
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1195
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1199
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1200
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1201
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1202
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Instrument Panel Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1207
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1212
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1213
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1217
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1220
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1221
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1222
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1226
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1227
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1228
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1235
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1236
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1237
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1242
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 1243
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1250
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1251
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1252
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1257
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1261
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1265
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1270
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 1271
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1274
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1275
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1276
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1277
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 1278
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1281
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 1282
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1290
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1291
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1292
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1293
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1294
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1295
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1296
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1297
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1298
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1299
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1300
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1301
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1302
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1303
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1304
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1305
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1306
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1307
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1308
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1309
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1310
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1311
59-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1312
59-3
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a strategy that delivers a transmission output
shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes the Visteon Gen
II electronic throttle body (replaces throttle cable).
Torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy. This is possible by
not coupling the throttle angle to pedal position, which enables various fuel economy schemes and
technologies.
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts. In other words the engine shifts can result is an engine lugging condition (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the same torque requested by the driver. It should
be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates
when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon"
light.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as:
- VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Continuously varying Transmission (CVT)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ECT also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are:
- Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate ISC Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
Electronic Throttle Body
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 148) has the following characteristics
1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the
throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has
the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2X main spring). Default
angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (typically 7 to 8 degrees from
hard-stop angle).
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding is the bore (~0.75
degree). This hard stop is non-adjustable and is set
to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the plate or use
plate sealant. The hole in the plate is not required
with ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle, which also is the reason
there is no IAC.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP assembly requires four wires.
- 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for safety monitor reasons. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and
APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal
operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1316
position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2- (5 V Reference Voltage)
- 2- (Signal Return "ground")
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A safe value will be substituted for a
faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1321
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine
Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 1322
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
1323
View 151-11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 1326
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views >
Page 1327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash
Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accomodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash
Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 1330
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1334
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Micro ISO Relay > Page 1337
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Micro ISO Relay > Page 1338
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Micro ISO Relay > Page 1339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1345
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1346
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1350
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Micro ISO Relay > Page 1353
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Micro ISO Relay > Page 1354
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Micro ISO Relay > Page 1355
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1360
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1361
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1362
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1367
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 1370
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1371
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1372
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
With Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1375
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1376
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1377
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1378
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1379
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
21. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 22. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
23. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1380
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1381
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1382
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1383
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1384
onto the bracket under the seat.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1385
19. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 20. Close the glove box.
21. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
23. Install the steering wheel access cover. 24. Connect the battery ground cable. 25. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1386
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Without Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1387
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1388
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1389
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1390
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
17. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 18. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
19. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1391
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1392
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1393
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1394
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1395
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1396
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr.Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1397
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1398
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1403
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 1406
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 1407
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 1408
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1414
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1415
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1420
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1421
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1422
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1427
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1430
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1431
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 1432
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control
Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1442
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1451
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1452
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1453
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1454
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1460
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1461
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1462
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 1463
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1466
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1467
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 1468
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1469
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1473
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor >
Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1479
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1484
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 1487
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 1490
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 1491
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 1492
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1496
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1497
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1498
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1499
Exterior Rear View Mirror Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1503
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1504
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1505
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1506
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1507
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic toot must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1508
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 1513
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1514
Seat Heater Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1515
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1516
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 1521
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 1524
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1529
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1530
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float
and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate.
Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system
to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder
reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1534
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1535
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
1540
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1543
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1544
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 1545
View 151-28
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1548
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1549
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 1550
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1551
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1552
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove
the bolt and the sensor.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1562
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 1568
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 05-17-11 >
Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1579
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1580
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 1593
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 1596
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1597
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1598
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1602
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1603
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil pressure sender .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1608
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1609
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1610
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 1619
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 1622
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1623
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator. ^
A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures. ^
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^
When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 1626
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1631
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1632
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1633
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1638
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1641
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1645
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1646
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 1653
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1657
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1658
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1663
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 1666
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1670
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1671
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1672
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1676
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1677
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel removal from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1 Disconnect electrical connector.
2 Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1681
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1682
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1683
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1689
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1690
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1694
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1695
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1696
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1706
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1707
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
1708
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 1715
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 1716
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component
Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1720
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1721
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1726
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1727
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1728
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 1729
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1732
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1733
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1734
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1735
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1736
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1737
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1738
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1739
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1740
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1741
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1742
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1743
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1744
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1745
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1746
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1747
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1748
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1749
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1750
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1751
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 1752
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1753
Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID
In-Line Engines
V-Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 1756
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 1757
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 1758
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1767
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1768
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1769
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1770
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1771
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1772
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1773
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1774
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1775
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1776
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1777
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1778
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1779
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1780
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1781
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1782
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1783
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 1784
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1788
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1789
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1790
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 1791
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1795
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1796
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1797
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1801
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1802
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1803
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1804
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1805
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1806
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1814
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1815
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1816
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 1817
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1822
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1823
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
1827
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1831
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 73) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 1834
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 85) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Reset Instructions
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. If no natural gas leak
is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner
Guide).
NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. Again, check for leaking
natural gas.
WARNING: IF YOU SMELL NATURAL GAS AT ANY TIME OTHER THAN DURING FUELING, DO
NOT RESET THE IFS SWITCH.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 1835
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1839
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1840
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1841
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1846
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1847
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1848
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1852
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1853
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1854
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1862
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1863
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 1869
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 1872
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 1875
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 1876
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1879
be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR,
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1880
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1881
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1882
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1883
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1884
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1885
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1886
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1887
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1888
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1889
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1890
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1891
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic toot to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1892
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and
Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1893
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1894
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1895
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1896
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1897
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1898
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1899
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 1900
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1901
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep >
05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: >
05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1918
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1919
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 1925
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 1928
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1936
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1944
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1945
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1946
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1947
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1948
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1949
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1950
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1951
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1952
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1953
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1954
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1955
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1956
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1957
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1958
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1959
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1960
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1961
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1962
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 1963
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1964
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1970
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1971
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1972
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1973
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1974
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1975
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor >
Page 1981
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 1984
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 1985
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 1986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1989
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1990
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1991
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1996
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2001
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2006
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2007
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2012
View 151-35
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 2013
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2016
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2017
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 2018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 2021
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 2022
Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 2023
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 2024
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2025
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2030
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2031
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2035
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2036
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2037
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2038
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2048
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2049
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2050
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By Symptom for
Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2051
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2057
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2058
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2059
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 2060
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Front
Position - Curb
Caster ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 1.79° ± 1.00° Caster Split ...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1°
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.84° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Total
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................... 0.23° ± 0.32° Ride Height .........................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 476.6 mm ± 20 mm
Side-to-Side Lean ................................................................................................................................
.......................................... -10 mm to +10 mm
Position - 8 gal. fill
Caster ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 1.72° ± 1.00° Caster Split ...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1°
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.84° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Total
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................... 0.23° ± 0.32° Ride Height .........................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 477.4 mm ± 20 mm
Side-to-Side Lean ................................................................................................................................
.......................................... -10 mm to +10 mm
Rear
Position - Curb
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.04° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Indiv.
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
......................................... 0.10° ± 0.17° Ride Height ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................ 491 mm ± 20 mm Side-to-Side
Lean .....................................................................................................................................................
..................... -10 mm to +10 mm Clear Vision ....................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 0 ± 3
Position - 8 gal. fill
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.13° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Indiv.
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
......................................... 0.10° ± 0.17° Ride Height ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................ 495 mm ± 20 mm Side-to-Side
Lean .....................................................................................................................................................
..................... -10 mm to +10 mm Clear Vision ....................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 0 ± 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 2063
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts
.................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft.
lbs.) Rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts
...................................................................................................................................... 115 Nm (41 ft.
lbs.) Tie rod end jam nuts ....................................................................................................................
............................................................. 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2064
Alignment: Description and Operation
Suspension System
The front suspension system consists of the following components ^
strut and spring assembly upper mounting bracket
^ upper spring seat
^ wheel hub
^ lug bolts
^ front wheel bearing
^ front suspension lower arm ball joints
^ front wheel knuckle
^ front stabilizer bar and brackets
^ front suspension lower and mounting bolt bushing (horizontal)
^ strut and spring assembly
^ stabilizer control link
The front strut and spring assemblies can be disassembled to install any of the new individual
components. New LH or RH front strut and spring assemblies can be installed independently. The
front suspension system can also be disassembled in order to install new: ^
front wheel knuckle
^ wheel hub
^ lug bolts
^ front wheel bearing
^ front suspension lower arms
^ front suspension lower arm mounting bolt bushings (horizontal)
New front stabilizer bar components can be installed individually. The rear suspension system
consists of the following components: ^
rear spring
^ rear shock absorber
^ rear wheel knuckle and bushing
^ lower lateral link
^ upper lateral link
^ bump stopper
New LH and RH rear wheel knuckles can be installed individually. The rear suspension arm and
bushings can be installed individually. Only toe can be adjusted on the rear suspension.
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at
the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is
negative (-).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 2065
Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe inch). When
the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is
measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2068
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2069
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2070
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 2071
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3.
Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2077
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2078
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2087
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2088
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
V6 Firing Order: 1 4 2 5 3 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2092
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > Number One
Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap
0.052-0.056 inch (1.32-1.42 mm)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2100
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AWSF-32F
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2101
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2105
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the 0FF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit
Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil on top of the
pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders.
Compression Test Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are faulty.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2106
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or seating incorrectly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C
Drive Belt: Locations With A/C
3.0L (4V) with A/C
3.0L (4V) With A/C
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C > Page 2111
Drive Belt: Locations With Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.01.(4V) with Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) With Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C > Page 2112
Drive Belt: Locations Without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) Without Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2113
Drive Belt: Diagrams
3.0L (4V) With A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) With Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2114
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) Without Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accessory Drive
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
2. Inspect to determine if any of the mechanical concerns apply.
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns.
Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2117
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2118
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Belt Tensioner Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause
excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive
belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt
With Tensioner
Water Pump Belt-3.0L (4V) with Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Without Tensioner
Water Pump Belt-3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Removal
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt >
Page 2121
2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and remove the water pump belt by walking off the pulley.
Installation
1. Partially start the water pump belt on the pulley. 2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and install
the water pump belt by walking on the pulley.
3. Install the engine appearance cover and the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt >
Page 2122
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2134
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2135
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Powertrain Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative
Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component
Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Powertrain
Management/Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2139
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2144
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service
Precautions > Page 2145
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications
Coolant Line/Hose: Specifications
Cooler tube bracket bolt ......................................................................................................................
..................................................... 28 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2158
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2159
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2165
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
2166
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Page 2167
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions
Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 2171
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 2172
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5.
Remove the front bumper cover.
6. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core
and remove the condenser to evaporator line.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting
..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.)
Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting
............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48
ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt
.................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering
pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt
........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power
steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt
................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch
lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt
..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. Remove the power steering pressure hose.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2178
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
2. Install the power steering pressure hose.
1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt.
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 2179
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Fill to the line on the reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2185
Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications
Fluid Type .........................................................................................................................................
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid
Clutch Fluid
Fill to the line on the reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2190
Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Clutch Fluid
Clutch Fluid
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid.
The hydraulic clutch system uses the same reservoir as the
hydraulic brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info
Article No. 02-23-7
11/25/02
COOLING SYSTEM - MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM GOLD ENGINE COOLANT - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2002-2003 ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS, THUNDERBIRD 2003 CROWN
VICTORIA 2002 EXCURSION 2002-2003 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY
F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2003 EXPEDITION, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2002 CONTINENTAL 2002-2003 LS 2003 TOWN CAR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD 2003
AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2002-2003 SABLE 2003 GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 02-17-7 is being republished in its entirety to update the text and part numbers.
ISSUE
A new, extended-life engine coolant, yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant,
meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51-A1, service part numbers VC-7-A and VC-7-C (for use in
the U.S., except California and Oregon) and VC-7-B (for use only in California and Oregon as it
contains a bittering agent), has been equipped in all of the vehicles noted above. The initial-fill life
for this coolant is 100,000 miles/5 years. Due to variations in water quality, the replacement interval
is 50,000 miles/3 years.
ACTION
Any time the addition of coolant or a coolant change-out is required, USE ONLY THE TYPE OF
ENGINE COOLANT WITH WHICH THE VEHICLE WAS ORIGINALLY EQUIPPED. DO NOT MIX
COOLANT TYPES. To determine the type of coolant required, check the color of coolant in the
coolant reservoir of the vehicle or refer to the applicable vehicle's Owner's Guide or Workshop
Manual for service parts and specification information.
SERVICE INFORMATION
Except for heavy-duty vehicles equipped with the Caterpillar 3126E engine, the use of a
supplemental coolant additive (SCA) such as Motorcraft Heavy-Duty Cooling System Additive,
service part number FW-16, is not required in conjunction with this coolant.
Testing is currently underway to determine the backward compatibility of the Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant in vehicles equipped with the green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine
Coolant, service part numbers VC-4-A, VC-4-B, and VC-5. Until the final test results are available,
vehicles should ONLY be serviced with type of coolant with which they were originally equipped.
Please note that Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant is not compatible with any
orange-colored, extended-life engine coolants such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant, service part numbers VC-2 and VC-3. DO NOT MIX COOLANT TYPES. USE ONLY THE
TYPE OF COOLANT WITH WHICH THE VEHICLE WAS EQUIPPED.
Failure to follow these guidelines may result in degradation of corrosion protection and potential
engine damage.
Coolant Discoloration:
The current Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, service part number VC-6, used in both
Production and Service, cause the yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant to
change color ranging from a light golden brown to dark brown, depending upon the amount of
pellet
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info > Page 2195
material in the coolant reservoir. This discoloration does not adversely affect the coolant or the
vehicle's cooling system components. No repairs are required for this condition. To avoid confusion
with regard to coolant contamination, a new formulation of stop leak pellets will be implemented in
Production and Service in the near future.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 02-17-7 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum
and Temperature Specifications
Coolant: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Cooling System Pressure Test Specification
Radiator ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 138 kPa (20 psi)
Radiator Cap Pressure Test Specification
Radiator cap
..................................................................................................................................................... 110
+ 14 kPa - 21 kPa (16 + 2 psi - 3 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum
and Temperature Specifications > Page 2198
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity (Auto trans) ..................................................................................................................
.................................................... 10.0 L (10.5 quart)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum
and Temperature Specifications > Page 2199
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Types
Caution: Do not mix coolant types.
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant ......................................................... VC-4-A (in Oregon VC-5,
in Canada CXC-10) ESE-M97B44-A (green color)
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant ...................................................................... VC-7-A (in
Oregon VC-7-B) WSS-M97H51-A11 (yellow color)
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush
......................................................................................................................................... VC-1
ESR-M14F7-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2211
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2212
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 2213
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2219
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2220
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page
2225
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page
2226
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page
2227
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2233
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 2234
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
............................................................... 10 Qt (9.5L) Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2237
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2240
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition
Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level
check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before
checking.
Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the
vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for
instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid
level should be checked.
Fluid Level Check 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal
operating temperatures. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3.
With your foot on the brake, start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to
engage.
4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal and room temperature.
Low Fluid Level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
High Fluid Level Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage.
High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition. See the previous note.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission
component damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement
concerns, or possible damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally
indicated on the fluid level indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 2241
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician.
Fluid Condition Check
NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If
the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with
MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V
specification.
^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check.
^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an
overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure.
^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of
solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator).
If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug
should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If
transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the
transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque
converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and
adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic
tests and adjustments listed in the diagnosis must be completed to make sure that the problem has
been eliminated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.3 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2246
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Refill......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... 1.4 Liters (2.95 Pints) Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch) from
the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2251
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
Rear Axle Type ....................................................................................................................................
.............................. SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity .......................................................................................................................
........................................................................... 12 oz. Note: The fluid level must be even with the
bottom of the filler hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2256
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................... SAE 75W-140 synthetic gear lubricant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2261
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil ..............................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 2266
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Power steering fluid capacity
..............................................................................................................................................................
1.9 Liters (2.0 quarts)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 2269
Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications
Premium Power Steering Fluid F7AZ-3F823-BA
................................................................................................................................................
MERCON
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refregerant Capacity
Refregerant Capacity
1 lbs 14 oz (850 kg)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2274
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
R-134a
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2275
Refrigerant: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If
the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all
the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other
cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful
in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
^ If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerent Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions
included with leak detector for handling and operation
techniques.
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2278
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 2279
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye
injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system
refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Discharging and Recovery
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service
gauge port valves.
NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 2282
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 2283
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant.
^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction
accumulator/drier.
NOTE: ^
Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 2284
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation and Charging
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect
the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be
accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2285
Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment
Refrigerent Leak Detector
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2286
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Capacity
Refrigerant Oil Capacity
9 oz (266 ml)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2291
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Oil
A/C Oil
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2292
Refrigerant Oil: Service Precautions
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2293
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDITION
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container.
^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2294
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^
installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
^ installation of a new refrigerant line
^ repair of an O-ring seal leak
^ repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Washer Fluid: Capacity Specifications Windshield Washer Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
2.7 qts (2.6L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 2299
Washer Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Windshield Washer Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Type Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Fluid Concentrate
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Wheel cylinder bleeder screws ............................................................................................................
.................................................... 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Bleeder screws ................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. (let medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system alter it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2305
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2306
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2307
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2308
with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic
system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2309
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2310
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed air may enter the system causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission plug the master cylinder feed port
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2311
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A DOT 3
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
> Page 2312
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2318
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2319
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2320
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2321
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2322
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 2323
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2329
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2330
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2333
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2334
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2339
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box > Page 2340
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2343
Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2345
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 2346
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2349
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2350
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2355
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box > Page 2356
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2359
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2360
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2362
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Central Junction Box > Page 2363
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2366
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 2367
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts.
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the
vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2379
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning
the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications >
Mechanical Specifications
Tires: Mechanical Specifications
Tire Runout Specifications
Type Wheel
Aluminum
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
.................................... 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Type Wheel
Steel
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
.................................... 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications >
Mechanical Specifications > Page 2384
Tires: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Tire Inflation
Tires ................................................................................................................................ See safety
certification sticker located on the driver door jamb.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications
Wheels: Specifications
Wheel Rim Runout
Type Wheel
Aluminum
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
..................................... 1.5 mm (006 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Type Wheel
Steel
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
..................................... 1.5 mm (006 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Specifications > Page
2388
Wheels: Service and Repair
Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2394
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2395
Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2396
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2397
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2398
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2399
Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2400
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2401
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2402
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2403
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2404
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2405
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2406
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2407
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2408
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1 Install the bolt.
2 Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS 13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18.
Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel nuts (all wheels) .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front > Page 2418
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the
vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2422
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning
the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
There are four possible types of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Systems. The 2003 Escort/Tracer are
Exhaust Phase Shifting system (EPS). The exhaust cam is the active cam and is being retarded.
The 2003 Lincoln LS, T-Bird and Focus SVT vehicles have Intake Phase Shifting system (IPS). A
intake phase shifting system will move the intake cam in the advance direction. The other two
possible systems are Dual Equal (DEPS) both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted equally
as well as Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) where the cams are shifted independently. The
systems have three operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and a default mode. At
idle and (low engine speeds with closed throttle) the phase angle is controlled by air flow and
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). At part and wide open throttle the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load, and Throttle Position (TP). VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhance engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems
have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition a VCT system will eliminate the need for an
external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of EGR system is accomplished
by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve
closing. Increased vehicle reliability is achieved with the elimination of the EGR system.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (Camshaft Position Sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (Crankshaft Position Sensor) provides the PCM (powertrain control
module) with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 130).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF
(Mass Air Flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine
speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant
temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM,
load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The PCM calculates and determines the desired
camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired
positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents
a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the
camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber in the VCT assembly, which changes the linear
piston motion to a rotational motion that
advances or retards the camshaft.
Hardware
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2429
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 131) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the
solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100%
represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by
dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty near 50%.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The VCT unit assembly (Figure 132) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT
unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, a pressure
differential occurs forcing the piston to move. This movement is translated into rotational camshaft
motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the
camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain
adequate position control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2433
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the 0FF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit
Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil on top of the
pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders.
Compression Test Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are faulty.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications > Page 2434
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or seating incorrectly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
Camshaft Bearing: Customer Interest Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
TSB 06-3-5
02/20/06
CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built
prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the
left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only.
ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a
mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft
at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B.
2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and
the valves are fully closed.
3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight.
NOTE
THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO
POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2444
4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L
camshaft cap.
5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply
hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head.
6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9
(inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3).
7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01.
8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr.
Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 > Feb > 06 >
Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2445
Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr.
Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs.
2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A267 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
Camshaft Bearing: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise
TSB 06-3-5
02/20/06
CAMSHAFT TICK NOISE - 3.0L 4V ENGINE ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-20-8 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Taurus/Sable, 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles built
prior to 1-17-2006 equipped with the 3.0L 4V Duratec engine may exhibit a ticking noise from the
left bank cylinder head, with the engine at normal operating temperature only.
ACTION To diagnose, with the engine running and warm (normal operation temperature), using a
mechanic's stethoscope determine if the ticking noise is coming from the left hand intake camshaft
at cylinder number 6, (Figure 1). If the ticking noise can be verified, refer to the following Service
Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the left bank valve cover. Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 303-01B.
2. Rotate the engine clock wise until the cylinder number 6 intake cam lobes are pointing up and
the valves are fully closed.
3. Remove all left hand intake cam caps individually and reinstall them finger tight.
NOTE
THE CAMSHAFT CAPS MUST BE COMPLETELY LIFTED OFF AND THEN SET BACK INTO
POSITION. LOOSENING AND RE-TORQUEING CAP BOLTS IS NOT SUFFICIENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2451
4. Torque bolts in sequence shown in Figure 2 to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) excluding cam cap number 8L
camshaft cap.
5. Using a screw driver positioned on each side of the top of cam cap number 8L (Figure 3) apply
hand pressure and shift cam cap number 8L toward the exhaust side of the cylinder head.
6. While holding cam cap number 8L in the shifted position, torque the fasteners number 9
(inboard) first, to 72 lb-in (8 N.m) then torque fastener number 10 (Figure 3).
7. Install the left hand camshaft cover. Refer to appropriate Workshop Manual, Section 303-01.
8. Fully warm the engine to normal operating temperature to verify the repair.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060305A 2001-2003 Taurus/Sable: 0.9 Hr.
Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Camshaft Bearing: > 06-3-5 >
Feb > 06 > Engine - Left Bank Cylinder Head Ticking Noise > Page 2452
Install Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2004-2005 1.0 Hr.
Taurus/Sable: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
060305A 2001-2006 Escape and 1.2 Hrs.
2005-2006 Mariner: Remove And Install The Camshaft Caps Includes Time To Remove And Install
Valve Cover (Do Not Use With 6007A10, 6250AL, 6584AL)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6A267 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing
> Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2453
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft bearing cap bolts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
Camshaft
Lobe lift
Intake (primary) ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 4.79 mm (0.188 in.) Intake (secondary) ................................................
.............................................................................................................................. 4.79 mm (0.188
in.) Exhaust ..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 4.79 mm (0.188 in.)
Lobe lift allowable lift loss ....................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 0 mm (0.0 in.) Valve [email protected] zero lash
Intake (primary) ...................................................................................................................................
............................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 in.) Intake (secondary) ...............................................
............................................................................................................................... 9.80 mm (0.388
in.) Exhaust ..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 9.80 mm (0.388 in.)
Camshaft end play ...............................................................................................................................
....................................................... 0.027 - 0.190 mm
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................... 0.025 - 0.165 mm (0.001 - 0.0064 in.) Service limit .........................................................
........................................................................................................................ 0.190 mill (0.00748 in.)
Journal-to-bearing clearance
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................... 0.025 - 0.076 mm (0.001 - 0.0029 in.) Service limit .........................................................
.......................................................................................................................... 0.121 mm (0.0047
in.)
Journal diameters (all)
............................................................................................................................................ 26.962 26.936 mm (1.061 - 1 .060 in.) Journal inside diameter (cap assembled)
................................................................................................................................................ 27.012
- 26.987 mm Bearing inside diameter (all)
.................................................................................................................................... 27.012 26.987 mm (1.063 - 1.062 in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2457
Camshaft: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAM TIMING SYSTEM
Overview
There are four possible types of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Systems. The 2003 Escort/Tracer are
Exhaust Phase Shifting system (EPS). The exhaust cam is the active cam and is being retarded.
The 2003 Lincoln LS, T-Bird and Focus SVT vehicles have Intake Phase Shifting system (IPS). A
intake phase shifting system will move the intake cam in the advance direction. The other two
possible systems are Dual Equal (DEPS) both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted equally
as well as Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) where the cams are shifted independently. The
systems have three operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and a default mode. At
idle and (low engine speeds with closed throttle) the phase angle is controlled by air flow and
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). At part and wide open throttle the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load, and Throttle Position (TP). VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhance engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems
have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition a VCT system will eliminate the need for an
external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of EGR system is accomplished
by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve
closing. Increased vehicle reliability is achieved with the elimination of the EGR system.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (Camshaft Position Sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (Crankshaft Position Sensor) provides the PCM (powertrain control
module) with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 132).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF
(Mass Air Flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine
speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant
temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM,
load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The PCM calculates and determines the desired
camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired
positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents
a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the
camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber in the VCT assembly, which changes the linear
piston motion to a rotational motion that
advances or retards the camshaft.
Hardware
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2458
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 133) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the
solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100%
represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by
dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty near 50%.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The VCT unit assembly (Figure 134) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT
unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, a pressure
differential occurs forcing the piston to move. This movement is translated into rotational camshaft
motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the
camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain
adequate position control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshafts LH
Camshafts LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the water pump belt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2461
2. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 in.) past flush of the end of the
camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to the
end of the camshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the water pump drive pulley and discard.
3. Remove the timing drive components.
4. NOTE: To make sure of correct sealing, do not scratch the camshaft.
Using the special tools, remove the camshaft oil seal and discard.
5. Remove the bolts, the camshaft oil seal retainer and discard the press-in-place gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2462
6. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions.
Loosen the LH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise
from the cylinder head and remove the caps.
7. Remove the camshafts.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2463
1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions.
Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder
head. Align the camshafts as shown.
2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps
can occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil. Install the
bearing caps and loosely install the bolts.
3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install
the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2464
4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
5. NOTE: Clean and degrease the sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
Install a new press-in-place gasket and install the camshaft oil seal retainer.
6. Install the timing drive components.
7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using special tools, install a new camshaft oil seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2465
8. CAUTION: The OEM pulley is pressed on 4.74 mm (0.18 in.) past flush of the camshaft. The
service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the
camshaft.
Using the special tool, install a new service water pump drive pulley.
9. Install the water pump belt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2466
Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshafts RH
Camshafts RH
Removal
1. Remove the timing drive components.
2. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft journal caps and cylinder heads are numbered to verify that
they are assembled in their original positions.
Loosen the RH camshaft cap bolts evenly in the sequence shown to allow the camshafts to rise
from the cylinder head and remove the caps.
3. Remove the camshafts.
Installation
1. NOTE: Be sure camshaft bearing caps are installed in the original positions.
Lubricate camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder
head. Align the camshafts as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshafts LH > Page 2467
2. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps
have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps
may occur.
Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the
bearing caps and loosely install the bolts.
3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil. Install
the bearing thrust caps and loosely install the bolts.
4. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown. 5. Install the timing drive components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications
Hydraulic Valve Tappet
Diameter (std.)
..........................................................................................................................................................
15.988 - 16 mm (0.6290-0.6294 in.) Clearance to bore
................................................................................................................................................. 0.018 0.069 mm (0.0007 - 0.0027 in.)
Service limit .........................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 0.016 mm (0.0006 in.) Hydraulic leakdown rate a ................................
............................................................................................................................................... 5 - 25
seconds Collapsed valve tappet gap desired
.................................................................................................................................. 0.50 - 1.11 mm
(0.019 - 0.043 in.)
a Time required for plunger to leak down 1.6 mm of travel with 222 N force and leak down fluid in
tappet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2471
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Lash Adjusters
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the camshaft followers.
2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in
their original positions.
Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters.
3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore.
Install new lash adjusters if necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Specifications
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Roller follower ratio ..............................................................................................................................
......................................................................... 1.8:1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2475
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Roller Followers
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel.
4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly
away from the follower.
6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
There are four possible types of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Systems. The 2003 Escort/Tracer are
Exhaust Phase Shifting system (EPS). The exhaust cam is the active cam and is being retarded.
The 2003 Lincoln LS, T-Bird and Focus SVT vehicles have Intake Phase Shifting system (IPS). A
intake phase shifting system will move the intake cam in the advance direction. The other two
possible systems are Dual Equal (DEPS) both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted equally
as well as Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) where the cams are shifted independently. The
systems have three operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and a default mode. At
idle and (low engine speeds with closed throttle) the phase angle is controlled by air flow and
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). At part and wide open throttle the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load, and Throttle Position (TP). VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhance engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems
have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition a VCT system will eliminate the need for an
external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of EGR system is accomplished
by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve
closing. Increased vehicle reliability is achieved with the elimination of the EGR system.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (Camshaft Position Sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (Crankshaft Position Sensor) provides the PCM (powertrain control
module) with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 130).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF
(Mass Air Flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine
speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant
temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM,
load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The PCM calculates and determines the desired
camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired
positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents
a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the
camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber in the VCT assembly, which changes the linear
piston motion to a rotational motion that
advances or retards the camshaft.
Hardware
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2479
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 131) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the
solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100%
represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by
dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty near 50%.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The VCT unit assembly (Figure 132) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT
unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, a pressure
differential occurs forcing the piston to move. This movement is translated into rotational camshaft
motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the
camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain
adequate position control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
Connecting rod bearings
Clearance to crankshaft
..............................................................................................................................................
0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 in.) Bearing wall thickness (std.) c.....................................................
........................................................................................................ 1.503 mm (.059 in.)
Main bearings
Clearance to crankshaft-desired
................................................................................................................................ 0.025-0.045 mm
0.0009-0.0017 in.) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable
........................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm
(0.0009-0.0019 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1
......................................................................................................................................................
2.497 mm (0.0983 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2
.......................................................................................................................................................
2.501 mm (0.0985 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3
.......................................................................................................................................................
2.505 mm (0.0986 in.)
c 0.250 mm Undersize-Add 0.125 mm to standard or grade 2 thickness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod
Piston pin bore diameter
..........................................................................................................................................
21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 in.) Crankshaft bearing bore diameter
........................................................................................................................ 53.015-53.035 mm
(2.0872-2.0879 in.) Length (center to center)
............................................................................................................................................
138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.38 in.) Alignment (bore to bore max. difference) d
Twist
..............................................................................................................................................................
0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 in.) Bend
..............................................................................................................................................................
0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 in.)
Side clearance (assembled to crank)
d Pin bore and crank bearing bore must be parallel and in same vertical plane within the specified
total difference when measured at the ends of a 203 mm bar. 101.5 mm on each side of rod
centerline.
Connecting rod caps bolts
Stage 1 ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Stage 2 ................................................................
.................................................................................................................................. 43 Nm (32 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Main bearing journal diameter
..................................................................................................................................... 62.968-62.992
mm (2.467-2.479 in.) Connecting rod journal diameter
.................................................................................................................................. 49.970-49.990
mm (1.967-1.968 in.) Crankshaft free end play
..................................................................................................................................................
0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block
................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm (in.) max. 0.001
in.) Main bearings
Clearance to crankshaft-desired
................................................................................................................................ 0.025-0.045 mm
0.0009-0.0017 in.) Clearance to crankshaft-allowable
........................................................................................................................... 0.025-0.050 mm
(0.0009-0.0019 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 1
......................................................................................................................................................
2.497 mm (0.0983 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 2
.......................................................................................................................................................
2.501 mm (0.0985 in.) Bearing wall thickness-grade 3
.......................................................................................................................................................
2.505 mm (0.0986 in.)
Lower cylinder block bolts and studs
Fasteners No. 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 are studs. Fasteners No. 18-22 are M8 x 1.25 mm x 79.3 mm (0.05 inch
x 3.12 in.) bolts. Fasteners No. 2-4,17 are M8 x 1.25 mm x 95.3 mm (0.05 inch x 3.75 in.) bolts.
Fasteners 9-16 are M10 x 1.5 mm x 106 mm (0.06 inch x 4.17 in.) bolts. The bolts and studs must
be installed in the correct position or engine damage can result. Stage 1 ..........................................
............................................................................................................................... fasteners 1-8 to 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Stage 2 ........................................................................................................................
............................................... fasteners 9-16 to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) Stage 3 .......................................
............................................................................................................................................ fasteners
1-16 to 90 degrees Stage 4 .................................................................................................................
.................................................... fasteners 17-22 to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Main bearing journal diameter
..................................................................................................................................... 62.968-62.992
mm (2.467-2.479 in.) Connecting rod journal diameter
.................................................................................................................................. 49.970-49.990
mm (1.967-1.968 in.) Crankshaft free end play
..................................................................................................................................................
0.110-0.232 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) Crankshaft runout to rear face of cylinder block
................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm (in.) max. 0.001
in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Block Heater: Specifications
Block heater .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................... 2 Nm (18 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2496
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Raise the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the block heater power cable from the block heater.
4. CAUTION: Do not loosen the block heater retaining screw more than necessary for removal.
Remove the block heater.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the power cable is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components or damage to the cable can occur.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft pulley bolt
Stage 1 ................................................................................................................................................
............................................... 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.) Stage 2 .................................................................
............................................................................................................................... Loosen 360
degrees Stage 3 ..................................................................................................................................
............................................................... 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Stage 4 ...................................................
........................................................................................................................................... additional
90 degrees
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper
Install the crankshaft vibration damper washer and tighten the bolt in four stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 2: Loosen one full turn (360 degrees).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 4: Tighten to 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper > Page 2502
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Install the special tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper > Page 2503
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
5. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket
and sealer.
NOTE: Seal surfaces must be free of dirt and oil.
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed within four minutes of applying the silicone gasket
and sealer.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface of the crankshaft pulley with clean engine
oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper > Page 2504
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley.
3. NOTE: Use an appropriate strap wrench to hold the crankshaft pulley. Install the bolt and the
washer and tighten in four stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (86 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 2: Loosen 360 degrees.
- Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
- Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
4. Install RH front inner splash shield. 5. Install the accessory drive belt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Piston diameter
Coated grade 1
.....................................................................................................................................................
88.990-89.010 mm (3.5035-3.5043 in.) Coated grade 2
.....................................................................................................................................................
88.998-89.022 mm (3.5039-3.5048 in.) Coated grade 3
.....................................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.5043-3.5051 in.) Uncoated grade 1
.............................................................................................................................................
88.970-88.980 mm (3.50275-3.50314 in.) Uncoated grade 2
.............................................................................................................................................
88.978-88.992 mm (3.50306-3.50362 in.) Uncoated grade 3
.............................................................................................................................................
89.010-89.030 mm (3.50432-3.50511 in.)
Piston-to-bore clearance
........................................................................................................................................... 0.012 to
0.022 mm (0.0005-0.0009 in.) Pin bore diameter (piston)
........................................................................................................................................
21.008-21.012 mm (0.8270-0.8272 in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Pin: Specifications
Piston pin
Length ..................................................................................................................................................
........................ 60.51-60.08 mm (2.382-2.365 in.) Diameter ..............................................................
............................................................................................................. 21.011-21.013 mm (0.0013
in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance
....................................................................................................................................... -0.005 to
+0.001 mm (0.0001-0.00003 in.) Pin-to-rod clearance
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
..................... 0.004-0.020 mm (0.0001-0.0007 in.) Service limit .........................................................
.......................................................................................................................... 0.035 mm (0.0013
in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Ring-To-Groove Clearance
Compression (top)
....................................................................................................................................................
0.040-0.075 mm (0.0015-0.0029 in.) Compression (bottom)
.............................................................................................................................................
0.040-0.085 mm (0.0015-0.0033 in.) Oil ring .......................................................................................
........................................................................................................................... Snug Fit
Piston ring gap f
Compression (top)-gauge diameter
.......................................................................................................................... 0.100-0.250 mm
(0.0039-0.0098 in.) Compression (bottom)-gauge diameter
........................................................................................................................ 0.27-0.42 mm
(0.0106-0.0165 in.) Oil ring (steel rail)-gauge diameter
.............................................................................................................................. 0.15-0.65 mm
(0.0059-0.0255 in.) Compression (top)-service limit
............................................................................................................................................... 0.50 mm
(0.0196 in.) max. Compression (bottom)-service limit
........................................................................................................................................ 0.65 mm
(0.0255 in.) max. Oil ring (steel rail)-service limit
............................................................................................................................................... 0.90 mm
(0.0354 in.) max.
Ring groove width
Compression (top)
....................................................................................................................................................
1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 in.) Compression (bottom)
.............................................................................................................................................
1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 in.) Oil ring .......................................................................................
.............................................................................. 3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.0120 in.)
f Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in.) diameter gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2518
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2519
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications
Rocker Arm Assembly: Specifications
Roller follower ratio ..............................................................................................................................
......................................................................... 1.8:1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2523
Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair
Roller Followers
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH valve covers.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs. 3. Remove the RH front wheel.
4. Remove the splash shield. 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly
away from the follower.
6. Using the special tool, remove the followers. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Cover: Specifications
Valve cover bolts and studs .................................................................................................................
.................................................... 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover RH
Valve Cover RH
Removal
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the coils
3. Remove the wiring harness nuts and disconnect the oxygen sensor electrical connectors.
4. Remove the radio ignition interference capacitor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2529
5. Separate the harness from the center locating pins and position aside.
6. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover.
7. Remove the bolts, studs and the RH valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket.
Install a new valve cover gasket.
2. NOTE: Clean the head and front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before
applying silicone gasket and sealant.
NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying
the sealant.
Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2530
3. Position the valve cover and install the bolt and the studs in the sequence shown.
4. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover.
5. Connect the radio ignition interference capacitor.
6. Connect the 02 sensor electrical connectors and wiring harness to the RH valve cover stud.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2531
7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper and grease compound to the interior of the spark plug
boot prior to installation.
Install the three RH coil-on-plugs. 1
Position the coils.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the electrical connectors.
8. Install the upper intake manifold.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2532
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover LH
Removal
1. Remove the three nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover.
3. CAUTION: When removing the coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal. Remove the three LH coil-on-plugs.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the coils.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the valve cover studs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2533
5. Remove the engine lift bracket.
6. Position the power steering hose aside.
- Remove the bolt.
7. Remove the bolts, studs and the LH valve cover.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean the valve cover sealing area before installing a new gasket. Install a new gasket
on the valve cover.
2. NOTE: Clean the head and the front cover sealing surfaces using metal surface cleaner before
applying silicone gasket and sealant.
NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of applying
the sealant.
Apply a 5 mm dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover to cylinder head joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2534
3. Position the valve cover and install the studs and the bolts in the sequence shown.
4. Position the power steering hose and install the bolt.
5. Position the engine lift bracket and install the bolt.
6. Connect the wiring harness to the valve cover studs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover RH > Page 2535
7. NOTE: Apply a light film of brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Install the three LH coil-on-plugs. 1
Position the coils.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the electrical connectors.
8. Connect the crankcase ventilation tube to the valve cover.
9. Install the engine appearance cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Guide: Specifications
Valve stem guide clearance
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................... 0.020-0.069 mm (0.0007-0.0027 in.) Exhaust ................................................................
...................................................................................................... 0.045-0.094 mm (0.0017-0.037
in.)
Valve head diameter
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 35 mm (1.38 in.) Exhaust ...............................................................
..................................................................................................................................... 30 mm (1.18
in.) Gauge diameter
..........................................................................................................................................................
31 and 24.5 mm (1.22 and 0.96 in.)
Valve face runout (limit) .......................................................................................................................
................................................. 0.05 mm (0.001 in.) Valve face angle ................................................
................................................................................................................................................. 45.5
degrees Valve stem diameter (std.)
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
.................... 5.975-5.995 mm (0.2350-0.2358 in.) Exhaust 5.950-5.970 mm (0.2343-0.2350 in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Seat: Specifications
Valve seat width-intake
............................................................................................................................................................
1.1-1.4 mm (0.043-0.055 in.) Valve seat width-exhaust
.........................................................................................................................................................
1.4-1.7 mm (0.055-0.066 in.) Valve seat angle ...................................................................................
............................................................................................................ 44.75 degrees Valve seat
runout (T.I.R.) ......................................................................................................................................
................................. 0.04 mm (0.001 in.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Specifications
Valve Spring: Specifications
Valve spring compression pressure
Intake (n @ spec. length)
.................................................................................................................................. 680 N @ 30.19
mm (153 lbs. @ 1.18 in.) Exhaust (n @ spec. length)
............................................................................................................................... 680 N @ 30.19
mm (153 lbs. @ 1.18 in.)
Valve spring free length (approximate)
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
................................................. 46.8 mm (1.84 in.) Exhaust ...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................. 46.8 mm (1.84
in.)
Valve spring installed pressure (n @ spec. length)
Intake ...................................................................................................................................................
............... 228 N @ 39.99 mm (51 lbs. @ 1.57 in.) Exhaust ................................................................
............................................................................................... 228 N @ 39.99 mm (51 lbs. @ 1.57
in.)
Valve springs installed pressure (n @ spec. length -service limit)
.............................................................................................. 10% Pressure loss @ 30.09 Valve
springs-out of square limit ...................................................................................................................
................................................................... 1%
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2545
Valve Spring: Service and Repair
Valve Spring
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the roller followers.
2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure
will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder.
A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from
happening.
Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air.
3. Using the special tool. remove the key, retainer, and valve spring. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Specifications
Valve: Specifications
Valve Arrangement (Front to Rear)
LH intake .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... S-P-S-P-S-P LH exhaust .........................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
E-E-E-E-E-E RH intake .......................................................................................................................
................................................................................. P-S-P-S-P-S RH exhaust ..................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.... E-E-E-E-E-E
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C
Drive Belt: Locations With A/C
3.0L (4V) with A/C
3.0L (4V) With A/C
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C > Page 2554
Drive Belt: Locations With Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.01.(4V) with Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) With Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > With A/C > Page 2555
Drive Belt: Locations Without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) Without Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2556
Drive Belt: Diagrams
3.0L (4V) With A/C
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) With Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Locations > Page 2557
Water Pump Drive Belt-3.0L (4V) Without Tensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accessory Drive
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the engine to duplicate the condition.
2. Inspect to determine if any of the mechanical concerns apply.
3. NOTE: Minor cracks in the V-grooved portion of the drive belt are considered normal and
acceptable. If the drive belt has chunks missing from
the ribs, a new drive belt should be installed.
Install a new drive belt if any of the following conditions exist: rib chunk-out, severe glazing, frayed
cords or other concerns.
Inspect for drive belt cracking/chunking/wear.
V-Ribbed Belt With Cracks (Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs
V-Ribbed Belt With Chunks Of Rib Missing (Not Acceptable)
V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing
4. If the concerns remain after inspection, determine the symptoms. GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2560
Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2561
Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Belt Tensioner Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1.
Remove the belt in the area of the tensioner. 2. Rotate the tensioner from its relaxed position
through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind
and to make sure that there is tension on the belt tensioner spring.
3. If the tensioner meets the above criteria, proceed to test the tensioner dynamically. If the
tensioner does not meet the above criteria, install a new
tensioner.
Belt Tensioner Dynamic
The belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the
belt tensioner movement. The belt tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if
equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the belt tensioner movement is constant
without A/C clutch cycling or acceleration, a pulley or shaft is probably bent or a pulley is out of
round. In rare cases, excessive drive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in drive belt) can cause
excessive drive belt tensioner movement. This condition can be checked by installing a new drive
belt, and repeating the observation.
2. With the engine off, check routing of the drive belt. 3. Inspect the belt tensioner wear indicator to
confirm the drive belt is within operating range. Install a new drive belt if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Water Pump Belt
With Tensioner
Water Pump Belt-3.0L (4V) with Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Rotate the drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the water pump belt. 3. To install, reverse
the removal procedure.
Without Tensioner
Water Pump Belt-3.0L (4V) without Tensioner
Removal
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt > Page 2564
2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and remove the water pump belt by walking off the pulley.
Installation
1. Partially start the water pump belt on the pulley. 2. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and install
the water pump belt by walking on the pulley.
3. Install the engine appearance cover and the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Water Pump Belt > Page 2565
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the accessory drive belt.
2. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner > Page 2570
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Belt Tensioner-Water Pump
Belt Tensioner-Water Pump, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: If equipped with belt tensioner.
Remove the water pump belt.
2. Remove the bolt and the belt tensioner. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Mount: Specifications
Engine mount bolts/nut ........................................................................................................................
..................................................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Engine mount ground wire nut (engine)
..................................................................................................................................................... 9
Nm (80 in. lbs.) Engine mount ground wire bolt (body)
.................................................................................................................................................... 10
Nm (89 in. lbs.) Engine mount lower bracket bolts
............................................................................................................................................................
50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Engine mount bolts/nut ..........................................................................................
................................................................................... 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.) Engine/transaxle mounting
bolts .....................................................................................................................................................
.......... 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) Lower engine mount bracket bolts
............................................................................................................................................................
50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Lower engine mount bracket studs
...........................................................................................................................................................
34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.) LH engine support insulator bolts
.............................................................................................................................................................
70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.) LH engine support insulator nut .............................................................................
.................................................................................. 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2574
Engine Mount: Service and Repair
Engine Support Insulators-Front, RH
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the engine ground wire.
2. Using the special tools, support the engine.
3. Remove the A/C line bracket bolt and position the A/C lines out of the way.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2575
4. Remove the engine support insulator bolt.
5. Remove the engine support tool.
1 Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolts and insulator.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Idler Pulley: Specifications
Accessory drive belt idler pulley
..............................................................................................................................................................
45 Nm (35 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure 750 ± 50 rpm ...................................................................................................................
........................................................ 310 kPa (45 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Level Indicator Markings
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level Indicator
Markings
Article No. 03-8-3
04/28/03
ENGINE - ENGINE OIL LEVEL INDICATOR MARKINGS - REPORTS OF LOW OIL LEVELS
FORD: 2002 ESCORT 2002-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG,
TAURUS, THUNDERBIRD, E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXCURSION, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER
SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES,
WINDSTAR
LINCOLN: 2002 CONTINENTAL 2002-2003 LS, TOWN CAR, NAVIGATOR 2003 AVIATOR
MERCURY: 2002-2003 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE 2002 VILLAGER 2002-2003
MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE Reports from the field indicate incorrect or low engine oil levels are being found at
Pre-Delivery Inspection on new vehicles received in dealer inventory. In most cases, the level is
being misinterpreted because the fluid fill mark on the stick is not touching the top hash mark at the
upper limit (or MAX mark), or is partway down the crosshatch area.
ACTION Ford is in the process of standardizing the markings across all vehicle lines. Current
markings shown will be upgraded to a refined marking, shown in Figure 1. Both markings will be
used in production over the next few years. Oil levels will still be recorded in the crosshatched area
of the blade, between the upper and lower limit holes. Vehicles shipped with engine oil levels falling
within this area are acceptable and do not require topping off. Oil fill quantities are precisely
measured at the plants and account for slight variations that may occur in oil pan volumes,
indicator length, and pressed-in locations of the indicator tube into the block. For customer use, the
markings continue to serve as a guide to refilling the engine to the correct initial fill volume with
filter or, to top off the engine when it is determined the level is below the lower hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Oil Level Indicator Markings > Page 2587
SERVICE INFORMATION
Ensure the vehicle is sitting on level ground. Set the park brake and ensure the transmission
selector lever is in PARK position, or in FIRST gear on manuals. The engine must be OFF.
The best time for determining oil level is before the engine is started and the oil has had sufficient
drainback time to the sump. If the engine has been running, allow it to sit for a few minutes turned
off. An oil drainback period is required before taking an initial reading.
If the level falls below the lower hole, fill with one quart of oil. If one quart is insufficient to raise the
level above the mark, add oil until it records within the crosshatch area. Use caution during this
procedure as some time is needed for oil to drain down through the drainback passages in the
cylinder head, to the oil pan. Adding oil a quart at a time repeatedly without sufficient drainback
may overfill the sump.
If the oil level falls between the upper and lower hole do not add more oil. Adding an extra quart
could cause overfilling and may result in aeration (foaming) causing eventual damage to vital
bearing surfaces and moving parts inside. Overfilling will require some oil to be drained out until the
indicator shows the level between the upper and lower holes of the blade. DO NOT expect the
engine to 'consume" the extra oil back down to the upper oil till level hole, or consider it as extra
lubrication protection for the engine.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 401000, 490000, 499000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2588
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Specifications
Oil level indicator and tube stud
..............................................................................................................................................................
10 Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2589
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Oil Level Indicator and Tube
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the oil level indicator.
2. Remove the oil level indicator tube.
1 Remove the stud bolt.
2 Remove the oil level indicator tube.
3. Install a new O-ring. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
............................................................. 5.2L (5.5 Qt)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2594
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil ..............................................................................................................................
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Cooler: Specifications
Oil cooler bolt .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Cooler, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2598
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
Oil Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the oil pan drain bolt and drain the engine oil.
3. Remove and discard the oil filter.
4. Disconnect the coolant hoses at the cooler.
5. Remove and discard the oil cooler. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new oil cooler.
- Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil pan bolts and studs ........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Oil pan to transaxle bolts ................................
.......................................................................................................................................... 40 Nm (30
ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle
Oil Pan Baffle
Removal
1. Remove the oil pump screen cover and tube.
2. Remove the nuts and the tail pan baffle.
Installation
1. Position the oil pan baffle and install the nuts.
- Tighten the nuts in two stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.).
- Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees.
2. Install the oil pump screen cover and tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2604
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Engine
Oil Pan
Removal
1. Remove the flexible exhaust pipe.
2. Disconnect the downstream catalyst monitor sensor. 3. Drain the oil.
4. Install the drain plug. 5. Remove and discard the oil filter.
6. Remove the 15 bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2605
7. Remove the three bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means
to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the head gasket.
1. Clean all sealing surfaces on the engine and the oil pan with metal surface cleaner. 2. Position a
new gasket on the oil pan.
3. NOTE: Clean and degrease all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened with in four minutes of sealant
application.
Apply a 10 mm (0.40 in.) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the areas indicated.
4. Position the oil pan and gasket and loosely install the bolts in the sequence shown
5. Install the oil pan-to-transaxle bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Baffle > Page 2606
6. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown.
7. Lubricate the oil filter O-ring with clean engine oil and install the oil filter. 8. Install the exhaust
flexible exhaust pipe.
9. Connect the downstream catalyst monitor.
10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Fill the crankcase with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil pressure sender .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2610
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2611
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2612
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Removal
1. Remove the oil pan.
2. Remove the nut, bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
Installation
1. install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil.
2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
1 Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
2 Install the bolts. 3Install the nut.
- Tighten the nut in two stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2616
- Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees.
3. Install the oil pan.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure 750 ± 50 rpm ...................................................................................................................
........................................................ 310 kPa (45 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Upper intake manifold bolts
Lower intake manifold bolts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold
Upper Intake Manifold
Removal
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
1 Remove the crankcase ventilation tube.
2 Loosen the clamps.
3 Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Remove the three nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the cables.
1 Disconnect the throttle cable.
2 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable.
3 Remove the throttle cable bracket bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2626
4. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor and idle air control (IAC) electrical connectors.
5. Disconnect the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut.
6. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and vacuum hose.
7. Disconnect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the intake manifold.
1 Disconnect the chassis vacuum hose.
2 Disconnect the engine vacuum hose.
3 Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2627
8. Disconnect the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose.
9. Disconnect the two electrical connectors attached to the left side of the upper intake manifold.
10. Disconnect the power steering pressure (PSP) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the bolt and position the transmission vent hose and bracket aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2628
12. Remove the nut from the wire harness.
13. Remove the eight bolts and the upper intake manifold.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
- Clean all sealing surfaces.
Installation
1. Install new gaskets in the upper intake manifold.
2. Position the upper intake manifold and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
3. Connect the PSP electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2629
4. Position the transmission vent tube and bracket and install the bolt.
5. Position the wire harness and install the nut.
6. Install the two electrical connectors on the left side of the intake manifold.
7. Install the vapor management valve (VMV) vacuum hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2630
8. Connect the three vacuum hoses on the back of the upper intake manifold.
1 Connect the chassis vacuum hose.
2 Connect the engine vacuum hose.
3 Connect the PCV hose.
9. Connect the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid electrical connector and the vacuum hose.
10. Install the EGR valve vacuum hose and EGR tube nut.
11. Connect the TP sensor and IAC electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2631
12. Connect the throttle cables.
1 Install the throttle cable bracket bolts.
2 Connect the throttle cable.
3 If equipped, connect the speed control cable.
13. Install the air cleaner outlet tube.
1 Position the air cleaner outlet tube.
2 Install the hoses.
3 Install the clamps.
14. Install the engine appearance cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2632
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold
Lower Intake Manifold
Removal
1. Disconnect the fuel hose spring lock coupling. 2. Remove the upper intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the fuel rail.
1 Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and wire harness locators.
2 Disconnect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose.
3 Release the wire harness retainers from the fuel injection supply manifold.
4. Remove the bolts and the lower intake manifold. Remove and discard the gaskets.
Installation
1. Clean and inspect all mating surfaces. 2. Install new gaskets in the lower intake manifold.
3. Install the lower intake manifold assembly and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 2633
4. Connect the fuel rail.
1 Position the wire harness locators and connect the six fuel injector electrical connectors.
2 Connect the fuel pressure damper vacuum hose.
3 Connect the fuel injection harness to the fuel supply manifold.
5. Install the upper intake manifold. 6. Connect the fuel hose spring lock coupling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Camshaft Oil Seal >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Oil Seal: Specifications
Camshaft oil seal retainer bolts ...........................................................................................................
..................................................... 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the flexplate.
2. Using the special tools, remove the crankshaft rear oil seal and discard.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2641
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
NOTE: Lubricate the crankshaft rear oil lips with clean engine oil.
Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal.
2. Install the flexplate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification
Cylinder Head Gasket: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket
Identification
TSB 06-18-16
09/18/06
IDENTIFYING THE CORRECT REPLACEMENT HEAD GASKET FOR CERTAIN
REMANUFACTURED ENGINES - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 1999-2006 Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang, Mustang 2000-2005
Thunderbird 2001-2005 Taurus 2001-2006 Crown Victoria, Crown Victoria 2005 Five Hundred,
Freestyle 1997-2005 Expedition 1997-2006 E-Series, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty 1999-2003
Windstar 1999-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Escape, Explorer Sport Trac, Ranger 2004-2005 Freestar, Freestar 2006 F-53
Motorhome Chassis
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2001-2002 Continental 2001-200 Town Car 1998-2004
Navigator, Navigator 2003-2004 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2001 Cougar 2001-2005 Sable 2001-2006 Grand Marquis 2003-2006 Marauder 2005
Montego 1997-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
ISSUE On various vehicles when servicing the head gasket on certain Ford remanufactured
engines, it is critical to determine the type of remanufactured engine that is being serviced, in order
to identify the correct replacement gasket.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a SID (for
originally equipment level thickness head gasket) or OVR (for oversized service level thicker head
gasket) remanufactured engine when replacing a head gasket.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Use this TSB to help identify if the vehicle is equipped with a STD or OVR remanufactured engine
when replacing a head gasket. This will ensure that you obtain the proper head gasket (thicker for
OVR-oversized) for the engine you are repairing, as the engine may have milled engine block deck,
milled cylinder head deck, or an over sized bore in the cylinders. This information will be needed
when ordering parts. The parts catalogs already reflect the correct service numbers, as long as this
additional information is available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2646
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2647
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Cylinder Head Gasket >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine - Reman Engine Head Gasket Identification > Page 2648
For certain remanufactured engines, the long block assembly will be uniquely identified with a build
date, reman code, service part number, and serial number. This metal tag will be marked with STD,
or with OVR (Figures 1-6).
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
2. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front oil seal and discard.
Installation
1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
Apply clean engine oil to the seal before installing the seal.
2. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front oil seal. 3. Install the crankshaft pulley.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Valve Seals
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the valve spring.
2. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity.
Remove the valve seal.
Installation
NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil.
1. Using the special tool, install the valve seal. 2. Install the valve spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil pressure sender .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2659
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2660
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Specifications > Page 2661
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Guide >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Guide: Specifications
Timing chain guide bolts ......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing chain tensioner bolts ................................................................................................................
..................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the RH and LH valve covers. 2. Remove the oil pan. 3. Remove the generator.
4. Remove the bolt and the camshaft position (CMP) sensor. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the
power steering pump.
7. Install front engine support insulator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2672
8. Remove the special tool. 9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the bolt and remove the belt tensioner. 11. Remove the crankshaft front seal.
12. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the bolt and the sensor.
13. NOTE: Remove the engine front cover with the vehicle raised in the air.
Remove the bolts, studs and the engine front cover. Remove and discard the front cover gaskets.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means
to clean the sealing surface. These tools cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use
a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant.
l. Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner.
2. Install three new gaskets in the front cover.
3. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within four minutes of
applying the sealant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2673
Apply a 6 mm (0.24 in.) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower
cylinder block and cylinder head mating surfaces.
4. NOTE: Fasteners 1, 3, 4, 8, 10, 11, 14, 15 and 16 are studs.
Position the cover and install the studs and bolts in the sequence shown.
5. Install the (CKP) sensor and connect the electrical connector. 6. Install the crankshaft front seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 2674
7. Install the tensioner and bolt.
8. Install the CMP and the bolt.
- Connect the electrical connector.
9. Install the generator.
10. Install the oil pan. 11. Lower the vehicle.
12. Install the special tool.
13. Remove the front engine support insulator.
1 Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolts and the insulator.
14. Install the power steering pump. 15. Install the RH and LH valve cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
There are four possible types of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Systems. The 2003 Escort/Tracer are
Exhaust Phase Shifting system (EPS). The exhaust cam is the active cam and is being retarded.
The 2003 Lincoln LS, T-Bird and Focus SVT vehicles have Intake Phase Shifting system (IPS). A
intake phase shifting system will move the intake cam in the advance direction. The other two
possible systems are Dual Equal (DEPS) both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted equally
as well as Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) where the cams are shifted independently. The
systems have three operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and a default mode. At
idle and (low engine speeds with closed throttle) the phase angle is controlled by air flow and
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). At part and wide open throttle the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load, and Throttle Position (TP). VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhance engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems
have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition a VCT system will eliminate the need for an
external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of EGR system is accomplished
by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve
closing. Increased vehicle reliability is achieved with the elimination of the EGR system.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (Camshaft Position Sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (Crankshaft Position Sensor) provides the PCM (powertrain control
module) with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 130).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF
(Mass Air Flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine
speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant
temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM,
load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The PCM calculates and determines the desired
camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired
positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents
a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the
camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber in the VCT assembly, which changes the linear
piston motion to a rotational motion that
advances or retards the camshaft.
Hardware
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2679
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 131) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the
solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100%
represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by
dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty near 50%.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The VCT unit assembly (Figure 132) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT
unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, a pressure
differential occurs forcing the piston to move. This movement is translated into rotational camshaft
motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the
camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain
adequate position control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2685
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 2686
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2695
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 2696
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
V6 Firing Order: 1 4 2 5 3 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2700
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition
Timing > Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap
0.052-0.056 inch (1.32-1.42 mm)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2708
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AWSF-32F
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2709
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2713
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the 0FF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit
Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil on top of the
pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders.
Compression Test Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are faulty.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2714
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or seating incorrectly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump > Component
Information > Specifications
Drive Pulley: Specifications
Water pump pulley ...............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine Cooling System. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
3. Disconnect the five hoses from the thermostat housing and remove the thermostat housing.
4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor from the bypass tube.
5. Remove the bolt, stud, and the water bypass tube.
6. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info
Article No. 02-23-7
11/25/02
COOLING SYSTEM - MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM GOLD ENGINE COOLANT - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2002-2003 ESCORT ZX2, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS, THUNDERBIRD 2003 CROWN
VICTORIA 2002 EXCURSION 2002-2003 E SERIES, ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC,
EXPLORER SPORT, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, SUPER DUTY
F-53 STRIPPED CHAS. 2003 EXPEDITION, WINDSTAR 2002-2003 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2002 CONTINENTAL 2002-2003 LS 2003 TOWN CAR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD 2003
AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2002-2003 SABLE 2003 GRAND MARQUIS 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 02-17-7 is being republished in its entirety to update the text and part numbers.
ISSUE
A new, extended-life engine coolant, yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant,
meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51-A1, service part numbers VC-7-A and VC-7-C (for use in
the U.S., except California and Oregon) and VC-7-B (for use only in California and Oregon as it
contains a bittering agent), has been equipped in all of the vehicles noted above. The initial-fill life
for this coolant is 100,000 miles/5 years. Due to variations in water quality, the replacement interval
is 50,000 miles/3 years.
ACTION
Any time the addition of coolant or a coolant change-out is required, USE ONLY THE TYPE OF
ENGINE COOLANT WITH WHICH THE VEHICLE WAS ORIGINALLY EQUIPPED. DO NOT MIX
COOLANT TYPES. To determine the type of coolant required, check the color of coolant in the
coolant reservoir of the vehicle or refer to the applicable vehicle's Owner's Guide or Workshop
Manual for service parts and specification information.
SERVICE INFORMATION
Except for heavy-duty vehicles equipped with the Caterpillar 3126E engine, the use of a
supplemental coolant additive (SCA) such as Motorcraft Heavy-Duty Cooling System Additive,
service part number FW-16, is not required in conjunction with this coolant.
Testing is currently underway to determine the backward compatibility of the Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant in vehicles equipped with the green-colored Motorcraft Premium Engine
Coolant, service part numbers VC-4-A, VC-4-B, and VC-5. Until the final test results are available,
vehicles should ONLY be serviced with type of coolant with which they were originally equipped.
Please note that Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant is not compatible with any
orange-colored, extended-life engine coolants such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine
Coolant, service part numbers VC-2 and VC-3. DO NOT MIX COOLANT TYPES. USE ONLY THE
TYPE OF COOLANT WITH WHICH THE VEHICLE WAS EQUIPPED.
Failure to follow these guidelines may result in degradation of corrosion protection and potential
engine damage.
Coolant Discoloration:
The current Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, service part number VC-6, used in both
Production and Service, cause the yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant to
change color ranging from a light golden brown to dark brown, depending upon the amount of
pellet
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Cooling System - Premium Gold Coolant Service Info > Page 2727
material in the coolant reservoir. This discoloration does not adversely affect the coolant or the
vehicle's cooling system components. No repairs are required for this condition. To avoid confusion
with regard to coolant contamination, a new formulation of stop leak pellets will be implemented in
Production and Service in the near future.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 02-17-7 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 402000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Coolant: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Cooling System Pressure Test Specification
Radiator ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 138 kPa (20 psi)
Radiator Cap Pressure Test Specification
Radiator cap
..................................................................................................................................................... 110
+ 14 kPa - 21 kPa (16 + 2 psi - 3 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications > Page 2730
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity (Auto trans) ..................................................................................................................
.................................................... 10.0 L (10.5 quart)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications > Page 2731
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Types
Caution: Do not mix coolant types.
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant ......................................................... VC-4-A (in Oregon VC-5,
in Canada CXC-10) ESE-M97B44-A (green color)
Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant ...................................................................... VC-7-A (in
Oregon VC-7-B) WSS-M97H51-A11 (yellow color)
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush
......................................................................................................................................... VC-1
ESR-M14F7-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling
System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2740
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Level Sensor: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2746
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2747
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Level Sensor > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2748
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information >
Specifications
Coolant Line/Hose: Specifications
Cooler tube bracket bolt ......................................................................................................................
..................................................... 28 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Reservoir: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low
Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2760
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System
- Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Coolant Reservoir: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 > Cooling System
- Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2766
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2767
Coolant Reservoir: Specifications
Degas bottle nuts .................................................................................................................................
....................................................... 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2768
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. Remove the degas bottle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2778
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2779
View 151-12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2780
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2783
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2784
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2785
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2786
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2787
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2809
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2810
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2816
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2817
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Heater Core: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS
A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS
WORKING CORRECTLY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 2820
Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2821
Heater Core: Description and Operation
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2822
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH
AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow
the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core.
NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater
core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core
Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE
SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: ^
the heater core may have an air pocket.
^ the heater core may be plugged, or
^ the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core
pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter
with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the
heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and
adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2823
tester to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 2824
Heater Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2833
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2834
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2840
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core
Electrolysis/Leakage > Page 2841
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Hose > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2842
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications
Radiator: Specifications
Upper radiator support bracket bolts
........................................................................................................................................................ 10
Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2846
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the lower splash shields.
4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose, the high pressure transmission line and the degas return
hose.
5. Lower the vehicle.
6. Disconnect the transmission return line.
7. Disconnect the upper radiator hose and degas supply hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2847
8. Position the hood latch assemble out of the way.
9. Remove the two bolts and the center support.
10. Remove the two top bolts retaining the cooling fan to the radiator.
11. Remove the upper radiator support brackets, and remove the radiator from the vehicle. 12. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2853
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2854
View 151-12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2855
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2858
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2859
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > High Speed Fan Control Relay 1 > Page 2860
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Medium Speed Fan Control Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2861
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2862
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: Customer Interest Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-25-2 > Dec > 03 >
Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2872
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-25-2 >
Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON
Coolant Level Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light
ON
Article No. 03-25-2
12/22/03
ENGINE - COOLING SYSTEM - LOW COOLANT WARNING INDICATOR LAMP ILLUMINATED COOLANT DEGAS BOTTLE INSPECTION - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 03-08-5 to update the vehicle model years and service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2003 Escape 3.0L vehicles may exhibit a low coolant warning indicator lamp
illuminated. This may be caused by a low coolant level, even if it appears there is significant
coolant in the degas bottle. Analysis of coolant degas bottles indicate that bottle replacement may
not be necessary. Adjusting the coolant to the proper level may be all that is required to correct the
condition.
ACTION The following Service Procedure provides tips to help in veritying proper coolant levels.
Additional diagnostic and service information can be found in the appropriate Workshop Manual
Section 303-03.
SERVICE PROCEDURE PROPER INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF COOLANT LEVEL IN
THE DEGAS BOTTLE
There are four (4) different cells within the Escape degas bottle. The front cells of the degas bottle
are not a good visual indicator of proper coolant level, as these cells will always give the
appearance of being full (Figure 1). The actual COLD FILL RANGE is the larger cell with the fill
cap, just below the seam. It can be difficult to see if not properly examined.
If the vehicle is HOT when inspecting, the coolant level should be at the bottle seam (minimum) or
above the seam by 1/2 inch, well above the LOW mark. When hot, if the coolant level is not at least
to the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), there is a possibility of illuminating the low coolant
lamp when the vehicle cools down and the coolant is drawn back into the engine cooling system.
DIAGNOSIS Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Not Illuminated (OFF):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap and return vehicle to customer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-25-2 >
Dec > 03 > Cooling System - Low Coolant Warning Light ON > Page 2878
Engine Hot Or Cold Coolant Warning Indicator Lamp Illuminated (ON):
1. If the coolant level is found to be below the COLD FILL RANGE (seam) add coolant, tighten
pressure cap, verify that the warning lamp turns off after key cycle and return to customer.
2. If the coolant level is verified to be at the top of the COLD FILL RANGE (seam), disconnect the
coolant level sensor and verify that the warning lamp turns off. If the lamp does turn off then
replace the degas bottle. If the lamp remains on with the sensor disconnected then perform
diagnostics on the circuit beyond degas bottle/low coolant sensor.
NOTE
IT TAKES APPROXIMATELY 25 SECONDS FOR THE LOW COOLANT LAMP TO TURN OFF
AFTER THE SENSOR CIRCUIT IS OPENED. (EXAMPLE: WHEN ADDING COOLANT TO A LOW
BOTTLE WITH LAMP ON.)
NOTE
DO NOT REPLACE THE DEGAS BOTTLE UNLESS DIRECTED BY DIAGNOSTICS IN STEP 2.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 03-08-5
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level
Sensor: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level
Sensor: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 2884
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level
Sensor: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 2885
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level
Sensor: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 2891
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Coolant Level
Sensor: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 2892
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2893
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Coolant Level Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2894
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat Opening Temperatures
Starts to open ......................................................................................................................................
....................................... 90 - 93 °C (194 - 200 °F) Fully open ...........................................................
...................................................................................................................................... 106 °C (223
°F)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2905
Thermostat: Service and Repair
Thermostat-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the engine cooling system.
2. NOTE: The appearance cover is shown removed for clarity. Separate the thermostat housing.
3. Remove the thermostat and the O-ring seal from the thermostat housing.
4. NOTE: Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Specifications
Thermostat Housing: Specifications
Thermostat housing bolts and studs
......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Drive Pulley, Water Pump >
Component Information > Specifications
Drive Pulley: Specifications
Water pump pulley ...............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 10 Nm (89 in. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful
engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
(N), carbon dioxide (CO 2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO,
NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in
the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of
Section 1 for specific OBD catalyst monitor information.
The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on
the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 136) and (Figure
137) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S
are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be
used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to
monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three
HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst
will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is
utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3
(HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft
Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine, so only the
Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized.
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2917
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to
301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 138). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC
and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO),
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 139) and then on into the muffler. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the
exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off
catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 140).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2918
Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration
Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for
a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or
palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2919
the engine configuration and number of cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how
the HO2S operates.)
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2920
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems
Diagnosis.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2921
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger.
4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove
converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
LH
RH
Exhaust Manifold nuts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Removal
1. Remove the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor.
2. Remove the bolts and the splash shield.
3. Remove the nuts and position the exhaust crossover aside.
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise, and remove the belt.
5. Remove the A/C compressor bolts and position aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold LH > Page 2927
6. Remove the nuts and LH exhaust manifold and discard the gasket.
Installation
LH
1. Position a new gasket and tighten the exhaust manifold in the sequence shown.
2. Position the A/C compressor and install the bolts. 3. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner
clockwise and install the belt.
4. Position the exhaust crossover, and install the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold LH > Page 2928
5. Install the splash shield. 6. Install the LH HO2S and the LH catalyst monitor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Manifold LH > Page 2929
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold RH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal
1. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) tube. 2. Remove the generator. 3. Disconnect and
remove the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S). 4. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe.
5. Remove the RH manifold.
^ Discard the gasket.
Installation
RH
1. Position a new gasket and install the exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown. 2. Install the
RH HO2S. 3. Install the exhaust flexible pipe. 4. Install the generator. 5. Install the EGR tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Pipe: Specifications
Exhaust flexible pipe to three-way catalytic converter nuts
...................................................................................................................... 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.)
Flexible pipe to resonator U-bolt nuts
...................................................................................................................................................... 50
Nm (37 ft. lbs.) Exhaust flexible pipe to exhaust manifold nuts
........................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm (30 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2933
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair
Exhaust Flexible Pipe-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the RH catalyst monitor.
3. Remove and discard the two nuts and separate the flexible Y-pipe from the manifold.
4. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
5. Remove the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
6. Remove the flexible pipe.
^ Disconnect from the hanger.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Specifications
Muffler: Specifications
Muffler/tailpipe to resonator nuts
.............................................................................................................................................................
50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2937
Muffler: Service and Repair
Muffler-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the U-bolt.
3. Remove the nuts and the muffler.
^ Discard the gasket.
^ Discard the nuts.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Disconnect the resonator from the hanger and remove the resonator. 4. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2949
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2950
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2951
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2952
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2953
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2954
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2955
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2956
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2957
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2958
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2959
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2960
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2961
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2962
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2963
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2964
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2965
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2966
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2967
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2968
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2969
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2970
59-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 2971
59-3
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a strategy that delivers a transmission output
shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes the Visteon Gen
II electronic throttle body (replaces throttle cable).
Torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy. This is possible by
not coupling the throttle angle to pedal position, which enables various fuel economy schemes and
technologies.
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts. In other words the engine shifts can result is an engine lugging condition (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the same torque requested by the driver. It should
be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates
when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon"
light.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as:
- VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Continuously varying Transmission (CVT)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ECT also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are:
- Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate ISC Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
Electronic Throttle Body
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 148) has the following characteristics
1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the
throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has
the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2X main spring). Default
angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (typically 7 to 8 degrees from
hard-stop angle).
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding is the bore (~0.75
degree). This hard stop is non-adjustable and is set
to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the plate or use
plate sealant. The hole in the plate is not required
with ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle, which also is the reason
there is no IAC.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP assembly requires four wires.
- 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for safety monitor reasons. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and
APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal
operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2975
position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2- (5 V Reference Voltage)
- 2- (Signal Return "ground")
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A safe value will be substituted for a
faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 2980
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 2981
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2982
View 151-11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 2985
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 2986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accomodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 2989
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2993
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 2996
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 2997
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 2998
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3003
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3004
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3005
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3012
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3013
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3014
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3019
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3020
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3021
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3028
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3032
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3033
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3034
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3044
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3045
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
3046
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 3053
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 3054
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3058
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3059
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3064
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3065
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3066
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component
Locations > Page 3067
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3070
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3071
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3072
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3073
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3074
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3075
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3076
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3077
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3078
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3079
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3080
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3081
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3082
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3083
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3084
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3085
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3086
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3087
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3088
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3089
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 3090
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3091
Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID
In-Line Engines
V-Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3094
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3095
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3096
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3102
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3103
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3104
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3105
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3106
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3107
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3108
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3109
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3110
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3111
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3112
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3113
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3114
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3115
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3116
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3117
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3118
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3119
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3120
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3121
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 3122
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3126
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3127
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3128
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3129
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3133
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3134
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3135
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3139
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3141
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3142
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3143
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3144
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3152
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3153
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3154
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations >
Page 3155
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3160
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3161
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
3165
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3169
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 73) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3172
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 85) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Reset Instructions
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. If no natural gas leak
is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner
Guide).
NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. Again, check for leaking
natural gas.
WARNING: IF YOU SMELL NATURAL GAS AT ANY TIME OTHER THAN DURING FUELING, DO
NOT RESET THE IFS SWITCH.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3173
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3177
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3178
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3179
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3184
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3185
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3186
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3190
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3191
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3192
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3200
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3201
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3207
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3208
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3217
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3218
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
V6 Firing Order: 1 4 2 5 3 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3222
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing >
Number One Cylinder > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap
0.052-0.056 inch (1.32-1.42 mm)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3230
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AWSF-32F
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 3231
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3235
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
Compression Test Compression Gauge Check
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the
Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit.
With the ignition switch in the 0FF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of five compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes required to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test-Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75 percent of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit
Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil on top of the
pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders.
Compression Test Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are faulty.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3236
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or seating incorrectly. 3. If two adjacent
cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase
compression, the head gasket may
be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition.
Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest
reading is at least 75 percent of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3242
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3251
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3252
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3253
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3259
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3260
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3261
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): >
05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3277
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3278
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3279
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3280
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3281
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3282
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3283
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3284
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3285
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3286
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3287
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3288
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3289
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3290
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3291
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3292
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3293
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3294
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3295
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3296
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3297
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3298
59-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3299
59-3
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3303
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3307
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3308
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3309
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3319
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3320
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3321
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3327
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3328
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3329
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3330
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3331
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3332
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3333
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3334
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a strategy that delivers a transmission output
shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes the Visteon Gen
II electronic throttle body (replaces throttle cable).
Torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy. This is possible by
not coupling the throttle angle to pedal position, which enables various fuel economy schemes and
technologies.
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts. In other words the engine shifts can result is an engine lugging condition (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the same torque requested by the driver. It should
be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates
when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon"
light.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as:
- VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Continuously varying Transmission (CVT)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ECT also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are:
- Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate ISC Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
Electronic Throttle Body
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 148) has the following characteristics
1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the
throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has
the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2X main spring). Default
angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (typically 7 to 8 degrees from
hard-stop angle).
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding is the bore (~0.75
degree). This hard stop is non-adjustable and is set
to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the plate or use
plate sealant. The hole in the plate is not required
with ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle, which also is the reason
there is no IAC.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP assembly requires four wires.
- 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for safety monitor reasons. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and
APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal
operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3352
position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2- (5 V Reference Voltage)
- 2- (Signal Return "ground")
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A safe value will be substituted for a
faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3357
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page
3358
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3359
View 151-11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3362
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3363
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accomodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page
3366
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3373
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3374
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3378
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 122) and (Figure 123) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dash pot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3379
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 124) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^
No touch start
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dash pot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3380
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the valve. ^
Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Specifications
Information Bus: Specifications
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................Specification
Heat shrink tube overlap.......................................................................................................................
......................................................12.7 mm (0.5 inch) Wire insulation removal length (twist side)......
..........................................................................................................................................37.2 mm
(1.5 inch) Wire insulation removal length (receiving
side).......................................................................................................................................19.5 mm
(0.75 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3393
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3394
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3395
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3396
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3397
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3398
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3399
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3400
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3401
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3402
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3403
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3404
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3405
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3406
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration
Information Bus: Description and Operation Module Configuration
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Some modules support the ability to change specified factory configuration settings and preset
preference items. The process used to change the settings and customer preference items is
module configuration. There are two different methods of module configuration:
- programmable module installation (PMI)
- customer preference items
There are three storage locations for module configuration information. One primary storage
location and two secondary (or backup) storage locations.
- Primary location is the memory of the specific module.
- First backup location is the VID block memory of the powertrain control module (PCM).
- Second backup is the As-Built Data Center.
During PMI, the diagnostic tool will attempt to extract the module configuration information from the
module to be changed, if this is unsuccessful, the diagnostic tool will use the first backup and
attempt to extract the module configuration information from the VID block in the PCM. If this also
fails, the diagnostic tool will display instructions to contact the As-Built Data Center. This is the only
time the As-Built Data Center should be contacted.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
NOTE: If the powertrain control module (PCM) needs to have a powertrain calibration flash
programmed, refer to Computers and Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when
programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the PCM.
The PMI configuration method is used when a new programmable module is to be installed. During
the PMI routine the diagnostic tool attempts to gather two pieces of information: option content information from the old module (module configuration and customer preference
settings)
- the vehicle identification number (VIN) from the PCM
During PMI the diagnostic tool first looks to the PCM for the VIN of the vehicle. Once the VIN is
retrieved the diagnostic tool will carry out a self-test of the suspect module to determine if the
module has been configured. If DTC B2477 is present the module does not contain complete configuration information. The PMI
routine will then halt and give instructions on how to proceed.
- If DTC B2477 is not present the module will allow the diagnostic tool to retrieve its option content
information. The diagnostic tool will then store the option content information and the VIN.
The diagnostic tool can store the combined option content information and VIN for only one module
at a time. Once information is stored, the diagnostic tool cannot be used to retrieve any other
option content information without erasing the previous option content information. Make sure the
new module is on hand for installation before retrieving option content information data from the old
module.
After the new module is installed, use the diagnostic tool to restore the option content information
into the new module.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
NOTE: If the PCM needs to have a powertrain calibration flash programmed, refer to Computers and
Control Systems. Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a
PMI routine on the PCM.
- When carrying out a PMI routine on any non-PCM module, use the OBDII cable.
- Flash programming powertrain calibrations onto the PCM is different than PMI. It has no effect on
the backup data in the VID block memory area of the PCM.
The PCM contains a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. A portion of the VID
block is used to store the backup data for each programmable module on the vehicle.
The VID block is the first backup of information when using the PMI configuration method. If the
diagnostic tool cannot retrieve option content information from the suspect module, the diagnostic
tool will attempt to extract backup information from the VID block of the PCM.
The VID block is not related to or affected by the powertrain calibration information stored in the
PCM. If a new powertrain calibration has been flashed onto the PCM, the VID block will not be
affected.
If using the PMI routine to install a new PCM, the diagnostic tool will reprogram only VID
information. The engine calibration information may still need to be flashed. For more information,
refer to Computers and Control Systems for flash programming information.
As-Built Data Center
The As-Built Data Center keeps a record of the vehicle configuration in a database that is
retrievable using the VIN. The As-Built Data Center records the applicable module configurations
stored in each module before the vehicle leaves the factory. The As-Built Data Center will always
reflect the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration > Page 3409
original build of the vehicle as it left the factory. Only contact the As-Built Data Center when
directed to do so by the diagnostic tool.
Customer Preference Items
This method is used to enable or disable module-controlled items or systems to suit the preference
of the customer. Not all features controlled by the module are listed in this configuration method.
Refer to the Module Configuration Index for a list of features for each module.
If a feature is changed using the customer preference items configuration method, the changed
information will not be stored in the PCM VID block. The VID block will retain the original settings
as they were recorded when the vehicle left the factory.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Module Configuration > Page 3410
Information Bus: Description and Operation Communications Network
Description and Operation
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
The module communications network consists of the following items:
- standard corporate protocol (SCP) communications network
- international standards organization (ISO) communications network
- generic electronic module (GEM)
- powertrain control module (PCM)
- anti-lock brake system (ABS) module
- restraint control module (RCM)
- instrument cluster (IC)
Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The vehicle has two module communications networks. The standard corporate protocol (SCP)
network, which is an unshielded twisted pair cable (data bus plus, circuit 914 [TN/OG] and data bus
minus, circuit 915 [PK/LB]); and the international standards organization (ISO) 9141 network which
is a single wire (circuit 70 [LB/WH]). The diagnostic tool can connect to both networks through the
data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing
one smart tester to be able to diagnose and control any module on the two networks from one
connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel on the driver side.
The SCP communication network will remain operational even with the severing of one of the bus
wires. Communications will also continue if one of the bus wires is shorted to ground or voltage, or
if some, but not all, termination resistors are lost.
The ISO 9141 communication network does not permit inter-module communication. When the
diagnostic tool communicates to modules on the ISO 9141 communication network, the diagnostic
tool must ask for all information; the modules cannot initiate communications.
Unlike the SCP, the ISO 9141 communication network will not function if the wire is shorted to
ground or battery voltage. Also, if one of the modules on the ISO 9141 communication network
loses power or shorts internally, communications to that module will fail.
There are two modules linked to the SCP communication network and three modules linked to the
ISO 9141 communication network.
The powertrain control module (PCM) is on the SCP communication network. The PCM controls
the engine for better fuel economy, emissions control and failure mode detection and storage.
The passive anti-theft system (PATS) is integrated into the PCM module. The PCM/PATS system
is connected to the vehicle electrical system, the transceiver module, the vehicle SCP
communications network and the vehicle anti-theft indicator located in the instrument cluster (IC).
The PCM module uses a microprocessor to control the system functions as well as illumination of
the anti-theft indicator. The illumination command is sent from the PCM through the SCP
communications network to the IC, which in turn sends power to the anti-theft indicator. The PCM
module microprocessor stores the ignition key codes in non-volatile memory. The PCM and IC
modules can be diagnosed through the data link connector. For additional IC information, refer to
Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators.
The restraint control module (RCM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The RCM controls
the deployment of the air bags based on sensor input.
The generic electronic module (GEM) is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The GEM
controls a variety of systems:
- rear wiper
- cargo lamps
- interior lamps
- exterior lamps
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft (if equipped)
For additional GEM information, refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General Module).
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module is on the ISO 9141 communication network. The
ABS module controls the brake pressure to the four wheels to keep the vehicle under control while
braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Communications Network
Initial Inspection
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) Fuse ROOM (10A)
- Wiring harness
- Connectors
- Instrument cluster (IC)
- Anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module
- Restraint control module (RCM)
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
- Powertrain control module (PCM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position is in RUN.
If the diagnostic tool still dues not communicate with the vehicle, go to Pinpoint Test H. See:
Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Tests/Test H
4. Go to Pinpoint Test PC. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
Pinpoint Test PC (Precheck)
PINPOINT TEST PC: DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS NETWORK TEST
Test PC1
Test A
PINPOINT TEST A: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT
RESPOND TO THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3413
Test A1-A3
Test B
PINPOINT TEST B: THE RESTRAINT CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3414
Test B1-B3
Test C
PINPOINT TEST C: THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test C1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3415
Test C2-C3
Test D
PINPOINT TEST D: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (IC) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test D1-D2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3416
Test D2-D3
Test E
PINPOINT TEST E: THE POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO
THE DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test E1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3417
Test E2-E3
Test F
PINPOINT TEST F: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - ISO 9141 NETWORK
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3418
Test F1-F5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3419
Test F5-F10
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3420
Test F11-F12
Test G
PINPOINT TEST G: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - SCP NETWORK
Test G1-G4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3421
Test G5-G8
Test H
PINPOINT TEST H: NO MODULE/NETWORK COMMUNICATION - NO POWER TO THE
DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Test H1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3422
Test H2-H4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3423
Symptom Chart, Part 1
Symptom Chart, Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3424
Information Bus: Testing and Inspection Module Configuration
Initial Inspection
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Damaged wiring harness
- Loose or corroded connectors
- Instrument cluster (IC)
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
- Powertrain control module (PCM)
2. If the concern remains after inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check that the ignition switch is in the RUN position.
3. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus). 4. Refer to the Symptom Chart. See: Diagnosis By
Symptom
Module Configuration Index
MODULE CONFIGURATION INDEX
Module Configuration Index
NOTE: Do not contact the As-Built Data Center unless the diagnostic tool instructs you to do so.
The diagnostic tool will not allow you to use as-built data information unless the diagnostic tool first
prompts you for the As-Built Data Center information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3425
Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 1
Diagnostic Tool Message Index, Part 2
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A: UNABLE TO CONFIGURE THE NEW MODULE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Communications Network > Page 3426
Test A1-A2
Test A3-A4
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Communication Circuit Wiring Repair
Information Bus: Service and Repair Communication Circuit Wiring Repair
COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT WIRING REPAIR
Heat Gun
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Strip the wires.
3. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly activated (RMA) solder, not acid core solder.
Solder the wires. 1
Install the heat shrink tube.
2 Twist the wires together.
3 Solder the wires together.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Communication Circuit Wiring Repair > Page 3429
4. NOTE: Wait for the solder to cool before moving the wires.
Bend the wires back in a straight line.
5. Position the (A) heat shrink tube over the (B) wire repair.
- Overlap the heat shrink tube on both wires.
6. Use the heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out both ends of the heat shrink
tube. 7. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Communication Circuit Wiring Repair > Page 3430
Information Bus: Service and Repair Module Configuration
Programmable Module Installation
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION
NOTE: If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
- Do not remove the original module from the vehicle until the diagnostic tool has retrieved the
module's configuration information.
- Make sure the module is listed as being supported by programmable module installation in the
Module Configuration Index.
- Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the
PCM.
- It is important to keep a record of any error message given by the tester during the programmable
module installation routine. Additionally, observe the point during the routine that the error message
is given and refer to the Diagnostic Tool Message Index. This will help determine what is causing
the error message.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module
Configuration - Old ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 3. Install the new module. 4.
Continue with directions from the diagnostic tool for module reprogramming.
Programmable Module Installation - Using Backup Data
PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION - USING BACKUP DATA
NOTE: If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming then follow the screen prompts.
- Make sure to use the flash cable when programming calibrations or running a PMI routine on the
PCM.
1. Select Programmable Module Installation on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select Retrieve Module
Configuration - Old ECU. The diagnostic tool will give you a message to reinstall the old module or
to continue for
backup data. If the module to be replaced will not communicate or has incorrect data, continue and
allow the diagnostic tool to find backup data. If the diagnostic tool successfully retrieves the backup
data, GO to Step 7 in this procedure. If the diagnostic tool prompts you to contact the As-Built Data
Center for backup information, contact the As-Built Data Center and obtain the backup data for the
vehicle and continue on.
3. After the As-Built Data Center backup data is obtained continue with the routine by entering the
VIN number of the vehicle when the diagnostic
tool prompts you to do so.
4. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter the vehicle data. The vehicle data is listed on the
As-Built Data Center sheet in the upper left-hand
portion, directly underneath the VIN for the vehicle.
5. The diagnostic tool will prompt you to enter information for the module that needs to be
reprogrammed. Enter all of the data that the diagnostic
tool requests. If the diagnostic tool requests information that is not listed on the As-Built Data
Center sheet, press NO.
6. Follow the text screens until all pertinent data is entered and the module data is stored. 7. Select
Restore Module Configuration - New ECU, and follow the text screens until successful. 8. Manually
validate each customer preference item for correct setting. If necessary, ask the customer what
setting would be their preference. Refer to
the Module Configuration Index for the list of customer preference items.
Customer Preference Items
CUSTOMER PREFERENCE ITEMS
NOTE: If using the WDS, select Module Configuration and Programming, then follow the screen prompts.
- Make sure module is listed as supporting customer preference items and supports the specific
item to be configured in the Module Configuration Index.
1. Select Service Bay Functions on the diagnostic tool. 2. Select the module that contains the
customer preference item to be programmed. Refer to the Module Configuration Index. 3. Select
Customer Preference Items on the diagnostic tool. 4. Select Module Option Content. 5. Select the
item to be enabled or disabled. 6. Enable or disable the item as necessary to reflect the customer
preference.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3431
Information Bus: Tools and Equipment
Special Tool(s)
Heat Gun
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3435
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3436
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3440
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3443
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3444
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 3445
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts.
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3453
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3454
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3455
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3456
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3459
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3460
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3461
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3462
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3463
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3464
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3465
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3466
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3467
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3468
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3469
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3470
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3471
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3472
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3473
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3474
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3475
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3476
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3477
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3478
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3479
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3480
Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID
In-Line Engines
V-Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3483
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3484
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3485
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3491
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3492
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3493
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3494
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3495
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3496
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3497
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3498
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3499
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3500
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3501
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3502
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3503
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3504
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3505
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3506
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3507
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3508
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3509
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3510
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3511
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3515
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3516
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3517
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3518
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3525
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3526
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3527
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3528
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3529
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3530
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3531
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3532
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3533
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3534
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3535
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3536
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3537
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3538
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3539
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3540
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3541
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3542
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3543
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3544
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3545
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3546
59-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
> Page 3547
59-3
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Overview
Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) is a strategy that delivers a transmission output
shaft torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It utilizes the Visteon Gen
II electronic throttle body (replaces throttle cable).
Torque based ETC strategy was developed mainly to improve fuel economy. This is possible by
not coupling the throttle angle to pedal position, which enables various fuel economy schemes and
technologies.
Background "Why Torque Based ETC"
Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts. In other words the engine shifts can result is an engine lugging condition (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the same torque requested by the driver. It should
be noted that the ETC system includes a wrench light on the instrument cluster that illuminates
when a fault is detected. Faults are also accompanied by DTCS and the "Check Engine Soon"
light.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as:
- VCT (deliver same torque during transitions)
- Continuously varying Transmission (CVT)
- Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV)
Torque based ECT also results is a less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other generic benefits of ETC are:
- Eliminate cruise control actuators
- Eliminate ISC Bypass actuator
- Better airflow range
- Packaging (no cable)
Electronic Throttle Body
The Gen II electronic throttle body (Figure 148) has the following characteristics
1. The DC motor is driven by the PCM (requires two wires). The gear ratio from the motor to the
throttle plate shaft is 17:1. 2. There are two designs; parallel and in-series. The parallel design has
the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is
integrated into the main housing (in general this is more difficult to package). The in-series design
has a separate motor housing that protrudes out and offers more packaging flexibility.
3. Two springs are used: one is used to close the throttle (main spring) and the other is in a plunger
assembly that results in a default angle with no
power applied. This is for limp home reasons (force of plunger spring is 2X main spring). Default
angle is usually set to result in a top vehicle speed of 30 MPH (typically 7 to 8 degrees from
hard-stop angle).
4. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to avoid the throttle from binding is the bore (~0.75
degree). This hard stop is non-adjustable and is set
to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle.
5. Unlike cable type throttle bodies, the intent for the ETB is not to have a hole in the plate or use
plate sealant. The hole in the plate is not required
with ETB because the required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle, which also is the reason
there is no IAC.
6. The system has two throttle position sensors. Redundant throttle position signals are required for
monitor reasons. TP1 has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and TP2 has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing
voltage). During normal operation the negative sloped TP sensor (TP1) is used by the control
strategy as the indication of throttle position. The TP assembly requires four wires.
- 5 V Reference Voltage
- Signal Return (ground)
- TP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- TP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors (APPS)
The ETC strategy uses pedal position sensors as an input to determine the driver demand.
1. There are three pedal position sensors required for safety monitor reasons. APP1 has a negative
slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and
APP2 & APP3 both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal
operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
3551
position by the strategy.
2. There are two VREF wires, two signal return wires and three signal wires (total of seven wires
and pins) between the PCM and APPS assembly.
- 2- (5 V Reference Voltage)
- 2- (Signal Return "ground")
- APP1 voltage with negative voltage slope (5-0)
- APP2 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
- APP3 voltage with positive voltage slope (0-5)
3. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The
software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy.
4. The three pedal position signals ensure a correct input to the PCM, if any one signal has a fault.
The PCM knows if a signal is wrong by
calculating where it should be, inferred by the other signals. A safe value will be substituted for a
faulty signal if two out of the three signals are bad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - General PCM Programming
Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3556
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 3557
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3558
View 151-11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3561
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 3562
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically
Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only
Memory
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Flash EEPROM
Description
Flash Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) is contained in an
Integrated Circuit (IC) internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the
vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle and is capable of being
reprogrammed or reflashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The
VID block must be programmed when replacing the PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to perform this procedure may generate fault codes: P1635,
P1639, VID Block not programmed or is corrupt. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be
tailored to accommodate various hardware/parameter changes made to the vehicle since
production. Failure to perform this procedure properly may generate fault code: P1635, Tire/Axle
Ratio out of Acceptable Range is one of the main causes for code: P1639. This is described under
Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The
VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items
include the VIN number, octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle
ratio, the presence of speed control and four wheel drive electronic shift on the fly versus manual
shift on the fly. Only items applicable to vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block will be
displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy will place range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The VID block is also limited to the number of times to be reconfigured. When
this limit is reached, the scan tool will display a message indicating the need to flash the PCM
again to reset the VID block.
Each of the procedures described below use the Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS).
Reprogramming can be performed by a local Ford dealer for any non Ford facility. There are other
Enhanced Scan Tools that may have reprogramming capabilities available. Refer to the
manufacturers users manual for details.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
A new PCM will contain the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However,
the VID block will be blank and will need programming. There are two procedures available. The
first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM and the second is manual data
entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer will be performed if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done
by the use of a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The
stored data can now be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been replaced.
Manual data entry must be performed if the old module is damaged and/or incapable of
communicating. Remove and replace the old PCM. Using a compatible Scan Tool select and
execute Module/Parameter reprogramming referring to the manufacturers users manual. Important,
make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program Tire Size in revolutions
per mile, (rev/mile = 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches) Axle Ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or
Manual/Electronic shift on the fly (MSOF/ESOF) may result in codes: P1635, P1639. You may be
instructed to contact the "AS BUILT" data center for the information needed to manually update the
VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center ONLY if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is
corrupt. For Ford L-M technician's, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician
Society (PTS) web sight for "AS Built" data. Non Ford technicians, use the Fed World website at
"fedworld.gov". Select Auto Service Information and search for "Calibrations" or "Vehicle
Calibrations" then specify vehicle manufacturer, model name and model year as required.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to
accomodate vehicle hardware. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the entire EEPROM will need to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to
changes made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block
because it has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the Scan Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Flash Electrically
Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory > Page 3565
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cover.
1 Loosen the bolt and disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nuts and the cover.
3. Remove the PCM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3569
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro
ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro
ISO Relay > Page 3572
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro
ISO Relay > Page 3573
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro
ISO Relay > Page 3574
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3579
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3580
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3584
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3585
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3586
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) electrical connector.
2. Remove the CPP locknut and the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the cooling system.
2. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Unclip and remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3596
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3597
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3598
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
3605
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the rear seat assembly.
3. Remove the fuel tank sending unit access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank pressure sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor.
^ Disconnect the vapor tubes.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
3606
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Emission Control Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Emission Control
Systems/Evaporative Emissions System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3610
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3611
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3616
Oxygen Sensor: Harness Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3617
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3618
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page
3619
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Oxygen Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3622
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3623
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3624
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3625
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3626
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3627
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3628
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3629
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3630
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3631
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3632
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3633
Oxygen Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3634
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3635
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3636
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3637
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3638
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3639
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3640
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3641
Oxygen Sensor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 3642
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3643
Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID
In-Line Engines
V-Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3646
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the
vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the HO2S with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant E8AZ-19A501-B or
equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the HO2S to aid in
installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3647
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor LH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) LH > Page 3648
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor RH
EGO Sensor Wrench
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor.
NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the catalyst monitor sensor with Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
E8AZ-19A501-B or equivalent to aid in removal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Apply a light coat of High Temperature Nickel Anti-Seize Lubricant F6AZ-9L494-AA or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESE-M12A4-A to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor
to aid in installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3654
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3655
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3656
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3657
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3658
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3659
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3660
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3661
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3662
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3663
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3664
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3665
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3666
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3667
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3668
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3669
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3670
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3671
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3672
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 3673
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3674
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3678
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3679
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3680
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page
3681
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3685
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3686
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3687
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3691
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3692
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3693
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3694
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3695
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 3696
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3703
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3704
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3705
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3709
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3710
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3711
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3712
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3713
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3714
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
Variable Cam Timing System
Overview
There are four possible types of Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Systems. The 2003 Escort/Tracer are
Exhaust Phase Shifting system (EPS). The exhaust cam is the active cam and is being retarded.
The 2003 Lincoln LS, T-Bird and Focus SVT vehicles have Intake Phase Shifting system (IPS). A
intake phase shifting system will move the intake cam in the advance direction. The other two
possible systems are Dual Equal (DEPS) both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted equally
as well as Dual Independent Phase Shifting (DIPS) where the cams are shifted independently. The
systems have three operational modes; idle, part throttle, wide open throttle and a default mode. At
idle and (low engine speeds with closed throttle) the phase angle is controlled by air flow and
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). At part and wide open throttle the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) controls cam timing based on engine RPM, load, and Throttle Position (TP). VCT systems
provide reduced emissions and enhance engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems
have the added benefit of improve torque. In addition a VCT system will eliminate the need for an
external Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of EGR system is accomplished
by controlling the overlap in valve opening between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve
closing. Increased vehicle reliability is achieved with the elimination of the EGR system.
Variable Cam Timing
Variable Cam Timing System
The VCT (variable cam timing) system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid,
a CMP (Camshaft Position Sensor) and trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of
equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1).
Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1
tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP
signal for that bank. A CKP (Crankshaft Position Sensor) provides the PCM (powertrain control
module) with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments (Figure 130).
1. The PCM receives input signals from the Intake Air Temperature (IAT), ECT (engine coolant
temperature), CMP, TP (throttle position), MAF
(Mass Air Flow) and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle (low engine
speeds and closed throttle) the PCM controls camshaft position based on air and coolant
temperatures. During part and wide open throttle, camshaft position is determined by engine RPM,
load and throttle position. The VCT system will not operate until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the proper conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The PCM calculates and determines the desired
camshaft position. It will continually update the VCT solenoid duty cycle until desired
positioning is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents
a position error in the PCM's VCT control loop. The PCM will disable the VCT and place the
camshaft in a default position if a fault is detected.
5. Oil flows to either side of the piston chamber in the VCT assembly, which changes the linear
piston motion to a rotational motion that
advances or retards the camshaft.
Hardware
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3718
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Solenoid Valve
The VCT solenoid valve (Figure 131) is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve
controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the
solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100%
represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by
dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty near 50%.
Variable Cam Timing (VCT) Unit Assembly
Variable Cam Timing Unit Assembly
The VCT unit assembly (Figure 132) is coupled to the camshaft through a helical spline in the VCT
unit chamber. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, a pressure
differential occurs forcing the piston to move. This movement is translated into rotational camshaft
motion through the helical spline coupling. A spring installed in the chamber is designed to hold the
camshaft in the minimum overlap position (5 degrees) when oil pressure is too low to maintain
adequate position control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > System Information >
Description and Operation
Air Injection: Description and Operation
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) SYSTEMS
Overview
The Secondary Air Injection (AIR) system controls emissions during the first 20 to 120 seconds of
engine operation by forcing air downstream into the exhaust manifolds to oxidize the hydrocarbons
and carbon monoxide created by running rich at start up.
Electric Secondary Air Injection System
Dual Or Single AIRD Valve Electric Secondary Air Injection (AIR)
The Electric Secondary Air Injection (AIR) system consists of an Electric AIR Pump (EAP), single
or dual combination check air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve(s), an AIR bypass solenoid, a
solid state relay, Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and connecting wires and vacuum hoses.
1. The PCM requires Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT), Intake Air Temperature (IAT) and
Crankshaft Position (CKP) inputs to initiate
Secondary Air Injection function.
2. When the engine is started, the strategy will determine when to enable the EAP. The PCM
signals the solid state relay and the AIR bypass
solenoid, after a (5 to 10) second delay, to begin system operation. Once the catalyst is lit-off, the
PCM then signals the solid state relay to stop AIR pump operation and to close the AIR bypass
solenoid from supplying vacuum to the AIR diverter valve(s).
3. The solid state relay provides the start-up signal and will switch the high current required to
operate the AIR pump. 4. The AIR bypass solenoid applies a vacuum to the AIR diverter valve(s)
causing it to open and to allow air to flow into the exhaust manifolds. 5. The vacuum check valve
controls vacuum bleed-off to solenoid. 6. The function of the splash cap if equipped is to provide
the AIR pump with a source of dry air. 7. The electric AIR pump delivers the required amount of air
to control emissions during engine operation. Air is forced into the exhaust
manifolds to oxidize the hydrocarbons and carbon monoxide created by running rich at start up.
Hardware
Electric AIR Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > System Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3726
Electric Air Pump
The electric AIR pump provides pressurized air to the Secondary Air Injection system. The electric
AIR pump functions independently of rpm and is controlled by the PCM. The electric AIR pump is
only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system
backpressure and system voltage. The inlet system of the AIR pump incorporates a
non-serviceable filter and splash cap which helps to guard against dirt and water.
AIR Bypass Solenoid
Secondary Air Injection Bypass Solenoid
The secondary air injection bypass (AIR bypass) solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to
the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The AIR bypass solenoid is a normally
closed solenoid. The AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum
release.
AIR Diverter Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > System Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3727
Air Injection Diverter (AIR Diverter) Valve
The secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve is used with the electric AIR pump to
provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the electric AIR
pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve
disk. When the electric AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the
integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust
system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the Secondary Air Injection System.
Solid State Relay
Solid State Relay
The solid state relay switches the high current required for operation of the electric AIR pump. Input
control to the solid state relay comes from the powertrain control module (PCM).
Vacuum Check Valves
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > System Information >
Description and Operation > Page 3728
Vacuum Check Valve
A vacuum check valve blocks air flow in one direction. It allows free air flow in the other direction.
The check side of this valve will hold the highest vacuum registered on the vacuum side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
Catalyst and Exhaust Systems
The Catalytic Converter and Exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful
engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen
(N), carbon dioxide (CO 2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). CO,
NOx, and HCs are major air pollutants, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst will be used between the front and rear exhaust pipes.
Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the On Board Diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in
the PCM. Refer to the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor-Federal Test Procedure at the beginning of
Section 1 for specific OBD catalyst monitor information.
The number of HO2S(s) used in the exhaust stream and the location of these sensors depend on
the vehicle emission certification level (i.e. LEV, ULEV, PZEV). Refer to (Figure 136) and (Figure
137) for typical HO2S stream locations and naming convention. On most vehicles only two HO2S
are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst will be
used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) will be utilized to
monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV) will utilize three
HO2S sensors for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst
will be used for primary fuel control, the next group of sensors or stream 2 (HO2S12/HO2S22) is
utilized to monitor the light-off catalyst and the last group of sensors or stream 3
(HO2S13/HO2S23) is utilized for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (Fore Aft
Oxygen Sensor Control). Currently Ford's PZEV vehicles use only a 4-cylinder engine, so only the
Bank 1 HO2S(s) will be utilized.
V-Engines
In-Line Engines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3732
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst will also enable a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature.
The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 475 to 575°F (246 to
301°C). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust
manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close too the exhaust manifold it will
light off faster and reduce emissions quicker than the catalyst located under the body. Once the
catalyst lights off, the catalyst will quickly reach the maximum conversion efficiency for that
catalyst.
Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high
conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly
controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window will greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency (Figure 138). For example a rich mixture will decrease the HC
and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture will decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the
atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the
catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. An HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe
before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of carbon monoxide (CO),
unburned hydrocarbons (HCs) and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the exhaust emissions to an
acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter through
another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe (Figure 139) and then on into the muffler. Lastly,
the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Note on some Partial Zero Emission Vehicles (PZEV), there will be a total of 3 HO2S in the
exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off
catalyst (stream 2) and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst (Figure 140).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3733
Bank 1 Catalyst Two HO2S Configuration
Bank 1 Catalyst Three HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in-line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to two light off catalysts,
forming a "Y" pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for
a specific vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System.
Three-Way Catalytic Converter
The three-way catalytic (TWC) converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or
palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of
unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The three-way conversion can be best
accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold/Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3734
the engine configuration and number of cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S)
The HO2S provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with voltage and frequency information
related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. (Refer to the PCM Inputs for a description of how
the HO2S operates.)
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and it also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3735
Catalytic Converter: Testing and Inspection
For information regarding diagnosis of this system refer to Computers and Control Systems
Diagnosis.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3736
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter-3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove and discard the nuts.
^ Discard the gasket.
3. Remove the U-bolt, disconnect the catalytic converter from the hanger.
4. Remove and discard the nuts between main silencer and after silencer pipe. 5. Remove
converter and main silencer together. 6. Remove converter from main silencer on the floor. 7. To
install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
^ Install new nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3741
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3742
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3743
Electronic EVAP Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 100) and (Figure 101) is part of the Enhanced EVAP
system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the
EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister
purge valve is normally closed valve. The electronic EVAP canister purge valve (Figure 102)
controls the flow of vapors electronically by way of a solenoid thereby, eliminating the need for an
electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3744
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
^ Disconnect the vacuum tube.
^ Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
^ Disconnect the EVAP return tube.
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve.
^ Remove the two nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3748
Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3749
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose.
7. Remove the dust separator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3753
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3754
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose, dust separator and canister vent solenoid.
7. Remove the EVAP canister outlet tube.
8. Remove the EVAP canister.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL (R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3758
Leak Detection Valve: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3759
Leak Detection Valve: Description and Operation
CANISTER VENT SOLENOID
Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the Enhanced EVAP System test monitor, the canister vent (CV) solenoid (Figure 105)
seals the EVAP canister from atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to
obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the monitor run.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3760
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Disconnect the battery.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR FUEL LIQUID
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Disconnect the EVAP canister outlet tube.
4. Disconnect the canister vent solenoid electrical connector and the remote canister vent hose.
5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3761
6. Remove the remote canister vent hose and the dust separator.
7. Remove the canister vent solenoid.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carry out a leak test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission System Leak Test
^ Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Component Tests/Evaporative Emission
Repair Verification Drive Cycle
NOTE: Lubricate all O-ring seals with MERPOL(R) O-Ring Seal Lubricant meeting Ford
specification ESE-M99B144-B or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation
Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation
ON-BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
SYSTEM
On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery Evaporative Emission System
On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery Evaporative Emission System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 3765
On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery Evaporative Emission System
The basic elements forming the ORVR system (Figure 107), (Figure 108) and (Figure 109)
operation are as follows when fuel is dispensed:
1. The fuel filler pipe forms a seal to prevent vapors from escaping the fuel tank, while liquid is
entering the fuel tank (liquid in the one inch
diameter tube blocks vapors from rushing back up the fuel filler pipe).
2. A fuel vapor control valve controls the flow of vapors out of the fuel tank (valve closes when
liquid level reaches a height associated with
the fuel tank usable capacity). This valve accomplishes the following: a. Limits the total amount of
fuel that can be dispensed into the fuel tank. b. Prevents liquid gasoline from exiting the fuel tank
when submerged (and also when tipped well beyond a horizontal plane as part of the
vehicle roll-over protection in road accidents).
c. Minimizes vapor flow resistance during anticipated refueling conditions.
3. Fuel vapor tubing connects the fuel vapor control valve to the EVAP canister. This routes the fuel
tank vapors (displaced by the incoming
liquid) to the EVAP canister.
4. A check valve in the bottom of the fuel filler pipe prevents liquid from rushing back up the fuel
filler pipe during the liquid flow variations
associated with the filler nozzle shut-off.
Between refueling events, the EVAP canister is purged with fresh air so that it may be used again
to store vapors accumulated during engine soaks or subsequent refueling events. The vapors
drawn off of the carbon in the EVAP canister are consumed in the engine.
Refer to Evaporative Emissions System for information on the following Evaporative Emission
System components: liquid/vapor fuel discriminator, fuel filler pipe check valve, fill limit valve
assembly, fill limit vent valve assembly, fuel filler pipe flapper valve, fuel vapor control valve (fuel
tank mounted), ORVR T-connector assembly and EVAP canister.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3770
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
EGR VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID
EVR Solenoid
Test Graph
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data Chart
The EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid (EVR), (Figure 90) is an electromagnetic device which is
used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which
magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil
increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases.
Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note
that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows
some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3771
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
^ Disconnect the vacuum hoses.
3. Remove the PCM wiring harness bracket.
^ Remove the nut.
^ Position the bracket aside.
4. Remove the bolts and remove the EGR vacuum regulator valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY
Orifice Tube Assembly
The orifice tube assembly (Figure 92) is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the
intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and two pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates
a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure
differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which
provides feedback to the PCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3775
EGR Tube: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the EGR tube nut at the manifold connector.
2. Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR tube.
3. Disconnect the EGR tube fitting and remove the EGR tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Valve: Description and Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION VALVE
EGR Valve
The EGR valve (Figure 91) in the Differential Pressure Feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated EGR valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of exhaust gas
recirculation. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the
valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring
force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing service specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on-board diagnostic system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
Diagnostic Trouble Code if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured
directly as part of the field diagnostic procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3779
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the EGR valve.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Disconnect the EGR tube.
3 Remove the EGR valve and discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carefully clean all sealing surfaces and install a new EGR valve gasket.
NOTE: The EGR valve sealing surfaces are soft metals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3783
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3784
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3785
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3786
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left cylinder head.
2. Remove the two bolts.
3. Remove the crankcase vent oil separator and discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Carefully clean both sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new crankcase vent
oil separator gasket.
NOTE: The sealing surfaces are soft metal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3795
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3796
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 88) is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure
transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice
tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback sensor receives this signal through two hoses
referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI
SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback
EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The
differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop
across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
TUBE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EGR SENSOR
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3797
Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor (Figure 89) is identical in operation
as the larger metal or plastic DPFE sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose
connections are marked on the underside of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations > Page 3798
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Carefully remove the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor by sliding up and off the EGR
tube.
NOTE: The 3.0L (4V) engine is shown, the 2.0L Zetec engine is similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3804
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > Fuel Pressure Test
Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3805
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service Precautions > Page 3809
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service Precautions > Page 3810
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Accelerator Pedal: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 3816
Accelerator Pedal: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 3817
Accelerator Pedal: Description and Operation
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and
back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or
hesitation on return.
If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for
damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and
accelerator pedal and shaft.
For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3820
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal and Shaft
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
4. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft > Page 3823
2 Remove the bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the
accelerator cable end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft > Page 3824
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Cable
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
3 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
4. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft > Page 3825
5. Remove the accelerator cable.
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft > Page 3826
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Cable Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever.
1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever.
2 Rotate the throttle lever.
3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
4. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal and Shaft > Page 3827
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable
bracket.
5. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner
Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner. 2. Remove the battery tray.
3. Remove the bolt and the intake pipe.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3835
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3836
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 >
Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 >
Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3845
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 >
Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3846
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): > 06-11-7 >
Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3847
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3853
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3854
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed) >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Auxiliary Air Valve (Idle Speed): >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 3855
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fuel: Capacity Specifications Fuel Tank Capacity
Fuel Tank Capacity
16 Gallons (61 L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3860
Fuel: Fluid Type Specifications Fuel Type
Fuel Type
87 Octane
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Cut Valve Solenoid (CNG) >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Cut Valve Solenoid (CNG): Description and Operation
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Tank Shutoff Valve
Fuel Tank Shutoff Valve
The fuel tank shutoff solenoid valve (Figure 84) is located in the fuel tank. The solenoid valves are
on the same circuit as the gasoline fuel pump and utilize the same Inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch
as gasoline. When the key is in the off position, the shutoff valves are closed and fuel in the tanks
is isolated. During refueling, the shutoff valve acts as a check valve and allows flow due to
pressure differential between the fuel being added from the fill station and the fuel in the tank.
The internal solenoid valves also have the capability of being "manually locked down." If, while
servicing the vehicle, it becomes necessary to remove the fuel tank, the lock down feature provides
an added measure of safety. In addition, the valve has an internal Canadian Gas Association
(CGA) type 9 fusible link Pressure Relief Device (PRD) that senses the internal fuel tank gas
temperature. The contents in the tank are vented when the internal fuel tank gas temperature
reaches 199°C (217°F) and melts the fusible link. The escaping gas is vented through a vent line to
the atmosphere.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Cap: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3872
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3873
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3874
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3875
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's
Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3876
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Cap: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3882
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3883
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3884
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3885
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 > Emissions - MIL
ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3886
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3892
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3893
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3894
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3895
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3901
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3902
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3903
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Cap: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments
- False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 3904
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL FILLER CAP
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap (Figure 106) is used to prevent fuel spill and close the evaporative emission/fuel
system to atmosphere. Some vehicles may have a Fuel Cap On Indicator Lamp (FCIL) in the
instrument cluster which will illuminate when there is a failure in the vapor management system
that may be due to the fuel filler cap not being sealed.
Refer to the individual component for information on the following Evaporative Emission System
components: fuel vapor control valve, fuel vapor vent valve assembly and fuel vapor separator
assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3907
Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Fueling Connector
Flange Assembly-Fuel Tank Fill
Flange Assembly
The flange assembly (Figure 83) is designed for 20,685 kPa (3,000 psi) service pressure and is the
refueling connection to fill the vehicle. The assembly is mounted behind the fuel filler door and
attached to the fuel filler housing, similar to a gasoline vehicle. This assembly consists of an
NGVP1 type receptacle with a 150 micron filter (which can be serviced), a spring loaded check
valve to allow filling of the vehicle and a manually opened bypass to provide safe venting of the fuel
system. The vehicle is refueled by attaching the fuel station fill nozzle to the receptacle and locking
into place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Release: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3912
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Gauge
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the Schrader valve cap at the end of the fuel injection supply manifold and attach the
Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL SUPPLY TUBES WILL REMAIN PRESSURIZED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME AFTER
ENGINE SHUTDOWN. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED BEFORE REPAIRING OF THE
FUEL SYSTEM HAS BEGUN. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel tube, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system.
2. Open the manual valve slowly to relieve the system pressure. This may drain fuel from the
system.
NOTE: Position a suitable container for the fuel to drain into.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service Precautions > Page 3913
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service Precautions
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3918
Fuel Injector Wiring Harness: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. Disconnect the coil-on-plug electrical connectors.
3. Disconnect the radio ignition noise suppressor electrical connector.
4. Remove the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3919
5. Disconnect the 16-pin electrical connectors.
6. Disconnect Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators
from the fuel injection supply manifold.
NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar.
8. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 9. Remove the RH wheel
and tire assembly.
10. Remove the RH lower splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Wiring
Harness > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3920
11. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
12. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The oil pressure sensor is located behind the rear of the A/C compressor. The A/C
compressor has been removed for clarity.
13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Remove the fuel charging wiring harness from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fuel Line Coupler: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
^ THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND CONDENSED FUEL
VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL PRESENTS THE
DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE FROM
THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK OCCURRING,
POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL IS PRESENT
IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 3925
Fuel Line Coupler: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Push Connect Fittings
Disconnect
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
WARNING: ^
DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL- RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Separate the coupling.
1 Depress the tabs
2 Separate the coupling.
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the coupling and the tube for damage.
2. Align the tube to the coupling and push until you hear a click.
3. Pull on the coupling to make sure it is fully engaged. 4. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3928
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair R-Clip Fittings
Disconnect
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL PRESSURE MUST BE RELIEVED TO
PREVENT ACCIDENTAL SPRAYING OF FUEL, CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY OR A FIRE
HAZARD. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
CAUTION: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the shipping tab by bending downward.
4. Spread the R-clip legs and push the clip into the fitting.
5. Separate the fitting from the tube.
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. Remove any foreign material or
obstructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3929
2. Insert the R-clip into the fitting.
3. Align the tube and the fitting.
4. Insert the tube in the fitting and push together until a click is heard.
5. Pull on the connection to make sure it is fully engaged. 6. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3930
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover (Green)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR AN OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE
WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE REPAIRING OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
3. Remove the fuel line clip.
4. Install the special tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3931
5. Close and push the special tool into the open side of the cage.
6. Separate the coupling.
7. Remove the special tool.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect both coupling ends. Install new O-ring seals and garter springs if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3932
2. Fit the male coupling into the female end and push until the garter spring snaps over the flared
end of the female coupling.
3. Verify coupling engagement by pulling on the lines.
4. Install the fuel line clip. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Push Connect Fittings > Page 3933
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Vapor Tube Fittings
DISCONNECT
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM CONTAINS FUEL VAPOR AND
CONDENSED FUEL VAPOR. ALTHOUGH NOT PRESENT IN LARGE QUANTITIES, IT STILL
PRESENTS THE DANGER OF EXPLOSION OR FIRE. DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND
CABLE FROM THE BATTERY TO MINIMIZE THE POSSIBILITY OF AN ELECTRICAL SPARK
OCCURRING, POSSIBLY CAUSING A FIRE OR EXPLOSION IF FUEL VAPOR OR LIQUID FUEL
IS PRESENT IN THE AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
1 Squeeze the fitting.
2 Disconnect the vapor tube from the fitting.
CONNECT
1. Clean and inspect the fitting and the tube for damage. 2. Remove any dirt or obstructions.
3. Push the tube into the fitting until it snaps in place.
4. Pull on the connection to make sure the fitting is secure. 5. Connect the battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3934
Fuel Pipe 1/2 Inch Remover (Green)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 72) is attached to the fuel rail downstream of the fuel injectors.
It regulates fuel pressure supplied to the fuel injectors. The regulator is a diaphragm-operated relief
valve. One side of the diaphragm senses fuel pressure and the other side is connected to the
intake manifold vacuum. Fuel pressure is established by a spring preload applied to the diaphragm.
Balancing one side of the diaphragm with manifold vacuum maintains a constant fuel pressure drop
across the fuel injectors. Fuel pressure is high when engine vacuum is low. Excess fuel is
bypassed through the fuel pressure regulator and returned through the fuel return line to the fuel
tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 3939
Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel Pressure Regulator
The fuel pressure regulator (Figure 80) used in the Natural Gas fuel system is a single-stage
pressure reducing regulator which expands natural gas from storage pressures of 1,379 to 20,685
kPa (200 to 3,000 psig) to engine fuel injector pressures of 724 to 862 kPa (105 to 125 psig)
The regulator contains a pressure relief device, a 1,896 kPa (275 psig) check valve, which protects
the low pressure fuel system. The low pressure fuel system no longer must fulfill the design
requirements of the high pressure fuel system, therefore reducing cost, weight and complexity.
When gas expands, the fuel temperature drops significantly causing extreme cold temperatures
(-177°C or -160°F) that may damage synthetic fuel system components as well as cause water
vapor within the fuel to condense, freeze and plug the lines, valve and injectors. To prevent this,
engine coolant is routed through the fuel pressure regulator to warm the fuel before it expands.
The regulator has an internal thermostat to control the flow of engine coolant. This prevents
overheating and subsequent thinning of the fuel which may cause lean combustion. Outlet coolant
flow is restricted by the thermostat when it rises above approximately 82°C (100°F).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3943
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3947
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Test Port >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3948
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Use an O-ring seal that is made of special fuel resistant material. Use of an ordinary
O-ring seal can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3952
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation
FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER
Pulse Damper
The fuel rail pulse damper (Figure 73) located on the fuel rail reduces fuel system noise caused by
the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold
vacuum to avoid fuel spillage in the event the pulse damper diaphragm were to rupture. (The pulse
damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator, it does not regulate fuel rail
pressure.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3953
Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the throttle body.
2. Remove the fuel pulse damper.
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose.
2 Remove the snap ring.
3 Remove the damper.
3. Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION: Use an O-ring seal that is made of special fuel resistant material. Use of an ordinary
O-ring seal can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seal.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3959
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Description and Operation
PRESSURE TEST POINT
There is a pressure test point with a schrader fitting in the fuel rail that relieves fuel pressure and
measures the fuel injector supply pressure for service and diagnostic procedures. Before servicing
or testing the fuel system, read any CAUTION, WARNING, and HANDLING information. ON
VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH A SCHRADER VALVE, USE ROTUNDA FUEL PRESSURE
TEST KIT #134-R0087 OR EQUIVALENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > Fuel
Pressure Test Port > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 3960
Fuel Pressure Test Port: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure.
2. Remove the pressure relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3964
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3965
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3966
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions
Fuel Rail: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 3970
Fuel Rail: Description and Operation
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail Components
The fuel rail (Figure 78) distributes low pressure fuel from the chassis supply line to each fuel
injector. Fuel pressure at the top of each fuel injector is maintained within 1% of the other fuel
injectors at all times; this is done with nearly symmetric flow paths. The fuel rail is also designed to
have minimal flow restriction by increasing the cross-sectional flow area and reducing the flow path
length. The fuel rail contains several other Parts In Assembly (PIA) components that perform
crucial functions. These include: Injection pressure sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors. This
signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
- Engine fuel temperature sensor which measures the pressure of the fuel near the fuel injectors.
This signal is used by the PCM to adjust the fuel injector pulse width and meter fuel to each engine
combustion cylinder.
- Low pressure solenoid shut-off valve which isolates the fuel rail from the upstream fuel system
when the engine is OFF. This minimizes the amount of fuel available to flow through the fuel
injectors when the engine is off or leak from a damaged fuel rail during and after a crash. The valve
is controlled by the PCM fuel shut-off valve circuit and contains an inertia switch. The valve is only
on for one second after a key-on or whenever CKP signals are being received by the PCM.
- schrader/service valve (if equipped) provides a service port to the low pressure fuel system. This
valve is needed to relieve the pressure in the system before and during service. This valve could
also be used to monitor the pressure near the injectors during diagnostic procedures.
Fuel Rail Shut-Off Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 3971
Fuel Rail Shut-Off Valve
The fuel rail shut-off valve (Figure 86) is a normally closed solenoid actuated valve that opens
when (along with all of the tank valves) Pin 80 is grounded by the PCM. The valve isolates the fuel
injectors from fuel line pressure when the engine is off. Nominal resistance of the coil is 11 ohms.
The fuel rail shut-off valve is wired in parallel with the four tank valves.
Fuel Rail Valve Circuit Operation
When the key is turned to the ON position, the power relay is turned on. The power relay provides
power to the PCM and the control side of the fuel shut off valve relay. The relay provides voltage to
the fuel rail valve. If the ignition switch is not turned to the START position, the PCM will shut off
the fuel rail valve after one second. The PCM will open the valve (along with the four tank valves)
to provide fuel while cranking. The valve will remain open when the engine is running unless the
inertia fuel shut-off switch is "tripped."
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service Precautions > Page 3972
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ FUEL IN THE FUEL SYSTEM REMAINS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE EVEN WHEN THE
ENGINE IS NOT RUNNING. BEFORE WORKING ON OR DISCONNECTING ANY OF THE FUEL
LINES OR FUEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
RELIEVED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
1. Remove the upper intake manifold. 2. Disconnect the fuel line.
3. Disconnect the six fuel injector electrical connectors and release the wiring harness locators
from the fuel injection supply manifold.
NOTE: One connector is shown, the other five connectors are similar.
4. Remove the fuel injection supply manifold.
^ Remove the vacuum hose.
^ Remove the bolts and the manifold.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Lubricate the fuel injector O-ring seals with clean engine oil to aid installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Shut-off Solenoid >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Shut-off Solenoid: Description and Operation
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Rail Shut-Off Valve
Fuel Rail Shut-Off Valve
The fuel rail shut-off valve (Figure 86) is a normally closed solenoid actuated valve that opens
when (along with all of the tank valves) Pin 80 is grounded by the PCM. The valve isolates the fuel
injectors from fuel line pressure when the engine is off. Nominal resistance of the coil is 11 ohms.
The fuel rail shut-off valve is wired in parallel with the four tank valves.
Fuel Rail Valve Circuit Operation
When the key is turned to the ON position, the power relay is turned on. The power relay provides
power to the PCM and the control side of the fuel shut off valve relay. The relay provides voltage to
the fuel rail valve. If the ignition switch is not turned to the START position, the PCM will shut off
the fuel rail valve after one second. The PCM will open the valve (along with the four tank valves)
to provide fuel while cranking. The valve will remain open when the engine is running unless the
inertia fuel shut-off switch is "tripped."
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Lines and Fittings
Fuel Line Assembly
A fuel line assembly (Figure 82) consists of flexible hose and/or stainless steel seamless tubing,
end fittings and tube nuts. The hose is a conductive polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) liner reinforced
with a stainless steel wire braided covering. The fittings are inserted into the hose ends and
crimped into place. The stainless steel tubing contains end fittings which are brazed to the tube.
There are high pressure fuel lines that are identified by either 1/4-inch or 3/8-inch outer diameter
and a low pressure fuel line identified by a 1/2-inch outer diameter. The low pressure fuel line has a
quick-connect at one end for connection to the fuel rail. The other fittings used on the natural gas
vehicle to connect fuel components are SAE O-ring face seal tube fittings. There are two end
types: an O-ring face seal end and a straight thread end. On tee and elbow fittings, a washer and a
positionable nut are provided to aid in orientation of the fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Hose: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3988
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3989
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3990
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3991
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3992
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3998
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 3999
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4000
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4001
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Hose: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4002
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4003
Fuel Filler Hose: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY TYPE WHEN
WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP SLOWLY.
IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE REMOVING
THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED, FUEL MAY
SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4004
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair
Heavy - Duty Riveter
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left rear wheel.
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENT. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED, RESULTING IN
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Remove the gas cap.
WARNING: THE FUEL TANK MAY BE PRESSURIZED. REMOVE THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP
SLOWLY. IF A HISSING SOUND IS HEARD, WAIT UNTIL THE CONDITION STOPS BEFORE
REMOVING THE FUEL TANK FILLER CAP. IF THESE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED,
FUEL MAY SPRAY AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the filler neck retaining screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4005
4. Remove the rivets and the fuel tank filler tube shield.
5. Remove the fuel filler tube.
1 Disconnect the hoses.
2 Remove the bolt and the fuel filler tube.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Use the Heavy-Duty Riveter to install the rivets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4006
Heavy - Duty Riveter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4015
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4016
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4017
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4018
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct > 03 >
Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4019
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON
Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap
Lamp ON
Article No. 03-20-3
10/13/03
DRIVEABILITY - MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(MIL) ILLUMINATED WITH DTC'S P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457, P1442 OR CHECK FUEL CAP
LAMP ILLUMINATED WITH DTC P0457
FORD: 1997-2000 CONTOUR 1997-2002 ESCORT 1997-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, MUSTANG,
TAURUS 1998-2003 ESCORT ZX2 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1997 F-250
HD 1997-1999 F-250 LD 1997-2003 E SERIES, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER,
WINDSTAR 1999-2003 F SUPER DUTY 2000-2003 EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 MARK VIII 1997-2002 CONTINENTAL 1997-2003 TOWN CAR 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
MERCURY: 1997-1999 TRACER 1997-2000 MYSTIQUE 1997-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
1999-2002 COUGAR 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 03-9-8 to update the vehicle lines and Service Procedures.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminated with Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) P0442, P0455, P0456, P0457 or P1442 or a "Check Fuel Cap" Lamp
illuminated with DTC P0457 for the Evaporative Emission System. This may be caused by loose or
leaking hoses, loose or broken fuel cap, a leak at the top of the fuel filler pipe neck, etc.
ACTION Use the Rotunda Leak Detector Smoke Machine (Part 218-00001) or equivalent, to locate
and repair leaks in the Evaporative Emission System. Refer to the following Service Procedure for
details.
Definitions of Acronyms
^ CVS Canister Vent Solenoid
^ DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code
^ EVAP Evaporative Emissions System
^ EVMV Electronic Vapor Management Valve
^ FTP Fuel Tank Pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4025
^ MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
^ NGS New Generation STAR Tester
^ PID Parameter Identifier WDS Worldwide Diagnostic System
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE SUPERSEDES ALL OTHER PROCEDURES PUBLISHED IN SERVICE
MANUALS AND TSB ARTICLES.
NOTE
MANY EVAP LEAKS ARE CAUSED BY A LOOSE OR FAULTY CAP. IF THE FUEL CAP IS
SUSPECT DURING VISUAL INSPECTION, DO NOT DISTURB THE FUEL CAP UNTIL THE
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE. IF THE LEAK VERIFICATION FAILS, THE CAP
CAN BE REPOSITIONED OR REPLACED AND THE TEST REPEATED. THIS ACTION WILL
ISOLATE THE CAP FROM THE REST OF THE EVAP SYSTEM AS A POTENTIAL CONCERN. IF
DEBRIS ON THE SEALING SURFACE OF THE CAP APPEARS TO BE THE SOURCE OF THE
LEAK, CLEAN THE CAP AND REINSTALL.
OVERVIEW OF TEST PROCEDURES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4026
NOTE
SEE (FIGURE 1) AT END OF ARTICLE FOR TEST PROCEDURE FLOWCHART.
This TSB provides the following procedures:
^ Check the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (9C915) for a no flow condition
^ Locate a leak so that a repair can be performed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4027
^ Verify repair by utilizing a metered air pressure test
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE NO FLOW TEST
1. Using WDS Datalogger select the following PID's: EVAPVM # (or EVMV#), EVAPCV # and FTP.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Close both the Canister Vent Solenoid (CVS) (EVAPCV # On or 100% duty cycle) and the EVAP
Canister Purge Valve (EVAPVM# Off or zero % duty cycle).
4. While monitoring the FTP PID, command open the EVAP Canister Purge Valve with the
EVAPVM# PID to 100% duty
5. If the FTP decreases and/or the RPM changes and/or the engine stalls, the test passed. Turn off
engine and proceed to test procedures below. Otherwise replace the EVAP Canister Purge Valve,
verify the repair by repeating the No Flow Test and return vehicle.
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
1. Disconnect the larger of two manifold vacuum lines at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve and cap it
at the EVAP Canister Purge Valve (see Figure 2).
2. Connect the Smoke Machine power cables to vehicle battery The "Power Indicator Lamp" should
be on indicating a good battery contact.
3. Position the selector valve on Rotunda's Smoke Machine Control Panel to "SMOKE".
4. Locate the vehicle's Evaporative Emission Service Test Port and remove the green cap. The
EVAP Service Test Port is located close to or on the EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4028
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE THE SCHRADER VALVE. REMOVING THE SCHRADER VALVE FROM THE
TEST PORT ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH THE ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT
VALVE (9G641) AND/OR ELECTRONIC VAPOR MANAGEMENT VALVE & BRACKET
ASSEMBLY (9G683) (SEE FIGURE 3), OR EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE (9C915) AND/OR
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE & BRACKET ASSEMBLY (9F933) (SEE FIGURE 2) WILL
PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE VALVE.
5. Install the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter that is provided with the Rotunda's Smoke Machine
to EVAP Canister Purge Valve test port.
NOTE
SPECIAL PROCEDURES HAVE BEEN DESIGNATED FOR WINDSTAR, LS, THUNDERBIRD &
PZEV FOCUS BECAUSE THEY HAVE A CHECK VALVE THAT WILL PREVENT SMOKE FROM
ENTERING THE FILLER NECK.
6. Connect black smoke hose nozzle tip to the EVAP Emission Test Port Adapter. For all except
Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus Use NGS or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN
AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS OPERATION).
7. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - Remove the fuel cap from the vehicle.
Depress remote starter button: Smoke will be introduced into the EVAP Emission System. Secure
the fuel cap once smoke is seen exiting from the fuel tank's neck area. For Windstar, LS,
Thunderbird & PZEV Focus, do not remove fuel cap. Depress starter button and introduce smoke to
system until it can be seen exiting the CVS (located by filler neck). Once smoke is seen, use NGS
or WDS to close CVS. (CVS WILL REOPEN AFTER NINE (9) MINUTES OF CONTINUOUS
OPERATION).
8. Press and release the remote starter button in intervals of approximately 15 seconds on and 15
seconds off. Use the halogen light provided with the Smoke Machine to look for smoke in the
engine compartment, EVAP hoses to EVAP Canister Purge Valve, CVS, carbon canister and area
around the fuel cap. Wiggle fuel vapor lines to check for leaks. Check for leaks in areas that are
difficult to access, such as connections on top of the tank where connections may be or inside
frame rails. Use the black light to ensure that there are no leaks. If a leak is detected, repair as
necessary. If the leak is not detected from the top, check under the bottom of vehicle. Inspect the
EVAP hoses running to the carbon canister, fuel filler neck, CVS, and EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Go to LEAK VERIFICATION to verify any repair or if no leak is found.
LEAK VERIFICATION (METERED AIR SYSTEM)
1. Position the selector valve located on the Smoke Machine control panel to "METER".
2. Verify calibration of the flow meter by using the .020" calibrated leak orifice. To do this, insert air
supply hose (transparent hose) nozzle tip into appropriate EVAP System calibrated leak orifice
located on the front of the Smoke Machine panel.
3. TURN ON: Depress the remote starter button. Observe the position of the flow meter indicator
ball. Position the flow meter red pointer flag so it aligns with the measurement of the indicator ball.
Release the button and remove the air supply hose nozzle tip from the EVAP System calibrated
leak orifice.
NOTE
THIS FLOW METER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT INDICATES THE VEHICLE PASS OR FAIL
CRITERIA BASED ON THE .020" EVAP SYSTEM LEAK STANDARD.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 03-20-3 > Oct
> 03 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC's Stored/Check Fuel Cap Lamp ON > Page 4029
4. Connect the transparent air supply hose nozzle tip into the EVAP Service Test Port adapter.
5. Use NGS or WDS Diagnostic tool to CLOSE the CVS.
6. Depress the remote starter button on the Rotunda's Smoke Leak Detector. The indicator ball in
the flowmeter will go all the way to the top indicating the system is being pressurized. Continue to
depress the remote starter button until the ball stops descending. Once the indicator ball has
stopped descending, observe if it is above or below the red indicator flag. If performing this
verification following a repair, go to Step 7. If performing this verification after performing the
SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE), go to Step 8.
7. Leak Verification After Repair
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed. The test procedure is
complete. Remove the Smoke Machine Test equipment from the vehicle and reconnect the large
EVAP Canister Purge Valve manifold vacuum hose and the test port's green cap.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
8. Leak Verification After Passing SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST PROCEDURE)
a. If the measurement is below the indicator flag the system has passed, go to Step 9.
b. If the measurement is above the indicator flag, repeat SYSTEM LEAK CHECK (SMOKE TEST
PROCEDURE).
9. Using WDS Datalogger or NGS select the FTPV PID.
10. Remove Fuel Cap and turn the vehicle's ignition switch to the run position and check the FTPV
PID.
11. The nominal value for the FTPV PID is 2.6V. If the value is greater than 2.8V or less than 2.4V,
the FTP sensor is out of range and should be replaced. Verify the repair by checking to see if the
new sensor is in range. For all except Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus - if the sensor is
within range, the concern is no longer present. (Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus go to
Step 12.)
12. For Windstar, LS, Thunderbird & PZEV Focus only verify that filler neck clamps are in good
working order and tightened. Repair as necessary. If no problem is found with clamps, replace the
fuel cap.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-8 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Mounting
Straps > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Tank Mounting Straps: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Use a suitable jack to support the fuel tank.
3. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the fuel tank strap and position the parking brake cable
aside.
4. Remove the bolts and the fuel tank straps.
NOTE: For 4WD vehicles, it will be necessary to disconnect a wiring harness clip from the fuel tank
strap.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Fuel Tank Unit: Service Precautions
WARNING: Adhere to the following procedures any time the fuel system is being worked on in
order to reduce the risk of fire and personal injury:
- Keep a dry chemical (Class B) fire extinguisher near the work area.
- Place a "CAUTION FLAMMABLE" sign in the work area.
- Work in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke, and keep sparks and open flames away.
- Wear eye protection.
- Use caution when working near the catalytic converter to prevent the possibility of burns or fire.
(The temperatures within the converter can exceed 537 °C (1000 °F).
- Relieve the fuel system pressure prior to disconnecting fuel system components.
- Disconnect the negative battery cable except for tests where battery voltage is required.
- Use a suitable container to store or catch fuel.
- Do not replace fuel pipe with fuel hose.
- Plug all disconnected fuel line fittings and hoses.
- After making any fuel system repairs ALWAYS inspect for fuel leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4039
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 122) and (Figure 123) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dash pot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4040
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 124) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^
No touch start
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dash pot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4041
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Idle Air Control (IAC) valve.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the valve. ^
Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4045
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 73) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline Fuel System > Page 4048
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 85) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Reset Instructions
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. If no natural gas leak
is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner
Guide).
NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. Again, check for leaking
natural gas.
WARNING: IF YOU SMELL NATURAL GAS AT ANY TIME OTHER THAN DURING FUELING, DO
NOT RESET THE IFS SWITCH.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4049
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe.
1 Disconnect the crankcase vent hose.
2 Loosen the screw clamps.
INSTALLATION
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from
entering the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4056
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 4059
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 4060
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 4061
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4066
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4067
Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4068
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4072
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO
Relay
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO
Relay > Page 4075
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO
Relay > Page 4076
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO
Relay > Page 4077
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the left front wheel.
2. Remove the seven pin-type retainers and four screws and position aside the left inner fender
splash shield.
3. Remove the bolt and remove the intake air resonator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4085
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4086
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the four nuts and the MAF sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4090
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4094
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Gasoline Fuel System
The Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 73) is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel
ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner Guide for the location of the IFS.
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Gasoline
Fuel System > Page 4097
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation Natural Gas Fuel System
NATURAL GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
The inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch (Figure 85) is used in conjunction with electric fuel close valves.
The purpose of the IFS switch is to close the fuel shut-off valves if a crash occurs. It consists of a
steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the
magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the
switch and closes the electric fuel shut-off valve. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset
before restarting the vehicle. On some vehicles a fuel reset light illuminates. Refer to the Owner
Guide for the location of the IFS.
Reset Instructions
1. Turn key off. 2. Check for natural gas leaks in the engine compartment. 3. If no natural gas leak
is apparent, reset the IFS by pushing the reset button on the top of the switch (refer to Owner
Guide).
NOTE: In the closed position, the button can be depressed an additional 1.57 cm (1/16 inch)
against a spring.
4. Turn key to on or start position for a few seconds, then off again. 5. Again, check for leaking
natural gas.
WARNING: IF YOU SMELL NATURAL GAS AT ANY TIME OTHER THAN DURING FUELING, DO
NOT RESET THE IFS SWITCH.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4098
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl side trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the cowl side trim panel.
2. Remove the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch.
1 Disconnect the connector.
2 Remove the screws and the IFS switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4102
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4103
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4104
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Throttle Body: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4109
Throttle Body: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 4110
Throttle Body: Description and Operation
THROTTLE BODY SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The throttle body system meters air to the engine during idle, part throttle, and Wide Open Throttle
(WOT) conditions. The throttle body system consists of an Idle air control (IAC) valve assembly,
idle air orifice, single or dual bores with butterfly valve throttle plates and a Throttle Position (TP)
sensor. One other source of idle air flow is the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) system. The
combined idle air flow (from idle air orifice IAC flow and PCV flow) is measured by the MAF sensor
on all applications.
During idle, the throttle body assembly provides a set amount of air flow to the engine through the
idle air passage and PCV valve. The IAC valve assembly provides additional air when commanded
by the powertrain control module (PCM) to maintain the proper engine idle speed under varying
conditions. The IAC valve assembly mounts directly to the throttle body assembly in most
applications, but is remote-mounted to the intake manifold in some applications. Idle speed is
controlled by the PCM and cannot be adjusted.
NOTE: The traditional idle air adjust procedure as well as throttle return screw are no longer used
on OBD II applications.
Throttle rotation is controlled by a cam/cable linkage to slow the initial opening rate of the throttle
plate. The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. Some
throttle body applications provide an air supply channel upstream of the throttle plate to provide
fresh air to the Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) or IAC systems. Other throttle body
applications provide individual vacuum taps downstream of the throttle plate for PCV return,
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Evaporative Emission (EVAP), and miscellaneous control
signals.
Throttle Body System Hardware
The major components of the throttle body assembly include the TP sensor, IAC valve assembly,
and throttle body housing assembly.
Throttle Position Sensor
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Idle Air Control Valve
Nippondenso Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 4111
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Vent/Filter
The idle air control (IAC) valve assembly (Figure 122) and (Figure 123) controls engine idle speed
and provides a dash pot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle
plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the
desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle.
The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The
PCM monitors engine rpm and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the
desired rpm.
Hitachi Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Assembly With Air-Assist Injectors
On applications with air-assisted injectors, the IAC valve (Figure 124) also supplies a small amount
of air into the path of the fuel injectors. The jet of air causes an increase in fuel atomization at low
speed and light load conditions.
NOTE: The IAC Valve Assembly is NOT ADJUSTABLE and CANNOT BE CLEANED.
The IAC valve (part of throttle body assembly) has an internal diode on some applications. If the
internal diode is measured in crossed terminal position with a digital multimeter, there will be an
incorrect or negative reading. It is important that the mating component and harness connectors
are correctly oriented. Diagnostic procedures emphasize this importance.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: ^
No touch start
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 4112
^ Cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
^ Idle (corrects for engine load)
^ Stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dash pot function)
^ Over-temperature idle boost.
^ Air Assist to Injectors.
Throttle Body Housing
The throttle body housing assembly is a single piece of aluminum casting with an air passage and
a butterfly throttle plate with linkage mechanisms. When the throttle plate is in the idle (or closed)
position, the throttle lever arm should be in contact with the Throttle Return Stop. The throttle return
stop prevents the throttle plate from contacting the bore and sticking closed. The setting also
establishes the amount of air flow between the throttle plate and bore. To minimize the closed plate
air flow, a special coating is applied to the throttle plate and bore to help seal this area. This
sealant/coating also makes the throttle body resistant to engine intake sludge accumulation.
Features of the Throttle Body Assembly include:
1. Idle air control (IAC) valve assembly mounted directly to the throttle body assembly (some
vehicles). 2. A pre-set stop to locate the WOT position. 3. An air supply channel upstream of the
throttle plate to provide fresh air to the PCV system (some vehicles only). 4. Individual vacuum taps
for PCV, EGR, EVAP and miscellaneous control signals (some vehicles only). 5. PCV air return (if
applicable). 6. A throttle body-mounted throttle position (TP) sensor.
Attention Decal Locations
7. A sealant/coating on the throttle bore and throttle plate makes the throttle body air flow tolerant
to engine intake sludge accumulation. These
throttle body assemblies MUST NOT BE CLEANED and have a white/black attention decal (Figure
121) advising not to clean.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 4113
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT SMOKE OR CARRY LIGHTED TOBACCO OR OPEN FLAME OF ANY
TYPE WHEN WORKING ON OR NEAR ANY FUEL-RELATED COMPONENTS. HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE MIXTURES ARE ALWAYS PRESENT AND MAY BE IGNITED. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and should not be cleaned.
1. Remove the air cleaner outlet tube.
2. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable and the speed control cable (if equipped) from the throttle body
lever.
4. Disconnect the Throttle Position (TP) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 4114
5. Remove the bolt, the stud bolt and the throttle body.
^ Discard the gasket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Install a new gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4123
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available
on January 17, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
[New!] RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4124
Note:
Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review
the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4125
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES
Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a
PCS claim as described below:
^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted.
^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses.
PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS
When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER
NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields:
^ REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31,
2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL
1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4126
[NEW] CAUTION:
Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the
speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator
cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See
Figure 1.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4127
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2.
A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the
cam.
B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either
way and pulling it from the bracket.
C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See
Figure 3.
D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle.
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet.
2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows:
A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the
cam.
B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45
degrees to lock it in place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4128
D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to
retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4.
3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal.
4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped.
5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4129
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U > Oct > 05 > Recall (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4130
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04
> Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Recalls Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004
COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may
prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position.
CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance
and may result in a vehicle crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January
17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S25U Date: 051006
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4140
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes OASIS was activated on December 07, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes
Available through the website on December 09, 2004. Owner names and addresses were available
on January 17, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
[New!] RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4141
Note:
Related damage claims will not be accepted for speed control cable replacement. Please review
the revised technical instructions/illustrations found in Attachment III.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S25 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program. Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR for this program is 50336. This number identifies parts ordered for this recall
through the Special Service Support Center.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4142
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures."
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL ACCELERATOR CABLES
Immediate Purge Required ------YL8Z-9A758-AD Accelerator Cable - 3.0L Prepare and submit a
PCS claim as described below:
^ DO NOT ship the parts until Return Authorization is granted.
^ The return authorizations will include shipping addresses.
PCS CLAIM INSTRUCTIONS
When you create your PCS claim, use the following information for the REASON CODE, SHIPPER
NBR, and LINE EXPLANATION fields:
^ REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04S25
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by January 31,
2005. Claims filed after this date will be denied.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
ACCELERATOR CABLE REMOVAL
1. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
2. Remove the engine appearance cover, if equipped.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4143
[NEW] CAUTION:
Damage to the speed control cable may result if the throttle body cam is rotated by lifting upon the
speed control cable or the speed control cable connector end. When disconnecting the accelerator
cable from the throttle body, rotate the throttle body cam only by lifting upon the cam itself. See
Figure 1.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4144
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable as follows: See Figure 2.
A) Disconnect the cable by rotating the throttle body cam and sliding the cable barrel out of the
cam.
B) Remove the accelerator cable from bracket # 1 by turning the cable housing 45 degrees either
way and pulling it from the bracket.
C) Open bracket # 2 with a screwdriver and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. See
Figure 3.
D) Detach the accelerator cable from the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
E) Disengage the grommet at the dash panel and remove the accelerator cable from the vehicle.
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Feed the new cable through the dash panel and fully seat the grommet.
2. Install and connect the accelerator cable as follows:
A) Connect the cable to the throttle body by rotating the cam and sliding the cable barrel into the
cam.
B) Attach the accelerator cable to the clip located on the brake booster vacuum hose.
C) Secure the accelerator cable to bracket # 1 by inserting it and rotating the cable housing 45
degrees to lock it in place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4145
D) Position the accelerator cable in bracket # 2 and, using a suitable tool, bend down the tab to
retain the cable while ensuring the cable moves freely in the bracket. See Figure 4.
3. Connect the accelerator cable to the pedal.
4. Install the appearance cover, if equipped.
5. Check for free movement of the accelerator pedal and that there is no binding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: > 04S25U
> Oct > 05 > Recall - (LHD Vehicles) Throttle Cable Replacement > Page 4147
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Throttle Cable/Linkage: >
NHTSA04V574000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable Replacement
Throttle Cable/Linkage: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V574000: Throttle Cable
Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2002-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V574000 Recall Date: Dec 06, 2004
COMPONENT: Vehicle Speed Control: Cables
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 470245
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles built with 3.0L V6 engines, the accelerator cable may
prevent the throttle from returning to the idle position.
CONSEQUENCE: An unexpected increase in engine idle speed may increase stopping distance
and may result in a vehicle crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the accelerator cable. The recall is expected to begin on January
17, 2005. Owners should contact Ford at 1-866-436-7332.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04S25. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4152
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 4155
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4156
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Description and Operation
The acceleration control consists of the pedal and shaft assembly, accelerator cable and
accelerator cable bracket.
WARNING: MAKE SURE SURROUNDING COMPONENTS SUCH AS WIRING, HOSES, SOUND
INSULATION AND FLOOR CARPETING ARE NOT CONTACTING THE SLIDING INNER CABLE
OF THE ACCELERATOR CABLE OR THE ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
The throttle is controlled by an accelerator cable attached to the accelerator pedal and shaft. The
accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from the idle to the wide-open throttle positions.
Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 4157
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this system, please refer to Accelerator Pedal;
Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
3 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
4. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4160
5. Remove the accelerator cable.
CAUTION: Do not pull the accelerator cable out by the cable housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4161
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Cable Bracket
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the throttle lever.
1 If equipped, disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever.
2 Rotate the throttle lever.
3 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
4. Disconnect the throttle control linkage from the accelerator cable bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4162
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable from the bracket.
2 If equipped, squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the accelerator cable
bracket.
5. Remove the bolts and the accelerator cable bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4163
Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair Pedal and Shaft
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation hose.
2. Remove the bolt, the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
3. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle lever.
1 Rotate the throttle lever.
2 Slide the accelerator cable end out of the throttle lever.
4. Remove the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly.
1 Disconnect the accelerator cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cable > Page 4164
2 Remove the bolts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: To ease installation, remove the grommet from the throttle lever and install it onto the
accelerator cable end.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4168
Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4169
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
The TP sensor monitors throttle position and provides an electrical signal to the PCM. It is
monitored by the OBD II system for component integrity, system functionality, and faults that can
cause emissions levels to exceed standards set in government regulations. For additional
information on the TP sensor, refer to Electronic EC System Hardware-PCM Inputs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4170
Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the Throttle Position (TP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the sensor
NOTE: Air cleaner outlet tube is removed for clarity.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
V6 Firing Order: 1 4 2 5 3 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4175
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > Number One Cylinder >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4183
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4184
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4185
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4189
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4190
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4191
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
Ignition Coil: Technical Service Bulletins Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips
TSB 05-22-8
11/14/05
WDS COP KIT DIAGNOSTIC TIPS - COIL ON PLUG (COP) IGNITION SYSTEMS - ENGINE
MISFIRE OR ROUGH RUNNING
FORD: 1996-1999 Taurus SHO 1998-2006 Crown Victoria, Mustang 2000 Taurus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2003-2006 Focus 2004-2006 Taurus 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1997-2006
E-Series, Expedition, F-150 1999-2006 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion, F-53 2001-2006
Escape 2002-2005 Explorer 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1998-2002 Continental 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 LS
1998-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1998-2006 Grand Marquis 2000 Sable 2004-2005 Sable 2005-2006 Montego
2002-2005 Mountaineer 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-16-01 to update the vehicle applications and model years.
NOTE
FOLLOW THIS TSB PROCEDURE ONLY IF THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC MISFIRE TSBs/SSMs
RELEASED FOR THE VEHICLE SYMPTOM BEING EXPERIENCED.
ISSUE Approximately 50% of coil on plug (COP) coils returned for warranty do not have a problem.
ACTION The misfiring cylinder must be identified through Self-Test misfire codes or through WDS
Power Balance. Rule out base engine problems, rule out fuel problems, and then look at ignition
problems (be sure to rule out coil primary circuit issues). Once the above steps have been
completed, and the issue is in the secondary part of the ignition system, the oscilloscope procedure
outlined in this TSB can isolate the difference between a coil or spark plug problem.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
The optional WDS COP Kit available through Rotunda will provide more accurate diagnosis and
help reduce replacement of non-defective parts. The Kit (418-F5528) can be purchased through
1-800-ROTUNDA.
The following material will detail the diagnostic steps on WDS to take the guesswork out of misfire
diagnosis using the COP Kit. The following procedure is for cylinder specific misfires and not
random misfires. Random misfires have a different root cause and are not covered by this TSB.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4196
Misfire Definition: A misfiring cylinder is lacking power relative to the other cylinders. The causes
for a cylinder specific misfire could be fuel, spark, or mechanical problems.
Perform a thorough visual inspection. If no visible concerns are found use the following WDS tools
for misfire diagnosis:
^ Self-test (Check for codes first)
Power Balance (Identify the cylinder of concern)
^ Relative Compression (Rule out a possible mechanical issue)
^ Fuel (Make sure fuel injectors are not restricted)
^ Ignition (Make sure spark plugs and coils are working properly)
^ Oscilloscope (Detailed signal analysis)
NOTE
USE THE ENCYCLOPEDIA BUTTON IN THE LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE SCREEN FOR
DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE WDS TOOL BEING DISPLAYED.
If there is a self-test code identifying a particular cylinder then you just need to determine if it is a
fuel, ignition, or possibly a mechanical problem. Proceed to Step 2 after running Relative
Compression to rule out any mechanical issues. If there is no self-test code and the customer
concern is a miss, proceed to Step 1.
Step 1: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Power Balance)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4197
The cylinder specific miss has to be identified as shown in the example in Figure 2 in order to
proceed with the remaining steps. If the miss does not occur at idle (in the bay), try to brake torque
the engine. This extra loading should reproduce the miss in the bay. If the miss cannot be
reproduced during brake torque, select Relative Compression under Powertrain on WDS before
going on a road test to rule out mechanical problems. If Relative Compression shows a problem
then the base engine issue must be serviced. If Relative Compression results are good (Figure 3),
road test under as many different driving conditions as possible until the miss occurs on Power
Balance. Some misses may be very intermiffent so be patient and concentrate on steady load
conditions. Once a cylinder dropout is identified proceed to Step 2.
Step 2: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Fuel System Test)
Run Fuel System Test on WDS to determine if there may be a fuel problem. After completing fuel
Pressure/Leakdown test, select Injector flow to isolate
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4198
a restricted injector as shown in Figure 4. If all the injectors are within specification, proceed to
Step 3.
Step 3: (Select Toolbox Icon, then Powertrain, then Ignition System Test)
Run Ignition System Test on WDS to determine if there is an ignition problem. Look at both
duration (DUR) and kilovolts (KV) and look for values that standout from the rest as shown in
Figure 5 and Figure 6.
NOTE
LIVE DISPLAY HAS TO AVERAGE IGNITION VALUES BECAUSE THERE IS TOO MUCH DATA
TO DISPLAY. MAKE A CAPTURE TO VIEW EACH ENGINE EVENT WITHOUT AVERAGING.
THIS CAN BE HELPFUL WHEN THE PROBLEM IS INTERMITTENT. IF THE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4199
MISS IS EXTREMELY INTERMITTENT AND DOES NOT SHOW UP IN IGNITION, PROCEED TO
STEP 4.
If either spark duration or peak KV on the Red Probe (Suspect Cylinder) are offset from the values
displayed on the Black Probe (Known Good Cylinder) then the problem is in the ignition system.
Rule out coil primary circuit issues before proceeding to coil secondary issues such as the spark
plug , coil boot, or possibly the coil. Use the WDS Oscilloscope with the COP kit to determine if the
issue is the coil or the spark plug.
Step 4: (Select Toolbox, then Oscilloscope)
WARNING
SECONDARY IGNITION VOLTAGES ARE VERY HIGH. KEEP HANDS AND TOOLS AWAY
FROM THE END OF THE COIL THAT SUPPLIES THE SPARK.
SET-UP: With the engine off, pull the suspect coil from the cylinder well and turn it upside down so
the coil cannot spark to any other surface as shown in Figure 1. Wrap a clean shop cloth around
the hard shell of the coil to help keep the coil propped up and stable.
CAUTION
THE COIL BOOT CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE COIL SPARKS TO ANOTHER SURFACE DURING
THIS PROCEDURE.
Keep the coil connected to the harness and leave the WDS COP clip attached to the coil. Route
the coil clip wire and cable away from the coil being tested as well as other coils to avoid noise
interference. Disconnect the injector of the cylinder being tested so raw fuel is not washing the
cylinder. This is a stress test for the coil. The type of waveform displayed on the oscilloscope will
show whether a coil or the plug is the problem if all previous steps have been followed. Keep hands
and tools away from the end of the coil that supplies the spark.
COP Stress Test Procedure:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4200
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Ignition System - Coil-On-Plug Misfire Diagnostic Tips > Page 4201
Go to the Oscilloscope Tool and select Channel 3, then select Auto, then select
COP_STRESS_TEST_RED. This pre-configured setting will zoom-in on the peak firing of the coil
being tested. Start the engine and be sure the coil is not sparking to any surface. If the coil is
sparking to other surfaces, turn the engine off immediately and readjust the coil so it cannot spark
to any other surface. Restart the engine and touch the Red Man icon to start the oscilloscope. All
settings are pre-configured and no adjustments are necessary. Compare the waveform you get
with the examples provided in Figures 7, 8, and 9). Figure 7 is a good waveform. If your waveform
is similar to Figure 7 the coil is working correctly. Suspect the spark plug.
Figure 8 and Figure 9 are examples of problem coils. Replace the coil if the waveform is similar to
Figures 8 or 9. The coil is causing the misfire when the peak firing appears like those shown in
Figures 8 and 9. Notice the difference in the peak-firing signal when compared to the good peak
signal in Figure 7.
Figure 9 shows a more dramatic fault in the peak failure.
Most root causes of misfire issues can be identified quickly using the steps outlined above. Some
misfire issues can be difficult making the oscilloscope an important part of your diagnostic toolbox.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 05-13-4
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4204
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4205
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4206
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4207
Ignition Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4208
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4209
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil on Plug (CoP) #1 > Page 4210
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4211
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
COIL PACK
Horizontal Connector Six Tower Coil Pack
Series 5 Six Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4212
Four-Tower Coil Packs
Series 5 Four Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 4213
Coil packs come in four tower, Series 5 four tower, six-tower horizontal connector and Series 5 Six
tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For
six-tower coil pack (six cylinder) applications the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4
(Figure 58) and (Figure 59). For four-tower coil pack (four cylinder) applications the matched pairs
are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3 (Figure 60) and (Figure 61).
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts and the engine appearance cover.
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the coil-on-plug.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Coil-On-Plug - LH > Page 4216
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Coil-On-Plug - RH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper intake manifold.
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plug.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the coil-on-plug.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Apply a light film of silicone brake caliper grease and dielectric compound to the interior of the
spark plug boot prior to installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4220
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4221
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4222
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4226
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4227
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4233
Ignition Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4234
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4239
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4240
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The camshaft position sensor (Figure 57) used by COP Integrated EI system is a magnetic
transducer mounted on the engine front cover adjacent to the camshaft. By monitoring a target on
the camshaft sprocket, the CMP sensor identifies cylinder one to the PCM. The COP Integrated EI
system uses this information to synchronize the firing of the individual coils.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4241
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4245
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4246
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (Figure 56) is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine
block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted
pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel
has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L
ten cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a
missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position
and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to
identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the
angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference (Figure 54) for the CKP sensor
configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by
measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4247
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the bolts and the right front lower splash shield.
3. Remove the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolt.
3 Remove the sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4255
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4256
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the KS.
NOTE: The KS is located on the RH side of the cylinder block
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications Spark Plug Gap
Spark Plug Gap
0.052-0.056 inch (1.32-1.42 mm)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4260
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................AWSF-32F
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4261
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs.
2. Remove the LH and RH spark plugs.
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
3. Inspect the spark plugs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4282
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4283
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4288
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4289
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 4290
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4296
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4297
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4298
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4299
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4300
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4301
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4307
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4310
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4311
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4312
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4315
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4316
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4317
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4322
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S13 Date: 040401
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Safety Recall 04S13 Certain 2001-2003 Model Year Escape Vehicles Equipped with 3.0L V6
Engine Powertrain Control Module Re-Calibration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling >
Page 4336
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes available the week of April 12 2004.
Available through FMCDealer.com.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED/SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition on call
the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement unless approved.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904 Dearborn MI 48121.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S13 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND- Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling >
Page 4337
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
DEALER PRICE
Not applicable.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Not applicable.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Not applicable.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the PCM to the latest level calibration. Use one (1) of the following two (2) methods:
^ Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS), updated to release level B30.7 or later.
^ New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester with Rotunda Flash Cable (007-00531) and Rotunda Flash
Card (007-00532). The calibration must be downloaded to a flash card using WDS updated to
release level B30.7 or later.
NOTE:
If the PCM is already programmed to the latest level calibration, reprogramming is not necessary.
IF UNABLE TO REPROGRAM PCM
^ PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
^ Prior to disconnecting the WDS from the vehicle and closing the session, call the Special Service
Support Center at 1-800-325-5621.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling >
Page 4338
PREPARE AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS LABEL
1. Obtain and prepare the Authorized Modifications Label. Describe the modification performed,
and enter your P&A; Code, date of repair and the recall program type and program number. See
Figure 1.
2. Clean an area on the upper radiator support.
3. Apply the label to this clean area, then cover it with a clear plastic overlay.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling >
Page 4339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling >
Page 4340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA04V165000 > Apr > 04 > Recall 04V165000: Engine Stalls on
Deceleration
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Recalls Recall 04V165000: Engine Stalls on
Deceleration
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with 3.0L V6 engines, during decelerations at
vehicle speeds below 40 mph, the engine could stall due to excessively rich fuel-air mixtures being
sent to the engine. This could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The manufacturer has
reported that owner notification began on April 21, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673..
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4350
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4351
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4352
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4358
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4359
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4360
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4365
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4366
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S13 Date: 040401
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Safety Recall 04S13 Certain 2001-2003 Model Year Escape Vehicles Equipped with 3.0L V6
Engine Powertrain Control Module Re-Calibration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4371
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes available the week of April 12 2004.
Available through FMCDealer.com.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED/SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition on call
the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement unless approved.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904 Dearborn MI 48121.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S13 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND- Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4372
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
DEALER PRICE
Not applicable.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Not applicable.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Not applicable.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the PCM to the latest level calibration. Use one (1) of the following two (2) methods:
^ Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS), updated to release level B30.7 or later.
^ New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester with Rotunda Flash Cable (007-00531) and Rotunda Flash
Card (007-00532). The calibration must be downloaded to a flash card using WDS updated to
release level B30.7 or later.
NOTE:
If the PCM is already programmed to the latest level calibration, reprogramming is not necessary.
IF UNABLE TO REPROGRAM PCM
^ PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
^ Prior to disconnecting the WDS from the vehicle and closing the session, call the Special Service
Support Center at 1-800-325-5621.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4373
PREPARE AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS LABEL
1. Obtain and prepare the Authorized Modifications Label. Describe the modification performed,
and enter your P&A; Code, date of repair and the recall program type and program number. See
Figure 1.
2. Clean an area on the upper radiator support.
3. Apply the label to this clean area, then cover it with a clear plastic overlay.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4375
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
NHTSA04V165000 > Apr > 04 > Recall 04V165000: Engine Stalls on Deceleration
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V165000:
Engine Stalls on Deceleration
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with 3.0L V6 engines, during decelerations at
vehicle speeds below 40 mph, the engine could stall due to excessively rich fuel-air mixtures being
sent to the engine. This could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The manufacturer has
reported that owner notification began on April 21, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673..
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4385
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4386
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4387
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls General PCM Programming Procedures
TSB 04-24-14
12/13/04
FORD: 1997 Thunderbird 1997-2000 Contour 1997-2002 Escort 1997-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2003 Escort ZX2 2000-2005 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005 Five
Hundred, Freestyle 1997 Aerostar 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2005 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer,
F-150, F-250, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2000-2005 Explorer USPS 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2005 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004-2005 Freestar 1997-1999 F and B Series
LINCOLN: 1997-1998 Mark VIII 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS
1997-2005 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1997-1999 Tracer 1997-2000 Mystique 1997-2002 Cougar 1997-2005 Grand Marquis,
Sable 2005 Montego 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
This article supersedes TSB 04-21-07 to update the service procedure and to clarify this TSB
applies to all powertrain control module (PCM) reprogramming, with or without PCM replacement.
ISSUE PCMs may need to be reprogrammed or replaced as part of a repair. Additional vehicle
concerns may be caused if proper programming procedures are not followed.
ACTION Use the following procedure to reprogram PCMs.
Verify repair after reprogramming.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS - Existing PCM
Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
1. Connect a battery charger to vehicle.
2. Use WDS if available.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4392
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4393
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4399
a. Make sure WDS is docked or attached to vehicle battery supply.
b. Verify WDS software is at the latest release level.
3. If there is a communication error, attempt to communicate with a different diagnostic scan tool,
such as NGS, NGS+, VCM or another WDS.
NOTE
IF COMMUNICATION STILL CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED, VOLTAGE DROP PCM POWERS,
GROUNDS, AND CHECK VREF.
PCM REPLACEMENT - STANDARD
1. Open WDS vehicle session with original PCM installed in vehicle. If the original PCM is not able
to communicate, to open a session, proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
2. Install the new PCM.
NOTE
IF WDS NEEDS TO BE USED ON A DIFFERENT VEHICLE WHILE THE NEW PCM IS BEING
INSTALLED, PLACE THE VEHICLE SESSION ON "HOLD" FOR USE LATER.
3. Attempt to start the vehicle.
4. Run KOEO Self Test to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) in PCM.
5. Check for DTC P0602/P0605/P1639.
a. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is present then Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure
must be performed. Use the WDS session opened at Step 1.
b. If DTC P0602/P0605/P1639 is not present, then verify Programmable Parameters are properly
set such as tire size, axle ratio, etc.
6. Check for DTC B2900.
a. If DTC B2900 is present, perform PMI on the ABS module. Do Not replace ABS module for this
procedure when directed. You may be prompted to enter the 9 lines of PCM As-Built data during
this procedure.
b. If DTC B2900 is not present proceed to Step 7.
7. Diagnose all other DTCs following normal diagnostic procedures.
REPROGRAMMING DOES NOT COMPLETE OR FAILS - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM
Replacement
1. Verify all cables are properly connected.
2. Verify vehicle battery is at proper charge level.
3. Verify scan tool battery is at proper charge level.
4. Attempt reprogramming procedure again.
5. If reprogramming still does not complete properly, save current session, reboot WDS, open
previous session, and attempt reprogramming again.
6. If reprogramming still does not complete or you are now unable to communicate with PCM,
proceed to the Blank Path Programming procedure.
BLANK PATH PROGRAMMING - Existing PCM Reprogramming Or PCM Replacement
Perform this procedure prior to PCM replacement if a vehicle comes in with a PCM that will not
communicate, or if steps earlier in this TSB directed you to this procedure.
1. Verify powers and grounds to PCM by loading and voltage drop testing circuits.
2. Follow Pin Point Tests to verify network integrity.
NOTE
IGNITION MUST REMAIN IN THE OFF POSITION UNTIL PERFORMING STEP 8. DO NOT
TURN THE KEY ON WHEN WDS IS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04-24-14 > Dec > 04 > Engine Controls - General PCM Programming Procedures > Page 4400
INITIALLY CONNECTED TO THE DLC.
3. Connect WDS to vehicle.
4. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
5. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
7. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
8. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Turn ignition on, press TICK.
9. Screen shows "The PCM installed to this vehicle is blank". You will be prompted to select VIN
from a list of previous sessions. Press TICK.
10. When previous sessions are shown select "None of the above".
11. Screen shows 'To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration # (7 digits), Tear Tag # (4 digits), or PCM part #, press TICK.
12. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
13. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens.
14. Once PCM is reprogrammed communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be
reset (if necessary) as per Section 419-01 of the Workshop Manual.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling
Technical Service Bulletin # 04S13 Date: 040401
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Safety Recall 04S13 Certain 2001-2003 Model Year Escape Vehicles Equipped with 3.0L V6
Engine Powertrain Control Module Re-Calibration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4405
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes available the week of April 12 2004.
Available through FMCDealer.com.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states provinces and countries.
Accordingly you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected stock vehicles before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED/SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition on call
the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement unless approved.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or at their option
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 1904 Dearborn MI 48121.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs or those judged by Ford to be excessive will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04S13 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND- Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4406
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refund must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor Allowances and Parts Ordering Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS/ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE:
PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
DEALER PRICE
Not applicable.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Not applicable.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Not applicable.
Attachment III - Technical Information
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the PCM to the latest level calibration. Use one (1) of the following two (2) methods:
^ Worldwide Diagnostic System (WDS), updated to release level B30.7 or later.
^ New Generation STAR (NGS) Tester with Rotunda Flash Cable (007-00531) and Rotunda Flash
Card (007-00532). The calibration must be downloaded to a flash card using WDS updated to
release level B30.7 or later.
NOTE:
If the PCM is already programmed to the latest level calibration, reprogramming is not necessary.
IF UNABLE TO REPROGRAM PCM
^ PCM replacement will not be covered under this program.
^ Prior to disconnecting the WDS from the vehicle and closing the session, call the Special Service
Support Center at 1-800-325-5621.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4407
PREPARE AUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS LABEL
1. Obtain and prepare the Authorized Modifications Label. Describe the modification performed,
and enter your P&A; Code, date of repair and the recall program type and program number. See
Figure 1.
2. Clean an area on the upper radiator support.
3. Apply the label to this clean area, then cover it with a clear plastic overlay.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4408
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
04S13 > Apr > 04 > Recall - PCM Recalibration for Engine Stalling > Page 4409
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
NHTSA04V165000 > Apr > 04 > Recall 04V165000: Engine Stalls on Deceleration
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 04V165000:
Engine Stalls on Deceleration
DEFECT: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with 3.0L V6 engines, during decelerations at
vehicle speeds below 40 mph, the engine could stall due to excessively rich fuel-air mixtures being
sent to the engine. This could result in a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The manufacturer has
reported that owner notification began on April 21, 2004. Owners may contact Ford at
1-800-392-3673..
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Accumulator: Specifications
Accumulator body transfer plate bolts
........................................................................................................................................................ 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Band Apply Servo: Service and Repair
Overdrive Servo
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. NOTE: Servicing the intermediate/overdrive servo in the vehicle is only recommended in the
event of a leak. If servicing is required due to a
servo condition, it is necessary to remove and disassemble the transaxle to inspect the
intermediate/overdrive band assembly and direct clutch for damage.
Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. WARNING: The servo is under pressure. Servo and servo cover are under high spring force.
Use caution when removing servo cover.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the transmission cooler line bracket and bolt, and position the bracket out of the way.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4435
5. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to remove the
retaining ring.
Using the special tool, remove the servo retaining ring. 1
Install the special tool.
2 Compress the servo assembly by tightening the bolt.
3 Remove the retaining ring.
6. Remove the special tool. 7. Remove the servo cover assembly. 8. Remove the intermediate and
overdrive servo piston and return spring. 9. Wipe the servo piston and the servo cover cap with a
lint-free cloth.
10. CAUTION: Do not clean the rubber sealing surfaces of the servo piston and the servo cover
cap with cleaning solvent or damage to the sealing
surface may result.
Inspect the servo piston for cracks on its pressure surfaces and in the sealing area. Look for
damage near the point where the servo piston is attached to the servo rod.
11. Squeeze the servo piston lip for flexibility. If the lip feels brittle, install a new piston. 12. Inspect
the servo retainer spring for cracks, breaks or deformation.
Installation
1. WARNING: Servo return spring force is very high. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Assemble the special tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4436
2. Install the special tool.
3. CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to install the retaining ring or damage to the case may
occur. Use only snap ring pliers to install the
retaining ring.
NOTE: If the servo cover will not seat deep enough in the bore to install the servo cover retaining
ring, use a blunt punch or small hammer and gently tap the cover around the outer edge until the
servo cover retaining ring can be installed.
Tighten the special tool bolt. ^
Install the servo cover retaining ring.
4. If the case is stamped "WG", install a wide-groove snap ring, or the servo will be damaged.
5. Loosen the special tool bolt.
^ When the spring tension is released, remove the special tool.
6. Install the transmission fluid cooler line.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band Apply Servo, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4437
7. Install the splash shield. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Start the vehicle. Place transmission range
selector lever in each gear and allow to engage. Check for leaks.
10. Check transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic
Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Differential Fluid - A/T: Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain plug ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering
Fluid - A/T: Customer Interest Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4453
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4454
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable
Idle/Shuddering > Page 4455
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4461
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T Mercon V ATF Usage > Page 4462
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering
TSB 06-11-7
06/12/06
2001-2005 ESCAPE 3.0L UNSTABLE IDLE - 2001-2003 ESCAPE 3.0L AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE SHUDDER - MEXICO ONLY
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit idle speeds
outside the specified range. Some 2001-2003 Escape vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine and
CD4E automatic transaxle may exhibit a transmission shudder.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. If the concern is a 2001-2005 Escape with idle speeds outside the specified range:
a. Install a new idle air control (IAC) valve with jumper harness included in the kit. The new Denso
brand IAC will be installed with the electrical connector facing the opposite direction of the original
(Hitachi) valve which is why the jumper harness is required. The original (Hitachi) IAC connector
faces the front of the vehicle while the new Denso IAC connector faces toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4467
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4468
b. Referring to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the
powertrain control module (PCM) using the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5
and higher. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
2. If the concern is a 2001 - 2003 Escape with transaxle shudder, drain, flush and refill the
transmission fluid with MERCON(R) Multi-Purpose Automatic Transmission Fluid. Then, referring
to the calibration charts (Figures 1 and 2), select the applicable file and reprogram the PCM using
the TSB Service Procedure and WDS/IDS release B40.5 and higher. Calibration files may also be
obtained at the website.
3. When reprogramming the PCM use blank path programming. Select the proper file from the
chart and manually enter the PCM part number or tear tag number to obtain the updated calibration
file.
To Perform Blank Path Programming:
1. Connect WDS/IDS to vehicle.
2. Select "16 pin", select "All others, except those below", press TICK.
3. Screen shows installation of cable, press TICK.
4. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. DO NOT TURN IGNITION ON. Press TICK.
5. Screen shows progress bar, then screen tells you "No communication can be established with
the PCM" and asks you if you want to retry? Select "NO". With the ignition key still OFF, press
TICK.
6. Screen shows to turn ignition ON. Keep ignition in the "OFF" position, press TICK and you will
be asked to cycle the key "ON" and "OFF" a few times. Please keep the key position in the "OFF"
position through the key cycles.
7. Screen will show "The diagnostic tester is unable to communicate with this vehicle." You will be
prompted to "select a vehicle from the vehicle list", press TICK.
8. A list of vehicles will be displayed, select ALL OTHERS, and press TICK.
9. Screen shows "To enable WDS to reprogram the PCM with the correct calibration", enter one of
the following: Vehicle Calibration number (7 digits), Tear Tag number (4 digits), or PCM part
number, press TICK.
10. Highlight the box next to the selection chosen, and enter ONLY ONE of the selections listed
above. Press TICK.
11. Follow and answer correctly all remaining screens. Once PCM is reprogrammed
communication should be reestablished and PATS system can be reset (if necessary) per
Workshop Manual, Section 419-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-11-7 > Jun > 06 > Engine
Controls/A/T - Unstable Idle/Shuddering > Page 4469
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9F715 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V
ATF Usage
Fluid - A/T: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Mercon V ATF Usage
TSB 06-14-4
07/24/06
MERCON ATF IS BEING REPLACED BY MERCON V ATF AS A SERVICE FLUID.
FORD: 1980-1997 Crown Victoria 1981-1997 Mustang, Thunderbird 1981-2003 Escort 1986-1993
Festiva 1986-1997 Taurus 1989-1997 Probe 1994-1997 Aspire 1995-2000 Contour 1980-1996
Bronco 1981-2003 F-150 1981-2004 E-Series, F-Super Duty 1983-1996 Ranger 1986-1996
Aerostar 1991-1997 Explorer 1993-2004 F-53 Motorhome Chassis 1995-1998 Windstar 1997-2004
Expedition 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2007 Escape 1987-2000 F-B-Series 2000-2007 F-650,
F-750
LINCOLN: 1980-1997 Town Car 1981-1997 Continental 1993-1997 Mark VIII 1998-2004 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood
MERCURY: 1980-1997 Grand Marquis 1981-1997 Cougar 1986-1997 Sable 1987-1999 Tracer
1995-2000 Mystique 1999-2002 Cougar 1993-2002 Villager 1997 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
MERKUR: 1985-1989 XR4TI
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-7 to update the vehicle application chart.
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid.
ACTION Beginning immediately all automatic transmission / transaxle applications requiring
MERCON(R) can now be serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will
only continue for however long it takes to deplete what remains in inventory.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V
ATF Usage > Page 4475
Service automatic transmissions requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V
For proper fluid application on current and past model vehicles equipped with automatic
transmissions I transaxles refer to the fluid usage chart. (Figure 1)
CAUTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS / TRANSAXLES THAT REQUIRE MERCON® V SHOULD STILL
ONLY USE MERCON(R) V OR DUAL USAGE FLUID LABELED MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Fluid - A/T: > 06-14-4 > Jul > 06 > A/T - Mercon V
ATF Usage > Page 4476
CAUTION
MERCON(R) SP, MOTORCRAFT PREMIUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID AND
MOTORCRAFT M5 ATFS ARE UNIQUE FLUIDS AND MUST BE USED IN APPLICATIONS
RECOMMENDING THAT PARTICULAR FLUID.
USE OF ANY OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR TRANSMISSION
DAMAGE.
CAUTION
THE FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS FOR CVT TRANSMISSIONS ARE VERY
DIFFERENT THAN THOSE OF OTHER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDS (ATFS).
USE OF A FLUID OTHER THAN MOTORCRAFT CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CHAIN TYPE
TRANSMISSION FLUID OR ONE LABELED AS MEETING MERCON(R) C WILL CAUSE
FUNCTIONALITY CONCERNS AND INTERNAL TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID SUPPLEMENTS, ADDITIVES,
TREATMENTS OR CLEANING AGENTS.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Transmission Fluid ..............................................................................................................................
............................................................... 10 Qt (9.5L) Note: Approximately Dry Fill Capacity
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4479
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM
Ford Specification - MERCON(R) V
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Material
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Place a suitable container under the transaxle drain plug.
3. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount
of metal or friction particles may be found from
normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal service will be
required.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain transmission fluid.
Installation
1. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of Pipe
Sealant with Teflon D8AZ-19554-A or XW7Z-19554-AA or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSK-M2G350-A2.
2. Lower the vehicle 3. Add 3.7 liters (3.9 quarts) of MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V specification. 4. Start the engine and run through
all gears for a total of five minutes at idle. Turn off the engine. 5. Repeat the previous steps to help
flush fluid from the torque converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4482
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Check Fluid Level and Condition
Check Fluid Level and Condition
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is below the bottom hole on the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
NOTE: Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid level
check, drive the vehicle until warmed, approximately 30 km (20 miles). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic, during hot weather, or while pulling a
trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow the fluid to cool before
checking.
Under normal circumstances, there is no need to check the fluid level of the transaxle, since the
vehicle does not use up transmission fluid. However, if the transaxle is not working correctly, for
instance, the transaxle may slip or shift slowly, or there may be some sign of fluid leakage, the fluid
level should be checked.
Fluid Level Check 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until the vehicle reaches normal
operating temperatures. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3.
With your foot on the brake, start the engine and move the range selector lever through all the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to
engage.
4. Place the range selector in P (park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the fluid level
indicator and wipe it clean with a clean cloth. 6. Install the fluid level indicator, making sure that it is
fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the fluid level indicator. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal and room temperature.
Low Fluid Level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is below the hole at the bottom of the fluid
level indicator and the outside temperature is above 10°C (50°F).
High Fluid Level Fluid levels above the safe range can result in transmission failure. An overfill
condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement concerns, or possible damage.
High fluid levels can cause an overheating condition. See the previous note.
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid can cause internal transmission
component damage. An overfill condition of transmission fluid can cause shift or engagement
concerns, or possible damage.
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally
indicated on the fluid level indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 4483
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified technician.
Fluid Condition Check
NOTE: Evidence of fluid contamination, breakdown, or incorrect fluid can cause poor shift quality. If
the transmission fluid condition is suspect, drain the transaxle and replace the fluid with
MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting MERCON(R) V
specification.
^ Make the normal fluid level check as described in, Fluid Level Check.
^ Observe the color and odor of the fluid. It should be red, not brown or black. Odor can indicate an
overheating condition or clutch disc or band failure.
^ Use a clean, lint-free cloth and wipe the fluid level indicator. Examine the stain for evidence of
solid particles and signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish on the fluid level indicator).
If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of contamination, the transaxle drain plug
should be removed and a sample of the fluid filtered through a paper filter and examined. If
transaxle failure is confirmed by further evidence of coolant or excessive particles in the fluid, the
transaxle must be completely cleaned and repaired. This includes cleaning and flushing the torque
converter and transaxle cooling system. During disassembly and assembly all overhaul checks and
adjustments of clearances and end play must be made. After repairing the transaxle, all diagnostic
tests and adjustments listed in the diagnosis must be completed to make sure that the problem has
been eliminated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations
Fluid Filter - A/T: Locations
Part 1 Of 7
Transmission Fluid Filter Location
Filter is located at exploded view position number 8 internal. See Transmission
Disassembly/Assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T >
Component Information > Locations > Page 4487
Special Tool
Seal Removal
Transmission Filter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Line/Hose: Specifications
Cooler line fitting ..................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) Cooler inlet line .................................................
....................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft.
lbs.) Transaxle cooler lines ..................................................................................................................
............................................................. 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Auxiliary cooler bolts ................................
............................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.) Cooler tube bracket bolt .......................................................................................................
.................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Cooler tube fittings ............................
....................................................................................................................................................... 25
Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Fluid Pump: Specifications
Pump assembly bolts ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Pump support bolts .........................................
.......................................................................................................................................... 13 Nm (10
ft. lbs.) Drive gear clearance
...................................................................................................................................................... 0.05
- 0.08 mm (0.002 - 0.003 inch) Drive shaft rotational torque ...............................................................
....................................................................................................... 0.3 mm (2.6 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Parking Pawl: Specifications
Parking pawl shaft retainer bolt ...........................................................................................................
.................................................... 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4508
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T >
Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4509
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Fluid Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals - LH
Differential Fluid Seals - LH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. Remove the LH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Fluid Seals - LH > Page 4514
4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Remove the
drain pan and lower the vehicle.
4. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe
sealant.
5. Add automatic transmission fluid. 6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector
lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary. 7. Allow the transmission fluid to reach
operating temperature and fill as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Fluid Seals - LH > Page 4515
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Fluid Seals - RH
Differential Fluid Seals - RH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Determine the source of the fluid leak. If the leak is from the transaxle, continue with this
procedure.
If it is determined that the fluid leak is coming from the Power Take-Off (PTO) unit, remove the
PTO.
3. NOTE: Place a suitable drain pan under the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Fluid Seals - LH > Page 4516
Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid.
4. Remove the RH halfshaft. 5. If equipped remove the PTO.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal.
7. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to remove the RH differential
seal.
Installation
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTO, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal.
3. If equipped install the PTO. 4. Install the RH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Fluid Seals - LH > Page 4517
5. Install the transaxle drain plug.
^ After the fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of pipe
sealant.
6. Remove the drain pan and lower the vehicle. 7. Add automatic transmission fluid. 8. Start the
engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill as necessary.
9. Allow the transmission fluid to reach operating temperature and fill as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4522
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4523
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4524
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4525
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4526
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4527
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4533
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector >
Page 4536
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector >
Page 4537
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector >
Page 4538
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4541
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4542
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4543
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4548
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift
Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4549
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Shifter A/T: Specifications
Nuts - selector lever .............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 9 Nm (80 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4556
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Selector Lever
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH drive is shown, RH drive is similar.
1. Remove the clockspring. 2. Remove the multifunction switch. 3. Remove the windshield
wiper/washer switch.
4. Disconnect the gearshift cable.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness from the gear shifter assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4557
7. Remove the bolts and the gearshift lever assembly. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Cable: Specifications
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
Shift cable bracket bolts ......................................................................................................................
................................................. 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
External Controls
Gearshift cable bracket bolts ...............................................................................................................
................................................. 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Gearshift cable nuts .............................................
.............................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4562
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Selector Lever Cable Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the
gearshift lever detent. 4. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb)
weight from the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4563
5. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten. 6. Remove the weight from
the gearshift lever. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the PARK position and remove the feeler gauge.
8. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1 Position the lower steering column shroud.
2 Install the screws.
9. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4564
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Cable
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar.
1. Remove the upper steering column shroud.
2. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the lower steering column shroud.
3. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket.
1 Disconnect the gearshift cable from the gearshift lever.
2 Disconnect the gearshift cable from the steering column bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4565
4. Remove the gearshift cable nuts.
5. Detach the gearshift cable from the transaxle shifter lever.
6. Disconnect the gearshift cable from the bracket by depressing the locking tabs at the bracket.
7. Remove the gearshift cable.
Installation
NOTE: LH drive shown; RH drive similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4566
1. Install the gearshift cable.
2. Install the gearshift cable in the bracket.
3. Connect the gearshift cable to the transaxle shifter lever.
4. Install the gearshift cable nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4567
5. Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever.
1 Attach the gearshift cable to the steering column bracket.
2 Connect the gearshift cable to the gearshift lever.
6. Position a 0.6 mm (0.023 inch) feeler gauge between the gearshift lever selector and the
gearshift lever detent. 7. Place the gearshift lever in the DRIVE position and hang a 1.4 kg (3 lb)
weight from the gearshift lever.
8. Loosen the gearshift cable adjuster to adjust the cable then tighten.
9. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1 Position the lower steering column shroud.
2 Install the screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4568
10. Install the upper steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications
Torque Converter: Specifications
Torque converter nuts .........................................................................................................................
...................................................... 36 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) Torque converter pump rotational torque
.......................................................................................................................................... 0.3 Nm
(2.65 inch lbs.) Torque converter housing lower front mount bracket
............................................................................................................................... 90 Nm (66 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4572
Torque Converter: Description and Operation
Torque Converter
The torque converter is a four element assembly. The torque converter contains an impeller, a
turbine, a reactor, and a Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) for increased fuel economy. It couples the
engine to the turbine shaft assembly, provides torque multiplication and absorbs engine shock of
gear shifting.
Impeller and Cover The impeller and cover assembly drives the impeller blades and pump
assembly. The impeller is primarily responsible for driving the turbine with hydraulic fluid by means
of centrifugal force. The cover provides a mating surface for the torque converter clutch piston plate
and damper assembly.
Turbine The turbine is driven by centrifugal fluid force from the impeller. The turbine transmits input
torque to the drive chain and driven sprocket through the turbine shaft.
Reactor The reactor redirects fluid flow from the turbine back to the impeller so that fluid rotates in
the same direction as the impeller. This action also assists in torque multiplication.
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) provides a mechanical link or
direct drive between the engine crankshaft and turbine shaft when applied. The application of the
torque converter clutch is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Under certain
conditions, the PCM sends the appropriate signal to the TCC solenoid which allows fluid pressure
within the torque converter to force the TCC piston plate and damper assembly against the cover
creating a mechanical link between the engine and transaxle.
Turbine Shaft The turbine shaft connects the torque converter stator with the forward/coast/direct
clutch cylinder. When applied, the forward/coast/direct clutch cylinder transmits input torque to the
reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly, which also acts as the drive sprocket. This allows input
torque to be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4573
transmitted from the torque converter to the drive chain and driven sprocket.
Geartrain
The geartrain includes the planetary gearsets, apply components, and final drive gearset and
differential.
Planetary Gearsets The automatic transaxle has two planetary gearsets to provide operation in
reverse and four forward speeds. The gearsets are comprised of the following components: ^
Low/intermediate sun gear assembly.
^ Low/intermediate carrier assembly.
^ Low/intermediate ring gear assembly.
^ Reverse/overdrive sun gear and shell assembly.
^ Reverse/overdrive carrier assembly.
^ Reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4574
Drive Chain and Sprockets A chain drive transfers torque from the torque converter turbine to the
planetary gearsets. The chain drive is composed of the following components: ^
Reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly which acts as a drive sprocket.
^ Driven sprocket.
^ Drive chain.
The drive chain connects the reverse/overdrive sun gear with the driven sprocket. The final drive
sun gear located on top of the driven sprocket meshes with the final drive gearset.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4575
The final drive consists of a planetary gearset that transfers and multiplies torque from the
planetary gearsets to the differential. The final drive consists of the following components: ^
Final drive sun gear: is chain driven by the reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly and transfers
torque to the final drive carrier.
^ Final drive carrier: the final drive carrier acts as the driven member and is part of the differential
case.
^ Final drive ring gear: is held by the converter housing and is always the held member of the final
drive planetary gearset.
The differential assembly drives the differential pinion gears and the differential side gears which in
turn drive the front wheel driveshaft and joints, and provides differential action if driving wheels are
turning at different speeds. The differential assembly consists of the following components: ^
Differential case (part of the final drive carrier).
^ Two pinion gears supported by a pinion shaft.
^ Two side gears supported by the differential case and halfshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure
TSB 09-25-4
12/28/09
CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT
FORD: 2001-2008 Escape
MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service
Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may
experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When
overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid
bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler
bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold
Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7K177 55
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4580
Transmission Cooler: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Cooler Flushing Service Tips
Article No. 03-14-8
07/21/03
TRANSMISSION - NEW TRANSMISSION COOLER FLUSHER - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 1992-1997 CROWN VICTORIA, PROBE, THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 ESCORT,
MUSTANG, TAURUS 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000 CONTOUR 2000-2003 FOCUS 2002-2003
THUNDERBIRD 1992-1996 BRONCO 1992-1997 AEROSTAR, F SUPER DUTY, F-250 HD, F-350
1992-1999 F-250 LD 1992-2003 ECONOLINE, EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER 1995-2003
WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1999-2003 SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003
EXCURSION 2001-2003 ESCAPE, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT
LINCOLN: 1992-1997 TOWN CAR 1992-2002 CONTINENTAL 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003
LS 1998-2003 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD 2003 AVIATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1997 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS 1992-2000 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2002 COUGAR 1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
This article supersedes TSB 00-1-5.
ISSUE The number one cause for repeat transmission repairs is that contamination from the
transmission cooler system (lines and tank) will work their way back into the rebuilt or new
transmission. For this reason a new transmission cooler flusher has been released, "Turbo-Tank
Heated Cooler Line Flusher" Rotunda Tool number 22-00001.
ACTION The transmission cooling system (cooler and lines) MUST be flushed every time the
transmission is overhauled or replaced in order to minimize the likelihood of repeat repairs. The
use of this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001) is the most effective way to
remove contamination from its cooling system. Refer to the following Service Procedure and
Equipment instructions (supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher").
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Prior methods of cooler flushing have not obtained the level of cooler cleaning and contaminant
removal that is required to prevent repeat repairs. The "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher"
uses heated Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) and a pulsating action to loosen system
contamination.
Previous equipment used solvents to clean & flush coolers, lines and torque-converters. There are
2 issues with this method:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4581
^ Residual solvent contamination can cause damage to friction bonding materials within the
transmission (Clutches and Bands).
^ Lack of fluid heating and agitation prevents this method from completely removing contamination
from lines, in-radiator coolers and auxiliary coolers.
Aerosol Solvents should never be used for several reasons.
^ They do not provide the volume necessary to remove heavy contaminants.
^ They evaporate quickly and essentially leave contaminants in pockets, bends, or wherever they
are as the solvent dries.
NOTE
YOU MUST IDENTIFY THE RETURN COOLER LINE TO START THE BACK FLUSHING
PROCEDURE.
A quick way to identify the return cooler line (fluid coming out of the cooler and returning to the
transmission) is to locate the return cooler line fitting on the transmission case. Refer to the
following lists:
Rear Wheel Drive
^ TORQSHIFT, 4R100, E40D, C6 - The REAR transmission case filling receives the return line.
^ 4R70W, AODE, AOD - The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line.
^ A4LD, 4R44/55E, 5R55E, 5R55N, 5R55W, 5R55S
- The TOP transmission case filling receives the return line.
Front Wheel Drive
^ CD4E - The REAR or Pump End transaxle case fitting receives the return line.
^ 4F27E - The REAR or Cover End transaxle case fitting receives the return line.
^ AXOD, AXODE, AX4S, AX4N, 4F50N - The BOTTOM transaxle cooler line fitting receives the
return line.
NOTE
IF AN IN-LINE FILTER HAS BEEN INSTALLED IN THE COOLER LINE, IT MUST BE REMOVED
BEFORE FLUSHING THE COOLER OR COOLER LINES.
Purge the cooler and cooler line before flushing:
Located on the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" is a fluid transfer and purge valve. This
valve can be used to purge the cooler and cooler lines of contaminated fluid before starting the
back flush procedure of the fluid cooling system (refer to step 5a of this Service Procedure or
Equipment instructions, supplied with the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher").
Flush Procedure
1. Check and top off fluid level of the "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" tank with
transmission fluid.
2. Allow the fluid in the flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 140° F (60° C) before using.
3. Install line adapters into the transmission cooler lines.
4. Attach the flusher's blue line to the transmission return cooler line quick disconnect.
5. Attach the flusher's red line to the transmission outlet cooler line quick disconnect.
a. Follow equipment instructions, to purge cooler lines and cooler prior to starting flushing
procedure (using factory installed purge valve and clear hose on "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line
Flusher").
6. Allow the cooling system to back-flush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the cooler in a
forward/normal flow direction for an additional 10-15 minutes.
For ordering information on this new "Turbo-Tank Heated Cooler Line Flusher" (222-00001),
contact Rotunda at 800-ROTUNDA (800-768-8632 or outside U.S. 262-656-5805).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure > Page 4582
CAUTION
THIS FLUSHER CANNOT BE USED TO FLUSH COOLERS ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH
THE TEMPERATURE BYPASS-TYPE TRANSMISSION COOLER CURRENTLY FOUND IN
1998-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, GRAND MARQUIS, AND TOWN CAR VEHICLES.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 00-1-5 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4583
Transmission Cooler: Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4584
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped with a transmission fluid cooler integral to
the radiator which cannot be repaired separately. The integral transmission fluid cooler transfers
heat from the transmission fluid to the engine coolant. The auxiliary transmission fluid cooler
transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the outside air.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer's concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition. 2. If the
inspection reveals obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as necessary. 3. Install
new components if a fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling components. 4. If the
concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4587
Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4588
Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Transmission Fluid Cooler - Backflushing and Cleaning
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: Test the Torque Converter Cleaner to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding. Install a new system filter if flow is weak or contaminated.
1. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of this fluid cooler tubes to connect them to
the cleaner.
Connect the cleaner pressure and return lines appropriately. 1
Connect the pressure line to the fluid cooler inlet tube.
2 Connect the return line to the fluid cooler outlet tube.
3 Place the outlet end of the return line in the solvent tank reservoir.
2. NOTE: Cycling the solvent pump on and off will help dislodge contaminants in the cooler system.
Switch the solvent pumps on. Allow the solvent to circulate a minimum of five minutes.
3. Switch the solvent pump off. 4. Disconnect the cleaner pressure line at the fluid cooler tube. 5.
Using compressed air, blow through the fluid cooler inlet tube until all solvent is removed. 6.
Remove the rubber hoses from the fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Remove the bolts and the auxiliary transmission fluid cooler. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4591
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Disconnect the cooler tubes.
3. Disconnect the front cooler tube.
4. Disconnect and remove the front cooler tube.
5. Disconnect the rear cooler tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Cooler > Page 4592
6. Remove the rear transmission cooler tube bracket bolt and the cooler tube. 7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Disconnect and remove the integral to auxiliary cooler tube. 9. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill the transaxle to the specified level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the cross brace.
4. Remove the lower vibration dampener.
5. Remove the cross brace.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front > Page 4597
6. Remove the top and bottom mount cups.
7. Remove the rubber mount.
Installation
1. Install a new rubber mount.
2. Install the top and bottom mount cups.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front > Page 4598
3. Install the cross brace.
4. Install the lower vibration dampener.
5. Install the cross brace.
6. Install the splash shield. 7. Lower the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front > Page 4599
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC
Removal
1. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
4. Remove the bolts and nuts from the mount, and remove the mount.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front > Page 4600
1. NOTE: Prior to tightening the mount nuts install the mount bolt for correct alignment.
Install a new mount and bolts. 1
Install the mount.
2 Loosely install the bolt for correct alignment.
3 Tighten the bolt.
2. Install the air cleaner assembly.
3. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
4. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4604
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4605
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4606
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4607
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4608
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4609
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 4615
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4618
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4619
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 4620
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4623
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4624
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4625
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications
Valve Body: Specifications
Control valve body-to-transfer plate bolts
.................................................................................................................................................. 12 Nm
(9 ft. lbs.) Manual control lever bolt .....................................................................................................
.................................................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) Solenoid valve body bolts .................
.................................................................................................................................................... 10
Nm (89 inch lbs.) Main control valve body cover bolts
........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Main control cover bolts ..............................................................................................
............................................................................. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4629
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4630
Valve Body: Service and Repair
Main Control Valve Body
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the battery and tray.
3. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
4. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
5. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector, and TR sensor connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4631
6. Disconnect the shift cable.
7. Remove the shift cable and bracket, and position out of the way.
8. Remove the vent tube hose. 9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the LH front wheel.
11. Remove the splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4632
12. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the main control cover.
13. Remove the main control cover gasket.
14. NOTE: Remove the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Remove the main control valve body bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4633
15. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve.
Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link.
16. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through
the transaxle case.
17. Make sure the manual valve control lever does not fall out of the main control valve body while
removing from the vehicle.
Installation
1. Install the manual control valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4634
2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. Install a new
O-ring seal, if damaged, before installing the
connector into the case.
Push the solenoid valve body harness connector into the case.
3. Connect the manual valve link to the main control valve body.
4. Install the main control valve body and tighten the bolts in sequence as indicated. 5. Loosen the
nut on the ball stud for the manual valve detent lever actuating rod assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4635
6. Install the manual control lever.
7. Install and rotate the manual valve detent lever assembly to the neutral position.
1 Low 1
2 Low 2
3 Drive
4 Neutral
5 Reverse
6 Park
8. Install a new gasket on the main control cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4636
9. Install the main control cover, and tighten the bolts in sequence as shown.
10. Install the splash shield. 11. Install the LH front wheel. 12. Lower the vehicle.
13. Install the shift cable and bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4637
14. Connect the shift cable.
15. NOTE: Before installing the vent tube hose, clean out any obstructions in the hose using low air
pressure.
Install the vent tube hose to the fitting on the main control cover.
16. Connect the transaxle harness connector, and the TR sensor connector.
17. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4638
18. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
19. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery tray and battery.
20. NOTE: When the battery is disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive symptoms
can occur while the vehicle relearns its adaptive
strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the strategy.
Connect the battery cables.
21. Check the transmission fluid, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic
Transmission Fluid XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
22. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions. Refill
as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Clutch Disc: Specifications
Clutch disc inner diameter ...................................................................................................................
................................................... 150 mm (5.91 inch) Clutch disc outer diameter ...............................
....................................................................................................................................... 225 mm
(8.86 inch) Clutch disc
Minimum thickness ..............................................................................................................................
.............................................. 0.3 mm (0.012 inch) Maximum runout ..................................................
........................................................................................................................... 0.7 mm (0.0276 inch)
Set load ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................. 4.900 N (1.102 lb.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4643
Clutch Disc: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos
dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury. Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain asbestos fibers that are
hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with compressed air or by dry brushing.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust
and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as
sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to
the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Grinding or sanding on brake
linings, pads, rotors, drums or clutch facings should be done only while using correctly
exhaust-ventilated equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
OSHA requires areas where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with
warning signs. Only technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service should be
present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the transaxle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4644
2. Using the special tool lock the flywheel to the engine
3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate, and clutch disc
4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate
5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores flatness or ridges
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate
as necessary
7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is
not within specifications.
8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. Install a
new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4645
^ wear or rust on splines
9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within
specifications.
10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^
cracks
^ distortion
^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten
them in sequence to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4646
3. Remove the special tool.
4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Capacity Specifications Clutch Fluid
Clutch Fluid
Fill to the line on the reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4652
Clutch Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Clutch Fluid
Clutch Fluid
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid.
The hydraulic clutch system uses the same reservoir as the
hydraulic brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4 > May > 06
> M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: Customer Interest M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clutch Master Cylinder: > 06-9-4
> May > 06 > M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking Noise
Clutch Master Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Clutch Master Cylinder Squeaking
Noise
TSB 06-9-4
05/15/06
SQUEAKING NOISE FROM CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
FORD:
2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE
Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit a squeaking noise from the clutch master cylinder
as the clutch pedal is depressed or released. This noise is typically only present in ambient
temperatures of 70° F (21° C) or higher. This condition may be caused by the design of the master
cylinder seal.
ACTION
Install an updated master cylinder containing a seal with an improved design. Replace the master
cylinder following the procedure in Workshop Manual, Section 308-02.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
060904A 2001-2004 Escape 0.8 hr.
4X2/4X4: Replace Clutch Master Cylinder (Do Not Use With 7543A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7A543 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4666
Clutch Master Cylinder: Specifications
Clutch master cylinder nuts .................................................................................................................
..................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4667
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
2. Remove the clutch pedal bracket nut.
3. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the clutch master cylinder and plug it to prevent
excess fluid loss
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4668
4. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube from the clutch master cylinder.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
1 Remove the clutch master cylinder nut.
2 Remove the clutch master cylinder
6. To install reverse the removal procedure
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Specifications
Clutch slave cylinder bolts ...................................................................................................................
..................................................... 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) Clutch slave cylinder tube nut ..........................
......................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
ft. lbs.) Clutch slave cylinder tube fitting
..............................................................................................................................................................
30 Nm (22 ft. lbs.) Clutch slave cylinder line bracket bolts
.................................................................................................................................................... 20
Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4672
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Slave Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with water.
Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder tube and plug it to prevent excess fluid loss.
2. Remove the clutch slave cylinder
1 Remove the clutch slave cylinder bolts
2 Remove the clutch slave cylinder
3. To install reverse the removal procedure
^ Bleed the air from the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Specifications
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Specifications
Clutch pedal disengagement height mm (inch)
........................................................................................................................................... 59 mm
(2.3 inch) Clutch pedal free play mm (inch)
....................................................................................................................................... 506 - 15.0
mm (0.22 - 0.59 inch) Clutch pedal height mm (inch)
............................................................................................................................................ 212 - 217
mm (8.35 - 8.54 inch) Clutch pedal bracket bolt and nuts
............................................................................................................................................................
23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4676
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the clutch master cylinder nut.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder rod from the clutch pedal.
5. Remove the clutch pedal.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the clutch pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4677
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 4682
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 4685
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Release Fork, M/T > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork: Service and Repair
Clutch Release Fork
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transaxle
2. Remove the rubber boot
3. Remove the clutch release fork and bearing 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Pilot Bearing: Service and Repair
Pilot Bearing
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the flywheel. 2. Inspect the pilot bearing for:
^ misalignment and looseness in the crankshaft
^ needle rollers for scoring, worn or broken rollers, inadequate grease or discoloration
^ seal leakage
3. NOTE: Install a new pilot bearing only if it is damaged.
Using the special tool, remove the pilot bearing. 1
Install the special tool.
2 Remove the pilot bearing.
4. Clean the transaxle input shaft with a wire brush. 5. Inspect the transmission input shaft for:
^ burrs
^ rust
^ damage to the input shaft spline
^ damage to the input shaft on the pilot bearing contact surface
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pilot Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 4692
1. Using the special tool, install the pilot bearing 2. Apply a light coating of Premium Long-Life
Grease XG-1-C, XG-1-K or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M1C75-B to the transaxle
input shaft
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Pressure Plate: Specifications
Pressure plate side ..............................................................................................................................
................................................... 3.5 mm (0.138 inch)
Clutch pressure plate bolts ..................................................................................................................
...................................................... 29 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) Pressure plate diaphragm spring fingers
Maximum depth ...................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) Maximum clearance ............................................
............................................................................................................................... 0.5 mm (0.020
inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4696
Pressure Plate: Service and Repair
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Clutches and brakes contain asbestos fibers. Avoid breathing dust. Breathing asbestos
dust may cause asbestosis and cancer. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury. Breathing asbestos dust is hazardous to your health. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury. Dust and dirt present on wheel brake and clutch assemblies may contain
asbestos fibers that are hazardous to your health when made airborne by cleaning with
compressed air or by dry brushing. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Wheel brake assemblies and clutch facings should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos fibers such as brake/clutch/service vacuum 164-R3600. Dust
and dirt from vacuum should be disposed of in a manner that prevents dust exposure such as
sealed bags. The bag must be labeled as per OSHA instructions and the trash hauler notified as to
the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. If a vacuum
suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation is still
possible, technicians should wear government approved toxic dust purifying respirators. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury. Grinding or sanding on brake linings, pads,
rotors, drums or clutch facings should be done only while using correctly exhaust-ventilated
equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. OSHA requires areas
where asbestos dust generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only
technicians concerned with carrying out brake or clutch service should be present in the area.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the transaxle
2. Using the special tool lock the flywheel to the engine
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4697
3. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Loosen bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate, and clutch disc
4. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure
plate in solvent.
Using a suitable commercial alcohol base solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate
5. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores flatness or ridges
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate diaphragm fingers for wear. Install a new clutch pressure plate
as necessary
7. Measure the depth to the rivet heads. Install a new clutch disc if any rivet head measurement is
not within specifications.
8. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior
to clutch disc installation.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. Install a
new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: ^
oil or grease saturation
^ worn or loose facings
^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub
^ loose or broken torsion dampening springs
^ wear or rust on splines
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4698
9. Using the special tool, check clutch disc runout. Install a new clutch disc if not within
specifications.
10. NOTE: Install a new clutch release fork if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch release fork for: ^
cracks
^ distortion
^ excessive wear on the release bearing contact surface
Installation
1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel, install the pressure plate bolts and tighten
them in sequence to specification.
3. Remove the special tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 4699
4. Remove the special tool. 5. Install the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential >
Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Carrier > Component
Information > Specifications
Differential Carrier: Specifications
Maximum aluminum carrier spread
..................................................................................................................................................... 0.25
mm (0.010 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Differential Cover: Specifications
Differential housing cover retaining bolt
.................................................................................................................................................. 23 Nm
(17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4711
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Differential Housing Cover
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the differential fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Remove the bolts and the rear differential cover. ^
Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing, the differential housing
cover and the rotary blade coupling housing are
clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be
covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing, the differential housing cover and the
rotary blade coupling housing.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the differential housing cover and bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4712
4. Fill the rear axle with 1.4 liters (2.95 pints) of rear axle lubricant.
^ Tighten the filler plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Lock > Solenoid, Differential
Lock > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Axle Housing > Component
Information > Specifications
Differential Axle Housing: Specifications
Differential housing-to-front insulator bracket bolts
................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft.
lbs.) Differential housing-to-side insulator bracket bolts
.................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fill Plug, Differential > Component
Information > Specifications
Fill Plug: Specifications
Filler plug .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Oil Capacity
Refill......................................................................................................................................................
............................................... 1.4 Liters (2.95 Pints) Fill the rear axle 3-5 mm (1/8-3/16 inch) from
the bottom of filler hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4727
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Type
Rear Axle Type ....................................................................................................................................
.............................. SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Bearing, Differential > Component
Information > Specifications
Pinion Bearing: Specifications
Pinion bearing preload - (drive pinion collapsible spacer) used bearings
........................................................................... 0.68 - 1.13 Nm (6 - 10 inch lbs.) Pilot runout ...........
..............................................................................................................................................................
........ 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) max.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Ring Gear, Differential > Component
Information > Specifications
Ring Gear: Specifications
Ring gear bolt ......................................................................................................................................
................................................... 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.) Backlash between ring gear and pinion teeth
................................................................................................................ 0.13 - 0.20 mm (0.005 0.008 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal
Part 1 Of 2
Part 2 Of 2
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4737
2. To remove the seal only, use the special tool and remove the stub shaft seal.
3. To remove the bearing and seal use the special tools and remove the stub shaft pilot bearing
and seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing with rear axle lubricant.
To install the bearing, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing.
2. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal with grease.
To install the seal, use the special tools and install the stub shaft pilot bearing housing seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4738
3. CAUTION: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing
the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal
journal with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 > May > 05 >
Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 05-10-7 >
May > 05 > Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Whine Noise at 20-45 MPH
TSB 05-10-7
05/30/05
DRIVELINE WHINE 20-45 MPH (32-72 KM/H)
FORD: 2001-2006 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2006 Escape and 2005-2006 Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transaxle
may exhibit a driveline whine at 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during light acceleration or deceleration.
The sound may be more pronounced on vehicles equipped with steel wheels.
ACTION If the whine noise occurs at the specified speed range 20-45 MPH (32-72 Km/h) during
light acceleration or deceleration, install new dampened halfshaft assemblies. The revised
halfshafts are designed to minimize the whine, however, a small amount of noise may be inherently
characteristic. The dampened axle halfshafts will not correct driveline noises below or above 20-45
MPH (32-72 Km/h). Refer to Workshop Manual Section 307.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051007A 2001-2004 Escape 1.1 Hrs.
Replace The Front Halfshafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
051007B 2005-2006 Escape/Mariner 1.4 Hrs.
Replace The Front Half shafts, Includes Time For Road Test To Verify Concern (Do Not Use With
4462A, 3329A)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A427 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Axle Shaft Assembly: Mechanical Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4755
Axle Shaft Assembly: Fluid Type Specifications
Front Drive Halfshafts
High Temperature Constant Velocity Joint Grease E43Z-19590-A
........................................................................................................ ESP-M1C207-A
Rear drive Halfshafts
Constant Velocity Joint Grease (High Temp) E43Z-19590-A
................................................................................................................. ESP-M1C207-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshaft
Front Drive Halfshafts
The front wheel drive halfshafts consist of the following components: ^
inboard CV joints
^ outboard CV joints
^ intermediate shaft/bearing
^ halfshaft
The intermediate shaft contains a pressed on bearing which is can only be repaired as an
assembly.
Halfshaft Joint
The front wheel halfshaft joints consist of the following components: ^
inboard CV joints
^ outboard CV joints
^ halfshaft joint boot clamps
^ halfshaft joint boots
^ tripod joint housings
^ retainer circlips
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshaft > Page 4758
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshaft
Rear Drive Halfshafts
CAUTION: An inspection of the outer and inner boots is necessary so that if damage or grease
leakage is evident, installation of a new halfshaft can take place immediately. Continued operation
with damage or grease leakage will result in CV joint wear and noise due to contamination and loss
of the CV joint grease.
^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
^ Inboard and outboard CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross
groove inboard race assembly (inboard CV joint) together.
^ An axle circlip retains the splined inboard CV joint to the differential side gear. Install a new axle
circlip each time the halfshaft is removed from the vehicle
^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outboard
CV joint) to the rear hub. Install a new rear axle wheel hub nut each time the halfshaft is removed
from the vehicle.
Halfshaft Handling
CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft only by the inboard or outboard CV joint. Do not
over-angle the CV joints. Damage will occur to an assembled inboard CV joint if it is over-plunged
outward from the joint housing. Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Never use
the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Always support the free end of the
halfshaft. Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Handle the
halfshaft only by the interconnecting shaft to avoid pull-apart and potential damage to the CV joints.
Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact will cut the boots from the inside without evidence of
external damage.
Handle all halfshaft components carefully during removal and installation procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft
Halfshaft
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: RH shown; LH similar.
1. Remove the front wheels and tires.
2. Remove and discard the front axle wheel hub nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4761
3. Remove the clip.
4. Separate the lower control arm from the front wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt and nut.
2 Separate the lower control arm from the front wheel knuckle.
5. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the front wheel knuckle.
6. Using the special tools, remove the halfshaft.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4762
1. NOTE: When seated correctly, the driveshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into
the differential side gear groove.
Position the front wheel driveshaft and joint so the splines line up with the differential side gear
splines. Push the front wheel driveshaft and joint into the differential side gear.
2. Using the special tool, position the halfshaft into the front wheel knuckle.
3. Install the lower control arm and the ball joint pinch bolt and nut.
4. Install the clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4763
5. Install a new front axle wheel hub nut. 6. Install the front wheels and tires. 7. Check and refill the
transaxle fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4764
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation, Intermediate Shaft
Intermediate Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the RH front drive halfshaft.
2. Remove the two inner halfshaft bearing retainer nuts.
3. Remove the inner halfshaft. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4765
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly, Front Drive Half Shaft
Halfshaft
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. Secure the Halfshaft and Constant Velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers.
3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps.
4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4766
5. Separate the tripod joint from the inboard CV joint housing.
6. If reinstalling the original tripod joint, mark the tripod joint and the halfshaft to make sure of
correct installation.
7. Remove the snap ring.
8. Remove the tripod joint.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4767
9. Remove the snap ring.
10. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
11. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
12. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint.
13. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make
sure of correct installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4768
14. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft.
15. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard.
16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft.
Assembly
NOTE: Make sure all components are clean and free of foreign material.
1. Lubricate the outboard CV joint with Ford High Temperature Constant Velocity Joint Grease
E43Z-19590-A or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESP-M1C207-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4769
2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot.
3. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip.
4. Use a soft-face hammer to install the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft.
5. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot
forward onto the outboard CV joint.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4770
6. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver
after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing.
7. Using the special tool, install two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
8. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
9. Install the snap ring.
10. Install the tripod joint on the halfshaft.
1 Line up the marks on the halfshaft and tripod joint.
2 Install the tripod joint on the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4771
11. Install the snap ring.
12. Lubricate the three tripod joint needle bearings.
^ Use Ford High Temp Constant Velocity Joint Grease E43Z-19590-A or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESP-M1C207A.
13. Fill the tripod joint housing with Ford High Temp Constant Velocity Joint Grease E43Z-19590-A
or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESP-M1C207A.
14. Position the tripod housing onto the tripod.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4772
15. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
1 Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
2 Position the inboard halfshaft boot clamp.
16. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after
adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing.
17. Using the special tool, install two new outboard joint boot clamps.
18. Remove the halfshaft from the vise. 19. Install the front wheel halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4773
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation, Rear Drive Half Shaft
Halfshaft
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the rear coil spring.
2. Remove and discard the nut.
3. CAUTION: Make sure to support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4774
4. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the knuckle.
5. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. Install the halfshaft into the differential.
2. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4775
3. Position the lower ball joint and install the nut.
4. Install the halfshaft nut. 5. Install the rear coil spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4776
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly, Rear Half Shaft Joint
Halfshaft Joint
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Disassembly
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. Secure the halfshaft and Constant Velocity (CV) joint in a vise using protective jaw covers.
3. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot clamps.
4. Slide the inboard halfshaft boot off the inboard CV joint housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4777
5. If reinstalling the original inner joint, mark the inner joint and the halfshaft to make sure of correct
installation.
6. Using a soft face hammer, separate the halfshaft from the inboard joint housing.
7. Remove and discard the bearing retainer circlip.
8. Remove and discard the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4778
9. Remove the inboard halfshaft boot from the halfshaft.
10. Remove the two outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
11. Slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot back out of the way exposing the outboard CV joint.
12. If reinstalling the original outboard CV joint, mark the outboard CV joint and halfshaft to make
sure of correct installation.
13. Use a soft-face hammer to separate the outboard CV joint by gently tapping it off the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4779
14. Remove the halfshaft bearing retainer circlip and discard.
15. Remove the snap ring from the halfshaft.
16. Slide the outboard halfshaft boot off of the halfshaft.
Assembly
1. Lubricate the inboard and outboard CV joint with joint grease.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4780
2. Install the outboard halfshaft boot.
3. Install the snap ring on the halfshaft.
4. Install a new halfshaft shaft bearing retainer circlip.
5. Use a soft-face hammer to install the inboard CV joint by gently tapping it onto the halfshaft.
6. Remove any excess grease on the mating surfaces and slide the outboard halfshaft joint boot
forward onto the outboard CV joint.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4781
7. Remove any excess air trapped in the outboard halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver
after adjusting the outboard halfshaft boot spacing.
8. Using the special tool, crimp two new outboard halfshaft boot clamps.
9. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
10. Install the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4782
11. Install the bearing retainer circlip.
12. Using a soft face hammer, install the halfshaft on the inboard joint.
13. Position the inboard halfshaft boot.
14. Remove any excess air trapped in the halfshaft boot using a cloth covered screwdriver after
adjusting the halfshaft boot spacing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation, Front Drive Half Shaft > Page 4783
15. Using the special tool, install two new inboard joint boot clamps. 16. Install the front wheel
halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4789
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4790
Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4791
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4792
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4793
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4794
Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4795
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4796
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4797
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4798
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4799
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4800
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4801
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4802
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4803
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1 Install the bolt.
2 Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS 13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18.
Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications
Driveshaft runout .................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 0.89 mm (0.03 inch) Driveshaft to power take off bolts
............................................................................................................................................................
37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4812
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair
Driveshaft
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never attempt to
remove any part of the system until it has cooled. Be especially careful when working around the
catalytic converters. The temperature of the converter rises to a high level after only a few minutes
of engine operation. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly 1. Place the selector lever in NEUTRAL 2. Raise and
support the vehicle.
Driveshaft assembly
3. Remove the ground strap bolt
4. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the pinion yoke. Install new bolts and straps.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove the rear driveshaft universal joint caps 1
Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the rear of the driveshaft
2 Remove and discard the bolts and straps
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly
5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers only or
damage to the vehicle may occur.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4813
Remove the six front driveshaft to power take off bolts and washers ^
Discard the bolts and washers
Driveshaft assembly
6. With the help of an assistant, remove the driveshaft.
^ Remove the center bearing nuts.
Front driveshaft
7. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and straps
or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove the front driveshaft. 1
Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
2 Remove and discard the bolts and caps.
Front driveshaft and driveshaft assembly
8. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index
the driveshaft.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications
Universal Joint: Specifications
Universal joint cap bolts .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4817
Universal Joint: Service and Repair
Universal Joint - Center and Rear
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and straps for either of the center U-joint or the pinion yoke
U-joint. Install new bolts and straps or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in length of the head of the replacement yoke strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
1. NOTE: Index the driveshaft yoke to the driveshaft.
Remove the driveshaft.
2. Clamp the special tool into a vise.
3. Remove the snap rings.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4818
4. Press out the bearing cups.
^ Rotate the driveshaft 180 degrees and repeat.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flexplate bolts .....................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4822
Flex Plate: Service and Repair
Flexplate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transaxle.
2. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Case, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Case: Specifications
Case cover bolts ..................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Transaxle case to flywheel housing bolts
.................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm
(33 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle
> Ring Gear, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ring Gear: Service and Repair
Flywheel Ring Gear
Removal
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. Remove the flywheel.
2. CAUTION: Tap the flywheel ring gear evenly to prevent binding.
Remove the flywheel ring gear from the flywheel. ^
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear and use a brass drift to drive the flywheel ring gear off the
flywheel
Installation
WARNING: This procedure should be carried out only by a correctly equipped and experienced
acetylene torch operator. To avoid personal injury, tongs must be used or asbestos gloves worn
when handling the heated flywheel ring gear. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
1. CAUTION: Do not heat the flywheel ring gear beyond 278°C (532°F). Use heat indicating
crayons to prevent overheating. Keep the torch
moving to prevent hot spots.
Evenly heat the flywheel ring gear
2. CAUTION: The bevel on the flywheel ring gear must face the rear of the flywheel.
Install the flywheel ring gear. ^
Use a brass drift to tap the flywheel ring gear into position.
3. Install the flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Drain Plug, M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Drain Plug: Specifications
Drain plug ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transmission
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................................... 2.3 Quarts Note: Approximate refill. Service refill
capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a
level surface.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4843
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Manual Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the halfshaft.
2. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Remove the halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4847
Using the special tool, install the new halfshaft seal.
2. Install the halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4852
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Shifter M/T: Specifications
Gearshift lever bolts .............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Stabilizer bar to transaxle bolt ..........................
........................................................................................................................................ 40 Nm (30 ft.
lbs.) Gearshift stabilizer bar to transaxle bolt
................................................................................................................................................... 40
Nm (30 ft. lbs.) Gearshift stabilizer bar to vehicle body nuts
............................................................................................................................................... 12 Nm
(9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Gearshift Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the gearshift stabilizer bar bolt.
2. Remove the gearshift stabilizer bar bushing. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Stabilizer Bar Bushing > Page 4858
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Stabilizer Bar
Gearshift Stabilizer Bar
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the gearshift lever. 2. Lower the vehicle.
3. Remove the nuts. 4. Raise and support the vehicle.
5. Remove the gearshift stabilizer bar bolt.
6. Remove the Gearshift stabilizer bar from the vehicle. 7. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Stabilizer Bar Bushing > Page 4859
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot
Gearshift Lever Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot.
1 Remove the gearshift lever knob.
2 Remove the center console trim and gearshift lever boot.
2. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the gearshift lever boot.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Shift Cable: Specifications
Gearshift cable to underbody bracket bolts
............................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80
inch lbs.) Gearshift cable bracket to interior body bolts
........................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17
ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4867
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4873
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4874
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4879
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4880
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4881
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4887
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4888
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4889
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4890
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4891
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4892
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
> Page 4898
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 4901
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 4902
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS)
Sensor Connector > Page 4903
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4906
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4907
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4908
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4913
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4918
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Specifications
Case: Specifications
Transfer case cover bolts ....................................................................................................................
...................................................... 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Capacity .......................................................................................................................
........................................................................... 12 oz. Note: The fluid level must be even with the
bottom of the filler hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4927
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.................... SAE 75W-140 synthetic gear lubricant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4931
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4932
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4933
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4937
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange
Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the transfer case.
2. CAUTION: Rotational torque of the companion flange must be measured and recorded for
correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled.
Using the special tool, remove the pinion nut.
3. CAUTION: Mark the companion flange relative to the pinion spline.
Using the special tool, remove the companion flange.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange > Page 4942
1. CAUTION: Install the companion flange to engage the spline as previously marked.
Using the special tool, install the companion flange.
2. CAUTION: Do not over tighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded.
Install the pinion nut.
3. Install the transfer case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange > Page 4943
Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange Dust Shield
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Flange Dust Shield
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the companion flange.
2. Remove the companion flange dust shield.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the companion flange dust shield. 2. Install the companion flange.
3. NOTE: Refill capacities are determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole.
Check the transfer case oil level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4948
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4949
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4950
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the companion flange.
2. Remove the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the transfer case rear output shaft (pinion) seal. 2. Install the
companion flange. 3. Fill the transfer case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4955
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Inner Halfshaft Seal
Transfer Case Inner Halfshaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
3. Remove the transfer case vent tube.
^ Remove the two bolts.
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. CAUTION: The transfer case cover is located to the case using two hollow dowels. Remove the
cover squarely from the dowels to avoid
cracking the cover bosses.
Remove the bolts and the transfer case cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4956
6. Remove the three gears.
7. Remove the inner seal.
8. CAUTION: Transfer case cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of grease prior to
applying new silicone sealant.
Clean the transfer case sealing surfaces.
Installation
1. Using the special tool, install the inner seal.
2. CAUTION: Take care not to roll the transfer case inner halfshaft seal lip when installing the drive
gear.
Install the three gears. 1
Install the drive gear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4957
^ Install the drive gear using a slight rotation to prevent damaging the transfer case inner halfshaft
seal.
2 Install the idler gear.
3 Install the driven gear.
3. CAUTION: The transfer case cover must be installed within 15 minutes of applying the silicone
sealant. If the time limit is exceeded, clean the
sealing surfaces and reapply.
NOTE: Apply a 1/8-inch bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the sealing surface of the transfer
case cover before installing on the transfer case.
Install the transfer case cover. ^
Install the bolts in a cross pattern.
4. Install a new dust shield.
5. Install the transfer case vent tube.
^ Install the bolts.
6. Install the transfer case. 7. Fill the transfer case. 8. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4958
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal RH
Halfshaft Seal RH
Special Tool(s)
Removal
NOTE: If the transfer case is leaking automatic transmission fluid, install a new transfer case driven
gear seal.
1. Remove the exhaust system crossover pipe.
2. Remove the heat shield.
^ Remove the bolts.
3. Remove the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4959
4. Remove and discard the dust shield.
5. Remove and discard the RH halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. Using the special tools, install the RH halfshaft seal.
2. Install the dust shield.
3. NOTE: Clean the intermediate shaft before assembly. Use 600 grit sandpaper on seal journals
and wipe dry.
Install the front drive axle intermediate shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4960
4. Install the heat shield.
^ Install the three bolts.
5. Install the exhaust system crossover pipe. 6. Check the transfer case oil level. 7. Check the
transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4961
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Transfer Case Driven Gear Seal
Transfer Case Driven Gear Seal
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Drain the transfer case. 2. Remove the transfer case.
3. Using the special tools, remove the driven gear seal.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Transfer Case Rear Output Shaft Oil Seal > Page 4962
1. NOTE: Clean the inside of the driven gear of foreign material prior to installation.
Using the special tools, install the driven gear seal.
2. Install the transfer case. 3. Fill the transfer case. 4. Check the transaxle fluid level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four
Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4967
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Differential > Solenoid, Differential Lock > Component Information
> Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4988
Shift Interlock Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Shift Interlock Relay > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 4989
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-29
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4994
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4995
Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4996
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Specifications
Transmission Range (TR) sensor bolts
....................................................................................................................................................... 12
Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5002
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5003
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5004
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Place the vehicle in NEUTRAL. 2. Disconnect the battery cables. 3. Remove the battery and
tray.
4. Disconnect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
5. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5005
6. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
7. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the thermostat housing to gain access to the
Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the Transmission Range (TR) sensor.
1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the TR sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position.
Install the Transmission Range (TR) sensor and loosely install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5006
2. Using the special tool align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts.
^ Connect the electrical connector.
3. Install the thermostat housing.
4. Install the air cleaner assembly.
5. Install the intake tube and air cleaner cover.
6. Connect the breather tube and Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor.
7. NOTE: Before installing the battery tray check the vent tube hose for any obstructions, kinks, or
incorrect routing position.
Install the battery and tray.
8. NOTE: When the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some abnormal drive
symptoms can occur while the vehicle relearns its
adaptive strategy. The vehicle may need to be driven 160 km (100 miles) or more to relearn the
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5007
Connect the battery cables.
9. Check the correct operation with parking brake control engaged. The engine should start only in
PARK or NEUTRAL. Backup lamps should be
active only in the REVERSE position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor bolt
.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor bolt
..................................................................................................................................................... 13
Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Locations > Output Shaft Speed Sensor > Page 5013
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 5016
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 5017
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Connector > Page 5018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield.
4. Remove the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor.
^ Disconnect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the OSS bore.
5. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5021
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring before installation.
Install the OSS sensor. ^
Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
2. Install the splash shield. 3. Install the LH front wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using MERCON(R) V Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-5-QM or equivalent meeting
MERCON(R) V specification.
6. Start the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5022
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the LH front wheel.
3. Remove the splash shield. 4. Place a drain pan beneath the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) sensor.
5. Remove the TSS sensor.
^ Disconnect the TSS sensor electrical connector.
^ Remove the bolt.
^ Inspect the TSS sensor bore.
6. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new seal as necessary.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 5023
1. NOTE: Apply a light coat of petroleum jelly to the O-ring seal before installation.
Install the TSS sensor. ^
Connect the TSS electrical connector (white connector).
2. Remove the drain pan.
3. Install the splash shield. 4. Install the LH front wheel. 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Check the
transmission fluid level, add fluid as necessary using clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start
the engine and move the transaxle range selector lever through all gear positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications
Transmission Speed Sensor: Specifications
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) bolt
............................................................................................................................................................
7 Nm (62 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5028
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the VSS. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5033
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Diode >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5050
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5051
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5052
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5053
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5054
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5055
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5056
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5057
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5058
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5059
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5060
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5061
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5062
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5063
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5064
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5065
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5066
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5067
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5068
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5069
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5070
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5071
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5072
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5073
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5074
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control Module: >
NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5084
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5085
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5086
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5087
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5088
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5089
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5090
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5091
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5092
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5093
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5094
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5095
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5097
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5098
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5099
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5100
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5101
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5102
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5103
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5104
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5105
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5106
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5107
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5108
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Electronic
Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5113
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5114
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5115
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications
Control module bolts1 ..........................................................................................................................
............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5119
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5120
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips > Page
5125
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5128
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5129
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5130
View 151-28
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5135
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5136
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5137
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove
the bolt and the sensor.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Wheel cylinder bleeder screws ............................................................................................................
.................................................... 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Bleeder screws ................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. (let medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system alter it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5143
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5144
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5145
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5146
with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic
system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5147
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5148
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed air may enter the system causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission plug the master cylinder feed port
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5149
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A DOT 3
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Bleeding - System > Page 5150
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
Brake Pedal
Pedal free play .....................................................................................................................................
..................................... 7.8-12 mm (0.3-0.47 inch) Brake pedal bracket nuts ....................................
................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 5154
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Brake Pedal Position (BPP) switch. 2. If equipped, remove the speed control
deactivator switch.
3. Disconnect the push rod from the brake pedal pin.
^ Remove the cotter pin and bushing.
4. Remove the brake pedal and bracket.
^ Remove the nuts.
5. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Disc brake caliper bleeder screws
.............................................................................................................................................................
16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) ....................................................................
.............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate
bolts
...........................................................................................................................................................
150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts .............................................................................................
....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts
2 Position the caliper aside
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5161
with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action.
This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic
system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5162
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must
be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5163
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and
may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore
NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5164
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake backing plate bolts ....................................................................................................................
..................................................... 66 Nm (49 ft. lbs.) Brake lining thickness ......................................
.................................................................................................................................... 12.75 mm
(0.50 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5168
Brake Pad: Service and Repair
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous to
health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the brake pads.
^ Remove the outer brake pad from the anchor
^ Remove the inner brake pad from the caliper piston
5. To install reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Front Brake Rotor/Disc
Rotor thickness mm (in) .......................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 24.00 (0.94) Rotor minimum thickness mm (in)
.............................................................................................................................................................
22.00 (0.8661) Rotor mount mm (in) ...................................................................................................
................................................................................... 0.05 (0.002) Front disc brake rotor Runout
mm (in)
.............................................................................................................................................................
0.1 (0.004)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications > Page 5172
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair
Brake Disc
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
2. Remove the brake disc retaining clips (if equipped) and the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the
removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications
Backing Plate: Specifications
Brake backing plate bolts ....................................................................................................................
..................................................... 66 Nm (49 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5177
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
4. Remove the brake backing plate.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Rear Brake Drum
Maximum inside Diameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
230.10 mm (9.0590 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5181
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Special Tool(s)
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust can be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled. Brake and clutch assemblies must be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner
recommended for use with asbestos filters, such as brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be
labeled per the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) instructions, sealed, and the trash
hauler notified as to the bag's contents. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
WARNING: If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning must be done wet. If dust
generation is still possible, technicians must wear government-approved toxic dust purifying
respirators. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) requires where asbestos dust
generation is possible to be isolated and posted with warning signs. Only technicians carrying out
brake or clutch repair are to be present in the area. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both
ends of an axle.
1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly.
2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
3. If the brake drums will not come off follow these steps.
1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw
2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5182
4. Using the special tool. measure the brake drum inside diameter.
^ Install a new brake drum if the maximum inside diameter exceeds the specification shown on the
outside of the brake drum.
Installation
1. NOTE: If adjusting the rear brakes refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment.
Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
2. WARNING: Whenever a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign material
present on the mounting surfaces of
the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel.
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause
the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, causing loss of
control. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Clean the wheel hub mounting surface and wheel pilot.
3. Install the tire and wheel assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake shoe thickness
Minimum mm (in) .................................................................................................................................
................................................................ 1 (0.04) Standard mm (in) ..................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. 4.5
(0.17)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5186
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
Special Tool(s)
1. Remove the brake drum.
2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the
brake drum.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5187
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Use the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum to remove brake dust and dirt
from the brake assemblies.
3. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed. resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to ensure an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing wild also correct out-of-round and bell conditions.
Inning the special tool, measure the braking surface diameter. If the inside diameter measures
more than the maximum specification shown on the outside of the brake drum. install a new brake
drum.
4. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
5. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5188
6. Remove the lower spring.
7. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
8. Remove the self adjuster lever.
9. Remove the self adjuster and spring assembly.
^ Return the self adjuster to the fully seated position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5189
10. Remove the parking brake lever.
1 Remove the horseshoe clip.
2 Remove the parking brake lever.
11. Inspect the rear brake shoes for minimum thickness above the backing plate, and install new as
necessary. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in)
............................................................................................................................................................
23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting
................................................................................................................................................... 14
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................
............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5195
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5196
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap.
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots.
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Specifications
Brake Bleeding: Specifications
Wheel cylinder bleeder screws ............................................................................................................
.................................................... 8 Nm (71 inch lbs.) Bleeder screws ................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - System
Brake System Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
Anti-Lock Brakes Bleed
NOTE: Bleeding the Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the
HCU or master cylinder, or opening the lines to the HCU.
1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent
bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic
system through the bleeder screws.
NOTE: Adequate voltage to the HCU module is required during the anti-lock control portion of the
system bleed.
Connect the diagnostic tool.
2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION. Go to the Tool Tab-Chassis-Braking-ABS Service
Bleed and follow the directions on the diagnostic
tool.
3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of two
diagnostic tool cycles and two manual bleed cycles.
Manual Bleed
Brake system
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. (let medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system alter it has been correctly connected.
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5203
Rear drum brakes
3. Attach a rubber drain hose to the rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a
container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times
and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Loosen the bleeder screw until fluid flow stops.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and tighten the bleeder screw. 6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until
clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows.
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system.
Front disc brakes
9. Attach a rubber drain hose to the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free
end of the hose in a container partially filled with
clean brake fluid.
10. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal 10 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake
pedal. 11. Loosen the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw until fluid flow stops. Maintain pressure
on the brake pedal and tighten the front disc brake
caliper bleeder screw.
12. Repeat Steps 10 and 11 until clear, bubble-free fluid flows.
13. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5204
14. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Gravity Bleed
Brake system
1. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
2. Begin bleeding the system, going in order from the RH rear wheel, to the LH rear wheel, then to
the RH front wheel and ending with the LH front
wheel.
Rear drum brakes
3. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Loosen the rear wheel cylinder bleeder screw and leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
4. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5205
Front disc brakes
5. CAUTION: Be sure to check the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir often. Do
not let it run dry.
Open the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. Leave open until clear bubble-free brake fluid
flows.
6. Tighten the front disc brake caliper bleeder screw.
7. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with fluid and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Brake System Pressure Bleeding
Special Tool(s)
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5206
with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic
system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with brake fluid.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
3. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install Brake Bleeder to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the Brake Bleeder tank
hose to the fitting on the adapter.
4. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose
in a container partially filled with clean brake fluid. 5. Open the valve on the Brake Bleeder tank.
6. Loosen the bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then close the
bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5207
7. Tighten the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. 8. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in
order from the LH rear wheel to the RH front wheel, ending with the LH front wheel. 9. Close the
Brake Bleeder tank valve and remove the tank hose from the adapter, and remove the adapter.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir and install the reservoir cap.
^ Use High Performance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford
specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5208
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Bleeding - Components
Component Bleeding
Brake Master Cylinder-Bench Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed air may enter the system causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Support the brake master cylinder body in a soft jaw vise
2. Remove the master cylinder cap and install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports
with the ends submerged in the brake master
cylinder reservoir
3. NOTE: If equipped with a manual transmission plug the master cylinder feed port
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5209
Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance DOT 3 brake fluid C6AZ-19542-AB
or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A DOT 3
4. Slowly depress the primary piston until bubble -free brake fluid flows from both brake hoses 5.
Remove the brake hoses from the master cylinder.
6. Install plugs in the front and rear brake outlet port. 7. Install the reservoir cap and install the
brake master cylinder in the vehicle.
^ Remove the master cylinder outlet port plugs before installing the lines
Brake Master Cylinder-In-Vehicle Bleed
WARNING: Use of any other than the approved DOT 3 brake will cause permanent damage to
brake components and will render the brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with the specified brake fluid. Never reuse
the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component is installed, air may enter the system, causing spongy brake pedal action. This requires
the bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
1. Disconnect the brake outlet lines from the brake master cylinder and cap the lines.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Bleeding - System > Page 5210
2. Install short brake hoses to the master cylinder outlet ports with the ends submerged in the
brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
4. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows from both brake
hoses.
5. Remove the short brake hoses and install the brake outlet lines. 6. Bleed the hydraulic brake
system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Caliper: Specifications
Disc brake caliper bleeder screws
.............................................................................................................................................................
16 Nm (12 ft. lbs.) Front disc brake caliper bore mm (in) ....................................................................
.............................................................................................. 60.0 (2.36) Brake caliper anchor plate
bolts
...........................................................................................................................................................
150 Nm (111 ft. lbs.) Brake caliper bolts .............................................................................................
....................................................................................... 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.) Brake line to caliper .......
..............................................................................................................................................................
............. 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation
Brake Caliper
Removal
WARNING: Asbestos fiber dust may be present on brake and clutch assemblies and is hazardous
to health if inhaled.
Brake and clutch assemblies should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner recommended for use
with asbestos fibers such as a brake/clutch/service vacuum. The bag must be labeled per OSHA
instructions, sealed, and the trash hauler notified as to the bag's contents.
If a vacuum suitable for asbestos is not available, cleaning should be done wet. If dust generation
is still possible, technicians should wear government-approved toxic dust purifying respirators.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip
3. Position the caliper aside
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and bolts
2 Position the caliper aside
4. WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling. If
brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Get medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical attention
immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding
operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled the specified brake fluid. Never reuse the
brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5216
with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or a new
component has been installed, air may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action.
This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected. The hydraulic
system can be bled manually or with a Brake Bleeder.
Disconnect and cap the brake line from the caliper and remove the caliper.
5. CAUTION: Do no use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic systems. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5217
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
Brake Caliper
Disassembly
1. Remove front disc brake caliper from the vehicle.
2. Remove the front caliper slide pins and boots.
3. Remove the dust seal.
4. WARNING: Use only as much compressed air as necessary to remove the piston. Excessive
pressure can force the piston out of the
caliper bore with enough force to cause personal injury. Never attempt to catch the piston by hand
as it comes out of the bore. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or any other similar tool to pry the piston out of the bore.
Piston damage could result.
NOTE: Inspect the piston for wear, rust, or pits. If any of these conditions exist, a new piston must
be installed.
Remove the caliper piston. 1
Position a block of wood between the piston and the disc brake caliper.
2 Apply compressed air to caliper to remove piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5218
5. Remove the bleeder screw.
6. CAUTION: Use a plastic or wooden pick to remove the piston seal from the caliper bore. A metal
tool may scratch or nick the seal groove, which
could result in a seal leak.
NOTE: Inspect the caliper bore for wear, rust or pits If any of these conditions exist, do not hone; a
new caliper must be installed
Remove the piston seal.
Assembly
CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol to clean rubber components or assemblies that have
rubber components. Cleaning rubber components with denatured alcohol weakens the rubber and
may result in failure of the component.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all rubber seals and flex hoses replaced. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT
3.
NOTE: Be sure the seal is not twisted and is firmly seated in the caliper bore
NOTE: Clean all brake caliper components. All parts must be air-dried completely Coat all internal
parts and piston seal with High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A. DOT 3 before installation.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation > Page 5219
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the brake caliper clip.
3. Position the caliper aside.
1 Remove the brake caliper bolt caps and the bolts.
2 Position the caliper aside and support.
4. Remove the outboard brake pad.
5. Remove the bolts and brake caliper anchor plate. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Brake Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Fill to the line on the reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5224
Brake Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications
Fluid Type .........................................................................................................................................
High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5228
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5229
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float
and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate.
Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system
to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder
reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Hose/Line: Specifications
Brake line fitting to brake pressure control valve fittings
......................................................................................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Brake line master cylinder fittings
............................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5233
Brake Hose/Line: Description and Operation
Brake Lines and Hoses
CAUTION: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion which could
result in brake tube failure.
Steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube fittings must be correctly
double flared to provide strong leakproof connections.
If a section of brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be removed and a new tube of the
same type, size, shape and length installed.
When installing new hydraulic brake lines, hoses, or connectors, tighten all connections securely.
After installation, bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination
Valve > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Specifications
Brake pressure control valve bolts
.......................................................................................................................................................... 9
Nm (80 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination
Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5237
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Description and Operation
Brake Pressure Control Valve
The brake pressure control valve proportions the pressure to the rear brakes. ^
When the brake pedal is applied, brake fluid pressure passes through the brake pressure control
valve to the rear brake system until the valve split point is reached.
^ Above its split point, the brake pressure control valve begins to reduce the hydraulic pressure to
the rear brakes, creating a balanced braking condition between the front and rear brakes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Proportioning/Combination
Valve > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5238
Brake Proportioning/Combination Valve: Service and Repair
Brake Pressure Control Valve
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake pressure control valve.
1 Disconnect the six brake line fittings and plug the brake lines.
2 Remove the brake pressure control valve bolts
2. To install reverse the removal procedure
^ Bleed the brake system
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Specifications
Control module bolts1 ..........................................................................................................................
............................................ 1-2 Nm (9-17 inch lbs.) Hydraulic control unit (HCU) to bracket bolts
........................................................................................................................................ 8 Nm (71
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5242
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
4. Disconnect the brake lines.
5. Remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5243
6. Remove the bolts and the HCU.
7. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
Remove the screws and the control module, if necessary.
8. NOTE: Bleed the HCU after performing this procedure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Brake Master Cylinder: Specifications
Brake line master cylinder fittings
...........................................................................................................................................................
15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) Brake master cylinder ............................................................................................
................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Master cylinder nuts ...........
..............................................................................................................................................................
........ 17 Nm (13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder
The brake master cylinder is a dual-piston type. The brake master cylinder operates as follows: ^
When the brake pedal is depressed, pressure is applied by mechanical linkage to the primary and
secondary piston.
^ Brake master cylinder pistons apply hydraulic pressure to the two hydraulic circuits.
The brake master cylinder consists of the following components: ^
brake master cylinder reservoir
^ brake master cylinder body
^ primary piston
^ secondary piston
^ snap ring
Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must be
installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5249
Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder reservoir is removed from the brake master cylinder,
new seals must be installed.
The brake master cylinder reservoir: ^
is mounted to the brake master cylinder.
^ holds fluid supply for each brake master cylinder hydraulic piston.
^ provides visual fluid level markings.
^ contains the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the reservoir is shared with the clutch master
cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector 2. Using a suitable suction
device drain the brake master cylinder reservoir
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Disconnect the brake lines and plug the lines and the brake master cylinder ports.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5252
5. NOTE: Whenever the brake master cylinder is removed from the brake booster, new nuts must
be installed.
Remove the nuts and the brake master cylinder.
6. NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals. Lubricate
the new seals with clean brake fluid.
Transfer the brake master cylinder reservoir if a new master cylinder is to be installed. 1
Lubricate the two O-ring seals with clean brake fluid and insert into the brake master cylinder.
2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the O-ring seals until it snaps into the brake master
cylinder securely.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the master cylinder.
^ If equipped with manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5253
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Remove the brake master cylinder. 2. Clean the outside of the brake master cylinder.
3. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
4. Remove the seals.
5. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5254
6. Remove the primary and secondary piston.
7. NOTE: If the brake master cylinder bore is damaged a new brake master cylinder must be
installed.
Use isopropyl alcohol to clean and inspect the brake master cylinder bore for damage.
Assembly
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Use clean brake fluid to lubricate the new piston assembly seals and the brake master cylinder
bore.
2. Install the secondary piston assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5255
3. Install the primary piston assembly
4. Install the snap ring.
5. Install the seals
^ Lubricate the seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
6. Install the brake master cylinder reservoir.
^ Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
7. Install master cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5256
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
1. Disconnect the fluid level electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, drain the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
3. If equipped with manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed.
4. Remove the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Installation
NOTE: Whenever installing a new brake master cylinder reservoir, install new seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5257
1. Install the new brake master cylinder reservoir.
1 Lubricate the two seals with clean brake fluid and insert the seals into the brake master cylinder.
2 Press the brake master cylinder reservoir into the seals until it snaps in securely.
3 Connect the brake master cylinder fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. If equipped with manual transmission, connect the clutch master cylinder feed.
^ Bleed the clutch master cylinder.
3. Bleed the master cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Specifications
Wheel Cylinder: Specifications
Wheel cylinder inner diameter mm (in)
............................................................................................................................................................
23.81 (0.937) Brake line to rear wheel cylinder fitting
................................................................................................................................................... 14
Nm (10 ft. lbs.) Rear wheel cylinder bolts ............................................................................................
............................................................................... 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear brake drum. 2. Using the Brake/Clutch/Service Vacuum, remove brake dust
and dirt from the brake assemblies.
3. Remove the parking brake cable from the parking brake cable lever.
4. Remove the hold-down clips and pins.
5. Remove the lower spring.
6. Remove the rear brake shoes.
1 Pull the bottom of the brake shoe forward.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5263
2 Release the upper return spring.
3 Remove both brake shoes together.
7. WARNING: Use of any other than approved DOT 4 or DOT 3 brake fluid will cause permanent
damage to brake components and will
render brakes inoperative. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
WARNING: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with eyes. Wash
hands thoroughly after handling. If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15
minutes. Get medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce
vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a
painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water.
NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air
may get into the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires the bleeding of the
hydraulic system after it has been correctly connected.
Disconnect the brake line fitting from the wheel cylinder.
8. Remove the wheel cylinder.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the wheel cylinder.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 5264
Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder.
2. CAUTION: Do not use denatured alcohol for flushing the brake system or cleaning assemblies
where alcohol could be trapped. If denatured
alcohol is trapped, it can cause eventual failure of rubber components in the system.
CAUTION: Never allow any petroleum product or mineral oil to contact the inside of a brake
hydraulic system. Mineral oil and petroleum products deteriorate the natural rubber seals used in
brake hydraulic system. If a brake system becomes contaminated, it must be flushed with clean
brake fluid and all new rubber seals and flex hoses must be installed. Use High Performance DOT
3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
Disassemble the rear wheel cylinder. 1
Remove the bleeder screw cap.
2 Remove the bleeder screw.
3 Remove the dust boots.
4 Remove the pistons and piston seals.
5 Remove the spring.
3. Inspect the rear wheel cylinder bore for wear, rust or pits. If any of these conditions exist, install
a new wheel cylinder.
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Always install new piston seals and dust boots when assembling the rear wheel
cylinder. Always lubricate the bore with new brake
fluid. Use High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AB or equivalent
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A, DOT 3.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications
Parking Brake Cable: Specifications
Parking brake cable bracket bolt .........................................................................................................
...................................................... 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.) Parking brake cable equalizer bracket bolt
.............................................................................................................................................. 9 Nm (80
inch lbs.) Rear parking brake cable bracket bolts
..................................................................................................................................................... 23
Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Rear parking brake cable to knuckle bracket bolts
................................................................................................................................... 23 Nm (17 ft.
lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5269
Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments
Parking Brake Cable Adjustment
Vehicle with low series floor console
1. Remove the floor console front finish panel.
1 If equipped, remove the manual transmission shift knob by turning counterclockwise.
2 Remove the floor console front finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
Vehicle with high series floor console
3. Remove the floor console finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console finish panel.
All vehicles
4. Remove the adjustment nut clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5270
5. Turn the parking brake control adjustment nut so that the parking brake control stroke is three to
five notches when pulled. 6. Confirm the parking brake is applied. 7. Install the adjustment nut clip.
Vehicle with high series floor console
8. Install the floor console rear finish panel.
Vehicle with low series floor console
9. Install the floor console rear finish panel.
10. Install the floor console front finish panel.
^ If equipped, install the manual transmission shifter knob by turning clockwise.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Front
Removal and Installation
All Vehicles
1. Remove the parking brake control.
With Floor Console
2. Remove the two bolts and the floor console bracket.
Without Floor Console
3. Remove the LH front seat.
4. Remove the LH front door scuff plate. 5. Remove the LH lower A-pillar trim panel. 6. Remove the
LH front safety belt. 7. Pull back carpet to gain access to the console bracket. 8. Remove the two
bolts and the floor console bracket.
All Vehicles
9. Raise and support the vehicle.
10. Remove the front parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the parking brake cable from the RH side rear parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the parking brake cable equalizer.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5273
Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Rear
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear drum brake shoes.
ABS-equipped vehicles
2. Remove the ABS cable bracket bolt.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear parking brake cable to trailing arm bracket bolts.
4. Disconnect the rear parking brake cable from the backing plates.
5. Remove the rear parking brake cable bracket bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Front > Page 5274
6. Remove the RH side rear parking brake cable.
1 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the front parking brake cable.
2 Disconnect the RH side rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable
support bracket.
7. Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable to fuel tank support strap.
8. Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
9. Remove the LH rear parking brake cable.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Disconnect the LH rear parking brake cable from the body-mounted parking brake cable support
bracket.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Specifications
Parking Brake Control: Specifications
Parking brake control bolts ..................................................................................................................
..................................................... 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5278
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. 2. Release the parking brake control.
3. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the parking brake adjusting nut.
5. Remove the parking brake control.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the parking brake cable.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5282
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5283
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5288
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The brake booster consists of the following components: ^
power brake booster
^ vacuum booster hose
^ power brake booster check valve
The power brake booster reduces the effort required to push the brake pedal to actuate the brakes
The vacuum booster hose supplies vacuum to the brake booster.
The vacuum booster check valve closes when the engine is turned off and traps engine vacuum in
the power brake booster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5289
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
Brake Booster-Operation Check
1. Inspect all vacuum hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors must be capped
Hoses and their connections must be correctly secured
and in good condition with no holes, cracks, or collapsed areas.
2. Check the brake hydraulic system for leaks or insufficient brake fluid. Repair as necessary. 3.
With the engine off, place the transaxle in PARK (A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking
brake.
4. NOTE: If the power brake booster is noisy when the brakes are applied, a new component must
be installed.
Press the brake pedal several times to exhaust all of the vacuum from the system.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal. 6. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake
pedal will move downward under constant foot pressure. If no movement occurs, the
power brake booster system is not functioning.
7. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 8. Place the transaxle in PARK
(A/T) or NEUTRAL (M/T) and apply the parking brake. Start the engine. Manifold vacuum should
be available from
the vacuum booster hose. If manifold vacuum is not available, inspect all of the hoses and hose
connections. Repair as necessary.
9. Reconnect the vacuum booster hose and run the engine at fast idle for 10 seconds.
10. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. 11. Apply the brake pedal with
approximately 89 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as normal
power assisted brake
operation for at least one application. If the brake pedal feel is normal, then the power brake
booster is OK. If the brake pedal feels hard, continue with the test.
12. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. Apply 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg) of
vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum
does not leak off after l0 minutes, install a new power brake booster. If the Vacuum does leak off.
install a new check valve and/or new vacuum booster hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5290
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the brake pedal push rod cotter pin and washer.
2. Remove the four power brake booster pushrod bracket nuts.
3. Disconnect the brake pedal pushrod.
3.0 L (4V)
4. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve and position it aside.
1 Disconnect the cable locator.
2 Remove the nuts.
3 Position the evaporative emission canister purge valve aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5291
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the master cylinder and position aside.
^ Remove the nuts
^ Position the master cylinder aside.
6. Remove the brake booster.
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose.
2 Remove the brake booster.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
Check Valve
1. Remove the vacuum booster hose from the power brake booster. 2. APPLY 57.3 kPa (17 in-Hg)
of vacuum to the vacuum booster hose. If the vacuum does not leak off after ten minutes. the
check valve is OK.
Otherwise, install a new check valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5304
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5305
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5306
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5307
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5308
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5309
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5310
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5311
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5312
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5313
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5314
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5315
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5316
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5317
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5318
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5319
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5320
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5321
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5322
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5323
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5324
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5325
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5326
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5328
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Electronic Brake Control
Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: Recalls Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair
Technical Service Bulletin # 07S51S2 Date: 091009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5338
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes. OASIS was activated April 10, 2007.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes. Available through the website. Owner names and addresses were made available April 30,
2007.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5339
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles have been directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter and schedule a
service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251 Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that include other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This safety recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous repair.
Claiming a refund will not close the recall on the vehicle.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 07S51 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
If an ABS module needs to be ordered, Ford Motor Company will pay for a rental vehicle, except
for fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP)
guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle
was used in the Miscellaneous Expense area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Handling Allowance: An allowance of $1.00 per repair is being provided to cover the costs of
locally obtained materials and XG-12 Electrical Grease. To claim the allowance, enter $1.00 as
"HANDLG" in the "MISC EXPENSE" area of the claim form.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5340
^ Refund or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line
on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires approval from Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires approval from Special Service Support Center.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5341
Parts will not be direct shipped for this program Order your parts requirements through normal
order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this safety recall is 50376.
Questions regarding parts should be directed to the Special Support Center or E-mailed.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN
Affected ABS Modules (Part number YL8Z-2C065-AA and YL8Z-2B373-BA) and the removed ABS
connector are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center
(WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition
and return instructions.
Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return
Procedures".
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program includes making sure the wiring harness connector is properly sealed against
moisture/contamination, and inspecting the ABS module for evidence of corrosion resulting from an
inadequately sealed connector.
During the inspection, we expect that most of the affected vehicles will not have any evidence of
corrosion in the ABS module. However, the ABS wiring harness connector still needs to be
inspected for missing or improperly seated seals and/or incorrect connector number.
If the ABS module is corroded, the ABS module and connector must be replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5342
A flow chart has been developed to help direct you to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
Inspect Connector Seals
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. NOTE: When disconnecting the ABS module connector, be sure the blue connector lock stays
engaged with the harness connector and does not
remain in the module. Remove it from the module if necessary and make sure the white 0-ring seal
is properly installed.
Disconnect the ABS module 25-pin connector by sliding the lock mechanism out (towards the
passenger side of the vehicle) and pulling the connector off the module.
3. Disconnect the speed sensor harness, then remove the 2 harness retainers from the studs and
position the harness above the air cleaner assembly to
provide access for inspection.
4. Inspect the top of the ABS module connector cover for 2 yellow "X" marks.
^ If 2 yellow "X" marks are present, perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If no yellow "X" marks are present, proceed to Step 5.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5343
5. Inspect the ABS module connector pins for corrosion. See Figure 2.
^ If corrosion is present, perform Labor Operation E - Install Pigtail, New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
^ If corrosion is not present, proceed to Step 6.
6. CAUTION: Do not cut any of the harness wires or the wire insulation when cutting off the tie
strap.
Remove the tie strap from the connector dress cover, then slide the cover off the connector. See
Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5344
7. Verify the wire seals are present on the 4 heavier gauge wires. See Figure 4.
8. Verify the numbers 054" are stamped on the slide-lock end of the mat cover (wipe the mat cover
clean if necessary to view). See Figure 5.
NOTE:
Mat covers with any other number will be missing plugs in the unused pin locations.
9. Perform Labor Operation C - Install Pigtail and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ any seals are missing or,
^ if the number on the mat cover is not "054".
10. Perform Labor Operation D - Seat Connector and Apply Electrical Grease if:
^ Any of the 4 wire seals are not fully seated in the connector cavities.
^ Each seal should sit approximately 1-2 mm (1/16 in) below the top of the round cavity. See Figure
4.
11. Perform Labor Operation A - Apply Electrical Grease if:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5345
^ The module is not corroded. and
^ All seals are present. and
^ All seals are fully seated. and
^ The number on the mat cover is "054".
LABOR OPERATION A - APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 6.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 6. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess
amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a "hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
2. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
3. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION C - INSTALL PIGTAIL AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5346
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 7.
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 8.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 8.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5347
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/2 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 9.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5348
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 10.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 11.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5349
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 12.
8. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 13.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5350
connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover the 4 flat pins. See Figure 13. DO NOT
spread the grease around the connector. Applying an excess amount of grease into the connector
cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the connector will not be able to be seated fully or
locked in place.
9. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
10. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
11. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the instrument cluster for approximately 3
seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION D - SEAT CONNECTOR SEALS AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
1. If the seals are not fully seated, reseat any seals not fully seated with a blunt tool. DO NOT use
anything sharp such as a screwdriver, awl or punch that could penetrate the seal and allow
moisture to enter the terminal. See Figure 14.
2. Reinstall the dress cover and use electrical tape to secure the cover at the same location where
the original tie strap was removed. Apply Motorcraft
Electrical Grease XG-12 to the ABS module connector, position and connect the harness as
follows:
a) Reinstall the dress cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5351
b) Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 15.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 15. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
3. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
4. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
LABOR OPERATION E - INSTALL PIGTAIL, NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL
GREASE
IMPORTANT SERVICE INFORMATION
When performing the service pigtail installation, it is critical that the crimp tool and the flameless
heat gun found in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit / 64-R5903 be used.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5352
USING DIFFERENT TOOLS MAY RESULT IN A POOR QUALITY REPAIR. See Figure 16.
PROCEDURE TO REPLACE VEHICLE HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Remove the tape and the convolute from the vehicle harness which leads up to the ABS module
connector. See Figure 17.
2. Measure approximately 75 mm (3 in) from the end of the elbow towards the ABS module
connector, then, using suitable wire cutters, cut the harness
(all wires) to the same length. See Figure 17.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5353
3. Strip approximately 6 mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each of the cut wires in the harness. See
Figure 18.
CAUTION:
The harness contains a 16-gauge red wire and a 20-gauge red wire with a pink tracer. DO NOT
cross these wires when splicing in the service pigtail. As an assembly aid, the 16-gauge red wire
on the service pigtail is identified by a small tag.
Also, it is possible that some discoloration of the insulation may occur. Sets of wires may appear to
have the same color insulation when, in fact, all wires in the ABS module harness are different
except for the 2 black ground circuit wires. Be sure to carefully examine each wire to avoid crossing
circuits when splicing wires.
NOTE:
The harness contains 2 black wires of the same size. Both are grounds (circuit 57). Crossing these
wires has no adverse effect on vehicle operation.
NOTE:
The service pigtail kit contains the connector with wires matching color and size of the original
vehicle harness and a piece of heat shrink tubing to cover each splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5354
4. Working with one wire at a time, match the wires from the service pigtail to the vehicle harness.
Insert the stripped end of each wire into the splice
connector and crimp using the crimp tool provided in the Rotunda Wire Splice Tool Kit 164-R5903.
See Figure 19.
5. Using rosin core solder, solder only the vehicle harness side of the wires to the butt splice
connector.
6. After soldering the wires, center each piece of heat shrink tubing over the splice. Then, using the
flameless heat gun provided in the Rotunda Kit,
shrink one piece of tubing at a time until the adhesive flows out of both ends. Continue until all
wires are insulated. See Figure 20.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5355
7. Install the supplied convolute tubing over the spliced area and secure with electrical tape. Apply
tape to the entire length of the convolute and be sure
to secure the convolute to the elbow at one end, and as close as possible to the ABS connector on
the other. See Figure 21.
8. Install a new ABS module. Perform Labor Operation F - Install New ABS Module and Apply
Electrical Grease.
9. Reconnect the battery negative terminal.
10. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position. Allow the ABS to carry out a self-test (indicated by
illuminating the yellow ABS warning indicator in the
instrument cluster for approximately 3 seconds).
^ If the yellow ABS indicator is not illuminated after 3 seconds, release the vehicle.
^ If the yellow ABS warning indicator stays illuminated after the self-test, contact the Special
Support Service Center.
LABOR OPERATION F - INSTALL NEW ABS MODULE AND APPLY ELECTRICAL GREASE
NOTE:
Module configuration or reprogramming is not required when installing a new ABS module.
1. Disconnect the 2-wire electrical connector at the ABS module.
2. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
3. Remove the screws and the ABS module.
4. Position the new module and install the screws. Tighten the screws no more than 2 Nm (18
lb-in).
5. Lower the hoist.
6. Apply Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-1 2 to the ABS module connector, position and connect
the harness as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5356
^ Use ONLY Motorcraft Electrical Grease XG-12. See Figure 22.
- With the tip of the applicator tube snipped off, position the end of the tip between the 4 large flat
pins at the bottom of the ABS module connector. Squeeze out enough grease to completely cover
the 4 flat pins. See Figure 22. DO NOT spread the grease around the connector. Applying an
excess amount of grease into the connector cavity will cause a hydro lock" condition in which the
connector will not be able to be seated fully or locked in place.
7. Reposition the harness to its original position, install the retainers to the studs to secure the
harness and connect it to the ABS module.
8. Reconnect the 2-wire connector to the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5357
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5358
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5359
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5360
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > 07S51S2 > Oct > 09 > Recall - ABS Module Connector Inspection/Repair > Page 5362
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Electronic Brake Control Module: > NHTSA07V156000 > Mar > 07 > Recall 07V156000: ABS Module Connector Defect
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 07V156000: ABS Module
Connector Defect
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2004 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 07V156000 MFR'S REPORT DATE: March 30, 2007
COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Antilock: Control Unit/Module
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 446460
SUMMARY: On certain sport utility vehicles equipped with Antilock Brakes (ABS), the ABS module
connector may have missing or dislodged wire seals. This condition could allow contamination to
enter the module connector, creating a potential for an electrical short.
CONSEQUENCE: An electrical short might cause an ABS malfunction that would illuminate the
ABS warning light, and in some cases, the module may overheat resulting in burning odor, smoke,
and/or fire. This condition could occur either when the vehicle ignition switch is in the off position or
while the vehicle is being operated.
Remedy: Dealers will inspect the wire harness connector to the ABS module for missing or
dislodged wire seals, and repair or replace the harness connector as appropriate. The dealer will
also inspect the connector on the ABS module and replace it if it is found to be corroded or
damaged. The recall began on April 23, 2007. Owners may contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 07S51. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to
http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5367
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5368
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5369
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Module-Anti-Lock Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Raise and support the vehicle.
4. Remove the screws and the control module.
5. NOTE: The 4x2 module cannot be interchanged with the 4x4 module. The 4x4 module is
interchangeable with the 4x2 module.
To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5375
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch
The brake fluid level warning switch is an integral part of the brake master cylinder reservoir. It
consists of a float containing a magnet and a reed switch mounted in the bottom of the brake
master cylinder reservoir.
When the brake fluid in the brake master cylinder reservoir gets to a predetermined level, the float
and magnet actuates the reed switch that causes the red brake warning indicator to illuminate.
Loss of brake fluid from either the primary (front) or secondary (rear) system will cause this system
to activate. If the brake fluid level warning switch is inoperative, a new brake master cylinder
reservoir must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5380
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
Wheel Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips
TSB 04-23-2
11/29/04
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE When servicing the wheel speed sensors on a 2001-2005 Escape or 2005 Mariner and
Escape Hybrid, care must be taken during removal to prevent damage. The wheel speed sensor
wire has a body plug attached to it. This plug can be damaged if not removed correctly, such as
removal for pinpoint testing. If the body plug is damaged, sensor replacement may be necessary
even though the sensor is functional in all other respects.
ACTION
When removing the body plug, rotate the plug into a position which allows the use of a small
screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body plug. These two tabs are at right
angles (directly above and below) to the sensor wire. See Figures 1 and 2 for reference.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > ABS/TCS - Wheel Speed Sensor Removal Tips >
Page 5385
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front
View 151-14
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5388
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5389
View 151-27
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Left front > Page 5390
View 151-28
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5393
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5394
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 5395
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5396
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Sensor-Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Detach the grommet from the body and pull the connector through the hole.
3. Disconnect the sensor wiring.
4. Detach the retainer.
5. Remove the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5397
6. NOTE: Clean off any dirt that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove
the bolt and the sensor.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Switch > Page 5404
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5407
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5415
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5420
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5423
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5424
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5425
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly.
3. Remove the fuse junction box cover.
4. Remove the cables.
1 Remove the nuts and cable.
2 Release the lock clip and pull down on the connector.
5. Remove the bolt from the inner fender bolt.
6. Remove the battery ground cable bolt and the cable from the top of the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5430
7. Disconnect the harness clip retainer.
8. Remove the cable ends from starter solenoid.
1 Remove the upper nut.
2 Remove the lower nut.
9. Remove the cable harness from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
Output Amps ........................................................................................................................................
................................................................. 110 Amps Generator .........................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
95 amp Generator Output ....................................................................................................................
................................................................... At Least 58 amps voltage (Running At 2,000 RPM) ........
.......................................................................................................................................................
13.0 - 15.0 volts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5436
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views
Alternator: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Connector Views > Page 5439
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5440
Alternator: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as
directed.
^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling
fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5441
Alternator: Description and Operation
The charging system consists of the following components:
^ generator
^ integral voltage regulator
The generator maximum output provides 110 amps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Generator Testing
Alternator: Testing and Inspection Generator Testing
CAUTION:
^ To prevent damage to the generator, do not make the jumper wire connections except as
directed.
^ Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the housing and the internal diode cooling
fins with key on or off. A short circuit will result and burn out the diodes.
NOTE:
^ Battery posts and cable clamps must be clean and tight for accurate meter indications.
^ Refer to the battery tester manual for complete directions for testing the charging system.
1. Turn off all lamps and electrical components. 2. Place the transmission range selector lever in
NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake. 3. Carry out the Load Test and No-Load Test according to
the following component tests:
Generator On-Vehicle Tests-Load Test
1. Switch the battery tester to the ammeter function. 2. Connect the positive and negative leads of
the battery tester to the corresponding battery terminals. 3. Connect the current probe to the
generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH). 4. With the engine running, turn the A/C on, the
blower motor on high speed and the headlamps on high beam. 5. Increase the engine speed to
approximately 2,000 rpm. The voltage should increase a minimum of 0.5 volt above the base
voltage.
^ If the voltage does not increase as specified, carry out the Generator On-Vehicle Tests.
^ If the voltage increases as specified, the charging system is operating normally.
6. Adjust the tester load bank to determine the output of the generator. Generator output should be
at least 58 amps.
Generator On-Vehicle Tests-No Load Test
1. Switch the battery tester to the voltmeter function. 2. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to the
generator B+ output terminal, circuit 36 (YE/WH) and the negative lead to ground. 3. Turn all
electrical accessories off. 4. With the engine running at 2,000 rpm, check the generator output
voltage. The voltage should be between 13.0 and 15.0 volts. If not, refer back
to the pinpoint test or the Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests See: Testing
and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Generator Testing > Page 5444
Alternator: Testing and Inspection Other Diagnosis and Testing
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component, please refer to Charging System;
Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5445
Alternator: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables. 2. Remove the right intermediate axle shaft.
3. Remove the right lower splash shield screws and the pin-type retainer.
4. Rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the accessory drive belt.
5. Remove the nut and position the bracket and wiring harness aside.
6. Remove the upper generator mounting bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5446
7. Remove the lower generator bolts and position the generator aside.
8. Remove the generator mounting bracket bolts and remove the bracket.
9. Remove the generator electrical connectors.
1 Remove the B+ nut and cable.
2 Remove the connector.
10. Rotate the generator to gain clearance, and remove through the opening in the fender well.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Switch > Page 5452
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cutoff Switch > Page 5455
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Using a small tool, press the ignition lock cylinder release button and pull the ignition lock
cylinder out.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 5463
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Starter Drive/Bendix > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Starter Drive/Bendix: Testing and Inspection
Starter Drive and Flywheel Ring Gear Inspection
1. Remove the starter motor.
2. Check the wear patterns on the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear. If the wear pattern
is normal, install the starter motor.
3. If the starter drive gear and the flywheel ring gear are not fully meshing and both of the gears are
scored or damaged, install a new starter motor.
If necessary, install a new flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5471
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5474
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5475
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Micro ISO Relay > Page 5476
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Rear > Page 5482
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5493
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5494
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5497
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5498
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5503
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5504
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5507
Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5508
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5509
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Connector Views > Page 5510
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5513
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5514
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Ground Strap: Service and Repair
GROUND STRAP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables.
2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar.
Remove the ground strap. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5521
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5525
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5534
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5535
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5536
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5537
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May >
06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5538
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5544
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5545
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5546
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5547
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: >
06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5548
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 - C311
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5551
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5552
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5553
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5554
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5555
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5556
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5557
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5558
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C312 - C919
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5559
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5560
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5561
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5562
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5563
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5564
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5568
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5573
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5577
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5581
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5586
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5587
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5590
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5591
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5592
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5593
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5594
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5597
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5598
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5603
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5604
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5607
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5608
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5609
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5610
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5611
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5614
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5615
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5629
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5630
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5631
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5632
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5633
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5634
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5635
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5636
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 >
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5637
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 >
SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5647
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5648
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5649
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5650
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5651
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5652
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5653
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5654
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical
- Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips > Page 5655
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Rear > Page 5661
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Diode > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5672
Fuse: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box > Page 5673
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5676
Fuse: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5677
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5682
Fuse Block: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5683
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5686
Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5687
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5688
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views > Page 5689
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5692
Fuse Block: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5693
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Ground Strap > Component Information > Service and Repair
Ground Strap: Service and Repair
GROUND STRAP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cables.
2. NOTE: The 2.0L is shown, the 3.0L is similar.
Remove the ground strap. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5700
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 5704
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: Customer Interest Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's
Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5713
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5714
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5715
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5716
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 > Electrical - Intermit.
No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5717
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set
Multiple Junction Connector: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL
ON/DTC's Set
TSB 06-9-3
05/15/06
PCM FAILURE - ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES INTERMITTENT - INOPERATIVE
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a powertrain control module (PCM) concern that results in no
crank, no start, or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) with one or more diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) present. There may also be intermittent or inoperative power windows, door locks, keyless
entry system, lighting, speed control, radio, instrument cluster warning lamps (possibly dimly
illuminated instead of being off), or other electrical accessories. The concern is typically more
noticeable in wet and/or cold weather conditions.
This may be the result of connector terminal corrosion in C134, C263, or the central junction box
(CJB) which results in either high resistance between the male and female terminals or a short
between two or more circuits due to bridging through any corrosion that may be present. Corrosion
in C134 may be the result of improper positioning/sealing of C134. Corrosion in C263 or the CJB
may be due to a water leak in the left hand A-Pillar area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to inspect and repair the connector terminals for evidence
of corrosion. Repair any sources of water entry. If no signs of corrosion or water entry are found,
follow normal diagnostics.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
WHEN DIAGNOSING THE CAUSE OF A PCM FAILURE IT IS CRITICAL THAT THIS
INSPECTION AND REPAIR PROCEDURE BE COMPLETED IN ITS ENTIRETY BEFORE
INSTALLING A REPLACEMENT SERVICE PART.
THE POSSIBILITY EXISTS FOR A 12 VOLT
SHORT TO THE 5 VOLT VREF (CIRCUIT). INSTALLATION OF A SERVICE REPLACEMENT
PCM WITHOUT ELIMINATING THE 12 VOLT SHORT WILL RESULT IN REPEAT PCM FAILURE.
Inspect and repair the following connectors:
C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5723
1. Open the hood and locate C134 (Figure 1).
2. Disconnect the connector halves and thoroughly inspect the terminals. Clean any corrosion that
may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
3. Use shop air to blow out any moisture that may be present in the terminals, then apply dielectric
grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
4. Reconnect the connector halves and close the hood.
C263
1. Open the drivers door and remove the lower kick panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5724
2. Locate C263 as shown in Figure 2.
3. Disconnect the connector halves.
4. Pry out the terminal retainer as shown in Figure 3 and thoroughly inspect the terminals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5725
NOTE
THE CORROSION WILL NOT BE VISIBLE UNLESS THE TERMINAL RETAINER IS REMOVED.
5. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals.
6. Work dielectric grease into the side opening in the connector, then reinstall the terminal retainer.
7. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in both halves of the connector.
8. Reconnect the connector halves.
CJB (Central Junction Box)
1. Locate the CJB (Figure 2).
2. Disconnect the four harness connectors from the front and the two connectors from the rear of
the CJB, and remove the CJB.
3. Inspect the terminals and also the back side of the CJB or evidence of water damage or
corrosion.
4. Clean any corrosion that may be present and replace any damaged terminals or components.
5. Apply dielectric grease to the terminals in the harness connectors.
6. Reconnect the six harness connectors and reinstall the CJB.
7. Reinstall the lower kick panel.
NOTE
IF ANY CORROSION WAS FOUND IN EITHER C263 OR THE CJB, THE SOURCE OF THE
WATER ENTRY MUST BE IDENTIFIED TO PREVENT A REPEAT REPAIR.
Follow standard water testing procedures to identify the source of any leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5726
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Multiple Junction Connector: > 06-9-3 > May > 06 >
Electrical - Intermit. No Crank/Start/MIL ON/DTC's Set > Page 5727
Figures 4 through 8 identify some common sources of water leaks.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060903 Claim Labor As Actual Actual
Time Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A187 68
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 - C311
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5730
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5731
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5732
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5733
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5734
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5735
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5736
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5737
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C312 - C919
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5738
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5739
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5740
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5741
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5742
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 - C311 > Page 5743
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 5747
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5752
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini
ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5756
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5760
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5765
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box > Page 5766
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5769
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5770
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5771
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5772
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central Junction Box > Page 5773
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5776
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box > Page 5777
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5782
Relay Box: Locations Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box > Page 5783
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box
Relay Box: Diagrams Central Junction Box
Pin Number and Connector View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 5786
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 5787
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 5788
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 5789
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Central
Junction Box > Page 5790
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5793
Relay Box: Application and ID Central Junction Box
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box > Page 5794
Note: The fuse panel is located on the left hand side kick panel. Remove the panel cover to access
the fuses.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5803
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5804
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5805
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5806
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5807
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5808
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5809
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5810
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5811
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998
Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 04-26-12 > Dec > 04 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
Wiring Harness: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1994 or B1998 Set
TSB 04-26-12
12/31/04
SIDE AIR BAG DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1994 OR B1998
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit the air bag warning lamp illuminating
intermiffently with DTC B1994 (driver side, side mount air bag circuit open) or B1998 (passenger
side, side mount air bag circuit open). This condition may be caused by a variation in the electrical
continuity at connector C337 (passenger side) or C367 (driver side) at the body harness wire
terminal crimp.
ACTION Install a replacement body harness pigtail connector in the affected circuit. Refer to the
instruction sheet included in the connector repair kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042612A 2001-2004 Escape One 1.2 Hrs.
Seat: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seat)
042612B 2001-2004 Escape Both 1.8 Hrs.
Seats: Check For Diagnostic Trouble Codes, Install A Replacement Body Harness Pigtail (Includes
Time To Depower And Repower The Supplemental Restraints System, Remove And Install Seats)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14405 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips
Technical Service Bulletin # 05-18-7 Date: 050922
Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping Service Tips
TSB 05-18-7
09/22/05
WIRING - SOLDERING AND CRIMPING REPAIRS - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006
Five Hundred, Ford GT, Freestyle 2006 Fusion 2000-2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape Hybrid 2000-2006
F-650, F-750 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2000-2006 LS, Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2000-2006 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood
2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2000-2002 Cougar 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2005-2006 Montego
2006 Milan 2000-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner 2006 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 03-11-6 to update the service procedure, vehicle lines and model
years.
ISSUE Wire harness repairs are supported through the availability of individual components such
as:
^ Wire terminals with machine crimped pigtails
^ Hard shell connectors
^ Dual wall heat shrink tubing
^ Complete, loaded, wiring pigtail kits
Some of the available tools and service parts that are helpful when performing wiring harness
repairs are:
^ Motorcraft Wiring Pigtail Catalog (see website for more information)
^ Rotunda Wire Splice Tool kit 164-R5903
^ General Wire Terminal Repair Kit (order through Ford Component Sales)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5826
Information on the pigtail and terminal repair kits can also be accessed by technicians via the P15
web site. To access on PTS:
^ Select the year/model of the vehicle on the P15 home page
^ Select the wiring tab
^ Select the link to the pigtail or terminal repair kit at the top right of screen.
Additional service information contained in this TSB detailing wire folding, soldering, and crimping
techniques may be helpful.
ACTION
REPAIR VS REPLACEMENT
The approved procedure is to repair wiring harnesses with pigtail kits, wire terminals, or hard shell
connectors when available. The only exceptions to this procedure are when:
^ The repair cost exceeds the cost to replace the wiring harness
^ There are no component parts released to service the wiring harness
RESTRAINTS RELATED WIRING REPAIRS
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in a stand-alone harness, do not repair
them; replace the restraints harness unless directed to repair the circuit by a TSB or other Ford
Motor Company publication.
If restraints connectors or wiring circuits are contained in the main vehicle wiring harnesses (14401,
14A005, etc.), they should be repaired using the solder and heat-shrink repair procedure specified
in this TSB. The General Wire Terminal Repair Kit contains gold plated terminated pigtails (with
white insulation) and dual wall heat shrink tubing to perform these repairs. Loaded wiring pigtail kits
with gold plated terminals are also available in the parts catalog.
Disclaimer
Service Tips
Refer to applicable model year wiring diagrams for circuit information.
Twisted Wire Circuits
For "Twisted Wire" circuit repair (Figure 1), the twisting must not be disrupted for more than 2" (51
mm) Twist the repaired wires in the same direction and with the same general twist rate as the
original wiring. Reapply the shielding on shielded circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5827
Stagger the repairs to minimize harness diameter and maintain harness length (Figure 2).
Any leads that are not going to be used need to be sealed with dual wall heat shrink and stowed
(Figure 2). Silicone must not be used.
Excess wire from the harness can be folded back on itself to maintain the harness length.
Reapply any convolute and tape that was removed to make the repair.
For 16 AGW and Smaller Diameter Wire
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5828
1. Strip 1-1/2" (37.2 mm) of insulation from Wire # 1 and 3/4" (19.5 mm) of insulation from Wire # 2,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands (Figure 3). Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire is pulled
at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during stripping, cut
off the end and re-strip.
2. Install heat shrink tubing at least 1" (26 mm) away from one of the stripped ends being spliced.
Twist wires together. Solder wires together (Figure 4).
NOTE
USE ROSIN CORE MILDLY ACTIVATED (RMS) SOLDER. DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER
FOR WIRE REPAIR.
3. Bend Wire # 1 back in a straight line for sealing (Figure 4). Inspect solder joint bond.
NOTE
WAIT FOR SOLDER TO COOL BEFORE MOVING WIRES.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5829
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5830
4. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
5. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
For 14 AGW and Larger Diameter Wire (Excluding Restraints Wiring Repairs)
1. Strip 1/4" (6.35 mm) of insulation from pigtail wire end once the wire lengths are sized so repairs
can be staggered. Take care not to nick or cut wire strands. Pull wire straight from stripper. If wire
is pulled at an angle, wire strands may be cut off. If more than one (1) strand is cut off during
stripping, cut off the end and re-strip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5831
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5832
NOTE
THE STRIP LENGTH WILL VARY DEPENDING ON THE BUTT SPLICE AND WIRE IN
HARNESS. LONGER STRIP LENGTHS ARE REQUIRED WHEN THE WIRE NEEDS TO BE
FOLDED TO MATE WITH THE BUTT SPLICE. REFER TO FIGURE 10 CHART FOR STRIP
LENGTHS AND FOLDING TECHNIQUES.
2. Slide heat shrink tubing onto one (1) of the wire ends to be crimped, must be at least 1" (25.4
mm) away from stripped end (Figure 6).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5833
3. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber of the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper (or
equivalent) by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice
(Figure 7). Hold the crimping tool so the identified wire sizes are facing you. Squeeze tool handles
together until the ratchet releases, then allow the jaws of the tool to open fully.
4. Center one (1) end of the butt splice on the appropriate crimping chamber. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam of the butt splice toward the indenter (Figure 8).
5. Hold the butt splice in place and squeeze the tool handles together until the ratchet engages
sufficiently to hold the butt splice in position (typically one (1) or two (2) clicks). DO NOT deform the
butt splice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 05-18-7 > Sep > 05 > Electrical - Wiring Soldering/Crimping
Service Tips > Page 5834
6. Insert stripped wire into the buff splice, making sure the insulation on wire does not enter the butt
splice (Figure 8).
7. Holding the wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Allow tool
handles to open, then remove crimped butt splice.
8. To crimp the other half of the splice, reposition the un-crimped wire barrel in the same crimping
chamber, and repeat Steps 3-8. If splice cannot be turned for crimping the other half, turn the tool
around.
9. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice. It is acceptable for crimp to be slightly
off center, but not off the end of the buff splice (Figure 9-a).
b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. Wire is flush with or extends slightly beyond end of
buff splice (Figure 9-b).
c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices (Figure 9-c).
10. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair (Figure 5).
NOTE
OVERLAP TUBING ON BOTH WIRES.
11. Use a shielded heat gun to heat the entire length of the heat shrink tubing until the hot melt
appears from both ends of the tubing. Durability of a heat shrink tubing splice is dependent on the
hot melt that will appear from both ends of the tube. The hot melt forms an adhesive seal between
the wire insulation and the heat shrink tubing, which prevents air and moisture from entering the
solder point (Figure 5).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: By Symptom Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5844
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5845
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5846
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > By
Symptom for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5847
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics
TSB 04-21-4
11/01/04
STEERING DRIFT/PULL - IMPROVED DIAGNOSTIC AND REPAIR PROCEDURE - SERVICE
TIP
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a drift/pull to either the right or left. This condition may occur
even if the alignment settings are within specifications.
ACTION The following procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual. It contains a
more detailed description of the camber/caster adjustment, updated diagnostics to help determine
cause and an updated camber adjustment procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5853
1. Refer to the Drift/Pull diagnostic flow chart (Figure 1).
2. Use procedures in TSB when adjusting alignment if directed by the diagnostic flow chart.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5854
3. Complete worksheet as needed (Figure 5).
GENERAL FRONT SUSPENSION UPPER STRUT MOUNT ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5855
Adjustment of camber and caster can be made by rotating the upper strut mount into one (1) of four
(4) positions. The orientation of the strut rod relative to the center of the hole for the mount
determines the alignment change. The strut rod is offset 180 degrees from the paint mark on the
strut bushing. Moving the strut rod inboard or outboard changes camber and moving the strut rod
forward or rearward changes caster. Regardless of the start setting, a 90 degree rotation will only
change one of the settings (caster or camber), and a 180 degree rotation will change both settings
(caster and camber).
ADDITIONAL FRONT CAMBER ADJUSTMENT:
The clearance between the bolts and the holes in the knuckle to strut joint allows front camber
adjustment beyond what the strut mount orientation provides. This additional adjustment can be
used on either of the front wheels to increase or decrease a camber split.
Rotating the upper strut mount is the primary and preferred method to adjust front camber. If
rotating the upper strut mount does not provide enough camber adjustment, perform the following
steps to achieve an approximate camber change of up to +/- 0.24 degrees per side:
1. Lift the vehicle up off its tires.
2. Replace the old strut to knuckle fasteners (bolts and nuts) with new fasteners, but do not torque
the new fasteners.
3. Move the top of the tire inboard or outboard to adjust camber (Figure 4).
a. If more negative camber is desired, push the top of the tire inboard.
b. If less negative camber is desired, pull the top of the tire outboard.
4. With the tire at the desired position, torque the new fasteners to 85 lb-ft (115 N.m).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Alignment: > 04-21-4 > Nov > 04 > Steering - Improved Drift/Pull Diagnostics > Page 5856
5. Lower the vehicle back down.
6. Place vehicle on alignment rack and measure the alignment to confirm the desired camber
change was achieved.
NOTE
DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT SETTINGS (INDIVIDUAL CAMBER) BEYOND THE
RELEASED SPECIFICATIONS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
FRONT W6
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Front
Position - Curb
Caster ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 1.79° ± 1.00° Caster Split ...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1°
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.84° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Total
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................... 0.23° ± 0.32° Ride Height .........................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 476.6 mm ± 20 mm
Side-to-Side Lean ................................................................................................................................
.......................................... -10 mm to +10 mm
Position - 8 gal. fill
Caster ..................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 1.72° ± 1.00° Caster Split ...............................................................
.................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1°
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.84° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Total
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
.......................................... 0.23° ± 0.32° Ride Height .........................................................................
.......................................................................................................... 477.4 mm ± 20 mm
Side-to-Side Lean ................................................................................................................................
.......................................... -10 mm to +10 mm
Rear
Position - Curb
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.04° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Indiv.
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
......................................... 0.10° ± 0.17° Ride Height ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................ 491 mm ± 20 mm Side-to-Side
Lean .....................................................................................................................................................
..................... -10 mm to +10 mm Clear Vision ....................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 0 ± 3
Position - 8 gal. fill
Camber ................................................................................................................................................
.................................................. -0.13° ± 1.00° Camber Split ..............................................................
................................................................................................................................... -1° to +1° Indiv.
Toe ......................................................................................................................................................
......................................... 0.10° ± 0.17° Ride Height ..........................................................................
............................................................................................................ 495 mm ± 20 mm Side-to-Side
Lean .....................................................................................................................................................
..................... -10 mm to +10 mm Clear Vision ....................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 0 ± 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications > Page 5859
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts
.................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft.
lbs.) Rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts
...................................................................................................................................... 115 Nm (41 ft.
lbs.) Tie rod end jam nuts ....................................................................................................................
............................................................. 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 5860
Alignment: Description and Operation
Suspension System
The front suspension system consists of the following components ^
strut and spring assembly upper mounting bracket
^ upper spring seat
^ wheel hub
^ lug bolts
^ front wheel bearing
^ front suspension lower arm ball joints
^ front wheel knuckle
^ front stabilizer bar and brackets
^ front suspension lower and mounting bolt bushing (horizontal)
^ strut and spring assembly
^ stabilizer control link
The front strut and spring assemblies can be disassembled to install any of the new individual
components. New LH or RH front strut and spring assemblies can be installed independently. The
front suspension system can also be disassembled in order to install new: ^
front wheel knuckle
^ wheel hub
^ lug bolts
^ front wheel bearing
^ front suspension lower arms
^ front suspension lower arm mounting bolt bushings (horizontal)
New front stabilizer bar components can be installed individually. The rear suspension system
consists of the following components: ^
rear spring
^ rear shock absorber
^ rear wheel knuckle and bushing
^ lower lateral link
^ upper lateral link
^ bump stopper
New LH and RH rear wheel knuckles can be installed individually. The rear suspension arm and
bushings can be installed individually. Only toe can be adjusted on the rear suspension.
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber Camber is the inward or outward tilting of the wheels at the top. When the wheel tilts out at
the top, then the camber is positive (+). When the wheel tilts in at the top, then the camber is
negative (-).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 5861
Caster Caster is the tilting of the steering axis either forward or backward from vertical.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front
camber is adjusted.
Toe Toe is a measurement of how much the front of the wheels are turned in or out from the
straight-ahead position.
When the wheels are turned in toward the front of the vehicle, toe is positive (+) (toe inch). When
the wheels are turned out toward the front of the vehicle, toe is negative (-) (toe out). Toe is
measured in degrees, from side to side, and totaled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired
position to set camber and caster. Both camber and
caster for front suspension are adjustable within a maximum of 30 minutes angle.
4. Tighten the front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5864
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off, and lock the steering
wheel in position. 3. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is
rotated.
Remove the clamps.
5. Loosen the nuts.
^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie rod threads.
6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5865
7. Tighten the nuts.
8. Install the clamp(s). 9. Recheck the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5866
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal resting position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. Loosen the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolt.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear suspension trailing arm and bushing bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5867
Alignment: Service and Repair Lean Correction
Lean Correction
NOTE: When installing a new coil spring, install a new one with the same part number and the
same spring code. Refer to the Vehicle Certification (VC) Label on the driver side door.
1. Measure the distance from the wheelhouse opening to the center of the wheel and tire at the
same point on both sides of the vehicle. 2. If the difference exceeds 10 mm (0.4 inch), a lean
correction is necessary. Compare the original with a new coil spring. Note the difference. 3.
Remove the higher side coil spring.
1 If the original coil spring exceeds the height of the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), install the new
coil spring in the vehicle.
2 If the original coil spring is shorter than the new one by 10 mm (0.4 inch), remove the low side
coil spring from the vehicle.
4. Compare all three coil springs and select the two most evenly matched for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5875
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5876
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5877
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5878
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5879
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5880
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5881
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5882
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5883
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5884
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5885
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5886
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5887
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5888
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5889
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5890
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5891
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5892
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5893
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and
Instructions > Page 5894
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5895
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications
Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications
Wheel knuckle cam bolt .......................................................................................................................
.................................................. 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5900
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5901
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed.
1. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5902
2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
1 If necessary, remove the center cap.
2 Remove the nuts.
3. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
occur.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum. ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
4. If the brake drum will not come off, follow these steps.
1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw.
2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
5. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5903
6. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
7. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
8. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
9. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5904
Vehicles with ABS 10. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 11. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
12. Remove brake line bracket bolt.
13. Support the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5905
14. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
15. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
16. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
17. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5906
18. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
19. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
20. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle and position aside.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5907
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam. 4. Install the wheel knuckle cam
bolt loosely.
5. NOTE: Brake shoes shown removed for clarity.
Install the brake backing plate into the wheel knuckle. ^
Install the bolts.
6. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub. 7. Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5908
8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
9. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
10. Remove the support from the wheel knuckle.
11. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
12. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5909
13. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
14. Install brake line bracket bolt.
15. Install the parking brake cable bolt.
Vehicles with ABS 16. Position the ABS brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5910
17. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 18. Install the halfshaft nut.
19. Install the brake drum. 20. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 21. Check and adjust the wheel
alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Purging
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, premature power
steering pump failure can result. This condition can occur on pre-delivery vehicles with evidence of
aerated fluid or on vehicles that have had steering component repairs.
1. NOTE: A whine heard from the power steering pump may be caused by air in the system. The
power steering purge procedure must be performed
prior to any component repair for which power steering noise complaints are accompanied by
evidence of aerated fluid.
Remove the power steering pump reservoir cap. Check the fluid. ^
Use Motorcraft MERCON Multipurpose ATF XT-2-QDX or equivalent MERCON fluid.
2. Tightly insert the stopper of the vacuum pump into the reservoir. 3. Start the vehicle.
4. Apply maximum vacuum and maintain it for a minimum of three minutes with the engine speed
at idle. 5. Release the vacuum and remove the vacuum pump.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5915
6. CAUTION: Do not overfill the reservoir.
Fill the reservoir. ^
Use Motorcraft MERCON Multipurpose ATF XT-2-QDX or MERCON equivalent.
7. Reinstall the vacuum pump. Apply and maintain maximum vacuum.
8. CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel against the stops for more than three to five seconds
at a time. Damage to the power steering pump
can occur.
Cycle the steering wheel fully to the left and right every 30 seconds for approximately five minutes.
9. Stop the engine, release the vacuum, and remove the vacuum pump.
10. Install the reservoir cap. 11. Check for fluid leaks at all of the connections. If the power steering
fluid shows signs of air, repeat this procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage
TSB 07-1-7
01/22/07
MERCON(R) ATF REPLACED BY MERCON(R) V AS A SERVICE FLUID FOR SOME POWER
STEERING SYSTEMS
FORD: 1996-1997 Thunderbird 1996-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 1998-2003 Escort
2000-2007 Focus 2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2006 Ford GT 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle
2006-2007 Fusion 1996-1997 Aerostar 1996-2007 E-Series, Explorer, Ranger 1997-2004 F-53
Motorhome Chassis 1997-2007 Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty 1998-2003 Windstar 2000-2005
Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2007 Escape 2004-2007
Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1996-1997 Cargo 1996-1998 L-Series 1996-1999 F- B-Series
2000-2007 F-650, F-750 2006-2007 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 1996-1998 Mark VIII 1996-1999 Continental 1996-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln
LS 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 1996-1997 Cougar 1996-2005 Sable 1996-2007 Grand Marquis 1999-2002 Cougar
2003-2004 Marauder 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2007 Mountaineer 1998-2002
Villager 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2007 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
ISSUE MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid is being replaced by MERCON(R) V as a
service fluid for power steering systems originally requiring MERCON(R).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Mercon V(R) Fluid Usage > Page 5920
ACTION Beginning immediately all power steering applications requiring MERCON(R) can now be
serviced using MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids
labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V. After July 1, 2007, MERCON(R) Automatic Transmission
Fluid will no longer be manufactured, therefore, availability of this fluid will continue until remaining
inventory has been depleted.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Service power steering Systems requiring MERCON(R) with MERCON(R) V or MERCON(R)
Automatic Transmission Fluid or dual usage fluids labeled MERCON(R) / MERCON(R) V.
CAUTION
APPLICATIONS RECOMMENDING TYPE F AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND POWER
STEERING FLUID MUST CONTINUE TO USE THAT PARTICULAR FLUID. USE OF ANY
OTHER FLUID MAY CAUSE REDUCED FUNCTIONALITY OR DAMAGE
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications
Power steering fluid capacity
..............................................................................................................................................................
1.9 Liters (2.0 quarts)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5923
Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications
Premium Power Steering Fluid F7AZ-3F823-BA
................................................................................................................................................
MERCON
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Specifications
Power steering fluid cooler mounting bolts
.......................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5927
Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the hose from the power steering fluid reservoir.
2. Disconnect the power steering cooler hose. 3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the nuts and the power steering fluid cooler. 5. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Mechanical Specifications
Power steering pump fluid reservoir mounting bolts
............................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5932
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Capacity Specifications
Fill to the line on the reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5933
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
Type Motorcraft Mercon ATF
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 5934
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pain.
Disconnect the power steering fluid return hose.
2. Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
3. Remove the bolts and the power steering pump reservoir. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
^ Fill power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Specifications
Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications
Power steering pressure hose to steering gear fitting
..................................................................................................................... 28-33 Nm (21-25 ft. lbs.)
Power steering pressure line-to-pump fitting
............................................................................................................................................ 65 Nm (48
ft. lbs.) Power steering pressure line bracket-to-engine insulator bracket bolt
.................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch lbs.) Power steering
pressure and return line retainer plate-to-gear bolt
........................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.) Power
steering pressure line bracket-to-gear bolt
................................................................................................................................. 10 Nm (89 inch
lbs.) Power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt
..................................................................................................................................... 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure
Line
Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line-3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear.
5. Remove the power steering pressure hose.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Loosen the fitting and remove the power steering pressure line.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5940
1. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure line fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
2. Install the power steering pressure hose.
1 Tighten the power steering pressure hose fitting to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
3. Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt to the steering gear. 4. Raise the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear. Install the bolt.
6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump to Steering Gear Pressure Line > Page 5941
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Steering Gear to Fluid Cooler Return Hose
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Make sure not to drop the O-ring seals.
Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
2. Remove the power steering return line bracket-to-gear bolt.
3. Release the clamp and remove the power steering return line.
4. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^
Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Power Steering Pump: Mechanical Specifications
Power steering pump pulley nut ..........................................................................................................
..................................................... 49 Nm (36 ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket-to-pump bolts
........................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18
ft. lbs.) Power steering pump bracket mounting nuts
........................................................................................................................................ 10 Nm (89
inch lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5946
Power Steering Pump: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Power Steering Pump
Flow (1) ................................................................................................................................................
................... 6-8.25 liters/minute (1.79-2.19 gpm) Pressure (1) ...........................................................
.................................................................................................................................. 414 kPa (60 psi)
Relief pressure
.........................................................................................................................................................
8,964- 10,205 kPa (1,300-1,480 psi)
(1)Fluid 74°-80° C (165°-175° F) Engine at idle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 5947
Power Steering Pump: Capacity Specifications
Power Steering Pump
Minimum capacity (1)
..........................................................................................................................................................
4.4 liters/minute (1.15 8pm)
(1) Fluid @ 74°-80° C (165°-175° F). Engine at idle. Pressure at 5,171 kPa (750 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump
Power Steering Pump
Special Tool(s)
Removal
1. Remove the ground strap.
^ Remove the nut and the ground strap.
2. Using the special tools, support the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5950
3. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 4. Remove the drive belt.
5. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley.
6. NOTE: Drain the power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
Disconnect the power steering low pressure hose.
7. Disconnect the power steering pressure hose and position aside.
1 Remove the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
3 Disconnect the power steering pressure line and position aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5951
8. Remove the upper engine insulator bracket bolt.
9. Remove the A/C line support nut.
10. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity.
Remove the engine insulator. 1
Remove the nut.
2 Remove the bolt and the engine insulator.
11. Remove the power steering pump bracket.
1 Remove the pressure line bracket screw.
2 Remove the six nuts.
3 Remove five bolts and the power steering pump bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5952
12. Remove the power steering pump.
Installation
1. Position the power steering pump.
2. Install the power steering pump bracket.
1 Install the five bolts.
2 Install the six nuts.
3 Install the pressure line bracket screw.
3. NOTE: The engine isolator bracket is shown removed for clarity.
Install the engine insulator. 1
Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5953
2 Install the nut.
4. Install the upper engine insulator bracket bolt.
5. Position the A/C line support and install the nut.
6. Using the special tool, install a new seal on the power steering pressure hose fitting.
^ Remove and discard the original seal.
^ Stretch the seal over the special tool and slide it onto the tube nut.
7. Connect the power steering pressure hose.
1 Connect the power steering pressure hose to the pump.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
3 Install the power steering pressure line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5954
8. Connect the power steering low pressure hose.
9. Install the power steering pump pulley and bolt.
10. Install the drive belt.
11. Tighten the power steering pump pulley bolt.
12. Remove the special tools.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5955
13. Install the ground strap.
^ Position the ground strap and install the nut.
14. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump > Page 5956
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley
Power Steering Pump Pulley
Removal and Installation
1. Loosen the power steering pump pulley bolt. 2. Remove the drive belt.
3. Remove the bolt and the power steering pump pulley. 4. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5963
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5964
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5965
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5966
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5967
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5968
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5969
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5970
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5971
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5972
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5973
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5974
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5975
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5976
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5977
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5978
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5979
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5980
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5981
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5982
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5983
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the Power Steering Pressure (PSP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5990
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5991
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5992
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5993
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5994
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 5995
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications
Steering Gear: Specifications
Power Steering Gear
Turning effort .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 30 Nm (6.75 lb)
Steering gear mounting bolts ...............................................................................................................
................................................... 126 Nm (93 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar.
Remove the rear transaxle insulator. 1
Remove the bolts and nuts.
2 Remove the rear transaxle insulator.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 2. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle
insulator bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6001
All vehicles 3. Remove the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 4. Remove the
front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission 5. Remove the bolts and the rear transaxle insulator
bracket.
All vehicles
6. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Remove the tie rod end nut. 1
Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
7. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6002
Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
8. NOTE: Record the number of turns required to remove the tie rod end.
Remove the tie rod ends and the tie rod end jam nuts.
9. Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
1 Slide the boot up.
2 Remove the steering gear coupling pinch bolt.
10. NOTE: Drain the excess power steering fluid into a suitable drain pan.
NOTE: Do not drop the O-ring seals. Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Disconnect the power steering pressure and return lines.
11. Lower the vehicle on the hoist.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6003
12. Remove the steering shaft.
13. Remove the steering shaft boot.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the steering shaft boot.
14. NOTE: LH shown; RH similar.
Remove the two steering gear mounting bolts.
15. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear forward to separate the steering coupling
from the steering gear shaft. Remove the steering gear.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: With the mounting bolts removed, slide the gear rearward to connect the steering
coupling to the steering gear shaft.
Position the steering gear in the vehicle.
2. Lower the hoist.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6004
3. Install the two steering gear mounting bolts. 4. Install the steering shaft boot.
5. Install the steering shaft.
6. Install the power steering pressure and return line bracket bolts. 7. Raise the vehicle on the
hoist.
8. NOTE: Make sure the O-ring seals are on the power steering pressure and return lines.
Connect the power steering pressure and return lines to the steering gear and install the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6005
9. Install the steering gear coupling pinch bolt and slide the boot down.
10. Thread the tie rod end jam nuts onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
11. NOTE: Use the numbers recorded from removal to install the tie rod ends.
Thread the tie rod ends onto the front wheel spindle tie rods.
12. Tighten the tie rod end jam nuts.
13. NOTE: LH side shown; RH similar.
Connect the tie rod end to the knuckle. 1
Install the nut.
2 Install the cotter pin.
Vehicles equipped with manual transmission
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6006
14. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
15. Install the front wheels.
Vehicles equipped with automatic transmission
16. Install the rear transaxle insulator bracket and the bolts.
All vehicles
17. NOTE: 2.0L Zetec shown; 3.0L (4V) similar.
Install the rear transaxle insulator.
18. Fill, bleed and leak check the power steering system. 19. Align the front wheels to
specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 6007
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Position the steering gear boot cover aside.
2. NOTE: The nut cannot be reused. Install a new nut.
Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling. 1
Remove and discard the nut.
2 Disconnect the steering column shaft from the flexible coupling.
3. Remove the steering gear boot.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering
Wheel Is Loose > Page 6016
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is
Loose
TSB 07-4-3
03/05/07
LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE
FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007
Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty
2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport
2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape
Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan
2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather
coming loose from the spoke area.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke.
Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT
STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY
WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL.
CAUTION
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On
Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 6022
1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING
WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B.
2. Fold loose leather out of the way.
3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke.
4. Fold the leather back into its original position.
5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to
the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds).
NOTE
THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE
REPAIR AREA.
6. Reinstall steering wheel.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3600 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6023
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Removal
1. Position the front seats rearward.
2. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
3. Lower the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Turn the pinion shaft to release the steering wheel from the column shaft.
5. Remove the steering wheel.
- Position the steering wheel rearward.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6024
1. Install the steering wheel.
- Connect the electrical connector.
- Position the steering wheel onto the steering column shaft.
2. Tighten the pinion shaft.
3. Close the steering wheel air bag connector access cover.
4. Repower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). See: Steering Column/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Tie Rod End: Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures
Article No. 03-15-13
08/04/03
STEERING - TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 1997-2002 EXPEDITION 1997-2003 F-150 2001-2004 ESCAPE
LINCOLN: 1998-2002 NAVIGATOR 2002-2003 BLACKWOOD
This article supersedes 03-9-9 to update the vehicle models covered.
ISSUE This article is to be used as an updated procedure for inspecting tie rod end wear.
ACTION This procedure is designed to supplement the Workshop Manual, as it provides a more
detailed tie rod end inspection procedure.
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE
FOR ESCAPE VEHICLES, THIS TIE ROD END INSPECTION PROCEDURE SHOULD ONLY BE
COMPLETED ON THE OUTER TIE RODS. FOR ESCAPE INNER TIE ROD INSPECTION
PROCEDURES, REFER TO WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 211-00.
Step 1 - Free Play:
Check the outer tie rod ends by grasping by hand and push up and down. Check the inner tie rod
ends, pushing them front to rear. If any free play is observed in a joint, it is worn and should be
replaced.
Step 2 - Stud Lash - Free Play:
While vehicle is on the ground or on a drive-on hoist, have an assistant rotate the steering wheel
rapidly back and forth from 10 o'clock to 2 o'clock to 10 o'clock while observing the inner and outer
tie rods. If the outer tie rod ends have any vertical movement or the inner tie rod ends have any
horizontal movement, the tie rod end with the observed movement should be replaced.
Step 3 - Seal Inspection:
Raise the vehicle on a hoist and remove the front wheels. The wheels will need to be turned to the
right in order to inspect the passenger side inner tie rod end and to the left to inspect the drivers
side inner tie rod end. Inspect all four seals for tears, perforations and wear. If there is any
indication of wear or perforations on the seal, that tie rod end should be replaced.
Step 4 - Stud Corrosion:
For Escape Vehicles - If Squeak is noticed during Step 2, disconnect tie rod from knuckle and
articulate stud in socket. If squeak is verified, replace part. While pushing down on seal, at stud
end, if corrosion present at contact point at base of stud, replace part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6030
For All Other Vehicles Covered In This Article:
Using a wrench, rotate the tie rod end so that the front of the seal on the outer tie rod end is
expanded (Figure 1). Using a puffy knife or other hard, flat, dull object, lift the bottom of the seal up,
exposing the stud (Figure 2). If any water escapes from the seal in the form of bubbles or in a liquid
form, that tie rod end should be replaced. Closely examine the stud for signs of corrosion,
especially around the interface with the knuckle. A rag might be needed to clean off any grease on
the stud that impairs a good visual inspection. If there is any sign of corrosion, that tie rod end
should be replaced.
Rotate the tie rod end in the opposite direction to expand the inner tie rod seal. Repeat the
inspection procedure used on the outer tie rod. Repeat this entire procedure on the other side of
the vehicle. If there is sign of corrosion, that tie rod end should be replaced.
NOTE
IF ANY TIE ROD ENDS ARE REMOVED, INSPECT THE SEAL AND THE STUD AGAIN NOTING
ANY DIFFERENCES IN VISUAL PERCEPTIONS FROM WHEN THE PART WAS ON THE
VEHICLE. CHECKING THE STUD AFTER REMOVAL HELPS IMPROVE CONSCIOUSNESS OF
ISSUES WHEN INSPECTING PARTS ON VEHICLE.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 03-9-9 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Steering - Tie Rod End Inspection Procedures > Page 6031
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6032
Tie Rod End: Specifications
Tie rod end lain nuts ............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 55 Nm (41 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end nut .................................................
........................................................................................................................................ 55 Nm (41 ft.
lbs.) Tie rod end castellated ................................................................................................................
.............................................................. 50 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) Tie rod end jam nut .................................
.................................................................................................................................................. 45 Nm
(33 ft. lbs.) Inner tie rod end ................................................................................................................
...................................................................... 110 Nm (81 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Inner
Tie Rod End-Inner
Removal
1. Remove the steering gear.
2. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove both steering gear boots when removing the RH inner lie rod end.
Remove the boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
3. NOTE: LH side shown; RH side similar.
Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft.
4. NOTE: RH side shown; LH side similar.
Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie rod end.
5. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the piston shaft while tightening.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner > Page 6035
Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Outer
Tie Rod End-Outer
Special Tools
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
1. Turn the ignition switch to the unlock position. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly.
3. Remove the castellated nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the castellated nut.
4. Loosen the tie rod end jam nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Inner > Page 6036
5. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end
6. Remove the tie rod end. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Adjust the front toe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Ball Joint: Specifications Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid > Page 6042
Ball Joint: Specifications General Specifications
Front
Ball joint pinch bolt ...............................................................................................................................
.............................................. 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.)
Rear
Lower ball joint nut ...............................................................................................................................
............................................ 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) Upper ball joint nut ..................................................
........................................................................................................................... 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection
Ball Joint Inspection, Front Suspension, Lower Arm
Prior to carrying out this test, check the front wheel hub for excessive end play.
1. Raise and support the vehicle so no load is on the front suspension lower arm. 2. Grasp the
upper and lower edges of the (1) tire and move the wheel in and out from the (2) pivot center line.
3. The front suspension lower arm ball joint is worn if excessive movement is felt while the wheel is
being moved. 4. Install a new front suspension lower arm if the movement exceeds 0.794 mm (1/32
inch).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Ball Joint Inspection > Page 6045
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Suspension Balljoint Inspection Job Aid
Front Lower Balljoint
Measurement
..................................................................................................................................................
Between lower control arm and knuckle
Deflection .............................................................................................................................................
........................................... 0-0.008 in (0-0.2mm)
Reference Diagram .............................................................................................................................
............................................................................. D
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing
Inspection
TSB 09-5-1
03/23/09
LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the
evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the
technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower
control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components.
ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is
identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts
number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from
the arm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6051
Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes
through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing
is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves.
Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect
the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10
mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement.
Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing
may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a
separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional
requirements. These do not require replacement.
Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The
customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the
arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as
the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be
safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 6052
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications
Front Steering Knuckle: Specifications
Wheel knuckle cam bolt .......................................................................................................................
.................................................. 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6056
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6057
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: When a new wheel knuckle is installed a new wheel bearing must also be installed.
1. Raise the vehicle on the hoist.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6058
2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
1 If necessary, remove the center cap.
2 Remove the nuts.
3. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
occur.
NOTE: If the brake drum is rusted to the axle shaft pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
Remove the brake drum. ^
If equipped, remove the brake drum retaining clips.
4. If the brake drum will not come off, follow these steps.
1 Move the brake shoe adjusting lever off the brake adjuster screw.
2 Loosen the brake shoe adjuster screw nut by adjusting the nut upward.
5. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6059
6. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
7. Using the special tool, remove the wheel hub.
8. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
9. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6060
Vehicles with ABS 10. Position the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 11. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
12. Remove brake line bracket bolt.
13. Support the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6061
14. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
15. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
16. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
17. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6062
18. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
19. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
20. Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the brake backing plate from the wheel knuckle and position aside.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6063
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam. 4. Install the wheel knuckle cam
bolt loosely.
5. NOTE: Brake shoes shown removed for clarity.
Install the brake backing plate into the wheel knuckle. ^
Install the bolts.
6. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub. 7. Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6064
8. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
9. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
10. Remove the support from the wheel knuckle.
11. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
12. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6065
13. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
14. Install brake line bracket bolt.
15. Install the parking brake cable bolt.
Vehicles with ABS 16. Position the ABS brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6066
17. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 18. Install the halfshaft nut.
19. Install the brake drum. 20. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 21. Check and adjust the wheel
alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Specifications
Stabilizer Bushing: Specifications
Stabilizer bar bushing mount ...............................................................................................................
..................................................... 70 Nm (52 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Specifications
Stabilizer Link: Specifications
Stabilizer bar links ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................... 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 6074
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the upper and lower stabilizer bar link nuts.
2 Remove the stabilizer bar link.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6084
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6085
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6091
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6092
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6093
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6094
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6095
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6096
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6097
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6098
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6099
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the two engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6100
6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the belts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6101
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the two steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6102
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6111
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6112
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6118
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6119
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6120
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6121
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6122
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6123
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6124
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6125
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6134
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6135
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6141
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6142
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6143
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6144
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6145
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6146
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6147
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6148
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6149
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6150
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6151
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the four control arms bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6160
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6161
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6167
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6168
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6169
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6170
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6171
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6172
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6173
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6174
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair
Spring
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
NOTE: After removing the wheel, finger-tighten one lug nut to retain the drum if the drum retainers
have been removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
Vehicles with ABS 3. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 4. Support the rear wheel knuckle. 5. Remove the upper arm bolt.
^ Loosen the lower arm bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6178
6. Remove the lower shock nut and position aside.
7. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Bleed the brake system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6187
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 >
Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6188
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut
Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises
TSB 09-6-5
04/06/09
NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA
FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid
ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner
Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area
during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009
may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while
driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch,
thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut
area during slow parking lot type maneuvers?
a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00
diagnostics.
b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure
and install new dust boot designed for this
concern.
d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM,
Section 204-00 diagnostics.
2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure.
a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02.
b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight
down, out of the upper spring seat.
c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover.
d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce
bumper itself.
e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut.
f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009).
a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01.
b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6194
C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1)
(1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around
the rod.
(2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot.
(3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself.
d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01.
e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service
Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With
1007D, 18124A)
090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots,
Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears
and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A)
090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In
Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8,
2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5
> Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 6195
Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5,
2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18A179 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Shock Absorber
Front shock absorber upper mounting bracket nuts
.................................................................................................................................. 80 Nm (59 ft.
lbs.) Lower shock absorber nut ...........................................................................................................
............................................................ 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) Upper shock absorber .............................
.................................................................................................................................................. 18 Nm
(13 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Specifications > Shock Absorber > Page 6198
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Specifications Strut
Strut piston rod to bearing plate nut
........................................................................................................................................................
103 Nm (76 ft. lbs.) Strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts .................................................................................
.................................................................................. 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) Upper strut mount bolts .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... 80 Nm (59 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Unclip the brake hose from the bracket.
Vehicles with ABS 3. Disconnect the anti-lock brake harness from the strut and spring assembly.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Position the bracket aside.
All vehicles 4. Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
1 Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
2 Position the stabilizer bar link aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6201
5. Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts. 6. Mark the bearing plate outer studs. Marking the
studs will aid in the installation in restoring the caster/camber to its original settings.
7. NOTE: Support the strut and spring assembly when removing upper nuts.
Remove the strut and spring assembly. ^
Remove the nuts.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Align the front wheels to specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6202
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the strut and spring assembly.
2. WARNING: Always wear safety goggles when using a spring compressor. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal
injury.
Mount the assembly in a suitable holding fixture and use a suitable spring compressor to compress
the front coil spring.
3. Remove the strut piston rod nut.
4. Disassemble the strut and spring assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6203
1 Remove the metal sheet plate.
2 Remove the upper strut mount.
3 Remove the thrust bearing plate.
4 Remove the thrust bearing.
5 Remove the upper spring seat.
6 Remove the upper spring seat isolator.
7 Remove the spring.
8 Remove the dust boot.
9 Remove the rubber bump stopper.
10 Remove the lower spring seat.
5. NOTE: New fasteners must be used when old fasteners are loosened and/or removed.
NOTE: Make sure that an alignment procedure is carried out any time the strut and spring
assembly or the front shock absorber mounting bracket bolts are loosened.
NOTE: Be sure the spring is correctly seated in the insulator.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6204
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the upper shock absorber nut. 3. Raise and support the vehicle enough to relax the
suspension system.
4. Remove the shock absorber.
^ Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
^ Remove the shock absorber.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6210
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6211
Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6212
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6213
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6214
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6215
Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6216
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6217
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6218
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6219
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6220
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6221
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6222
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6223
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front > Page 6224
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1 Install the bolt.
2 Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS 13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18.
Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation
JACKING
WARNING: Do not run the engine when jacking the vehicle. The wheels contacting the ground could cause the
vehicle to move. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Make sure the jack and jack stands are correctly located to prevent the vehicle from falling.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Wheel chocks should be used to prevent the vehicle from rolling and falling off the jack. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The service jack provided with the vehicle is only intended to be used in an emergency
for changing a deflated tire. Never use the service jack to hoist the vehicle for any other service.
Refer to the Owner Guide when using the jack supplied with the vehicle.
Jacking points - Front
Jacking Points - Front
1. The front jacking point is at the bolt head of the lower control arm.
Jacking points - Rear
Jacking Points - Rear
1. The rear jacking points are located on the rear trailing arms.
LIFTING
Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6233
Lifting Points
1. CAUTION: Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if
care is not exercised when positioning
the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle.
The lifting points are part of the uni-body structure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications
> Mechanical Specifications
Tires: Mechanical Specifications
Tire Runout Specifications
Type Wheel
Aluminum
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
.................................... 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Type Wheel
Steel
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
.................................... 1.5 mm (0.06 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications
> Mechanical Specifications > Page 6238
Tires: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
Tire Inflation
Tires ................................................................................................................................ See safety
certification sticker located on the driver door jamb.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheels: Specifications
Wheel Rim Runout
Type Wheel
Aluminum
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
..................................... 1.5 mm (006 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Type Wheel
Steel
Max. Radial Runout .............................................................................................................................
..................................... 1.5 mm (006 inch) Max. Lateral Runout ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 2.0 mm (0.08 inch)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 6242
Wheels: Service and Repair
Wheel Leaks
1. Pinhole leaks in cast aluminum wheels compromise the wheel integrity. Install a new wheel.
Straightening Wheels, Rims or Components
1. NOTE: Do not heat wheels in an attempt to soften them for straightening to repair damage. The
special alloy used in these wheels is heat-treated.
Uncontrolled heating from welding affects the properties of the material.
Do not weld the wheels for any reason.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection
Wheel Bearing Inspection
NOTE: The wheel bearings are not adjustable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6248
Removal
NOTE: Install a new wheel bearing when the wheel hub is removed.
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake disc.
2. Remove the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the tie rod end nut.
1 Remove the cotter pin.
2 Remove the nut.
4. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod end from the knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6249
Vehicles with ABS 5. Remove the bolt and position the anti-lock brake sensor aside.
All vehicles 6. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the pinch bolt.
2 Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the wheel knuckle.
^ Position the halfshaft aside and support.
8. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6250
9. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing and knuckle.
10. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the snap ring.
12. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
NOTE: The brake disc shield is pressed on.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6251
13. If necessary, remove the brake disc shield.
Installation
All vehicles
1. If necessary, install a disc brake shield.
2. NOTE: Special Tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6252
4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
5. Install the wheel knuckle.
1 Position the wheel knuckle.
2 Install the strut-to-wheel knuckle bolts.
6. Using the special tool, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the pinch bolt into the wheel knuckle.
^ Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6253
Vehicles with ABS 8. Install the anti-lock brake sensor and tighten the bolt.
All vehicles 9. Install the tie rod end into the wheel knuckle.
1 Install the tie rod end nut.
2 Install a new cotter pin.
10. Install the wheel hub nut. 11. Install the brake disc.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6254
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6255
Special Tool(s)
Removal and Installation
All vehicles 1. Remove the brake shoes.
2. Remove the rear halfshaft nut.
3. Using the special tool, loosen the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6256
4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub.
5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle, after removing the wheel hub.
Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
Vehicles with ABS 6. Position the anti-lock brake (ABS) sensor aside.
1 Remove the ABS sensor bolt and bracket bolts.
2 Position the ABS sensor aside.
All vehicles 7. Disconnect the parking brake cable.
^ Remove the parking brake cable bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6257
8. Disconnect the brake line from the wheel cylinder.
^ Remove the brake line bracket bolt.
9. Support the wheel knuckle.
10. Remove the lower shock absorber nut.
11. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the lower ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
12. NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the ball joint stud to keep it from turning while removing the
nut.
Disconnect the upper ball joint. ^
Remove the nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6258
13. NOTE: Note the position of the spring insulator and spring for installation.
Remove the spring. ^
Lower the support to the wheel knuckle.
14. Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Mark the position of the adjustment cam notch.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
15. Remove the wheel knuckle.
1 Remove the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Remove the wheel knuckle.
16. Remove the snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6259
17. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the snap ring into the wheel knuckle.
3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6260
4. Position the wheel knuckle and install the wheel knuckle cam.
^ Position the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
5. Install the wheel knuckle cam bolt loosely.
6. Support the wheel knuckle and install the spring.
7. Install the lower shock absorber nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6261
8. Install the upper ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
9. Install the lower ball joint.
^ Install the nut.
10. Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
1 Align the wheel knuckle cam.
2 Tighten the wheel knuckle cam bolt.
11. Install the brake line to the wheel cylinder.
^ Install the brake line bracket bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6262
12. Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
1 Install the bolt.
2 Install the parking brake cable onto the backing plate.
Vehicles with ABS 13. Position the anti-lock (ABS) brake sensor and bracket bolts.
^ Install the bolts.
14. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
All vehicles 15. Install the halfshaft nut. 16. Install the brake shoes. 17. Bleed the brake system. 18.
Check and adjust the wheel alignment as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Wheel hub nut .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................. 290 Nm (214 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel nuts (all wheels) .......................................................................................................................
.................................................... 133 Nm (98 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front > Page 6272
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel bearing.
2. Press out the wheel studs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Accumulator HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6277
Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The suction accumulator is mounted to the A/C accumulator bracket. The inlet tube of the suction
accumulator is connected to the A/C evaporator outlet tube. The outlet tube is connected to the A/C
manifold and tube assembly.
After entering the inlet of the suction accumulator, heavier oil-laden refrigerant contacts an
internally mounted dome (which serves as an umbrella) and drips down onto the bottom of the
canister.
^ A small diameter oil bleed hole, in the bottom of the vapor return tube, allows the accumulated
heavier liquid refrigerant and oil mixture to re-enter the compressor suction line at a controlled rate.
^ As the heavier mixture passes through the small diameter liquid bleed hole, it has a second
chance to vaporize and recirculate through the A/C compressor without causing compressor
damage due to slugging.
^ A fine mesh screened filter fits tightly around the bottom of the vapor return tube to filter out
refrigerant system contaminant particles.
^ A desiccant bag is mounted inside the canister to absorb any moisture which may be in the
refrigerant system.
^ A fitting located on the top of the suction accumulator is used to attach the A/C cycling switch. A
long-travel Schrader-type valve stem core is installed in the fitting so that the A/C cycling switch
can be removed without discharging the A/C system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6278
Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
3. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
4. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
5. Remove the two suction accumulator mounting bracket nuts.
6. Disconnect the suction line from the A/C evaporator core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6279
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
7. Remove the suction accumulator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new suction accumulator with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defrost Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 6285
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Panel Vent Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 6286
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Footwell Vent Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Defrost Vacuum Control Motor > Page 6287
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Outside Air Inlet Vacuum Control Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Moulding/Trim,
Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the vacuum control motor.
1 Disconnect the vacuum line.
2 Remove the two screws.
3 Disconnect the vacuum control motor from the door lever.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Door Cable: Service and Repair
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Lower the glove compartment door.
^ Press the glove compartment release tabs inward while pulling downward on the glove
compartment.
3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable.
1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool.
2 Release the locking tab.
3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6291
4. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
^ Disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Cable, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 6292
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct
Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument
Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
2. Remove the screws and the retaining guides.
3. Remove the screws and remove the duct.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 6297
Air Duct: Service and Repair Rear Footwell Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats.
2. Remove the utility compartment.
1 Remove the four plastic fasteners.
2 Remove the utility compartment. ^
Disconnect the electrical connection.
3. Remove LH and RH front door scuff plates. 4. Remove LH and RH lower A-pillar panels.
5. Remove the LH foot rest. 6. Pull back the carpet to gain access to the rear floor vent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 6298
7. Remove the wire harness pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the floor duct pin-type retainers and
remove the duct.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 6299
Air Duct: Service and Repair Center Register Duct
REMOVAL
1. Remove the defroster duct.
2. Remove the screws from the front side of the instrument panel.
3. Remove the screw for the left vent duct.
4. Remove the screw for the right vent duct.
5. Remove the screws for the center vent duct and remove the vent duct.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Defroster Duct > Page 6300
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust > Page
6309
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to Adjust
TSB 04-25-13
12/27/04
SERVICEABILITY OF INSTRUMENT PANEL REGISTER VENTS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape
2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 vehicles may exhibit instrument panel (IP) register vents that are difficult
to adjust or are limited in their adjustability.
ACTION Register vents for the IP center finish panel can now be ordered and replaced individually.
Replacement of an entire center finish panel assembly to correct a register vent condition is no
longer necessary. The IP outboard register vents can be replaced similarly without replacing the
entire housing assembly, however, the outboard vent must be ordered as an assembly with the
housing. Refer to the following Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
CENTER REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Remove center finish panel. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-12.
2. With center finish panel removed, release the register retention tabs and remove the register.
3. Replace register with Part Number YL8Z-19893-CAA left or YL8Z-19893-CAB right.
4. Reinstall the center finish panel.
OUTBOARD REGISTER REPLACEMENT
1. Tilt the vehicle's outboard register to the down most position. Pull the top of the register out until
it is released from the housing.
2. Remove the new register from the service replacement register housing assembly (base #
-19893-), as described in Step 1.
3. Snap the new register into the vehicle's existing outboard register housing.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042513A Register Replace Right 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513B Register Replace Left 0.2 Hr.
Outboard Vent Only
042513C Register Replace Both 0.4 Hr.
Center Vents (Includes Time To Remove And
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 04-25-13 > Dec > 04 > A/C - Instrument Panel Vents Hard to
Adjust > Page 6315
Install Center Finish Panel)
042513D Register Replace All Vents 0.4 Hr.
(Includes Time To Remove And Install Center Finish Panel)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19893 41
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6320
Blower Motor: Description and Operation
Blower Motor
The blower motor pulls air from the air inlet and forces it into the heater core housing where it is
mixed and distributed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH A-pillar lower trim.
2. Remove the blower motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the washer screws.
3 Remove the blower motor and cover, lower the assembly from the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Blower Motor > Page 6323
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor Wheel
REMOVAL
1. Remove the blower motor.
2. Remove the blower motor wheel retainer from the motor shaft, and remove the wheel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Install a new blower wheel retainer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6328
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6329
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6330
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6334
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6335
Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation
The four-speed operation of the blower motor is achieved through the blower motor switch resistor
and contains a thermal limiter which is used as a temperature protecting fuse. The assembly is
located on the passenger side on the evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
NOTE: The air distribution system of this vehicle cannot be equipped with a cabin air filter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Air gap between pulley and hub...........................................................................................................
...................................0.35-0.75 mm (0.014-0.029 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6346
Compressor Clutch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6347
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation
A/C compressor and Clutch Assembly
NOTE:
^ Internal A/C compressor components are not repaired separately. Install a new FS-10 A/C
compressor only as an assembly. The A/C clutch, A/C clutch pulley, A/C clutch field coil and the
shaft seals are repairable.
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not required when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The FS-10 A/C compressor has the following characteristics:
^ a 10-cylinder swashplate design utilizing the tangential design mount
^ displacement of 170 cc (10.4 cubic inches)
^ A one-piece lip-type seal (repaired from the front of the A/C compressor) is used to seal it at the
shaft opening in the assembly.
^ Five double-acting pistons operate within the cylinder assembly. The pistons are actuated by a
swashplate that changes the rotating action of the shaft to a reciprocating force.
^ Reed-type discharge valves are located between the cylinder assembly and the head at each end
of the A/C compressor.
^ The A/C compressor uses PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B. This oil contains special additives necessary for the A/C
compressor.
^ The A/C compressor oil from vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may have a dark
color while maintaining a normal oil viscosity. This is normal for this A/C compressor because
carbon from the piston rings will discolor the oil.
Compressor Clutch Components
The magnetic A/C clutch has the following characteristics:
^ It drives the compressor shaft.
^ When battery positive voltage (B+) is applied to the A/C clutch field coil, the clutch disc and hub
assembly is drawn toward the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6348
^ The magnetic force locks the clutch disc and hub assembly and the A/C clutch pulley together as
one unit, causing the compressor shaft to rotate.
^ When B+ is removed from the A/C clutch field coil, springs in the clutch disc and hub assembly
move the clutch disc away from the A/C clutch pulley.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6349
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at three equally-spaced places between the clutch hub and the A/C
clutch pulley. 2. Remove the A/C clutch. Add or remove spacers between the A/C clutch and the
compressor shaft until clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6350
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6351
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6352
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
3. Install the A/C clutch pulley.
NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned
during installation.
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6353
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 6354
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6358
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6359
Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the A/C clutch bolt.
3. Remove the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer.
1 Thread an 8 x 1.25 mm bolt into the A/C clutch to force it from the compressor shaft.
2 Lift the disk and hub assembly and the A/C clutch hub spacer from the compressor shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6360
4. Remove the pulley snap ring.
5. Remove the A/C clutch pulley.
6. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
1 Note the location of the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
2 Using the special tools, remove the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
2. Using the special tools, install the A/C clutch field coil.
CAUTION: Do not use air tools. The A/C clutch field coil can be easily damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6361
NOTE: Position the clutch field coil on the A/C compressor as previously marked.
3. Install the A/C clutch pulley.
NOTE: The A/C clutch pulley is a tight fit on the A/C compressor head. It must be correctly aligned
during installation.
4. Install the pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
5. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening.
6. Install the disk and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6362
7. Using the special tool, install and tighten the A/C clutch bolt.
8. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch hub spacers. 9. Install
the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6363
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: Customer Interest A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06 > A/C Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6372
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
Compressor Shaft Seal: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative
TSB 06-4-9
03/06/06
A/C COMPRESSOR NOT OPERATIONAL / LOW FREON-SHAFT SEAL LEAKS
FORD: 2003 Escort 2003-2006 Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2003 Explorer Sport, Windstar 2003-2005
Excursion, Explorer Sport Trac 2003-2006 Escape, F-150, F-Super Duty, Ranger 2004-2006
Freestar 2006 Low Cab Forward
LINCOLN: 2002 Blackwood 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 2003-2005 Sable 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2002-2006 vehicles equipped with an FS-10 A/C compressor may experience a non
operational A/C compressor due to a low freon level caused by a leaking shaft seal.
ACTION Replace the A/C compressor shaft seal following the Service Procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
If the shaft seal on the front of the A/C compressor is leaking, replace the shaft seal
(F1VY-19D665-A) and not the compressor assembly. Replacing the shaft seal should correct the
leaking condition. When replacing the seal, follow the procedure outlined in Workshop Manual,
Section 412-03.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT060409 Use Standard Labor Actual
Operation For Compressor Time
Removal And Installation If Available, And Claim Additional Labor Required As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19D665 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Compressor Shaft Seal: > 06-4-9 > Mar > 06
> A/C - Compressor Leaking/Inoperative > Page 6378
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6379
Compressor Shaft Seal: Service Precautions
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6380
Compressor Shaft Seal: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the disk and hub assembly from the A/C compressor.
2. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal felt from the nose of the A/C compressor. 3. Clean
the compressor nose area.
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
4. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6381
5. Using the special tool, remove the shaft seal from the A/C compressor.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the A/C compressor nose area.
CAUTION: To prevent refrigerant system contamination, do not allow dirt or other foreign materials
to enter the A/C compressor.
2. Lubricate the shaft seal and special tool with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B. Place the
shaft seal on the special tool.
3. Position the special tool, with the shaft seal, over the A/C compressor shaft.
4. Using the special tool, push the shaft seal onto the A/C compressor shaft until seated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6382
5. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal snap ring. 6. Carry out the A/C compressor external
leak test.
7. Using the special tool, install the shaft seal felt. 8. Install the disk and hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Shaft Seal > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6383
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Diode HVAC > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6390
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6391
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6392
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6393
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6397
Compressor Fitting HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the nuts from the A/C manifold and tube mounting bracket.
2. Disconnect the A/C manifold and tube from the suction accumulator.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
3. Remove the front bumper cover.
4. Remove the nut and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube to A/C condenser core air
conditioning line (peanut) fitting.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
5. Position aside the speed control actuator assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6398
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the electrical harness pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the nuts.
6. Raise and support the vehicle.
7. Remove the RH splash shield.
8. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
9. Disconnect the A/C clutch field coil electrical connector.
10. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Fitting HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6399
NOTE: Vehicles with 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
11. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly through the bottom of the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
^ Apply Pipe Sealant with Teflon (R) D8AZ-19554-A or equivalent meeting Ford specifications
WSK-M2G350-A2 and ESR-M18P7-A to the threads of the A/C manifold retaining bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Condenser HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6403
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C condenser core has the following characteristics:
^ It is an aluminum fin-and-tube design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator.
^ It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over the fins and tubes to extract heat
and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6404
Condenser HVAC: Testing and Inspection
ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core from the A/C system.
NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the
core tubes.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the
manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect
the
yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are
used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will
activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6405
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
^ If an A/C condenser core leak is suspected, the A/C condenser core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover.
3. Remove the nuts from the two condenser core air conditioning line (peanut) fittings.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the screws and the A/C condenser core brackets. 5. Remove the A/C condenser core.
NOTE: When removing the A/C condenser core, disconnect the two air conditioning line (peanut)
fittings from the A/C condenser core.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new A/C condenser core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views
Control Assembly: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Connector Views > Page 6411
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams
> Page 6412
Control Assembly: Description and Operation
The climate control assembly has three system controls:
^ The A/C heater function selector switch combines a vacuum selector valve with two electrical
switches to supply battery positive voltage (B+) to the A/C clutch circuit and the blower motor
control circuit.
^ The temperature selection is accomplished through cable-controlled positioning of the
temperature blend door located in the heater core housing.
^ The blower motor switch controls the blower motor speed by adding or bypassing resistors in the
heater blower motor switch resistor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the four screws and the climate control assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6415
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Temperature Control Switch
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the temperature control switch knob.
3. Disconnect the temperature blend door control cable.
1 Align the locator holes and insert the special tool.
2 Release the locking tab.
3 Remove the temperature blend door control cable from the blend door shaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6416
4. Depress the three tabs and remove the temperature blend door control cable.
5. Remove the temperature control switch.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Depress the tab and rotate the temperature control switch counterclockwise.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Rotate the gear to align the locking tab with the notch in the gear before installing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6417
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Function Selector Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the function selector switch knob.
3. Remove the function selector switch.
^ Push in the locking tab on one side of the function selector switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Align the function selector switch locking tabs with the holes in the housing and press the
function selector into the housing. Verify that both locking tabs are secured.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Climate Control Assembly > Page 6418
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Climate Control Assembly Illumination Bulbs
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the illumination bulb(s) by turning a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 6419
Alignment Pin, Temperature Blend Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions
Coupler HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches across the
O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
^ Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring; this can
cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
^ Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent axial
scratches which may cause future leaks.
^ Use only new green/purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may
result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
^ Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 6423
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation
Spring Lock Coupling
Spring Lock Coupling
The spring lock coupling is a refrigerant line coupling held together by a garter spring inside a
circular cage. ^
When the coupling is connected together, the flared end of the female fitting slips behind the garter
spring inside the cage of the male fitting.
^ The garter spring and cage then prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the
cage.
^ The O-ring seals are green in color and are made of a special material.
^ Use only the green O-ring seals listed in the Ford Master Parts Catalog for the spring lock
coupling.
^ A plastic indicator ring is used on the spring lock couplings of the A/C evaporator core to indicate,
during vehicle assembly, that the coupling is connected. Once the coupling is connected, the
indicator ring is no longer necessary but will remain captive by the coupling near the cage opening.
^ An A/C tube lock coupling clip may be used to secure the coupling but is not necessary.
Air Conditioning Line (Peanut) Fitting
The air conditioning line (peanut) fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component. ^
The male and female blocks of the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting are retained with a nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 6424
^ An O-ring seal is installed around the tube on the male block.
^ The female block is welded to the tube and is not adjustable.
^ Support the female fittings with a wrench to prevent twisting of the tubes.
^ The male block will pivot around the tube to allow for alignment with the female block during
assembly.
^ When correctly assembled the male and female fittings should be flush.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Spring Lock Coupling
Spring Lock Coupling
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISCONNECT
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling clip.
3. Using the special tool, disengage the spring lock coupling fittings.
4. Remove the O-ring seals with a non-metallic tool.
CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seals. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6427
5. Remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring with a small hooked wire.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the A/C tube lock coupling spring;
this can cause axial scratches across the O-ring seal grooves resulting in refrigerant leaks.
CLEANING
1. Fabricate a cleaning tool from a 1/8 inch diameter brazing rod.
2. Cut an abrasive pad from maroon colored 3M Scotch Brite (R) with the dimensions
corresponding to the coupling size.
3. Assemble the pad to the tool. 4. Coat the abrasive pad with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
(R-134a Systems) F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting
Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
5. Roll the pad on the tool and install it in a variable speed motor drill.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6428
6. Polish for one minute at moderate speed (less than 1,500 rpm) or until the surface is clean and
free of scratches or foreign material.
CAUTION: Maintain low speed drill rotation when inserting or removing the cleaning tool to prevent
axial scratches which may cause future leaks.
7. Clean the fitting with a lint-free cloth. 8. Inspect the surface for grooves or scratches. If grooves
or scratches are still present, install a new component.
9. Clean the O-ring seal grooves with a 300 mm (12 inch) length of natural fiber string.
^ Loop the string around the grooves and pull the string back and forth.
10. Remove any foreign material from the grooves with a lint-free cloth.
CONNECT
1. Install the A/C tube lock coupling spring.
2. Lubricate the inside of the coupling with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or
equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6429
3. Install the O-ring seals.
1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
NOTE: Some connections may have two or three O-ring seals.
CAUTION: Use only new green O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may
result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
4. Connect the spring lock coupling fittings with a twisting motion until the A/C tube lock coupling
spring snaps over the flared end of the female
fitting.
5. Install the A/C tube lock coupling clip. 6. Charge the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6430
Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Air Conditioning Line (Peanut) Fitting
DISCONNECT
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the nut from the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting.
CAUTION: Support the female fitting with a wrench to prevent the tubes from twisting.
3. Pull the air conditioning line (peanut) fitting apart.
4. Remove the O-ring seal with a non-metallic tool.
CAUTION: Do not use metal tools to remove the O-ring seal. They can cause axial scratches
across the O-ring seal groove resulting in refrigerant leaks.
CONNECT
1. Clean all dirt or foreign material from the fittings.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Spring Lock Coupling > Page 6431
2. Install the O-ring seal.
1 Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
CAUTION: Use only new purple O-ring seals. The use of any O-ring seals other than specified may
result in intermittent leakage during vehicle operation.
3. Lubricate the inside of the fittings with PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems)
F7AZ-19589-DA (Motorcraft YN-12-C) or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
4. Assemble the male and female fittings together.
NOTE: When correctly assembled, the male and female fittings should be flush.
5. Charge the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 6432
Spring Lock Coupling
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Case > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporator Case: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to: Body and
Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
3. Disconnect the refrigerant line spring lock couplings from the A/C evaporator core.
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose.
5. Remove the evaporator core housing.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Carefully remove the evaporator core housing to avoid spilling PAG compressor oil in the
passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Feed the vacuum hose through the opening in the cowl while installing the housing.
^ Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and temperature
switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317
A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Article No. 03-5-6
03/17/03
CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate
control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most
noticeable when the A/C is first turned on.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the
mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the
recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the
evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of
Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs.
Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19B55 53
OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999
Disclaimer
Odor Service Tips
Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments
There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are:
^ Chemical odors
^ Environmental odors
^ Microbiological odors
^ Human and other interior-generated odors
Odors can be described in a number of ways:
^ Musty
^ Mildew
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 6444
^ Fishy
^ Sweet
^ Burning
^ Chemical
^ Fuel
^ Oil
^ Exhaust
^ Wet cement
^ Urine
^ Tar
^ Fragrance
^ Body odor
Chemical odors:
^ Coolant: sweet smell
^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell
^ Oil: oil type or burning smell
^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell
^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell
^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell
^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell
^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell
Environmental odors:
^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell
^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells
^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell
^ Pollen: sweet smell
^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell
Microbiological odors:
Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on:
^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell
^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 6445
^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell
^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell
^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell
Human and other interior-generated odors:
^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors
^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell
^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors
^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell
The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must
determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is.
Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C
system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by
improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings.
Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed
through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the
A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle.
Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on
and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such
as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be
more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C).
Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a
short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system.
They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode.
The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it
must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated.
Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and
then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure.
Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external
sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max
A/C or recirculation mode.
Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected
area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification
(WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article.
Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning
the affected area.
A/C Odor Treatment Procedure
1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side
for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check
the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the
cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion.
2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top
Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is
debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the
microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components.
3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris.
Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water.
4. Open vehicle windows.
5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
6. Set the following:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors > Page 6446
^ Function selector switch in A/C mode
^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed
^ Engine running at normal operating temperature
7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system.
8. Turn ignition off.
9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop
Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and
eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.)
NOTE
TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY
INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING).
10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the
Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four
(4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the
opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft
A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty.
11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor.
12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating.
13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch.
Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation
1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure.
2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number
3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum
bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum
Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location.
3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Technical Service Bulletin # 03-5-6 Date: 030317
A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors
Article No. 03-5-6
03/17/03
CLIMATE CONTROL - MUSTY OR MILDEW TYPE ODOR FROM CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
FORD: 2001-2003 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a musty and/or mildew type odor coming from the climate
control system. This odor is caused by mildew-type fungi growth in the A/C evaporator. It is most
noticeable when the A/C is first turned on.
ACTION Apply Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating to the A/C system, which encapsulates the
mildew to help reduce odors. Install air inlet vacuum motor bleed valve, which operates the
recirculation/fresh air door to default to fresh mode when the vehicle is parked to dry out the
evaporator core. Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under The Provisions Of
Bumper To Bumper Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
030506A Apply Motorcraft A/C 1.5 Hrs.
Cooling Coil Coating To The A/C System Then Install Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19B55 53
OASIS CODES: 208000, 208300, 208999
Disclaimer
Odor Service Tips
Types Of Odors, Their Sources And Treatments
There are typically four (4) types of objectionable odors found in a vehicle, they are:
^ Chemical odors
^ Environmental odors
^ Microbiological odors
^ Human and other interior-generated odors
Odors can be described in a number of ways:
^ Musty
^ Mildew
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 6452
^ Fishy
^ Sweet
^ Burning
^ Chemical
^ Fuel
^ Oil
^ Exhaust
^ Wet cement
^ Urine
^ Tar
^ Fragrance
^ Body odor
Chemical odors:
^ Coolant: sweet smell
^ Fuel: gasoline or diesel fuel smell
^ Oil: oil type or burning smell
^ Power Steering Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Transmission Fluid: oil type or burning smell
^ Washer Fluid: alcohol type smell
^ Gear Lube: garlic/sulphur smell
^ Refrigerant/Oil: ether type smell
^ Carpet/Trim Adhesives: fishy, urine, or sweet smell
^ Evaporator Core Coating: wet cement type smell
Environmental odors:
^ Exhaust: exhaust, fuel, burning type smell
^ Industrial Pollutants: all types of smells
^ Dust: musty, mildew, wet cement type smell
^ Pollen: sweet smell
^ Tobacco: burning, tar smell
Microbiological odors:
Microbial growth supported by warm temperatures and moisture may occur on:
^ Foam Seals: musty, mildew smell
^ Rubber Seals: musty, mildew smell
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 6453
^ Adhesives: musty, mildew smell
^ Standing Water: musty, mildew smell
^ Water Soaked Carpet/Trim: musty, mildew smell
Human and other interior-generated odors:
^ Secretion From The Human Body: body odors
^ Perfuming Agents: sweet or fragrance smell
^ Dirty Clothes, Shoes, Socks: musty, mildew, body odors
^ Food/Beverage: sweet, musty, mildew, fishy smell
The first step in diagnosing an odor concern is to verify the concern. To verify an odor you must
determine when and under what circumstances the odor occurs and what type of odor it is.
Chemical odors are usually constant regardless of A/C setting and can be enhanced by A/C
system operation. Most chemical odors are caused by fluid leaks and some are caused by
improperly cured carpet and trim adhesives or evaporator core coatings.
Environmental odors usually occur for a short time and go away after the vehicle has passed
through the affected area. These odors are usually only detected when a window is open or the
A/C system is operating in a function that allows outside air to enter the vehicle.
Microbiological odors, if in the A/C system, usually last for about 30 seconds when first turned on
and will be detected in both Max and Normal A/C. Microbiological odors occurring elsewhere such
as from standing water in doors or kick panels or wet carpeting may last indefinitely and will be
more intense in Max A/C. Microbiological odors will not occur at temperatures below 50° F (10° C).
Human and other interior-generated odors occur while the source is present and may linger for a
short time after removal. These odors can be more noticeable during operation of the A/C system.
They can be detected in the outside air position and may be more noticeable in recirculation mode.
The first step in getting rid of odors is to find the source of the odor. Once the source is found, it
must be removed and the affected area cleaned or treated.
Chemical odors can be removed by repairing or replacing the component that causes the odor and
then cleaning any residue that may have accumulated from the component failure.
Environmental odors usually cannot be removed due to the fact that they occur from external
sources and are an everyday occurrence. They can, however, be minimized by switching to Max
A/C or recirculation mode.
Microbiological odors can be eliminated by removing the source and then treating the affected
area. Standing water must be allowed to drain and dry out. A/C systems may be treated by using
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29), or equivalent meeting Ford specification
(WSS-M99B187-A) as described in the Service Procedure in this article.
Human and other interior-generated odors can be eliminated by removing the source and cleaning
the affected area.
A/C Odor Treatment Procedure
1. Try to reasonably rule out any other source for the odor. Check the carpet on the passenger side
for signs of being wet. Continue diagnosis if water is found on carpet and repair as needed. Check
the blower motor and cover for signs of moisture. This may be as a result of water bypassing the
cowl baffling system that prevents rain intrusion.
2. Remove the engine side fasteners for the plenum cover. This will allow access to the Cowl Top
Panel - Water RH. Remove this and inspect the air inlet screen. Use a shop vacuum if there is
debris present. This debris may work its way into the evaporator case and act as food for the
microbes to grow. Re-install the cowl components.
3. Check to see that the evaporator drain tube (or hose) is not plugged or restricted by debris.
Clear anything that may be obstructing the drainage of water.
4. Open vehicle windows.
5. Disconnect A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
6. Set the following:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 03-5-6 > Mar > 03 > A/C - Musty or Mildew Type Odors >
Page 6454
^ Function selector switch in A/C mode
^ Temperature at full heat Blower at high speed
^ Engine running at normal operating temperature
7. Run vehicle (Steps 4-6 conditions) for 25 minutes. This will dry out the system.
8. Turn ignition off.
9. Disconnect and remove the blower motor and blower motor resistor by referring to Workshop
Manual, Section 412-02 - Blower Motor. (This provides ease of access to the evaporator core and
eliminates the possibility of contaminating the blower motor and/or blower motor resister with the
Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating.)
NOTE
TO AVOID ANY POSSIBLE DAMAGE, DO NOT SPILL OR SPRAY THIS PRODUCT ON ANY
INTERIOR SURFACE (E.G., INSTRUMENT PANEL) OR MATERIAL (E.G., CARPETING).
10. Add the full four (4) fluid ounces (1 bottle) of Motorcraft A/C Cooling Coil Coating (YN-29) to the
Rotunda A/C Disodorizer Sprayer (Rotunda 164-R4700). For effective treatment, use the full four
(4) fluid ounces on one vehicle application. Insert the A/C Disodorizer sprayer nozzle into the
opening in the evaporator case and direct toward the face of the evaporator core. Spray Motorcraft
A/C Cooling Coil Coating until empty.
11. Reinstall and reconnect blower motor resistor and blower motor.
12. Repeat Steps 6, 7, and 8 to cure the Cooling Coil Coating.
13. Reconnect A/C cycling switch.
Air Inlet Vacuum Motor Bleed Valve Tee Installation
1. Remove the passenger front air bag. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20B for procedure.
2. Disconnect vacuum line at air inlet door vacuum motor. Install bleed valve tee Part Number
3L8Z-19B888-AA into vacuum line 90 degree connector, and attach vacuum line with the vacuum
bleed tee to air inlet door vacuum motor. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 412-04 (Vacuum
Control Motor - Outside Air Inlet) for component location.
3. Follow Workshop Manual procedures for reinstalling passenger front air bag.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6455
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C component or damage to the suction accumulator.
The A/C evaporator housing contains the A/C evaporator core. The A/C evaporator core is the
plate/fin type with a unique refrigerant flow path.
^ A mixture of refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the A/C evaporator core through the A/C
evaporator core inlet tube and is routed so it flows through the partitioned first four plate/fin
sections.
^ The next four plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the other end
of the A/C evaporator core.
^ The next five plate/fin sections are partitioned to force the refrigerant to flow toward the bottom of
the A/C evaporator core.
^ Refrigerant then continues through to the remaining five plate/fin sections and then moves out of
the A/C evaporator core through the A/C evaporator core outlet tube.
^ This W-pass flow pattern transfers the flow of refrigerant and oil through the A/C evaporator core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6456
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the suspect A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core from the A/C system.
NOTE: DO NOT leak test an A/C evaporator core with the suction accumulator/drier attached to the
core tubes.
3. Clean the spring lock couplings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Test Fitting
Set to the evaporator or condenser tube connections. 5. Connect the red and blue hoses from the
manifold gauge set to the test fittings on the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. Connect
the
yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are
used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter which will
activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core. If the refrigerant is
not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a
refrigerant leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. ^
If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
^ If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the A/C evaporator core or
A/C condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
^ If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the A/C evaporator core or A/C condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure,
install a new A/C evaporator core or A/C
condenser core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6457
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
NOTE:
^ Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air conditioning
system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed A/C
component or damage to the suction accumulator.
^ If an A/C evaporator core leak is suspected, the A/C evaporator core must be leak tested before it
is removed from the vehicle.
^ The evaporator core and evaporator housing must be installed as a complete unit.
1. Remove the A/C evaporator core housing. 2. Transfer, the components from the old evaporator
core housing to the new evaporator core housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the new A/C evaporator core with the correct amount of PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C
or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6461
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation
A/C Evaporator Core Orifice
NOTE: Install a new A/C evaporator core orifice whenever a new A/C compressor is installed.
The A/C evaporator core orifice has the following characteristics:
^ color-coded green
^ an orifice diameter of 1.25 mm (0.052 inch)
^ located in the condenser to evaporator line
^ Changes the high-pressure liquid refrigerant into a low-pressure liquid.
^ filter screens located on the inlet and outlet ends of the orifice body
^ The inlet filter screen acts as a strainer for the liquid refrigerant flowing through the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
^ O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice prevent the high-pressure liquid refrigerant from
bypassing the A/C evaporator core orifice.
^ Adjustment or repair cannot be made to the A/C evaporator core orifice. A new A/C evaporator
core orifice must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6462
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
2. Engage the special tool onto the A/C evaporator core orifice.
3. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the A/C
evaporator core orifice.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6463
4. If the A/C evaporator core orifice is broken, screw the end of the special tool into the broken A/C
evaporator core orifice.
5. Hold the special tool T-handle stationary and rotate the special tool body to remove the broken
A/C evaporator core orifice.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate and install the O-ring seals on the A/C evaporator core orifice.
^ Use PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B.
2. Place the A/C evaporator core orifice into the special tool.
3. Using the special tool, insert the A/C evaporator core orifice into the condenser to evaporator
line until seated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6464
4. Remove the special tool.
5. Connect the condenser to evaporator line at the orifice tube. 6. Recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6465
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6474
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6475
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6481
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Core: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6482
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Heater Core: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT IS
NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH AS
A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE SYSTEM IS
WORKING CORRECTLY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 6485
Heater Core: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 6486
Heater Core: Description and Operation
Heater Core
The heater core consists of fins and tubes arranged to extract heat from the engine coolant and
transfer the heat to air passing through the heater core housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 6487
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection
WARNING: CARBON MONOXIDE GAS IS COLORLESS, ODORLESS AND DANGEROUS. IF IT
IS NECESSARY TO OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE VEHICLE IN A CLOSED AREA SUCH
AS A GARAGE, ALWAYS USE AN EXHAUST COLLECTOR TO VENT THE EXHAUST GASES
OUTSIDE THE CLOSED AREA. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater water hose to heater core attachments. A
coolant leak in the heater water hose could follow
the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core.
NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good
and did not require installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater
core must be tested by following the Plugged Heater Core Component Test before the Heater Core
Pressure Test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly.
CAUTION: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening
of non-specification clamps can cause leakage at the heater water hose connection and damage
the heater core.
2. Check the integrity of the heater water hose clamps.
Heater Core - Plugged
WARNING: THE HEATER CORE INLET HOSE WILL BECOME TOO HOT TO HANDLE IF THE
SYSTEM IS WORKING CORRECTLY.
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the
heater 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, feel the heater core outlet hose
to see if it is hot.
If it is not hot: ^
the heater core may have an air pocket.
^ the heater core may be plugged, or
^ the thermostat is not working correctly.
Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the radiator/heater core pressure tester to carry out the pressure
test.
1. Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
2. Disconnect the heater water hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater water
hose, approximately 101 mm (4 inches) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater water hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the radiator/heater core
pressure tester in the heater water hose ends. Secure the heater water hoses, plug and adapter
with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the radiator/heater core pressure tester to the
adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure
into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of three minutes. 8. If the
pressure drops, check the heater water hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater
water hoses do not leak, remove the
heater core from the vehicle and carry out the bench test.
Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant
from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 inch) test heater water hoses with plug and
adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the radiator/heater core pressure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 6488
tester to the adapter.
4. Apply 241 kPa (35 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Page 6489
Heater Core: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. Remove the heater blending door levers.
1 Remove the screw for heater blending door.
2 Remove the levers for the blending door.
5. Remove the heater core.
1 Remove the three screws.
2 Remove the cover for the heater core and pull the heater core out of the housing.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: Before installing the temperature control cable, make sure the blend door, cable and
temperature switch are correctly positioned.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Heater Core Case: Description and Operation
The heater core housing contains the following components:
^ heater core
^ air temperature control door
^ panel air flow control door
^ defrost/floor air flow control door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core Case > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6493
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to:
Body and Frame, Interior Trim, Dashboard/Instrument Panel, Service and Repair, Removal and
Installation, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation
4. If equipped with A/C, remove the A/C evaporator core housing.
5. Remove the heater core housing.
1 Remove the heater core housing retaining nuts.
2 Carefully remove the heater core housing to avoid spilling engine coolant in the passenger area.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: Customer Interest A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6502
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage > Page
6503
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
Heater Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
TSB 06-21-19
10/30/06
HEATER CORE LEAKAGE AND ELECTROLYSIS (INFORMATION ONLY)
FORD: 1997-2002 Contour 1997-2007 Crown Victoria, Mustang, Taurus 2000-2007 Focus
2002-2005 Thunderbird 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1997-1999 F-250
Light Duty 1997-2003 Windstar 1997-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, F-150, F-53 Motorhome
Chassis, F-Super Duty, Ranger
2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2004
F-150 Heritage 2004-2007 Freestar 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid 1999-2007 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 1997-2002 Continental 1997-2007 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 2007
MKZ 1998-2007 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1997-2002 Cougar, Mystique 1997-2005 Sable 1997-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007
Montego 2006-2007 Milan 1997-2002 Villager 1997-2007 Mountaineer 2005-2007 Mariner
2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid
This article supersedes TSB 01-15-6 to update the vehicle model years and Service Procedure.
ISSUE The majority of repeat heater core leaks are due to high flow rate or use of poor quality
coolant. However, electrolysis should also be checked, especially when repeat repairs have
occurred.
ACTION If the heater core is leaking, review the location of the leakage and check the condition of
the coolant.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Review the location of the leakage and check the condition of the coolant:
a. If leaks are found on the inlet (or outlet) tubes entering / exiting the heater core, it is most likely
due to due to high flow rate - replace the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6509
heater core and install a restrictor in the heater hose closest to the engine block, reference
Workshop Manual, Section 412.
b. If leaks are found in the body of the heater core itself, and does not appear to be the result of
physical damage like contact or puncture, check the coolant for possible electrolysis.
Testing For Electrolysis
Check for voltage in the cooling system by touching the negative contact of a voltmeter to the
battery ground or a known good ground and suspend the positive lead in the coolant, making sure
it is in contact with the coolant but not touching any metal part of the radiator or cooling system.
Both AC and DC voltages must be checked. Vehicles normally have DC voltages; however, a faulty
engine block heater or faulty diode in the alternator can produce AC voltages. It is understood that
coolant is lost due to heater core failure but try to obtain a voltage reading on the old coolant in the
engine block before addition to or replacement of. To keep more coolant from exiting the heater
core clamp off heater core lines and measure coolant in the engine block. Try not to dilute the
original coolant with new coolant during testing if possible.
1. Determine whether coolant condition is acceptable.
a. Remove both cables from the battery and ensure they do not contact each other or the vehicle.
b. Touch negative lead of voltmeter to engine ground and positive lead in the coolant.
NOTE
POSITIVE TEST PROBE IS IN THE COOLANT FOR TESTING.
c. Check the voltage in the cooling system. If less than or equal to 0.4 volts (V) OK, reconnect
battery cables and proceed to Step 2.
d. If greater than 0.4 V, flush cooling system thoroughly.
e. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
f. Reconnect battery cables.
g. Refill the system with appropriate Motorcraft® engine coolant.
2. Check for loose or missing grounds at static conditions.
a. Turn off all accessories. Turn ignition on but do not start engine.
b. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
c. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V on all grounds OK.
d. Any one greater than 0.4 V, check and clean ground cable connections.
e. Check accessories without using the on off switch on the vehicle instrument panel, use a jumper
wire to ground.
f. Plug in engine block heater, if equipped, and test.
g. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V.
h. Unplug engine block heater, if equipped.
3. Check for loose, missing, or inadequate grounds.
a. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
b. Crank engine but do not start.
c. Monitor voltage while cranking. less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
d. If greater than 0.4 V, ground or repair starter.
e. Start engine and run at about 2000 rpm.
f. Turn on all accessories including those customer only uses occasionally such as CB radio, cell
phone, etc.
g. Test with ground probe to battery ground, engine ground, and vehicle ground sequentially.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heater Hose: > 06-21-19 > Oct > 06 > A/C - Heater Core Electrolysis/Leakage
> Page 6510
h. Voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V OK
i. If greater than 0.4 V, turn off one item at a time until V drops to less than or equal to 0.4 V. Repair
ground to the accessory just identified.
j. Recheck voltage less than or equal to 0.4 V
k. Turn the DVOM to AC volts.
l. Check for ANY AC voltage greater than 0.4.
m. If any AC voltage is present then try turning off each accessory one at a time including blower
motor and any fan motors.
n. If AC voltage is still present then shut engine off and remove B+ from the alternator and tape it
up then retest.
o. If voltage drop is gradual to less than or equal to 0.4 V, the ground straps may simply be
overloaded by added accessories. Test by using heavy gauge jumper to ground. If indicated, install
heavier gauge ground strap(s) and recheck.
NOTE
If vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, be sure they cycle during this testing and monitor
voltage when they are on and when off.
CAUTION
DO NOT GROUND HEATER CORE. IF THE HEATER CORE IS GROUNDED, YOU HAVE
PROVIDED THE ELECTROLOSIS A PATH THROUGH THE HEATER CORE. THIS WOULD
CAUSE THE HEATER CORE TO BECOME AN ANODE OR RECEIVER AND IT WOULD
PROMOTE THE ELECTROLOSIS, OR ANY STRAY VOLTAGE TO USE THE COOLANT AS THE
GROUND PATH.
4. Refill the engine cooling system, reference Workshop Manual, Section 303-03.
NOTE
IF THE HEAT OUTPUT IS INSUFFICIENT, OR THE ENGINE DOES NOT REACH NORMAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES, VERIFY PROPER THERMOSTAT OPERATION AND REPEAT
PROCEDURE IF REQUIRED.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
18476 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Hose > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6511
Heater Hose: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Disconnect the heater outlet hose from the water hose connection.
4. Disconnect the heater hose connection from the engine. 5. Remove the heater hose from the
engine compartment.
6. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater hose junction.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service Precautions
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6515
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation
An A/C compressor pressure relief valve is incorporated in the compressor A/C manifold and tube
to:
^ relieve unusually high refrigerant system discharge pressure buildups of (3,792 kPa [550 psi] and
above).
^ prevent damage to the A/C compressor and other system components.
^ avoid total refrigerant loss by closing after the excessive pressure has been relieved.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6516
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the RH splash shield.
4. If equipped, disconnect the engine block heater electrical connector.
5. Remove the A/C manifold and tube assembly bolt and disconnect the A/C manifold and tube.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
6. Remove the A/C compressor pressure relief valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6517
NOTE: Vehicles with the 2.0L Zetec engine shown, vehicles with the 3.0L (4V) engine similar.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6521
Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation
NOTE: Installation of a new suction accumulator is not necessary when repairing the air
conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of system contamination from a failed
A/C compressor or damage to the suction accumulator.
The condenser to evaporator line contains high-pressure liquid refrigerant upstream of the A/C
evaporator core orifice. The A/C manifold and tube assembly is attached to the A/C compressor
with O-ring seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6522
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch. 2. Remove the evaporator core orifice.
3. Disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C evaporator core.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
4. Remove the evaporator line support nut and remove the line from the A/C evaporator core. 5.
Remove the front bumper cover.
6. Remove the nut and disconnect the condenser to evaporator line from the A/C condenser core
and remove the condenser to evaporator line.
CAUTION: Plug all ports to prevent contamination from dirt or moisture.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Refregerant Capacity
Refregerant Capacity
1 lbs 14 oz (850 kg)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 6527
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Refrigerant
A/C Refrigerant
R-134a
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6528
Refrigerant: Service Precautions
CAUTION:
^ Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be carried out. If
the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all
the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner, or other
cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is very helpful
in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector.
^ If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Electronic Leak Detection
Refrigerent Leak Detector
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
CAUTION: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where electronic A/C leak testing is to be
carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate
this gas all the time. Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake cleaner,
or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan, even in a well-ventilated area, is
very helpful in removing small traces of contamination from the air that might affect the leak
detector.
1. Leak test the refrigerant system using the Refrigerant Leak Detector. Follow instructions
included with leak detector for handling and operation
techniques.
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
2. If a leak is found, recover the refrigerant and repair the system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6531
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection Tracer Dye Leak Detection
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
NOTE: Ford Motor Company vehicles are produced with R-134a Leak Tracer Dye incorporated into
the A/C system. The location of leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow-green glow of the
tracer dye. Since more than one leak can exist, always inspect each component.
1. Check for leaks using a 120-watt UV spot lamp. 2. Scan all components, fittings and lines of the
A/C system. 3. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak dye with a general purpose oil
solvent.
4. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting with the UV spot lamp.
Tracer Dye Injection
NOTE: System pressure should be between 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C (75°F) with the
engine off.
1. Install the Manifold Gauge Set or a recovery station.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Electronic Leak Detection > Page 6532
2. Turn the valve on the fluorescent tracer dye injector all the way to the left to close the valve.
3. Fill the reservoir with 7 ml (0.25 ounce) of R-134a Fluorescent Tracer Dye 164-R3712.
4. Install the injector between the low-side quick disconnect and the vehicle low-pressure service
gauge port valve. 5. Open all quick disconnect valves and charge the refrigerant system. 6. When
system charging is complete, recover the refrigerant from the dye injector. 7. Remove the dye
injector from the low-side quick disconnect valve.
NOTE: Only connect the dye-injector to the Manifold Gauge Set or the charging/recovery station
when dye is to be injected. The dye injector has a one-way check valve that will prevent system
refrigerant recovery and evacuation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Discharging and Recovery
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the
refrigerant. 2. Connect the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service
gauge port valves.
NOTE: Some R-134a service centers require the use of an A/C manifold gauge set.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. 4. Once the service center has recovered the vehicle A/C system
refrigerant, close the service center inlet valve (if so equipped). Then switch off the
power supply.
5. Allow the vehicle A/C system to remain closed for about two minutes. Observe the system
vacuum level as shown on the gauge. If the pressure
does not rise, disconnect the recovery station hose(s).
6. If the system pressure rises, repeat Steps 2 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable for
two minutes. 7. Carry out the required repairs, then evacuate and recharge the A/C system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 6535
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Identifying Refrigerants
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Follow the instructions included with the refrigerant analyzer to obtain the sample for testing.
NOTE: Prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system, you must use an A/C refrigerant
analyzer to identify gas samples taken directly from the refrigeration system or storage containers.
2. The analyzer will display one of the following:
^ A green "PASS" Light Emitting Diode (LED) will light if the purity of the R-134, R-12 or the R-22 is
better than 98% by weight.
^ A red "FAIL" LED will light if the purity of the gases does not meet the 98% purity standard.
^ A red "FAIL" LED and "HYDROCARBON" light will illuminate and a horn will sound if a
hydrocarbon is detected above 5%. This will alert the user of potential hazards.
3. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 6536
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Handling of Contaminated Refrigerants
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant.
^ This equipment must only be used to recover contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to
other vehicles.
^ If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in your area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
CAUTION: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into your
recovery/recycling equipment.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern. 3. Remove the suction
accumulator/drier.
NOTE: ^
Residual refrigerant oil in the suction accumulator/drier must be drained and measured for correct
oil system matching.
^ The suction accumulator/drier cannot be cleaned and a new suction accumulator/drier must be
installed.
4. Clean the A/C evaporator core and the A/C condenser core by flushing. 5. Install the new suction
accumulator/drier. 6. Correctly oil match the system. 7. Evacuate and charge the system. 8.
Dispose of contaminated refrigerant according to all federal, state and local regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Discharging and Recovery > Page 6537
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Evacuation and Charging
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Prior to charging the refrigerant system, you must verify the purity of the refrigerant. 2. Connect
the R-134a A/C Refrigerant Center to the low and high pressure service gauge port valves.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a charging station to carry out evacuation and
charging of the refrigerant system. If a charging station is not available, system charging may be
accomplished using a separate vacuum pump, charging cylinder, and manifold gauge set.
3. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) (vacuum)
and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the vacuum pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
4. Turn off the evacuation pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for five minutes to make sure
that the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not
held for five minutes, leak test the system, service the leaks, and evacuate the system again.
5. Correctly oil match the system to verify that the correct amount of refrigerant oil is present in the
system. 6. Charge the system with the specified weight of refrigerant and refrigerant oil. 7. When
no more refrigerant is being drawn into the system, start the engine and select MAX A/C operation.
Adjust the blower motor speed to
maximum and allow the remaining refrigerant to be drawn into the system. Continue to add
refrigerant into the system until the specified weight of R-134a has been added. Close the charging
cylinder valve and allow the system to pull any remaining refrigerant from the hose. When the
suction pressure drops to approximately 207 kPa (30 psi), close the charging hose valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 6538
Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment
Refrigerent Leak Detector
Special Tool(s)
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Page 6539
Delux A/C Refrigerant Analyzer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil Capacity
Refrigerant Oil Capacity
9 oz (266 ml)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 6544
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications A/C Oil
A/C Oil
PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6545
Refrigerant Oil: Service Precautions
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6546
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT OIL ADDITION
CAUTION: During normal A/C operation, oil is circulated through the system with the refrigerant,
and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the system are
removed for new installation, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the
original total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system
with the new part.
1. Rotate the A/C compressor shaft six to eight revolutions while collecting oil in a clean measuring
device.
^ If the amount of oil drained from the old A/C compressor is between 85-142 ml (3-5 ounces), pour
the same amount plus 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is greater than 142 ml (5
ounces), pour the same amount drained of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent
meeting Ford specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
^ If the amount of oil that was removed from the old A/C compressor is less than 85 ml (3 ounces),
pour 85 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B into the new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without compressor oil.
2. For the suction accumulator/drier, drill two 1/2 inch holes in the suction accumulator/drier
cylinder and drain the oil into a calibrated container.
^ Add a quantity of new oil to match that drained from the old suction accumulator/drier plus 60 ml
(2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B.
3. For the A/C evaporator core, add 89 ml (3 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6547
4. For the A/C condenser core, add 30 ml (1 ounce) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or
equivalent meeting Ford specification
WSH-M1C231-B to the A/C condenser core or the suction accumulator/drier inlet tube.
5. Add 60 ml (2 ounces) of clean PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B to the suction
accumulator/drier inlet tube when carrying out each of the following repairs: ^
installation of a new A/C evaporator core orifice
^ installation of a new A/C compressor pressure relief valve
^ installation of a new refrigerant line
^ repair of an O-ring seal leak
^ repair of a charge port leak
6. Installation of new components that do not require discharge of refrigerant and resulting oil loss,
such as the A/C cycling switch and the A/C
pressure transducer, do not require additional oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6552
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6555
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6556
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator. ^
A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures. ^
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^
When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6559
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6564
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6565
Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation
The blower motor relay supplies voltage to the blower motor and is activated when the key is ON
and the function selector switch is in any position besides OFF. The blower motor relay is located
under the instrument panel next to the steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6566
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6567
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6571
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6572
Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation
The A/C compressor clutch relay supplies voltage to the A/C compressor clutch and is located in
the Battery Junction Box (BJB). The Power Control Module (PCM) can interrupt the A/C
compressor operation through the A/C compressor clutch relay under the following conditions:
^ during engine start-up
^ Wide Open Throttle (WOT)
^ low engine idle conditions
^ excessively high engine temperatures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6573
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6574
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the blower motor switch knob.
3. Remove the blower motor switch.
^ Depress the locking tab.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6583
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > A/C Clutch Cycling Pressure Switch > Page 6586
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6587
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
A/C Cycling Switch
A/C Cycling Switch
The A/C cycling switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the top of the suction
accumulator. ^
A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C cycling switch, presses in on the
Schrader valve stem.
^ This allows the suction pressure inside the suction accumulator to control the operation of the
A/C cycling switch.
^ The electrical switch contacts open when the suction pressure drops to 152-193 kPa (22-28 psi).
^ The contacts close when the suction pressure rises to 276-324 kPa (40-47 psi).
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts close, the signal to energize the A/C clutch is sent to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) which energizes the A/C relay and supplies B+ voltage to the
A/C clutch field coil.
^ When the A/C cycling switch contacts open, the A/C clutch field coil is deenergized and
compressor operation stops.
^ The A/C cycling switch will control the A/C evaporator core pressure at a point where the plate/fin
surface temperature will be maintained slightly above freezing.
^ This prevents icing of the A/C evaporator core and blockage of airflow.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C cycling switch.
A/C Pressure Cut-Off Switch
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of high
system discharge pressures. ^
The A/C pressure cut-off switch is mounted on a Schrader valve-type fitting on the high pressure
side of the condenser to evaporator line.
^ A valve depressor, located inside the threaded end of the A/C pressure cut-off switch, is used to
monitor the compressor discharge pressure.
^ It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
^ The A/C pressure cut-off switch has two sets of contacts. One electrical contact is normally
closed.
^ When the compressor discharge pressure rises to approximately 3,103 kPa (450 psi), the switch
contacts open, disengaging the A/C compressor.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,724 kPa (250 psi), the contacts close to allow
operation of the A/C compressor.
The switch contains a second set of electrical contacts used for high-speed fan control. ^
When the compressor discharge pressure reaches approximately 2,241 kPa (325 psi), these
contacts close and engage the high-speed fan control.
^ When the pressure drops to approximately 1,896 kPa (275 psi), the contacts again open and the
high speed fan control is disengaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the A/C cycling switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C cycling switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C cycling switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 6590
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Pressure Cutoff Switch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pressure cut-off switch.
1 Disconnect the A/C pressure cut-off switch electrical connector.
2 Remove the A/C pressure cut-off switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with PAG Compressor Oil YN-12-C or equivalent meeting Ford
specification WSH-M1C231-B.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Service Port HVAC: Locations
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6594
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6595
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6596
Clutch Cycling Orifice Tube Type Refrigerant System, Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page
6597
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
Service Gauge Port Valve
The high-pressure gauge port valve is located on the condenser to evaporator line.
The low-pressure gauge port valve is located on the A/C manifold and tube assembly.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigeration line or component.
^ Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side gauge ports.
^ The Schrader-type valve core can be repaired if the seal leaks.
^ Always install the A/C charging valve cap on the gauge port valves after repairing the refrigerant
system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service Precautions
WARNING: READ THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6601
Vacuum Harness HVAC: Service and Repair
Vacuum Tester Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Measure the length of the damaged area of the mini-tube vacuum hose. 2. Cut a piece of
standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) inner diameter vacuum hose approximately 25 mm (1 inch) longer than
the damaged area of the
mini-tube vacuum hose.
3. Cut off the mini-tube vacuum hose on each side of the damaged area. 4. Dip the mini-tube hose
ends in commercially available paint thinner containing Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK). This solvent
will seal the mini-tube
in the vacuum hose.
WARNING: READ THE WARNING INFORMATION ON THE PRODUCT LABEL. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
5. Insert the ends of the mini-tube vacuum hose approximately 9 mm (0.375 inch) into the ends of
the standard 3 mm (0.125 inch) service vacuum
hose section.
6. Shake the service joint after assembly to make sure the O-ring seal solvent is dispersed and the
vacuum line is not plugged. 7. Test the system for a vacuum leak in the repair area.
^ Use the Vacuum Tester or equivalent.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Vacuum Harness HVAC > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6602
Vacuum Tester Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate workshop manual procedures prior to carrying out vehicle
repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control
module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the
vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new
deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried
out.
Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry
out the OCS System Reset procedure as
instructed in the workshop manual. Refer to the appropriate workshop manual for OCS system
removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following
procedures for the specified system:
- For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails.
- For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be cleared.
- NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The
DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM.
For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Safety Belt System.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
Steering column (deployable column if equipped) Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting
points Instrument panel braces and brackets Instrument panel and mounting points Seats and seat
mounting points Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6608
SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 6609
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
A Collision
1. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points
are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and
structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Perform the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS, IF SO EQUIPPED, CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE CORRECTLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6616
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6617
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6618
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6619
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6620
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6621
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Side Air
Bag Module, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6626
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6627
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6630
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6631
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6632
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Technician Safety Information
Air Bag: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
^ FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE AIR
BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS PERMISSIBLE).
^ INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT
BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT.
^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN
EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR
BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Technician Safety Information > Page 6635
Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door.
^ Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat
not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
^ When positioning the seat or separating/installing the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to
damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
^ Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The hook
and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
^ Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag
module and the mounting bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service Precautions
> Page 6636
Air Bag: Description and Operation
Air Bag Module - Driver
NOTE: References to the driver air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted air
bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
The driver air bag module: ^
is steering wheel mounted.
^ will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM).
^ has no subassemblies.
^ is serviced with the steering wheel as an assembly.
Air Bag Module - Driver Side
NOTE: ^
References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats for additional
information.
The driver side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the driver
side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the driver seat back.
Air Bag Module - Passenger
NOTE: References to the passenger air bag module must not be confused with the seat-mounted
air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
The passenger air bag module: ^
has no separately repairable parts and is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the RH side of the instrument panel.
Air Bag Module - Passenger Side
NOTE: ^
References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The passenger side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the
passenger side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the passenger seat back.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Carry a live air bag module with the air bag and trim cover pointed away from your
body. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not set a live air bag module down with the trim cover face down. This will reduce
the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a
product of the gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap
and water afterwards.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: Air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers must be installed new, not
repainted.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Depower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
2. NOTE: The driver air bag module and steering wheel must be serviced as an assembly. These
components are not serviced separately
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal of the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
4. Repower the system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Air Bag
Disarming and Arming/Depowering and Repowering
Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6639
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
With Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6640
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6641
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6642
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6643
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6644
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
19. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts.
20. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module
and remove it from the instrument panel.
CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6645
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before
positioning it in the instrument panel.
2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to
the instrument panel openings.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6646
3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel.
^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel.
^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around
its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel.
4. Install the bolts.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6647
8. Connect the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at
the remaining deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install the steering wheel access cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6648
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6649
17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
19. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
20. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6650
21. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
22. Connect the battery ground cable. 23. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Without Side Air Bags
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6651
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS INVOLVED IN A COLLISION,
INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION.
REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY OTHER DAMAGED
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER OR NOT THE AIR
BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6652
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6653
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
8. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6654
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
15. Remove the four passenger air bag module bolts.
16. Reaching one hand into the glove box opening, push outward on the passenger air bag module
and remove it from the instrument panel.
CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND DEPLOYMENT DOOR POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACE
DOWN. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED DEPLOYMENT DOORS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6655
REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Make sure the J-clips are correctly aligned to the holes in the passenger air bag module before
positioning it in the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6656
2. Position and align the two passenger air bag module trim cover alignment pins (one shown) to
the instrument panel openings.
3. Install the passenger air bag module trim cover into the instrument panel.
^ Install the trim cover alignment pins into the instrument panel.
^ When aligned correctly, the passenger air bag module trim cover will have an even gap around
its perimeter and sit flat up against the instrument panel.
4. Install the bolts.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6657
6. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 7. Close the glove box. 8. Connect
the battery ground cable. 9. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at the remaining
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
10. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6658
12. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install the steering wheel access cover.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6659
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6660
Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6661
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place the seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be replaced. The seatback frame should be replaced if necessary.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats concerning the installation of a
new side air bag.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the affected seat
from the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
3. Pry out and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
NOTE: ^
Use care not to damage the center hole plug.
^ The driver side air bag module removal is shown, the passenger side air bag module removal is
similar.
4. Remove the seat cushion adjuster handle.
1 Release the retaining tabs.
2 Pull and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6662
5. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest lever cover.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the seat cushion side shield. ^
If equipped, disconnect the power seat switch electrical connector.
6. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
7. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the side air bag electrical connector and wire
harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
8. Remove the seat backrest pivot nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6663
9. Remove the seat backrest.
1 Remove the seat backrest bolts.
2 Slide the seat backrest pivot stud out of the seat cushion frame and remove the seat backrest.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or separating the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to
damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
10. Turn the manual lumbar handle clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual
lumbar support cable.
11. Pull and remove the manual lumbar support adjustment handle.
12. Separate the seat backrest trim cover J-retainers.
13. Remove the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Placing a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and pad, carefully separate the hook and
loop strips.
2 Roll up the seat back trim cover, in an inside out fashion, and remove the seat backrest trim
cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6664
WARNING: FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE
AIR BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS
PERMISSIBLE).
CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The
hook and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
14. Remove the seat backrest pad from the frame.
15. Separate the side air bag module wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat back frame.
16. Remove the side air bag module.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the side air bag module.
NOTE: If installing a new side air bag module, use new retaining nuts. If the same side air bag
module is to be reused, then reuse the side air bag module retaining nuts.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6665
GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS
WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats concerning the installation of a
new side air bag.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side air bag module onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
1 Position the side air bag module to the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
2 Install the nuts.
NOTE: The driver side air bag module installation is shown, the passenger side air bag module
installation is similar.
WARNING: ^
INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT
BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6666
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN
EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR
BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
2. Route the side air bag module wire harness. Install the pin-type retainers to the seat backrest
frame.
3. Position the seat backrest pad onto the seat backrest frame.
WARNING: INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO
DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
4. Install the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Position and roll the seat backrest trim cover down over the seat backrest frame and pad.
2 Attach the hook and loop strips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6667
5. Attach the seat back trim cover J-retainers.
6. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
7. Install the seat backrest bolts.
1 Align the seat backrest to the seat bottom.
2 Install the seat backrest bolts.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not
to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
8. Install the pivot nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6668
9. Route the side air bag module wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and
electrical connector pin-type retainers.
10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Align the retaining clips and push inward, seating the retaining clips. ^
If equipped, connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest lever cover.
11. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle.
12. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Driver Air Bag Module > Page 6669
13. Align the retaining clips and push inward, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 14.
Install the affected seat into the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
15. Connect the battery ground cable. 16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 6670
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6674
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6677
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6678
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6679
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
With Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6682
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6683
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6684
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6685
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6686
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
21. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 22. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
23. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6687
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6688
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6689
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6690
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6691
onto the bracket under the seat.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6692
19. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 20. Close the glove box.
21. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
23. Install the steering wheel access cover. 24. Connect the battery ground cable. 25. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6693
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Without Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6694
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6695
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6696
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6697
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
17. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 18. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
19. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6698
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6699
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6700
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6701
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6702
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6703
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr.Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6704
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6705
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW ALL
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
^ INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT FAILURE. IF
IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE CENTRALIZING
PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6711
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and can be
broken from its internal connection.
^ Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6712
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation
The clockspring:
^ is mounted on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.
^ provides a continuous electrical path between the Restraints Control Module (RCM) and the
driver air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6713
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6714
be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tool MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
All vehicles
1. Make sure the wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable
and wait at least one minute. 3. Remove the steering wheel.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
Vehicles with tilt column
4. Position the steering column completely downward.
All vehicles
5. Push in where indicated, releasing the retaining tabs, and remove the upper steering column
shroud.
6. Remove the lower steering column shroud.
1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped.
2 Remove the three screws.
3 Remove the lower steering column shroud.
NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if
equipped), to remove the lower steering column shroud.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6715
7. Apply two strips of masking tape across the clockspring to prevent accidental rotation when the
clockspring is removed.
8. Separate the clockspring from the steering column.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Pull out and separate the clockspring from the steering column.
9. Remove the clockspring.
1 Disconnect the accessory electrical connector.
2 Push to release the clockspring electrical connector locking clip.
3 With the clockspring electrical connector locking clip in the released position, pull and disconnect
the clockspring electrical connector.
4 Remove the clockspring.
10. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the clockspring
electrical connector at the steering column.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6716
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER POINTED AWAY
FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN WITH THE TRIM COVER FACE DOWN. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ AIR BAG MODULES WITH DISCOLORED OR DAMAGED TRIM COVERS MUST BE
INSTALLED NEW, NOT REPAINTED.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
All vehicles
1. Connect the battery ground cable. 2. With the restraint system diagnostic tools installed at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Vehicles receiving a new clockspring
4. Remove the key from the clockspring, holding the rotor in its centralized position.
^ Do not allow the clockspring rotor to turn from this position.
NOTE: A new clockspring is supplied in a centralized position and held there with a key.
Vehicles needing clockspring recentering
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6717
5. Centralize the clockspring.
1. Hold the clockspring outer housing stationary. 2. While turning the rotor clockwise, carefully feel
for the ribbon wire to run out of length, and a slight resistance is felt. Stop turning at this
point.
CAUTION: Overturning will destroy the clockspring. The internal ribbon wire acts as the stop and
can be broken from its internal connection.
3. Turn the rotor counterclockwise approximately 2-3/4 turns. This is the center point of the
clockspring.
^ Do not allow the rotor to turn from this position.
WARNING: INCORRECT CENTRALIZATION MAY RESULT IN PREMATURE COMPONENT
FAILURE. IF IN DOUBT WHEN CENTRALIZING THE CLOCKSPRING, REPEAT THE
CENTRALIZING PROCEDURE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
CAUTION: Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
NOTE: If a clockspring has rotated out of center, follow through with this step.
All vehicles
6. Make sure the road wheels are in the straight ahead position.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the clockspring
electrical connector at the steering column.
8. Connect the clockspring electrical connectors.
1 Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
2 Connect the accessory electrical connector.
NOTE: Recenter clockspring as needed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6718
Vehicle repairs reusing the same clockspring
9. Remove the tape applied during clockspring removal.
NOTE: When the tape is removed, do not allow the clockspring to turn.
All vehicles
10. Align the clockspring for installation.
^ Align the large slot to the large tab in the clockspring.
^ Align the small slot to the small tab in the clockspring.
NOTE: The clockspring is shown from the back for clarity.
11. Install the clockspring.
1 With the slots and tabs aligned, slide the clockspring over the steering column.
2 With the clockspring sitting flush against the multi-function switch, install the screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6719
12. Install the lower steering column shroud.
1 Release the tilt column locking lever, if equipped.
2 Position the lower steering column shroud to the steering column.
NOTE: The steering column must be in the raised position, with the tilt column lever released (if
equipped), to install the lower steering column shroud.
3 Install the three screws.
Vehicles with tilt column
13. Position the steering column completely downward.
All vehicles
14. Position the upper steering column shroud to the steering column and completely engage the
retaining tabs.
^ Make sure the upper steering column shroud is aligned correctly and the retaining tabs are
completely engaged.
15. Install the steering wheel.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6720
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 6725
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Right > Page 6728
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6731
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6732
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6735
be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR,
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6736
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6737
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6738
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6739
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6740
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6741
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6742
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6743
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6744
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6745
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6746
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6747
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic toot to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6748
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6749
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6750
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6751
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6752
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6753
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6754
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6755
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6756
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6757
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Module, Right
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Locations >
Side Air Bag Module, Right > Page 6765
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Air Bag Module, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Air Bag Module, Right > Page 6768
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Side Air Bag: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO
MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6771
Side Air Bag: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
^ Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting on a seat
not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
^ When positioning the seat or separating the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to damage
the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat components.
^ Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The hook
and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
^ Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag
module and the mounting bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6772
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation
Air Bag Module - Driver Side
NOTE: ^
References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The driver side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the Restraints Control Module (RCM) initiated by the driver
side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the driver seat back.
Air Bag Module - Passenger Side
NOTE: ^
References to side air bag modules refer to the seat-mounted and not to the steering wheel or
instrument panel mounted air bag components of the supplemental restraint system (SRS).
^ When installing a new side air bag module after deployment, refer to Seats.
The passenger side air bag module: ^
will deploy upon receiving a signal from the restraints control module (RCM) initiated by the
passenger side crash sensor.
^ is installed as an assembly.
^ is mounted in the passenger seat back.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6773
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6774
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ If a side air bag deployment took place the seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be replaced. The seatback frame should be replaced if necessary.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats concerning the installation of a
new side air bag.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 2. Remove the affected seat
from the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES, AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
3. Pry out and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
NOTE: ^
Use care not to damage the center hole plug.
^ The driver side air bag module removal is shown, the passenger side air bag module removal is
similar.
4. Remove the seat cushion adjuster handle.
1 Release the retaining tabs.
2 Pull and remove the seat cushion adjuster handle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6775
5. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest lever cover.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the seat cushion side shield. ^
If equipped, disconnect the power seat switch electrical connector.
6. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
7. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the side air bag electrical connector and wire
harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
8. Remove the seat backrest pivot nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6776
9. Remove the seat backrest.
1 Remove the seat backrest bolts.
2 Slide the seat backrest pivot stud out of the seat cushion frame and remove the seat backrest.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or separating the seat bottom from the back, be careful not to
damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
10. Turn the manual lumbar handle clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual
lumbar support cable.
11. Pull and remove the manual lumbar support adjustment handle.
12. Separate the seat backrest trim cover J-retainers.
13. Remove the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Placing a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and pad, carefully separate the hook and
loop strips.
2 Roll up the seat back trim cover, in an inside out fashion, and remove the seat backrest trim
cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6777
WARNING: FRONT SEAT BACK TRIM COVERS INSTALLED ON SEATS EQUIPPED WITH SIDE
AIR BAGS CANNOT BE REPAIRED; THEY ARE TO BE REPLACED (CLEANING IS
PERMISSIBLE).
CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook and loop strip. The
hook and loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam.
14. Remove the seat backrest pad from the frame.
15. Separate the side air bag module wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat back frame.
16. Remove the side air bag module.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the side air bag module.
NOTE: If installing a new side air bag module, use new retaining nuts. If the same side air bag
module is to be reused, then reuse the side air bag module retaining nuts.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TEAR SEAM POINTED
AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ DO NOT SET A LIVE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE DOWN ON THE COVER TEAR SEAM. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6778
GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS
WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ When replacing the side air bag after deployment, refer to Seats concerning the installation of a
new side air bag.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side air bag module onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
1 Position the side air bag module to the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
2 Install the nuts.
NOTE: The driver side air bag module installation is shown, the passenger side air bag module
installation is similar.
WARNING: ^
INSPECT THE MOUNTING SURFACES OF THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE AND THE SEAT
BACK FRAME MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS BEFORE INSTALLING
THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6779
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ BEFORE INSTALLING THE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE, CHECK IT FOR DAMAGE AND
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF THE AIR BAG MODULE IS DAMAGED, REPLACE IT. IF ANY FOREIGN
OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY, IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
^ IF THE AIR BAG COVER HAS SEPARATED OR THE AIR BAG MATERIAL HAS BEEN
EXPOSED, INSTALL A NEW SIDE AIR BAG MODULE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR THE AIR
BAG MODULE. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
2. Route the side air bag module wire harness. Install the pin-type retainers to the seat backrest
frame.
3. Position the seat backrest pad onto the seat backrest frame.
WARNING: INSPECT THE SIDE AIR BAG CAVITY IN THE SEAT BACK PAD FOR ANY
FOREIGN OBJECTS. IF ANY FOREIGN OBJECTS ARE FOUND, REMOVE THEM. FAILURE TO
DO SO MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT.
4. Install the seat backrest trim cover.
1 Position and roll the seat backrest trim cover down over the seat backrest frame and pad.
2 Attach the hook and loop strips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6780
5. Attach the seat back trim cover J-retainers.
6. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
7. Install the seat backrest bolts.
1 Align the seat backrest to the seat bottom.
2 Install the seat backrest bolts.
CAUTION: When positioning the seat or installing the seat bottom to the seat back, be careful not
to damage the seat back pivot or the recliner mechanism. This can cause damage to the seat
components.
8. Install the pivot nut.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6781
9. Route the side air bag module wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire harness and
electrical connector pin-type retainers.
10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Align the retaining clips and push inward, seating the retaining clips. ^
If equipped, connect the power seat switch electrical connector.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest lever cover.
11. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle.
12. Install the seat cushion adjuster handle center plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6782
13. Align the retaining clips and push inward, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 14.
Install the affected seat into the vehicle.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY, READ AND FOLLOW
ALL WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, NOTES AND INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SEAT REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
15. Connect the battery ground cable. 16. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed,
prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6783
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6788
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Air Bag Control Module: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6791
Air Bag Control Module: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6792
Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6793
Air Bag Control Module: Testing and Inspection
For further information regarding the diagnosis of this component and the system that it is a part of,
please refer to Air Bag Systems; Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
With Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6796
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6797
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6798
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6799
12. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
14. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic tools
installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6800
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 19. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
20. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
21. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 22. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
23. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6801
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6802
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6803
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6804
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
15. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6805
onto the bracket under the seat.
16. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
17. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
18. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6806
19. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 20. Close the glove box.
21. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
23. Install the steering wheel access cover. 24. Connect the battery ground cable. 25. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6807
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Without Side Air Bag
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6808
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6809
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the instrument panel, disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6810
8. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery ground cable. 13. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6811
14. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 15. Position the carpet back
at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
16. Remove the right-hand side restraint control module (RCM) retaining bolts.
17. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 18. Position the carpet back at the
left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument panel.
19. Remove the RCM.
1 Slide and disengage the two RCM electrical connector locking dips.
2 Push down to pivot the RCM electrical connector tabs and pull out to disconnect.
3 Remove the retaining bolt.
4 Remove the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6812
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH AN SRS SYSTEM HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN WHICH THE
CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND BRACKET
FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER OR NOT THE
AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE RCM
MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these
charges, damage can result.
NOTE: Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition,
install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Position the RCM to the center tunnel area and install the three bolts hand-tight.
WARNING: ^
THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE: ^
If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6813
2. Tighten the right-hand side RCM bolts.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
3. Reposition the carpet back at the right-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
4. Connect the RCM.
1 Tighten the bolt.
2 Connect the RCM electrical connectors.
3 Slide and engage the RCM electrical connector locking clips.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM)
RETAINING BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
5. Reposition the carpet back at the left-hand side of the center tunnel area under the instrument
panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6814
6. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. 8.
With the restraint system diagnostic tools still installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air
bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
9. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6815
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6816
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6817
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr.Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6818
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6819
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6826
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6827
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6828
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6829
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6830
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 6831
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
^ IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO
SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY
SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6836
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation
Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of
the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as
an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Child safety seat tether anchors are manufactured into the vehicle. See the owners manual for
locations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 6837
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. At the roof, near the rear liftgate door, remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover.
2. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the child safety seat tether anchor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
WARNING: IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLT/ANCHOR BE SECURELY TIGHTENED TO
SPECIFICATION. OTHERWISE, THE CHILD'S SAFETY SEAT MAY NOT BE PROPERLY
SECURED, AND THE CHILD CAN BE INJURED IN CASE OF A SUDDEN STOP OR ACCIDENT.
NOTE: ^
Rework the sheet metal to its original condition and structural integrity.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button
Service
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt: > 05-3-10 > Feb > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button
Service
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Stop Button Service
TSB 05-3-10
02/21/05
SAFETY BELT WEB STOP BUTTON SERVICE
FORD: 2000-2004 Mustang 2000-2005 Crown Victoria, Focus, Taurus 1999-2005 F-Super Duty
2000-2003 Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, F-150, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Escape, Explorer Sport Trac 2002-2005 Explorer 2003-2004 Expedition 2004-2005 Freestar 2005
Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 2000-2005 LS, Town Car 2003-2004 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2001-2005 Mariner 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey
ISSUE To service a safety belt web stop button (the button that keeps the belt tongue from sliding
down when not in use), a service kit is now available.
ACTION Install the safety belt button kit, DO NOT replace the entire safety belt assembly. Follow
the Service Procedure in the Instruction Sheet that comes with the kit. Refer to Section 501-20A of
the appropriate model year Workshop Manual for additional information if needed.
NOTE
ONE KIT WILL REPAIR ONE SEAT BELT BUTTON.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B09 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Seat Belt: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6862
Seat Belt: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE DRIVER AND PASSENGER MUST BE PREPARED TO BRACE THEMSELVES IF THE
RETRACTOR DOES NOT LOCK.
^ AFTER ANY VEHICLE COLLISION, THE SAFETY BELT SYSTEM AT ALL OUTBOARD
SEATING POSITIONS (EXCEPT DRIVER, WHICH HAS NO "AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR" FEATURE) MUST BE CHECKED BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN TO VERIFY
THAT THE "AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR" FEATURE FOR CHILD SEATS IS STILL
FUNCTIONING PROPERLY, IN ADDITION TO OTHER CHECKS FOR PROPER SAFETY BELT
SYSTEM FUNCTION. A BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED IF THE
SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLY'S "AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR" FEATURE, OR ANY
OTHER SAFETY BELT FUNCTION, IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY WHEN CHECKED
ACCORDING TO THE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO REPLACE THE BELT AND RETRACTOR
ASSEMBLY COULD INCREASE THE RISK OF INJURY IN COLLISIONS.
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY
GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER.
^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
PRETENSIONER SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE
PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6863
Seat Belt: Description and Operation
Safety Belt, Lap/Shoulder - Dual Locking Mode
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two
ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode.
1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on
hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and
rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains
locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is
buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight
lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat.
3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the
retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard
passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side is similar.
Vehicles with rear power point
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both rear safety belt retractors
2. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Remove the rear door scuff plate
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6866
3. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar.
4. Pivot the seat cushion forward.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
5. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
6. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and
remove it.
NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6867
7. Remove the rear safety belt guide.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt guide. ^
If necessary, remove the spacer from the rear safety belt guide.
8. Lower the second row seat backrest.
9. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on
the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced.
10. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
^ Pull up to release the relaining clips.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6868
11. Remove the cargo cover.
12. Remove the cargo cover hold-down.
RH side only
13. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
LH side only
14. Pull out to release the retaining clips and separate the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6869
15. Disconnect the power point connector, if equipped and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
Both rear safety belt retractors
16. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
Both rear safety belt retractors
1. Install the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
LH side only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6870
2. Position the rear quarter trim panel and connect the power point electrical connector.
Both retractors
3. Install the quarter trim panel.
1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening.
2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
4. Install the cargo cover hold-down.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6871
5. Install the cargo cover.
Both rear safety belt retractors
6. Install the rear hatch scuff plate.
7. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping.
8. Make sure the spacer is installed onto the rear safety belt guide bolt.
9. Install the rear safety belt guide.
1 Position the safety belt guide.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6872
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
10. Install the rear safety belt guide cover.
NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new
cover.
11. Raise the second row seat backrest.
12. Install the safety belt anchor.
1 Position the safety belt anchor.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6873
13. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping.
14. Install the rear door scuff plate.
1 Position the rear door scuff plate.
2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Close the cover.
15. Position the seat cushion down.
Vehicles with a rear power point
16. Connect the battery ground cable.
All vehicles
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Front Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6874
PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE
INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
4. Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor.
2 Remove the front safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6875
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Safety Belt - Center, Rear
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Remove the safety belt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6876
Seat Belt: Service and Repair General Procedures
Deployed
1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
WARNING: THE SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN
HANDLING A SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO
COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Inoperative
WARNING:
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN
REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY BELT
BUCKLE PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER.
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
PRETENSIONER SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE
PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and
safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt
buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from
the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company.
Scrapped Vehicle
Remote Deployment
WARNING: ^
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6877
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt
pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6878
Seat Belt: Tools and Equipment
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Buckle: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN
AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY
PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6883
Seat Belt Buckle: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 6884
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6887
SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6888
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result
in personal injury.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6889
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the
affected seat into the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6890
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Center and Passenger Side, Rear
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Remove the safety belt buckle assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure that the safety belt buckles are accessible after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6891
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Driver Side, Rear
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
1. Pivot the seat bottom forward. 2. Pivot the seat backrest back.
3. Remove the safety belt and buckle assembly.
1 Position the carpet out of the way.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Feed the safety belt and buckle through the carpet and remove the assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure that the safety belt and buckle are accessible after repositioning the seat.
^ Make sure to tighten the bolt to specification.
2. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Page 6892
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp
ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air
Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6906
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6907
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation
A safety belt that is too short even when fully extended can be lengthened. The safety belt
extension is available. This assembly will add approximately 20 cm (8 inches) to the length of the
safety belt. Use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short when fully extended. Do
not use the safety belt extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt
extensions are available at no cost from any authorized Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service Precautions
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 2. Lower the height adjuster.
3. Remove the upper height adjuster bolt. 4. Raise the height adjuster.
5. Remove the height adjuster.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the height adjuster.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that the front safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6916
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair General Procedures
D-Ring Installation Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
1. Remove the trim panels.
2. Use the half-inch drill provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent to
drill out the damaged threads in the upper
B-pillar structure.
3. Apply a suitable lubricant to the M14x1.5 tap provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) and tap new threads.
NOTE: After each rotation, back tap off slightly to remove new cuttings and be sure to clean out
any chips before proceeding.
4. Use a threaded insert provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012 (134-00018) or equivalent
and screw it into the retapped hole until it is slightly
below the surface of the hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 6917
5. Use a hammer to lightly tap the installation tool provided in D-Ring Installation Kit 100-F012
(134-00018) several times to drive down the insert
keys.
NOTE: If the two hex-head bolts on the front seat shoulder strap adjuster are not stripped, refer to
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster to install the height adjuster to the body. If the front seat
shoulder strap adjuster bolts are stripped, replace the adjuster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6918
D-Ring Installation Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning System
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: ^
If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning System
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows:
^ If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract > Page
6933
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to
Retract
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to Retract
TSB 05-16-11
08/22/05
SAFETY BELT RETRACTION SPEED
FORD: 2000-2003 Mustang 2000-2006 Crown Victoria, Taurus 2000-2003 Explorer Sport,
Windstar 2000-2005 Excursion, Explorer 2000-2006 E-Series, Expedition, F-150, F-Super Duty,
Ranger 2001-2005 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004-2006 Freestar 2005-2006 Escape
Hybrid 2004-2006 F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 LS, Town Car, Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2006 Grand Marquis 2000-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2006
Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-21 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE A service kit is now available to improve safety belt retraction speed.
ACTION See the part application chart and select the appropriate kit. Follow the Instruction Sheet
included in the kit. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 501-20A for additional information.
NOTE
TEFLON TAPE SHOULD ONLY BE USED ON THE FRONT ROW SEATS FOR VEHICLES
LISTED IN THIS TSB, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND THE
MOUNTAINEER. TEFLON TAPE CAN ALSO BE USED ON SECOND ROW SEATS FOR THESE
THREE VEHICLES.
NOTE
FOR MUSTANG, AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR AND MOUNTAINEER, REFER TO THE
FOLLOWING BUILD DATE INFORMATION BEFORE PERFORMING THIS TSB. TEFLON TAPE
HAS ALREADY BEEN INSTALLED DURING PRODUCTION ON SOME OF THESE VEHICLES.
^ MUSTANG: Only install on vehicles built through 6/15/2003. Teflon tape was already installed on
vehicles built on/after 6/16/2003.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (FRONT ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 6/24/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 6/25/2004.
^ AVIATOR, EXPLORER 4DR/MOUNTAINEER (SECOND ROW SEATS): Only install on vehicles
built through 10/21/2004. Teflon tape was already installed on vehicles built on/after 10/22/2004.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 05-16-11 > Aug > 05 > Restraints - Seat Belts Slow to
Retract > Page 6939
Parts Block
NOTE
THE LABOR OPERATIONS WITHIN THIS TSB CAN BE CLAIMED IN COMBINATION AS
NEEDED TO COVER THE REQUIRED REPAIRS.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051611A Install Teflon Tape B 0.8 Hr.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels If Necessary)
051611B Install Teflon Tape C 1.1 Hrs.
Pillars Both Sides (Includes Time To Remove And Install Trim Panels And Seats If Necessary)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
70611B08 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Article No. 03-25-3
12/22/03
BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near
C/D pillar.
ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or
replace headliner.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING
SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE
HOLES UNTIL STEP 12.
Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should
be replaced:
1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the
headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner
must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue
with procedure.
To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit.
^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA
^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB
HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6945
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6946
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6947
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6948
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6949
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6955
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6956
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6957
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6958
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Retractor: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner
Sags at Rear Quarter Glass > Page 6959
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 6962
Seat Belt Retractor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE DRIVER AND PASSENGER MUST BE PREPARED TO BRACE THEMSELVES IF THE
RETRACTOR DOES NOT LOCK.
^ AFTER ANY VEHICLE COLLISION, THE SAFETY BELT SYSTEM AT ALL OUTBOARD
SEATING POSITIONS (EXCEPT DRIVER, WHICH HAS NO "AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR" FEATURE) MUST BE CHECKED BY A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN TO VERIFY
THAT THE "AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR" FEATURE FOR CHILD SEATS IS STILL
FUNCTIONING PROPERLY, IN ADDITION TO OTHER CHECKS FOR PROPER SAFETY BELT
SYSTEM FUNCTION. A BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED IF THE
SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLY'S "AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR" FEATURE, OR ANY
OTHER SAFETY BELT FUNCTION, IS NOT OPERATING PROPERLY WHEN CHECKED
ACCORDING TO THE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO REPLACE THE BELT AND RETRACTOR
ASSEMBLY COULD INCREASE THE RISK OF INJURY IN COLLISIONS.
^ ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTERS (IF
SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND ATTACHING
HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT ASSEMBLIES
SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE ASSEMBLIES
SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN USE DURING A
COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER DAMAGE OR
IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 6963
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
WARNING: REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD NEVER BE PLACED IN THE FRONT
SEATS.
The dual locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination lap/shoulder safety
belt for the front outboard passenger and both rear outboard seating positions, operates in two
ways. The driver single locking mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of the combination
lap/shoulder safety belt works only in the vehicle sensitive mode.
1. In the vehicle-sensitive (emergency locking) mode, the shoulder belt retractor allows the
occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on
hard braking, hard cornering or impacts of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more. The front and
rear outboard seat belt retractors can also be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
2. In the automatic locking mode, the shoulder belt retractor automatically locks and remains
locked when the combination lap/shoulder safety belt is
buckled and does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. This mode provides tight
lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant and on a child safety seat.
3. When the combination lap/shoulder belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract completely, the
retractor switches to the vehicle-sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front outboard
passenger and both rear outboard passenger seating positions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Front Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: The driver side is shown, the passenger side is similar.
1. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
3. Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
3 Separate the front safety belt retractor from the B-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6966
4. Remove the front safety belt retractor.
1 Disconnect the front safety belt retractor.
2 Remove the front safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
^ Make sure that after the front passenger safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
NOTE: ^
Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
^ Make sure to tighten bolts to specification.
2. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
^ Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6967
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: ALL SAFETY BELT ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING RETRACTORS, BUCKLES, FRONT
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES (SLIDE BAR), SHOULDER BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTERS (IF SO EQUIPPED), CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ATTACHMENTS, AND
ATTACHING HARDWARE SHOULD BE INSPECTED AFTER ANY COLLISION. ALL BELT
ASSEMBLIES SHOULD BE REPLACED UNLESS A QUALIFIED TECHNICIAN FINDS THE
ASSEMBLIES SHOW NO DAMAGE AND OPERATE PROPERLY. BELT ASSEMBLIES NOT IN
USE DURING A COLLISION SHOULD ALSO BE INSPECTED AND REPLACED IF EITHER
DAMAGE OR IMPROPER OPERATION IS NOTED.
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side is similar.
Vehicles with rear power point
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both rear safety belt retractors
2. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Remove the rear door scuff plate
3. Separate the weather-stripping from the C-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6968
4. Pivot the seat cushion forward.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
5. Remove the safety belt anchor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt anchor.
6. From behind the rear safety belt guide cover, release the retaining tabs, slide the cover up and
remove it.
NOTE: The rear safety belt guide has been removed for clarity.
7. Remove the rear safety belt guide.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt guide.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6969
^ If necessary, remove the spacer from the rear safety belt guide.
8. Lower the second row seat backrest.
9. Separate the rear hatch weather-stripping along the scuff plate and rear quarter trim panel on
the side of the safety belt retractor being serviced.
10. Remove the rear hatch scuff plate.
^ Pull up to release the relaining clips.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
11. Remove the cargo cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6970
12. Remove the cargo cover hold-down.
RH side only
13. Pull out to release the retaining clips and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
LH side only
14. Pull out to release the retaining clips and separate the rear quarter trim panel.
15. Disconnect the power point connector, if equipped and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
Both rear safety belt retractors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6971
16. Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
2 Remove the rear safety belt retractor.
INSTALLATION
Both rear safety belt retractors
1. Install the rear safety belt retractor.
1 Position the rear safety belt retractor to the C-pillar.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
LH side only
2. Position the rear quarter trim panel and connect the power point electrical connector.
Both retractors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6972
3. Install the quarter trim panel.
1 Position the quarter trim panel and feed the safety belt webbing through the opening.
2 Align the quarter trim panel and push in, fastening the retainers.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
Vehicles with a cargo cover
4. Install the cargo cover hold-down.
5. Install the cargo cover.
Both rear safety belt retractors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6973
6. Install the rear hatch scuff plate.
7. Install the rear hatch weather-stripping.
8. Make sure the spacer is installed onto the rear safety belt guide bolt.
9. Install the rear safety belt guide.
1 Position the safety belt guide.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
10. Install the rear safety belt guide cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6974
NOTE: If the safety belt guide cover is damaged or if it does not remain in position, install a new
cover.
11. Raise the second row seat backrest.
12. Install the safety belt anchor.
1 Position the safety belt anchor.
2 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted prior to installation.
13. Install the C-pillar weatherstripping.
14. Install the rear door scuff plate.
1 Position the rear door scuff plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6975
2 Install the two pin-type retainers (one shown).
3 Close the cover.
15. Position the seat cushion down.
Vehicles with a rear power point
16. Connect the battery ground cable.
All vehicles
17. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
1 Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
2 Carry out the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) Mode Functional Test to make sure that the
new retractor operates correctly. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6976
Seat Belt Retractor: Tools and Equipment
Torx Bit, Safety Belt Bolt
Seat Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Seat > Page 6981
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Seat Belt Tensioner: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY
GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
PRETENSIONER SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE
PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 6984
Seat Belt Tensioner: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Active
The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckle and pretensioner are secured to the
front seat cushion frame assembly. This allows the front safety belt buckle end to move with the
front seat.
The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing
from the safety belt system. The belt and buckle assembly pretensioner uses the same crash
sensor system as the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the belt and buckle
assembly pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward, pulling excess webbing from the lap
and shoulder safety belts.
If the safety belt buckle and pretensioner assembly is deployed, a new assembly must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6987
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air
Bag System
As part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the safety belt buckles are equipped with
pretensioners. The safety belt buckle pretensioners remove excess slack from the safety belt
webbing. The pretensioners are activated by the restraints control module (RCM) when the module
detects a crash event force exceeding a programmed unit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Occupant Restraints - Active
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE.
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVICING AN AIR BAG-EQUIPPED VEHICLE
AND WHEN HANDLING A BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER. THIS WILL
REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ THE BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. NEVER
PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN
BELT AND BUCKLE ASSEMBLY PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6990
SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the affected seat from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the removal procedure of the affected seat.
3. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
^ Pull out to release the retaining clips.
NOTE: The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
4. Release the pin-type retainers and separate the safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical
connector and wire harness from the seat.
NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation.
5. Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Using the special tool, remove the bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6991
2 Remove the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
NOTE: Do not handle the safety belt buckle and pretensioner in the area of the safety belt buckle
and pretensioner cable or retaining nut. Accidental pretensioner deployment could occur and result
in personal injury.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped;) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat Systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
^ The driver seat safety belt buckle and pretensioner is shown, the passenger side is similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6992
1. Install the safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the seat cushion frame.
2 Align and install the anti-rotation tab of the safety belt buckle and pretensioner to the slot in the
seat cushion frame.
3 Using the special tool, install the bolt.
2. Route the safety belt buckle and pretensioner wire harness as noted in removal. Install the wire
harness and electrical connector pin-type retainers.
3. Align the retaining clips and push in, installing the inboard seat cushion side shield. 4. Install the
affected seat into the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
NOTE: Make sure to follow all steps and instructions in the installation procedure of the affected
seat.
5. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Prove Out Procedure
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6993
Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Occupant Restraints - Passive - Supplemental Air Bag
System
Deployed
1. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same manner as any other part to be
scrapped.
WARNING: THE SAFETY BELT PRETENSIONER IS A PYROTECHNIC DEVICE. ALWAYS
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN
HANDLING A SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO
COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN
PERSONAL INJURY.
Inoperative
WARNING:
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN
REPAIRING AN AIR BAG EQUIPPED VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING A SAFETY BELT
BUCKLE PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER.
^ THE SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER AND SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
PRETENSIONER ARE PYROTECHNIC DEVICES. NEVER PROBE A PRETENSIONER
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR. DOING SO COULD RESULT IN PRETENSIONER OR AIR BAG
DEPLOYMENT AND COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ CARRY A LIVE SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR PRETENSIONER OR SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
PRETENSIONER SO AS TO KEEP FINGERS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MOVEABLE
PARTS. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT.
NOTE: All inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioners and safety belt retractor pretensioners have
been placed on the Mandatory Return List. All damaged safety belt buckle pretensioners and
safety belt retractor pretensioners must be treated the same as any inoperative live safety belt
buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner being returned.
1. Remove the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt retractor pretensioner from
the vehicle. 2. Package and return the inoperative safety belt buckle pretensioner or safety belt
retractor pretensioner to Ford Motor Company.
Scrapped Vehicle
Remote Deployment
WARNING: ^
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE OR
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR/PRETENSIONER ASSEMBLY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF
INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ CARRY A LIVE AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE AIR BAG AND TRIM COVER OR DEPLOYMENT
DOOR POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. THIS WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN
THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ REMOTE DEPLOYMENT IS TO BE PERFORMED OUTDOORS WITH ALL PERSONNEL AT
LEAST 6.1 METERS (20 FEET) AWAY TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY. DUE TO THE LOUD
REPORT WHICH OCCURS WHEN THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED, HEARING PROTECTION IS
REQUIRED.
^ DO NOT PLACE THE DRIVER OR PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE WITH THE TRIM COVER
OR DEPLOYMENT DOOR FACING DOWN, AS THE FORCES OF THE DEPLOYING AIR BAG
COULD CAUSE IT TO RICOCHET AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY.
1. Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the vehicle.
2. Cut and strip the wires near the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Restraints - Active > Page 6994
3. Obtain two wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) long and attach one end of
each wire to stripped ends of the pretensioner wires. 4. Place the pretensioner on a flat surface in
an open outdoor area. 5. Remain at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from the safety belt
pretensioner.
6. Deploy the safety belt pretensioner by touching the other ends of the two wires to the terminals
of a 12-volt battery. 7. To allow for cooling, wait at least ten minutes before approaching the
deployed safety belt pretensioner. 8. Dispose of the deployed safety belt pretensioner in the same
manner as any other part to be scrapped.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6995
Safety Belt Bolt Bit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Air Bag Sensor, Left > Page 7001
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Right > Page 7004
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information
Impact Sensor: Customer Safety Information
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Customer Safety Information > Page 7007
Impact Sensor: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
^ THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING BOLTS IS
CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
^ THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 7008
Impact Sensor: Description and Operation
WARNING: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR
CORRECT SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN A COLLISION IN
WHICH THE CENTER TUNNEL AREA HAS BEEN DAMAGED, INSPECT THE MOUNTING AND
BRACKET FOR DEFORMATION. IF DAMAGED, THE RCM MUST BE REPLACED WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAGS HAVE DEPLOYED. IN ADDITION, MAKE SURE THE AREA OF THE
RCM MOUNTING IS RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL CONDITION.
For this vehicle, the SRS employs three crash sensors. One of the sensors is integral to the RCM
and is not serviceable separately. In addition, there are two side crash sensors located in the LH
and RH B-pillars. The RCM is mounted on the center tunnel under the instrument panel. Mounting
orientation is critical for correct operation of all crash sensors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Driver Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7011
be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR,
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
3. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7012
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
5. Open the glove box past its stops.
6. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7013
8. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7014
12. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system diagnostic
tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7015
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7016
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7017
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag module
electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7018
11. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7019
15. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 16. Close the glove box.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
19. Install the steering wheel access cover. 20. Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the
restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7020
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Passenger Side
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7021
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Open the glove box past its stops.
3. Through the glove box opening toward the center of the Instrument Panel (I/P), disconnect the
passenger air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the passenger air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7022
4. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the vehicle harness side of the passenger air bag
module electrical connector.
5. Remove the steering wheel access cover.
6. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
1 Push to release the driver air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
7. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the clockspring electrical connector at the top of the
steering column.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7023
8. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the driver side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Attach the restraint system diagnostic toot to the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
10. Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the under the seat
bracket.
2 Push to release the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
11. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7024
12. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
1 Slide and release the passenger side air bag module electrical connector locking clip.
2 Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
14. Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
1 Remove the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector from the bracket
under the seat.
2 Push to release the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector locking clip.
3 Disconnect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector.
15. Attach the restraint system diagnostic tool to the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector. 16. Connect the battery ground cable. 17. With the restraint system
diagnostic tools installed at all deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
18. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7025
19. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
20. Remove the side crash sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the side crash sensor.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
^ ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN REPAIRING AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) VEHICLE AND WHEN HANDLING AN AIR BAG MODULE. THIS
WILL REDUCE THE RISK OF INJURY IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT.
^ AFTER DEPLOYMENT, THE AIR BAG SURFACE CAN CONTAIN DEPOSITS OF SODIUM
HYDROXIDE, A PRODUCT OF THE GAS GENERANT COMBUSTION THAT IS IRRITATING TO
THE SKIN. WASH YOUR HANDS WITH SOAP AND WATER AFTERWARDS.
^ NEVER PROBE THE CONNECTORS ON THE AIR BAG MODULE. DOING SO CAN RESULT
IN AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT, WHICH CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
^ VEHICLE SENSOR ORIENTATION IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION. IF A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH AN AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS
INVOLVED IN A COLLISION, INSPECT THE SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET AND WIRING
PIGTAIL FOR DEFORMATION. REPLACE AND PROPERLY POSITION THE SENSOR OR ANY
OTHER DAMAGED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS WHETHER
OR NOT THE AIR BAG IS DEPLOYED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
^ THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM SERVICE
ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD
RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
NOTE:
^ If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side airbag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped)
system is being serviced the airbag system must be deactivated.
^ Restraint system diagnostic tools MUST be installed under the seats in the side airbag and safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) to floor connectors.
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a side airbag system and/or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system with the seats in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to
diagnose/repair the side airbag system and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) system the
seats must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed
in the side airbag and the safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) connectors at the floor connectors.
The restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Diagnostics may be performed on seat systems other than the side airbag or the safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) system (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the
seat installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tools are installed under the
seats in the side airbag and safety belt pretensioner to floor connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7026
^ After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install
the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again.
1. Install the side crash sensor.
1 Position the side crash sensor to the B-pillar.
2 Install the bolts.
3 Connect the side crash sensor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE TIGHTENING TORQUE OF THE AIR BAG SIDE CRASH SENSOR RETAINING
BOLTS IS CRITICAL FOR PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. 3. With the restraint system diagnostic tools still in place at all
deployable devices, prove out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
4. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 5. Install the B-pillar trim
panel.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner
floor electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Connect the passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the
passenger safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector
onto the bracket under the seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7027
8. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag module floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
9. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector. Install the passenger side air
bag module electrical connector onto the bracket
under the seat.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner floor
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Connect the driver safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector. Install the driver safety
belt buckle pretensioner electrical connector onto
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7028
the bracket under the seat.
12. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air bag module floor electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
13. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. Install the driver side air bag
module electrical connector onto the bracket under the
seat.
14. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring electrical connector at the top
of the steering column.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7029
15. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Install the steering wheel access cover.
17. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the vehicle harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
18. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 19. Close the glove box. 20.
Connect the battery ground cable. 21. With all the restraint system diagnostic tools removed, prove
out the air bag system. See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7030
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
22. Check the restraint system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7031
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair General Procedures
"J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedures and Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control
Module (RCM) and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ If two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according to this procedure. Weld
nuts must be installed according to Weld Nut Repair-Missing Weld Nut, Restraints Control Module
(RCM) and Side Impact Sensor.
^ The following procedure applies to vehicles that have a rectangular hole in the sheet metal that is
in close proximity to the missing weld nut.
1. Obtain a "J" nut (part number N623332-S301) or any of the following optional "J" nuts (part
numbers: N623342-S101, N800854-S100,
N800925-S100).
2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) grounding screw (part number N806327-5190) or equivalent. 3. Install
the "J" nut through the rectangular hole in the sheet metal. 4. Install the crash sensor.
NOTE: Be sure the threaded portion of the "J" nut is aligned with the clearance hole in the sheet
metal.
5. Tighten the attaching screws to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Missing Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
NOTE:
^ There are two procedures to repair a vehicle having missing air bag crash sensor attaching weld
nut(s). Read both this procedure and Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM)
and Side Impact Sensor before proceeding with the repair.
^ Use only this procedure if two or more weld nuts are missing, do not install the "J" nuts according
to Weld Nut Repair - "J" Nut, Restraints Control Module (RCM) and Side Crash Sensor.
^ Radiator support repair shown, others are similar.
1. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in) weld nut (part number N806285-S190). 2. Obtain a 6 mm (0.24 in)
grounding screw (part number N806327-S190).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Installation > Page 7032
3. Route a sufficient length of copper welding wire through the weld nut clearance hole and back
out an adjacent access hole.
4. Feed the copper welding wire through the weld nut, then through a standard flat washer. 5.
Secure the flat washer so that it cannot be pulled off the end of the copper welding wire. 6. Pull the
copper welding wire back through the clearance hole, allowing the weld nut and flat washer to
follow the copper welding wire through. 7. Position the weld nut to the weld nut clearance hole,
firmly pulling on the copper welding wire allowing the secured flat washer to hold the weld
nut in position.
8. Holding the weld nut securely in place and using a MIG welder, weld in four places around the
edge of the weld nut. 9. Metal finish as required.
10. Verify the nut is securely in place. 11. Install the crash sensor. 12. Tighten the attaching screws
to specification. Refer to Torque Specifications.
Stripped Weld Nut, Restr. Ctrl Module (RCM)/Side Impact Sensor
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING, ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
PLEASE REFER TO THE APPROPRIATE COMPONENT OR SYSTEM TO DETERMINE
LOCATION OF THE FRONT AIR BAG SENSORS.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
1. Obtain an 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw (part number N802455-S190). 2. Drill out the internal
threads of the stripped-out weld nut to 7.37 mm (0.29 in) using a letter "L" size drill bit. 3. Position
the crash sensor to the vehicle. 4. Install the 8 mm (0.32 in) grounding screw into the drilled-out
weld nut. 5. Install the remaining attaching screws. 6. Tighten the attaching screws to specification.
Refer to Torque Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7033
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Safing Sensor, Air Bag >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Safing Sensor: Description and Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) carries out the following functions:
^ signals the inflators to deploy the air bags in the event of a deployable crash
^ monitors the air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) for faults
^ illuminates the air bag indicator if a fault is detected
^ flashes the air bag indicator to indicate the Lamp Fault Code (LFC) detected
^ communicates through the Data Link Connector (DLC) the current or historical Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs)
^ signals the instrument cluster to activate a chime if the air bag indicator is not available and
another SRS fault exists
NOTE: The safety sensor is internal to the RCM and is not serviced separately.
The RCM monitors the SRS for possible faults. If a fault is detected while the ignition switch is in
the RUN position, the RCM will flash the air bag indicator located in the instrument cluster.
When the ignition is cycled (turned off and then on), the air bag indicator will prove out by lighting
for six seconds and then off for two seconds. After the prove out, the air bag indicator will then flash
the two-digit LFC for any current SRS fault. If an SRS fault exists, the air bag indicator will flash the
LFC five times, and then remain illuminated for the rest of the key cycle. The RCM will also
communicate the current and historical DTCs through the DLC, to the scan tool. If the air bag
indicator does not function, and the system detects a fault condition, the RCM will signal the
instrument cluster to activate an audible chime. The chime is a series of five sets of five tone
bursts. If the chime is heard, the SRS and the air bag indicator require repair.
LFCs are prioritized. If two or more faults occur at the same time, the fault having the highest
priority will be displayed. After that fault has been corrected, the next highest priority fault will be
displayed.
The RCM includes a backup power supply. This feature provides sufficient backup power to deploy
the air bags in the event that the ignition circuit is damaged in a collision before the safing and air
bag sensors determine that a deployment is required. The backup power supply will deplete its
stored energy approximately one minute after the battery ground cable is disconnected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: > 05-17-11 > Sep >
05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Customer Interest SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Belt Buckle Switch: >
05-17-11 > Sep > 05 > SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's B1877/B1881 Set
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins SRS - Air Bag Lamp ON/DTC's
B1877/B1881 Set
TSB 05-17-11
09/05/05
RESTRAINT SYSTEM - SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER DIAGNOSTIC
TROUBLE CODE (DTC) B1877 AND/OR B1881
FORD: 2001-2004 Escape
This article supersedes TSB 04-24-4 to update the service procedure.
ISSUE Some 2001-2004 Escape vehicles may exhibit an intermittent air bag lamp on and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) B1877 and/or B1881. This may be caused by a variation in the
electrical continuity between the pins of the driver and/or passenger side wiring harness and the
buckle pretensioner connector. If this condition were to occur, the air bag system remains fully
functional.
ACTION Install a replacement harness connector kit ON BOTH the driver and passenger safety
belt buckle pretensioners, even if the DTC is present for only one side. The kit includes improved
connector halves to replace the existing connectors on both the body harness and the safety belt
buckle pretensioner.
One kit is required per side (2 kits per vehicle). Refer to the instruction sheet included in the kit for
complete repair procedure.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
051711A 2001-2004 Escape Install 2.0 Hrs.
A Replacement Harness Connector On Both The Body Side And Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner
Harness For Both Driver And Passenger Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioners (Do Not Use With
14056D)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7861202 OR 7861203 X2
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7050
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7051
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7057
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7058
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7059
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair
ANTENNA UPPER CABLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Remove the right lower A-pillar trim.
3. Disconnect the antenna cable connector.
4. Lower the glove box door.
5. Remove the three pin-type retainers holding the lead-in cable.
6. Remove the antenna cable clip fastened to the center instrument panel support. 7. Remove the
cable through the glove box opening.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7065
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle
Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7073
Alarm System Transponder: Service and Repair
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Pull the tilt wheel lever down in open position, as
necessary.
3. Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
1 Remove the lower instrument panel steering column cover.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the transceiver assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the transceiver assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: No key replacement or re-initialization needs to occur with the removal or installation of a
new PATS transceiver.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For
Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7077
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7083
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7084
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
- All keyless entry remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
- All previous transmitter identification codes (TIC's) will be erased when programming mode is
entered.
- To program (or reprogram) the keyless entry remote transmitters into the generic electronic
module (GEM), carry out the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to RUN eight times within 10 seconds, ending in RUN. If the GEM
has successfully entered program mode, it will
lock and unlock all the doors.
2. NOTE: The first TIC must be entered within 7.5 seconds of entering the program mode and
additional TICs must be entered within 7.5 seconds
of the first TIC. The programming mode is exited whenever the timing constraints are not met.
Press any button on a keyless entry remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm that each keyless entry remote transmitter has been programmed.
3. If the door locks do not respond for any keyless entry remote transmitter, wait for several
seconds and press the button again. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, or wait up to
five minutes after step 1, to exit program mode. If a keyless entry remote transmitter
has been programmed (or reprogrammed), the GEM will lock and unlock all the doors one last
time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7095
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7104
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7105
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7106
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7107
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7113
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7114
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7115
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7116
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7119
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7120
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7121
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7122
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7126
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information >
Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Module Controlled Functions
General Module: Description and Operation Module Controlled Functions
MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
The multifunction module consists of the generic electronic module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Module Controlled Functions > Page 7135
General Module: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The generic electronic module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern
is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
General Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Fuse
- Wiring harness
- Connector(s)
- Circuitry
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
- NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint
Tests
- SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate system to continue
diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7138
General Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1318
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7139
DTC Index B1319 - B2494
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7140
DTC Index B2495 - C1962
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7141
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7142
General Module: Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A: NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE
(GEM)
Test A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7143
Test A2-A3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7144
Test A4-A5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 7145
General Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 7146
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 7147
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Audio Control Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Audio Control Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Audio Control Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7155
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7161
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7162
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7163
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7164
Speaker: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7165
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Tweeter, Left Front > Page 7166
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7167
Speaker: Description and Operation
SPEAKERS
All vehicles are equipped with four radio speakers mounted in the doors. The optional tweeters are
mounted in the sail panels and the optional woofer is mounted in the right rear quarter panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7173
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7174
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7175
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Application and ID
Alarm Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Audio Control Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Audio Control Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Audio Control Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7182
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Controlled Functions
General Module: Description and Operation Module Controlled Functions
MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS
The multifunction module consists of the generic electronic module (GEM).
The GEM controls the following features:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module Controlled Functions > Page
7188
General Module: Description and Operation Principles of Operation (How Does It Work?)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The generic electronic module (GEM) constantly monitors its subsystems for concerns. If a concern
is found in one of the subsystems, the GEM will record the concern in the form of a diagnostic
trouble code (DTC).
The ignition switch position is very important to the GEM function. Erratic or unexpected GEM
function can often be traced to problems with these GEM inputs.
The GEM controls a variety of systems:
- interval rear window wiper
- battery saver
- illuminated entry
- headlamp control
- interior lamp control
- power door locks
- remote keyless entry (RKE)
- accessory delay
- perimeter anti-theft system
- door ajar output control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview
General Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system in question. 2. Visually inspect for obvious
signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Fuse
- Wiring harness
- Connector(s)
- Circuitry
- Generic electronic module (GEM)
3. If the concern remains after the inspection, connect the diagnostic tool to the data link connector
(DLC) located beneath the instrument panel and
select the vehicle to be tested from the diagnostic tool menu. If the diagnostic tool does not
communicate with the vehicle: check that the program card is correctly installed.
- check the connections to the vehicle.
- check the ignition switch position.
4. If the diagnostic tool still does not communicate with the vehicle, refer to the diagnostic tool
manual. 5. Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
- NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for generic electronic module (GEM), go to Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint
Tests
- SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs and carry out self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, refer to the appropriate system to continue
diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7191
General Module: Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures
DTC Index B1217 - B1318
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7192
DTC Index B1319 - B2494
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7193
DTC Index B2495 - C1962
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7194
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7195
General Module: Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A: NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE
(GEM)
Test A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7196
Test A2-A3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview > Page 7197
Test A4-A5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7198
General Module: Service and Repair
GENERIC ELECTRONIC MODULE (GEM)
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Prior to removal of the GEM, it is necessary to upload module configuration information
to a diagnostic tool. This information needs to
be downloaded into the new module once installed.
Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer and the lower shield.
3. Position the RH and LH carpet aside from the center tunnel.
4. Disconnect the GEM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7199
5. Remove the GEM
1 Pull back the insulation and remove the nuts.
2 Remove the GEM.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Configure the GEM. Refer to Module Communications Network (Information Bus).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > General Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7200
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7207
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
PARKING AID MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the parking aid module.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7212
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Customer Interest Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7221
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7222
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7223
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings > Page 7224
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - False Parking Aid
Warnings
TSB 05-6-4
04/04/05
FALSE PARKING AID WARNINGS
FORD: 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2002-2003 Windstar 2002-2005 Excursion, Expedition,
Explorer, F-Super Duty 2003-2005 Escape 2004-2005 F-150, Freestar
LINCOLN: 2002 Navigator 2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 2005 Montego 2002-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 05-4-19 to update the description for labor operation F.
ISSUE Vehicles equipped with the parking aid reverse sensing system (RSS) may sound a warning
tone when the vehicle is in reverse, even though there are no objects behind the vehicle. This
condition may also occur on vehicles equipped with the forward sensing system (FSS) when
vehicle is in reverse or drive.
ACTION The condition MAY NOT be due to proximity sensor(s) malfunction but may be a normal
operation characteristic, or due to sensor contamination (sensor being covered with dirt). Refer to
the following description of OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS, before
replacing any sensor(s).
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING DESCRIPTIONS ARE TRUE FOR BOTH THE RSS AND FSS.
OPERATION AND COMMON CAUSE OF WARNINGS
The RSS is only operational when the vehicle is in reverse. For vehicles also equipped with the
FSS the system is operational when the vehicle is in reverse or drive. The FSS and RSS give an
audible warning to the driver when obstacles are within 6' (1.8 meters) from the vehicle, and when
obstacles are within 18" (46 cm) on either side of the bumper.
NOTE
CERTAIN OBSTACLES MAY BE DIFFICULT FOR THE RSS/FSS TO DETECT DEPENDING ON
GEOMETRIC SHAPE OR PROFILE OF THE OBJECT AND THE MATERIAL THE OBJECT IS
COMPOSED OF.
NOTE
THE NEAREST OBSTACLE WILL ALWAYS BE THE OBSTACLE REPORTED, WITH THE
EXCEPTION STATED IN THE NOTE ABOVE.
NOTE
THE VEHICLE OPERATOR MUST BE AWARE THAT THE WARNING TONES ARE AT A
MODERATE VOLUME LEVEL AND THAT THE TONES MAY BE DIFFICULT TO HEAR WITH
BACKGROUND NOISE (RADIO, BLOWERS, PASSENGER CONVERSATION, ETC). THE
RSS/FSS SPEAKER VOLUME IS ALREADY AT MAXIMUM VOLUME AND IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE.
In cases where the RSS/FSS give warnings but nothing is within range of the vehicle sensors, or
give warnings for 3 seconds then ceases, the occurrence may be due to any of the following
reasons:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 7230
BLOCKED/CONTAMINATED PROXIMITY SENSOR SURFACE:
Proximity sensor surfaces may be covered with snow, ice, dirt or mud. There is a gap between the
sensor membrane and its plastic housing that must remain clear (Figure 1). If this space is
contaminated with any foreign material the system may sound a continuous tone or intermittent
tone. The sensor surface can be cleaned by a high pressure water spray.
SIDE COVERAGE SENSOR:
There is side/rear coverage that extends approximately 18" (46 cm) perpendicular from the side
rear fascia. Side coverage is a desirable feature in a parking situation where the vehicle is involved
in a very tight turn with little rearward movement, or where the vehicle is backing parallel to a large,
extending obstacle such as a garage wall. If there is no encroachment between any of the outer
sensors and an obstacle, then the warning will sound for 3 seconds and cease. If vehicle or the
obstacle begin to move closer to each other, then the warning will begin again. Obstacles within
10" (25 cm) of the fascia will always be reported with a continuous tone. This is considered normal
operation.
ABNORMAL ROAD SURFACES:
The RSS/FSS may give warnings due to certain road surfaces with surface projections such as
rocks, broken pavement, unplowed snow covered roads. This is considered normal operation.
OTHER POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Very wet weather conditions, such as mist, frost or snow may provoke occasional warnings. The
system may detect liftgate while open and certain trailer hitches and/or bicycle racks. External
ultrasonic noise may be detected (high velocity air, machinery). This is considered normal
operation.
SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
1. Ensure that nothing is in detectable sensor-range 6' (1.8 meters) behind vehicle for the RSS and
within 6' (1.8 meters) of the front of the vehicle for the FSS.
2. Clean proximity sensors with a dry shop towel, and if required wash with water or a high
pressure water to ensure that the membrane gap is free of any dirt or contamination.
3. Using the New Generation Star (NGS) tester (up to 2004 MY), NGS+ (2005 MY) or WDS
observe the following four parking aid module parameter identification displays (PIDs) for distance
information:
^ LR_CNTD (NGS)/LRI_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNTD (NGS)/RRI_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Center Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ LR_CNRD (NGS)/LRO_DIST (WDS): (Left Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
^ RR_CNRD (NGS)/RRO_DIST (WDS): (Right Rear Corner Sensor Distance To Obstacle)
NOTE
PID IDENTIFIERS ALSO EXIST FOR FRONT SENSORS IF EQUIPPED.
a. If the sensor is functioning properly, with no objects in range of the vehicle, each sensor PID as
described above should display a full scale numerical reading of 255 cm (NGS) or 100 inches
(NGS+ and WDS).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 7231
b. If a PID reading other than 255 or 100 displays, replace only the sensor that is out of
specification. Refer to Workshop Manual Section 413-00 as needed for removal and installation
procedures.
ACCESSING PIDS WITH NGS, SELECT:
^ Vehicle Line
^ Diagnostic Data Link
^ PAM
^ PID/Data Monitor And Record
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS
^ Start
ACCESSING PIDS WITH WDS, SELECT:
^ Tool box Icon
^ Datalogger, Then Tick (Check Mark)
^ Modules, Then Tick
^ PAM, Then Tick
^ Select The Appropriate PIDS, Then Tick
NOTE
FOR SOME VEHICLES, REPLACEMENT SENSORS WILL BE RECEIVED WITH A
PRIMED-BLACK PAINTABLE SURFACE AND MUST BE PAINTED TO MATCH VEHICLE
COLOR.
REFER TO PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS
^ Use a Ford-Approved paint gun, apply base/clear coat to match vehicle
^ Surface can be cleaned with Isopropyl alcohol
^ Maximum paint curing temperature is 194~ F (90~ C) for 1 hour
^ Maximum coating thickness 125 micro meters (including the primer)
^ Paint or veil of paint must not get into connector
^ Immersion processes ARE NOT permitted
^ Paint must be applied evenly to the surface
^ Functional test must be done after painting
^ Use NGS tester to confirm settling time of the sensor is within the specified limits: 850 micro sec.
to 1500 micro sec.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
050604A 2004-2005 F150, 0.7 Hr.
2002-2005 Excursion, 2002 Expedition/Navigator, 2002-2005 F Super Duty, 2002-2003
Blackwood, 2005 Freestyle: Replace
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 7232
One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not
Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Aviator, 0.9 Hr.
2002-2005 Explorer/Mountaineer: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES
Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2004-2005 Monterey, 0.8 Hr.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2002-2003 Windstar: Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S)
INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604B 2003-2005 Expedition: 1.3 Hrs.
Replace One Or More REAR Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal
(Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604C 2004-2005 Monterey, 1.2 Hrs.
2004-2005 Freestar, 2005 Montego, 2005 Ford Five Hundred: Replace One Or More FRONT
Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D,
12651D8, P101)
050604D 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both INNER Parking Aid Sensor(S) DOES NOT INCLUDE Time For
Bumper Cover Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604E 2003-2005 Escape, 2005 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One Or Both OUTER Parking Aid Sensor(S) INCLUDES Time For Bumper Cover
Removal (Do Not Use With 12651D, 12651D8, P101)
050604F Additional Time To Paint 1.0 Hr.
Sensors To Match Bumper Cover On The Following Vehicles: Aviator,
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Parking Assist Distance Sensor: > 05-6-4 > Apr > 05 > Instruments - False Parking Aid Warnings >
Page 7233
Monterey, Five Hundred, Freestyle, Montego
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15K859 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7236
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7237
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Outer Left > Page 7238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7239
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SENSOR
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: The rear bumper removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors.
The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear
bumper removal for access.
Remove the rear bumper.
2. Remove the parking aid sensor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Release the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid sensor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7243
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
PARKING AID SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel center finish panel.
2. Remove the parking aid switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Press the tabs.
3 Remove the parking aid switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7249
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7250
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7251
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7252
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7253
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7255
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7256
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7257
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7258
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7259
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer/Camper Adapter
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7277
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7278
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7279
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7280
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7281
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7282
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7283
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7284
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7285
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7286
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7287
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7288
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7289
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7290
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7291
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7292
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7293
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer/Camper Adapter
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting
system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually
inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
- Connections
- Circuitry
- Relays
- Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7296
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7297
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Tests AB
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test AB1
Tests AC
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AC1-AC2
Tests AD
PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER
TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7298
LAMPS
Test AD1
Tests AE
PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE-LH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AE1
Tests AF
PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE-PARKING LAMPS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7299
Test AF1-AF2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7300
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7305
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7306
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7307
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7308
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7309
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7310
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7311
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7312
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7313
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7314
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7315
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7316
Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7317
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7318
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7319
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7320
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7321
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7322
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7323
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7324
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7325
Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer/Camper Adapter
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7333
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7334
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7335
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7336
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7337
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7338
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7339
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7340
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7341
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7342
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7343
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7344
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7345
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7346
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7347
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7348
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7349
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7350
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7351
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7352
Body Control Module: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7353
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
59-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7354
59-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7355
59-3
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number.
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the six pin-type retainers (three each
3. Remove the foul front bumper cover bolt (two each side).
4. Remove and discard the two front bumper cover-to-front fender pin-type retainers (one each
side). 5. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
6. Remove the lower front bumper cover bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7361
7. Remove the pin-type retainers.
8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Remove the two upper bolts (one each side) and the front bumper cover.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, be sure to position the front bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front bumper cover.
2. Remove the front bumper.
1 Remove the four front bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the front bumper.
3. To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER COVER
Removal and Installation
1. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system electrical connector.
2. Remove the six rear splash shield bolts (three each side).
3. Remove the two rear bumper cover to rear quarter panel screws (one each side).
4. Remove the four pin-type retainers.
5. Remove the rear bumper cover.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the bolts and the liftgate alignment bumpers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Page 7369
3 Remove the rear bumper cover.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing. be sure to position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information
> Service and Repair
Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear bumper cover.
2. Remove the rear bumper.
1 Remove the four rear bumper nuts (two each side).
2 Remove the rear bumper.
3. To install. reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arm.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Loosen the door latch remote control screw.
4. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing.
5. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7384
6. Remove the exterior door handle seals.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
- Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - FRONT DOOR
LH and RH sides
NOTE: Make sure the rear door is within specification before making any adjustments to the front
door. Refer to the specification chart. See: Specifications
1. Remove the fender.
2. Mark the positions of the front door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the two front door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainer.
2 Remove the A-pillar lower trim panel.
LH side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7391
5. Position the central junction box (CJB) aside.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Position the CJB aside.
RH side
6. Position the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch bracket aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the bracket aside.
LH and RH sides
7. Loosen the lower door hinge bolt just enough to permit movement.
8. Adjust the front door to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7392
9. Tighten the three front door hinge to body bolts
LH side
10. Install the CJB.
1 Position the CJB.
2 Install the nuts.
RH side
11. Install the IFS bracket.
1 Position the bracket.
2 Install the bolts.
LH and RH sides
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7393
12. Install the A-pillar lower them panel.
1 Position the A-pillar lower trim panel.
2 Install the pin-type retainers.
13. Install the fender.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the exterior front door handle.
2. Loosen the screw until the door latch remote control is sliding free.
3. Position the interior door handle aside.
- Pull to release the clip.
4. Remove and discard the door latch screws.
5. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7397
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the door latch assembly.
- Slide the door latch remote control towards the front of the vehicle.
7. Remove the three screws and position the anti-theft guard aside.
8. open the clip and disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod. 9. Disconnect the
lock/unlock rod clip.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: Transfer components as necessary.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the front door latch release handle bezel.
3. Remove the door handle cup screw.
4. Remove the front door trim panel.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front door trim panel and disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits
tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown. the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the
door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the
screws.
8. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7407
9. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 7412
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7413
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7414
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7418
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the rear door glass top run aside.
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7424
6. Remove the exterior door handle screws.
7. Remove the exterior door handle cover.
1 Pull the exterior door handle.
2 The front of the cover must be released prior to removing.
8. Remove the exterior door handle by sliding towards the rear of the vehicle.
9. Remove the exterior door handle seals.
10. Remove the door latch remote control from inside the door frame.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside.
3. Remove the interior door handle.
- Release the clip.
4. Remove the door latch cable.
1 Disconnect the cable conduit.
2 Remove the door latch cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
HINGE ADJUSTMENT - REAR DOOR
1. Remove the front seat safety belt retractor.
2. Mark the positions of the rear door hinges to use as reference points.
3. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
4. Loosen the two rear door hinge-to-body bolts just enough to permit movement.
5. Adjust the rear door lo specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7431
6. Tighten the four rear door hinge-to-body bolts. 7. Check the front door adjustments. 8. Install the
front seat safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Disconnect the door latch electrical connector.
1 Release the clip.
2 Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Position the rear door glass top run aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Position the door glass top run aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7435
5. Disconnect the exterior door handle actuating rod.
1 Open the clip.
2 Disconnect the actuating rod.
6. Remove and discard the rear door latch screws. 7. Remove the rear door latch.
8. Disconnect the interior door handle cable.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
1 Remove the screw.
2 Remove the rear door latch release handle bezel.
2. Remove the door handle cup screw.
3. Remove the rear door sail panel.
4. Remove the rear door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7439
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
NOTE:Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits
tightly.
1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts.
2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side to side or up and down as necessary.
3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts.
4. NOTE: The rear door is shown. the front door is similar.
Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 7450
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7451
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7452
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7453
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7457
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7458
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions
Hood Latch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 7463
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Remove the hood latch bolts.
3. Remove the hood latch.
1 Release the cable conduit.
2 Disconnect the cable.
3 Remove the hood latch.
INSTALLATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 7464
1. Connect the hood latch release cable and conduit.
1 Connect the cable.
2 Engage the cable conduit.
2. Position the hood latch with alignment marks and install the bolts.
3. Install the hood latch nut. 4. Verify the hood alignment.
5. Adjust the hood latch.
1 Loosen the bolts.
2 Loosen the nut.
3 Align the hood latch with the hood latch striker.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 7465
6. Tighten the hood latch bolts and nut.
7. CAUTION: Make sure the hood latch is fully engaged.
Verify the hood latch striker is fully engaging the hood latch. Repeat previous steps as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair
HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the hood latch release handle bolts. 2. Remove the hood latch.
3. Remove the two hood latch release handle cable locators.
4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle cable must be pulled through the dash panel into the
passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7473
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. 1
Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7478
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7482
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS RELEASE HANDLE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear window wiper motor.
2. Remove the nuts, striker plate and the liftgate window glass release handle.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7494
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7495
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7496
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7497
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7498
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7499
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7500
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7501
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load
Non-Compliance > Page 7502
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000:
Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position.
Remove the exterior front door latch.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance
Technical Service Bulletin # 04C09 Date: 050318
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes. OASIS was activated January 20, 2004.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED: Yes Available through the website by March 21, 2005.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7518
Owner names and addresses will be available March 31, 2005.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affect units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Immediately contact any of your affected owners whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are
identified in OASIS. Give the owner a copy of the Customer Notification Letter (when available) and
schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this Field Service Action.
RELATED DAMAGE
Related damage claims are not approved for this program.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
This repair will require no additional labor time to complete. Claims submitted with "MT" labor will
not be accepted for reimbursement.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this recall if the repair
was performed prior to the date indicated in the reimbursement plan, which is posted with this
bulletin. This plan is also available to owners through the Customer Relationship Center (CRC).
The CRC will direct owners to seek reimbursement through authorized dealers or, at their option,
directly through Ford Motor Company at P.O. Box 6251, Dearborn, MI 48121-6251.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the end date specified in the reimbursement plan. Refund
claims that included other non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be
accepted for reimbursement.
^ This compliance recall must still be performed, even if the customer has paid for a previous
repair. Claiming a refund will not close out the VIN for this recall.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 04C09 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refunds must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is
claimed.
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7519
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Parts will not be direct shipped for this recall. Order your parts requirements through normal order
processing channels.
DEALER PRICE
For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN
Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division
in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
CLAIM HANDLING PROCEDURE FOR RETURNING PRIOR LEVEL PARTS Immediate Purge
Required: -4L8Z-7843150-DB LATCH ASY - TAILGATE (LIFTGATE) -3L8Z-7843400-FAA
HANDLE Prepare and submit a PCS claim as described below: ^
REASON CODE: GB
^ SHIPPER NBR: 04C09
^ LINE EXPLANATION: Purge Required
When preparing your PCS claim, list the part number being returned on the claim, and indicate the
quantity of that part number being returned. Your PCS claim must be submitted by March 31, 2005.
Claims filed after this date will be denied.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
This program involves performing specific liftgate latch system repairs on two (2) specific vehicle
populations. Each repair procedure identifies the affected vehicles requiring that particular repair.
See the list below for specific repairs needed for each vehicle population.
2004 model year Escape vehicles and 2001-2003 Escape vehicles serviced with subject parts:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
^ replace handle assembly return spring and circlip
2005 model year Escape vehicles:
^ replace the liftgate latch release rod
^ replace release rod clip
LIFTGATE HANDLE REMOVAL AND REPAIR AFFECTED VEHICLES: 2004 MODEL YEAR
ESCAPE VEHICLES AND 2001-2003 MODEL YEAR ESCAPE VEHICLES SERVICED WITH
SUBJECT PARTS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7520
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate window latch, liftgate handle and liftgate latch release rods by opening the
clips. See Figure 1.
5. Release the liftgate window latch ajar switch wiring harness locator and if equipped, disconnect
the liftgate latch actuator electrical connector. See Figure 2.
6. Remove the liftgate latch remote control assembly retaining screw and all four (4) retaining nuts.
See Figure 3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7521
7. Disconnect the liftgate handle-to-remote release rod from the remote control assembly, then
remove the remote control. See Figure 4.
8. Remove the liftgate handle assembly and place it on a bench. See Figure 5.
9. Disassemble the handle as follows:
a) Remove the circlip
b) Pull the pivot rod out of the handle assembly.
c) Note the position of the spring then remove the spring from the handle assembly.
10.
NOTE: the new circlip is supplied in the bag with the new spring. Make sure to retain the new circlip
for installation to the original pivot rod and handle.
LIFTGATE LATCH REMOVAL AND RELEASE ROD REPLACEMENT AFFECTED VEHICLES:
ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY 04C09
NOTE: For 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Step 4. Ford 2005 model year vehicles,
begin the repair on step 1.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. If equipped, remove the rear wiper motor cover.
3. Remove the four (4) screws and remove the liftgate trim panel.
4. Disconnect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector (located on the liftgate latch).
5. Remove the three (3) liftgate latch bolts and retain.
6. Remove the liftgate latch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7522
7. Remove the liftgate latch release rod and install the new rod. See Figure 6.
8. Remove the original release rod clip and replace with the new clip.
LIFTGATE LATCH INSTALLATION AFFECTED VEHICLES: ALL VEHICLES COVERED BY
04C09
1. Position the latch assembly in the vehicle.
2. Apply Motorcraft Medium-Strength Threadlocker TA-25 (blue) to the bolts and install the three
(3) liftgate latch bolts. See Figure 7.
3. Tight the bolts to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Connect the liftgate ajar switch electrical connector.
NOTE:
Fore 2001-2004 model year vehicles, proceed to Liftgate Handle Installation. For 2005 model year
vehicles, continue with Step 5 of this procedure.
5. Install the liftgate trim panel and four (4) screws.
6. If equipped, install the rear wiper motor cover.
7. Close the liftgate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7523
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7524
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7525
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 04C09 > Mar > 05 > Recall - Liftgate Latch Load Non-Compliance > Page
7526
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > 05-22-11 >
Nov > 05 > Recalls for Trunk / Liftgate Latch: > NHTSA04V602000 > Dec > 04 > Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release
Rod Replacement
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Recalls Recall 04V602000: Liftgate Latch Release Rod Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Ford/Escape 2001-2005 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor
Company NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 04V602000 RECALL DATE: Dec 17, 2004
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 262113
SUMMARY: Certain 2004-2005 sport utility vehicles and certain 2001-2003 sport utiity vehicles
having rear liftgate components serviced with 2004 equivalent components fail to comply with the
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention
Components." The rear liftgate latching system does not meet the inertia load requirement in one
direction.
CONSEQUENCE: If the liftgate is left unlocked, there is the potential that it may open during a
crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the rear liftgate latch release rod, the release rod attachment clip
and the door handle return spring. The recall is expected to begin on January 24, 2005. Owners
should contact Ford at 1-800-392-3673.
NOTES: Ford recall No. 04C09. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236. 888-327-4236.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
- All keyless entry remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
- All previous transmitter identification codes (TIC's) will be erased when programming mode is
entered.
- To program (or reprogram) the keyless entry remote transmitters into the generic electronic
module (GEM), carry out the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to RUN eight times within 10 seconds, ending in RUN. If the GEM
has successfully entered program mode, it will
lock and unlock all the doors.
2. NOTE: The first TIC must be entered within 7.5 seconds of entering the program mode and
additional TICs must be entered within 7.5 seconds
of the first TIC. The programming mode is exited whenever the timing constraints are not met.
Press any button on a keyless entry remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm that each keyless entry remote transmitter has been programmed.
3. If the door locks do not respond for any keyless entry remote transmitter, wait for several
seconds and press the button again. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, or wait up to
five minutes after step 1, to exit program mode. If a keyless entry remote transmitter
has been programmed (or reprogrammed), the GEM will lock and unlock all the doors one last
time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7536
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Solenoid: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE LATCH ACTUATOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the liftgate latch remote control.
2. Remove the screws and the liftgate latch actuator.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arm.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER SPLASH SHIELD
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly.
2. Remove the fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the fender splash shield screws.
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7561
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7562
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7568
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7569
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7570
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7571
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7572
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7573
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7574
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7575
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7576
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - FRONT
Special Tool(S)
Special Tool(s)
All vehicles
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the rear transmission mount nuts and bolt.
3. Using the special tool, support the engine. 4. Remove the two front wheel and tire assemblies. 5.
Remove the two engine air deflectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7577
6. Remove the two lower control arm ball joint pinch bolts and nuts (one on each side).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer bar link.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the link from the stabilizer bar.
8. Remove the lateral support crossmember.
1 Remove the belts.
2 Remove the crossmember.
9. Remove the front transmission mount bolt.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7578
11. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember.
12. Remove the two steering gear bolts.
13. Position the steering gear out of the subframe mounts. 14. Remove the dual converter Y-pipe
on the 3.0L (4V) engine or the muffler inlet pipe on the 2.0L (Zetec) engine.
Vehicles with manual transmission
15. Remove the two bolts and disconnect the manual transmission shift linkage.
Vehicles with 4WD
16. Remove the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7579
17. NOTE: Lower the rear of the engine to allow the subframe to clear the companion flange on the
transfer case.
Lower the rear of the engine approximately 150 mm (6 in).
All vehicles
18. CAUTION: Do not allow the rear subframe bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
Completely loosen the two front subframe bolts, but do not remove them.
19. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the two subframe nuts lower the subframe from the vehicle.
20. Transfer all necessary components. 21. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7588
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7589
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7595
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7596
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7597
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7598
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7599
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7600
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7601
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7602
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7611
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7612
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7618
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7619
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7620
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7621
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7622
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7623
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7624
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7625
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7626
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
SUBFRAME - REAR
Removal
Vehicles with 4WD
1. Remove the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
2. Raise and support the vehicle.
3. Remove the four bolts and position the rear control arm aside.
4. Disconnect the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
5. With an assistant, remove the four bolts and rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7627
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and loosely install the bolts.
2. With a 19 mm (0.76 in) rod, align the rear subframe with the alignment holes.
3. Tighten the rear subframe bolts.
4. Connect the exhaust hanger on the subframe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7628
5. Position the four rear control arms in the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
Vehicles with 4WD
6. Install the rear axle assembly.
All vehicles
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. NOTE: The vehicles must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Tighten the four control arms bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7637
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7638
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7644
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7645
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7646
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7647
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7648
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7649
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7650
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7651
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Console - Floor
Console: Description and Operation Console - Floor
CONSOLE - FLOOR
The high series floor console consists of the following components:
- arm rest
- floor console finish panel
- rear cup holders
- storage compartment
The low series floor console consists of the following components:
- floor console front finish panel
- floor console rear finish panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Console - Floor > Page 7657
Console: Description and Operation Console - Overhead
CONSOLE - OVERHEAD
The overhead console may consist of the following components:
- garage door opener compartment
- lamp switch
- roof opening panel control switch (with roof opening panel)
- sunglass compartment(s)
- center dome lamp/map lamps
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series
Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - High Series
FLOOR CONSOLE - HIGH SERIES
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console front bolts.
3. Remove the floor console.
1 Remove the two rear bolts.
2 Remove the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7660
Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - Low Series
FLOOR CONSOLE - LOW SERIES
REMOVAL
1. Remove the floor console front finish panel.
1 Remove the manual transmission shifter knob by turning counterclockwise.
2 Remove the floor console front finish panel.
2. Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
1 Apply the parking brake.
2 Remove the floor console rear finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console front bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Floor Console - High Series > Page 7661
4. Remove the floor console.
- Remove the rear two bolts and the floor console.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7668
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7669
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7670
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7671
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7672
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 7673
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Headliner: Customer Interest Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Article No. 03-25-3
12/22/03
BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near
C/D pillar.
ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or
replace headliner.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING
SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE
HOLES UNTIL STEP 12.
Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should
be replaced:
1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the
headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner
must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue
with procedure.
To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit.
^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA
^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB
HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 7682
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 7683
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 7684
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 7685
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
> Page 7686
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass
Headliner: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear Quarter Glass
Article No. 03-25-3
12/22/03
BODY - HEADLINER - SAG/LOOSE AT REAR QUARTER GLASS
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
This article supersedes TSB 01-23-7 to update the vehicle model years.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit a headliner sag/loose condition at rear quarter glass area near
C/D pillar.
ACTION Verify condition. Inspect headliner for amount of sag and overall condition. Repair or
replace headliner.
Refer to the following Service Procedure for details.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
PRIOR TO REPAIRING THE HEADLINER, PLEASE READ THROUGH THE FOLLOWING
PROCEDURE IN ITS ENTIRETY. REMEMBER TO INSTALL THE PROTECTIVE TUBING
SLEEVE ONTO THE DRILL BIT TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF. DO NOT DRILL THE
HOLES UNTIL STEP 12.
Prior to repair, inspect the vehicle for the following conditions to determine if the headliner should
be replaced:
1. If the headliner sags in excess of 30 mm (1.180 inch) below quarter window black-out paint, the
headliner must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
2. Inspect for delamination of headliner cloth to substrate. If cloth has come loose the headliner
must be replaced (refer to Workshop Manual Section 501). Do not attempt repair.
If headliner does not meet the above replacement criteria, the headliner can be repaired. Continue
with procedure.
To repair the headliner, use the Headliner Retainer Installation Kit.
^ For Parchment interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAA
^ For Graphite interior, use part number 2L8Z-78519D80-AAB
HEADLINER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 7692
1. Locate new push-pin holes (See Figure 1 for example locations).
2. Cut template along the curves printed on both sides of template.
3. Make two holes on template along the printed circles.
4. Align template with glass and C-pillar or D-pillar as noted on template. Make sure arrow points to
front of the vehicle. Use template for locating proper push-pin spacing (Figure 2).
5. Fit the D-pillar side edge as noted on template and the D-pillar to locate the new push-pin
positions between D-pillar and C-pillar (Figure 2).
6. Mark both left-hand side and right-hand side new pin position holes as noted on template. Make
sure arrow points to front of the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 7693
NOTE
DO NOT DRILL AT THIS POINT. ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR AND HARNESS NEED TO BE
TEMPORARILY MOVED TO PREVENT DAMAGE. CONNECTOR MUST BE ROTATED 90
DEGREES ON LEFT HAND SIDE ONLY AS VIEWED FROM REAR OF VEHICLE (FIGURE 5).
7. Remove the push-pin and child seat tether cap on left hand side only. This allows headliner to
flex and helps prevent crease damage (Figure 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 7694
8. Remove top portion of left hand D-pillar trim to allow headliner to flex down. Be careful not to
bend or over flex headliner too much or creasing will occur (Figure 4).
9. Rotate electrical connector 90 degrees. Pull harness toward rear of vehicle to avoid drill damage
(Figure 5).
10. Install protective tubing sleeve onto 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with 7-10 mm of the drill bit
exposed beyond the end of the tube (Figure 6).
NOTE
THIS SLEEVE MUST BE USED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ROOF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 7695
11. Align drill perpendicular (90 degrees to surface of headliner) so that pin will be flush with
headliner surface (Figure 7).
NOTE
USE SAFETY GLASSES OR GOGGLES TO PROTECT EYES FROM CHIPS WHEN DRILLING
HOLES.
12. Drill holes using the 7 mm (9/32 inch) drill bit with protective sleeve.
13. Before inserting the push-pins, remove any debris/metal shavings that have accumulated on
the headliner and/or rear cargo department as a result of drilling the holes.
NOTE
DO NOT INSERT PUSH-PINS YET.
14. Rotate electrical connector and harness to original position.
15. Insert new pins into holes until headliner is 2 mm (.080 inch) above glass blackout line.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PULL HEADLINER UP TOO FAR. THIS WILL CAUSE GAPPING AT C
AND D PILLAR TRIM. PUSH-PINS CAN BE REMOVED AND RE-INSTALLED TO DESIRED
LENGTH.
16. Verify electrical function of center dome lamp, rear dome lamp and rear wiper.
17. Install D-pillar trim and push-pins in original locations. Make sure clips and pins are properly
positioned and seated.
18. Inspect headliner and trim positioning.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE
SUPERSEDES: 01-23-7
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Headliner: > 03-25-3 > Dec > 03 > Interior - Headliner Sags at Rear
Quarter Glass > Page 7696
032503A Verify Concern And 2.3 Hrs.
Replace Headliner (Includes Time For Overhead Console And Sun/Moon Roof)
032503B Verify Concern And 0.5 Hr.
Perform Repair Procedure:
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851944 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7697
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINER
REMOVAL
Vehicles with overhead console
1. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
2. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws.
2 Remove the two sun visors and two clips. If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the eight passenger assist handle covers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7698
4. Remove the four passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the eight bolts.
2 Remove the four passenger assist handles.
5. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
6. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
7. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings. 8. If equipped, remove the roof opening
panel moulding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7699
9. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-Ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the two safety belt D-ring covers.
10. Remove the two safety belt D-ring bolts. 11. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips
aside.
12. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels. 13. Remove the two C-pillar trim panels.
14. Remove the two D-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7700
15. Remove the front interior lamp lens.
16. Remove the front interior lamp.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the front interior lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
17. Remove the rear interior lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
18. Remove the five pin-type retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7701
19. If equipped, remove the three child seat tether anchor covers.
20. If equipped, remove the three bolts and the child seat tether anchors. 21. Remove the
headliner.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
2. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt. 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside.
4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7706
5. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7707
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL
REMOVAL
LH side
1. If equipped with a power point on the LH quarter trim panel, disconnect the battery ground cable.
Both sides
2. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring cover.
3. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt.
4. Remove the pin-type retainers and the liftgate scuff plate trim panel. 5. Position the liftgate
weatherstrip aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > B-Pillar Trim Panel > Page 7708
6. if equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down.
7. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
1 Insert a tape-wrapped screwdriver between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim panel.
2 Push the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow and remove the rear quarter trim panel.
8. If equipped, disconnect the accessory socket connector (left side).
9. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
DOOR LOCK CYLINDER
REMOVAL
NOTE: Individual lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative cylinder and building a
new lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a
detailed instruction sheet to build the new lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle.
1. NOTE: Make sure the window glass is in the raised position.
Remove the exterior front door latch.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1 Release the clips.
2 Remove the lock cylinder.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics
TSB 06-15-8
08/07/06
KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS - DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORY
FORD: 1998-2006 Taurus 1999-2003 Escort 1999-2006 Mustang 2000-2006 Focus 2002-2005
Thunderbird 2005-2006 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006 Crown Victoria, Fusion 1998-2006
Expedition, Explorer, F-150, Ranger 1999 F-250 Light Duty 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2006
F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2006 E-Series 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005
Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2006 Escape 2004 F-150 Heritage 2004-2006 Freestar
LINCOLN: 1998-2006 Town Car 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2006 Zephyr 1998-2006 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator 2006 Mark LT
MERCURY: 1998-2005 Sable 1999-2002 Cougar 2005-2006 Montego 2006 Grand Marquis, Milan
1998-2006 Mountaineer 2004-2006 Monterey 2005-2006 Mariner
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience a concern with the keyless entry keypad. In order to
properly diagnose the concern with the keyless entry keypad, it is important to identify whether the
keypad is a factory installed style (wired) or a Genuine Ford Accessory (GFA) radio frequency (RF)
style keypad.
ACTION Use the following Service Procedure to identify GFA RF keypads and provide diagnostic
service tips.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
IDENTIFICATION:
1. Production installed keyless entry keypads are mounted flush with the surface of the vehicle and
are wired directly to the module controlling the vehicle's keyless entry system. This style keypad
can be diagnosed using the appropriate Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7719
2. Dealer installed GFA RF keypads are adhesive backed and protrude approximately 1/2" (13
mm) from the surface of the vehicle and there are no specific diagnostics available in the WSM
(Figure 1).
NOTE
THIS RF KEYPAD WAS ALSO US[D IN PRODUCTION ON 2004 F-SUPER DUTY VEHICLES
BUILT PRIOR TO 12/3/2003. REFER TO WSM, SECTION 501-14 FOR RF KEYPAD
DIAGNOSTICS FOR THESE VEHICLES.
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORY KEYPAD DIAGNOSTIC TIPS
1. The keypad operates similarly to a remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and is programmed
using a similar procedure.
Although the RF keypad is not specifically addressed in the WSM, the RKE transmitter
programming portion of the WSM, Section 501-14 can be used as a guide
NOTE
THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTONS ON THE KEYPAD MUST BE PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY
DURING THE PROCEDURE IN ORDER FOR THE KEYPAD TO BE RECOGNIZED AS AN
ADDITIONAL REMOTE TRANSMITTER.
Since the GFA RF keypad is essentially another RKE transmitter, the transmitter diagnostic
pinpoint tests in the vehicle's WSM can also be referenced even though the buttons serving the
lock / unlock functions will differ
2. The GFA RF keypad is serviced as an assembly. The internal battery cannot be replaced
separately.
3. If the master code or owner selectable code is lost or forgotten, the GFA RF keypad must be
replaced. These codes are not stored in any vehicle module (with the exception of 2004 F-Super
Duty vehicles produced prior to 12/3/2003).
4. The GFA RF keypad and all RKE transmitters (the number of transmitters allowable will vary by
vehicle) must be reprogrammed together anytime the keypad is replaced, an RKE transmitter is
replaced, or the module controlling the keyless entry system on the vehicle (GEM/SJB/VSM/DDM
etc.) is replaced.
NOTE
THERE IS AN EXCEPTION TO TIP 4 FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH INTEGRATED
KEYHEAD TRANSMITTERS (IKTs) (FUSION/MILAN/ZEPHYR). THE GFA RF KEYPADS FOR
VEHICLES WITH IKTs MUST BE PROGRAMMED INDEPENDENTLY FROM THE IKTs. TURN
THE IGNITION FROM "OFF" TO "RUN" 8 TIMES WITHIN 10 SECONDS, WITH THE 8TH TIME
ENDING IN "RUN". THE DOOR LOCKS WILL CYCLE TO CONFIRM ENTERING
PROGRAMMING MODE. PRESS THE 7-8 AND 9-0 BUTTON ON THE KEYPAD
SIMULTANEOUSLY TO SEND A LOCK SIGNAL. TURN IGNITION TO OFF. THE LOCKS WILL
CYCLE AGAIN TO INDICATE THE END OF THE PROGRAMMING MODE.
5. The keypad will normally illuminate for 5 seconds after one or more buttons are pressed, and the
illumination will immediately turn off if the 7-8 and 9-0 buttons are pressed simultaneously (lock all
doors). The keypad contains an optical sensor and will not illuminate under bright lighting
conditions. The keypad may only illuminate briefly in colder temperatures in order to maximize the
battery power available to transmit a lock/unlock signal. The temperature at which this occurs will
vary depending upon the keypad battery age and condition. Both of these conditions are a normal
function of the Power Save Mode and do not indicate a need to replace the keypad.
6. After entering the keypad code, the system may unlock the driver's door, lock it, then unlock it
again, and the keypad will not even briefly illuminate. This is the Alert Mode and is an indication
that battery power is very low and the keypad must be replaced.
7. The keypad also contains an Anti-scan feature. If the wrong code has been entered 7 times (35
consecutive button presses) the keypad is disabled for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash
during this time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Keyless Entry - Keypad Diagnostics > Page 7720
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
14A626 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information >
Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Service and Repair
REMOTE TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING
NOTE:
- All keyless entry remote transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
- All previous transmitter identification codes (TIC's) will be erased when programming mode is
entered.
- To program (or reprogram) the keyless entry remote transmitters into the generic electronic
module (GEM), carry out the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to RUN eight times within 10 seconds, ending in RUN. If the GEM
has successfully entered program mode, it will
lock and unlock all the doors.
2. NOTE: The first TIC must be entered within 7.5 seconds of entering the program mode and
additional TICs must be entered within 7.5 seconds
of the first TIC. The programming mode is exited whenever the timing constraints are not met.
Press any button on a keyless entry remote transmitter, and the doors will lock and then unlock to
confirm that each keyless entry remote transmitter has been programmed.
3. If the door locks do not respond for any keyless entry remote transmitter, wait for several
seconds and press the button again. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, or wait up to
five minutes after step 1, to exit program mode. If a keyless entry remote transmitter
has been programmed (or reprogrammed), the GEM will lock and unlock all the doors one last
time.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
View 151-35
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7733
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7734
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7735
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Control Module > Component
Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7743
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7746
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7749
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7750
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7751
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7756
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7757
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7758
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7759
Exterior Rear View Mirror Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips
Article No. 03-10-1
PAINT - PLASTIC BUMPER/FASCIA PARTS - PREPARATION PROCEDURES - SERVICE TIPS
FORD: 2002-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS, ESCAPE, EXPEDITION,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, EXPLORER, WINDSTAR
LINCOLN: 2002 CONTINENTAL
2002-2003 LS, TOWN CAR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2002-2003 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE
2002 VILLAGER 2002-2003 MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE
This article is being written to clarify the proper procedures to prepare plastic fascia parts. Multiple
repair procedures for painting plastic fascia parts are being used in the field that are inconsistent
and may not provide adequate paint adhesion. Paint companies repair procedures are system
specific and do not lend themselves to generic repair procedures.
ACTION
Follow the repair information in this TSB flow chart to perform the initial steps for fascia paint repair
only. After completing the flow chart refer to paint company system recommendations for materials
and mixing instructions for the type of plastic being painted. Also listed in this TSB are some
important service tips to remember when preparing plastic parts for paint application.
SERVICE INFORMATION
For repair information, refer to flow chart Figure 1. Additional Service Tips:
- When washing plastic parts use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) mixed at a ratio (1 oz. of
ZC-3-A) to 1 gallon of water.
- Use basecoat reducer for a wipe test on coated service parts.
- If the coating (adhesion promoter/primer) shrivels or lifts, remove only that layer of material by
Scotchbrite scuffing or machine sanding. Never remove material to bare plastic substrate, as this
will create more work in order to protect the substrate for application of paint.
- If the adhesion promoter or primer is intact, use a gray Scotchbrite pad and scuff the entire part to
continue preparation steps for normal paint application.
- Follow paint company recommendations for primer or basecoat application.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 106000
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7765
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - Approved Paint Materials
Article No. 02-16-7
BODY-PAINT-APPROVED PAINT MATERIALS FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
FORD: 2003 CROWN VICTORIA, FOCUS, MUSTANG, TAURUS, E SERIES,
ESCAPE, EXCURSION, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT,
EXPLORER, F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, WINDSTAR, F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2003 CONTINENTAL, LS, TOWN CAR, AVIATOR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2003 COUGAR, GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE, MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE
Ford Motor Company's goal is to eliminate paint related repeat repairs and increase customer
satisfaction. To meet this goal, Ford has tested ten major refinish paint suppliers materials for
warranty repairs. Tests were conducted to paint material specification WSS-M2P100-D for refinish
paint materials.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7766
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7767
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7768
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7769
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7770
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7771
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7772
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7773
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7774
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7775
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7776
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7777
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7778
ACTION
The materials listed in the Figures 1-13, are approved paint systems for refinishing service parts as
well as repair of steel and plastic OEM paint systems.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: 98-18-2 WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 106000
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7779
Paint: Technical Service Bulletins Paint - New Polishing Products and Procedures
Article No. 02-16-3
PAINT-NEW POLISHING PRODUCTS-SERVICE PROCEDURES
FORD: 2002-2003 CROWN VICTORIA, ESCORT, FOCUS, TAURUS, ESCAPE,
EXCURSION, EXPEDITION, EXPLORER SPORT TRAC, EXPLORER SPORT, EXPLORER,
F-150, RANGER, SUPER DUTY F SERIES, F-650, F-750
LINCOLN: 2002-2003 LS, TOWN CAR, NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 2002-2003 GRAND MARQUIS, SABLE, MOUNTAINEER
ISSUE
Vehicles that have small scratches, mars, dirt, and scuff marks found during pre-delivery or
reconditioning may be repaired without repainting using new Motorcraft polishing products. These
products may also be used effectively for collision damage repairs.
ACTION
Read this TSB in its entirety BEFORE beginning any repairs. Repair as outlined in the following
Service Procedures.
BACKGROUND
The OEM paint system has changed significantly the last 18 months. Previous paint systems
required a number days to be fully cured. The OEM paint system used today cures faster and is
also much harder. The hardness of the OEM system is similar to the hardness of current Refinish
paint system and as a result, a new polishing system is necessary. These products have been
tested on all Ford Motor Company OEM paint finishes and all Major Refinish paint brands. The
system has significantly better results than all other products tested for OEM and Refinish paint
systems.
NOTE THE USE OF FORD OR MOTORCRAFT BRAND PRODUCTS IS MANDATORY ON ALL
REPAIR CLAIMS PAID BY FORD UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN EMISSIONS, FIELD
SERVICE ACTIONS, CUSTOMER SATISFACTION PROGRAMS, TSB'S OR OTHER COMPANY
PUBLICATIONS. THE COST OF NON-FORD/MOTORCRAFT PRODUCTS USED FOR A
WARRANTY OR ESP/ESC, OR AWA REPAIR WITHOUT JUSTIFYING THEIR USE, (I.E.,
EMERGENCY REPAIR) IS NOT REIMBURSABLE. EXAMPLES OF FORD PRODUCTS ARE:
ADHESIVES, SEALERS, SOLVENTS, CLEANERS, WASHES, AND OTHER SPECIAL
PRODUCTS LISTED IN THE FORD CAR CARE PRODUCTS MANUAL.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Make sure the area to be polished is clean and free of paint sealants and waxes. 2. To remove
dirt nibs, runs, or sags, sand the surface with a D.A. sander or by hand with P1500 grit sandpaper.
3. Apply the Motorcraft ZC-39-B backing pad to dual action sander. 4. Apply the Motorcraft
polishing disc (ZC-39-A kit) to the D.A. sander.
NOTE MAKE SURE THE POLISHING DISC IS CENTERED EXACTLY ON THE BACKING PAD,
OR "WILD SCRATCHES" MAY OCCUR.
5. Dampen the polishing disc with water from a spray bottle before use. 6. Damp polish the repair
area until the dirt, mar, etc. has been removed. The surface should now be semi-polished.
NOTE IF THE IMPERFECTION CANNOT BE REMOVED WITH THE POLISHING DISC, HAND
SAND WITH FINE SAND PAPER IN A STEP PROCESS (I.E. 600 GRIT, 1200 GRIT, 1500 GRIT).
THE POLISHING DISC WILL ONLY REMOVE 1500 GRIT SCRATCHES AND HIGHER.
7. To remove the sand scratches and also remove swirl marks, install a foam-polishing pad onto a
buffer. 8. Apply a small amount of the Motorcraft Finish Enhancement Compound on the foam pad
for the first time of pad use. Do not use a wool pad with
this product.
9. Move the pad around in a 2 foot area to spread out the material, then start up the buffer.
Recommended speed is 1750 rpm. Apply medium
pressure and let the polisher do the work. Verify the imperfection has been removed. If not, repeat
Step 9 until complete.
10. Wipe the repair area with a detailing cloth to complete the
repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Paint - Plastic Bumper/Fascia Service Tips > Page 7780
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY OASIS
CODES: 106000
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes
Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes
The upper portion of the vehicle certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the
month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes gross
vehicle weight ratings (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand front door jamb.
The first set of numbers/letters indicate the vehicle primary body color code. The second set of
numbers/letters (if applicable), indicate a lower body, two-tone paint code.
- BZ Chrome Yellow
- C2 Gold Ash Metallic
- CX Dark Shadow Gray (clearcoat)
- DV Light Tundra
- FX Merlot
- G2 Redfire
- L2 True Blue Pearl (clearcoat)
- P5 Aspen Green Metallic
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 7783
- TL Satin Silver (clearcoat)
- UA Ebony (clearcoat)
- YZ Oxford White (clearcoat)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID
> Paint Codes > Page 7784
Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL REFERENCE
The VC label is located on the left-hand front door or door jamb and is in a similar location on
trucks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Keyless Entry Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Power Door Lock Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Side Front > Page 7796
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7797
Seat Heater Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7798
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7799
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar climate controlled heated power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition install the original part and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7800
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7801
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7805
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7806
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the root opening panel module
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7812
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Close the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the headliner.
3. Remove the roof opening panel motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the roof opening panel motor.
INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The roof opening panel should be in the closed position.
Connect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
2. With the motor still removed, bump the roof opening panel switch one time only towards the
close or vent open position.
3. Install the roof opening panel motor.
1 Position the roof opening panel motor
2 Install the bolts.
4. Check for correct operation of the roof opening panel motor. 5. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 7817
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 7820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
AIR DEFLECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Open the roof opening panel. 2. Remove the roof opening panel frame.
3. Remove the air deflector.
- Lift up the air deflector and slide the air deflector to the rear to release the air deflector arms.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT DRAIN HOSE
REMOVAL
Passenger side
1. Remove the instrument panel.
All
2. Remove the headliner.
3. Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose at the front body pillar.
4. Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose.
1 Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose.
- Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel front drain hose.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose > Page 7828
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose
ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
3. Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
1 Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose from the roof opening panel frame.
2 Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
- Remove the tape securing the roof opening panel drain hose.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL FRAME
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the in-line electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the four roof opening panel drain hoses.
4. Release the wire harness locators.
5. Remove the roof opening panel frame.
1 Remove the eight roof opening panel frame bolts.
2 Remove the roof opening panel frame.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7832
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7836
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7837
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Service and Repair
ROOF OPENING PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the root opening panel module
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the roof opening panel module.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7843
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Seat Rear Height Motor > Page 7844
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7848
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7849
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7850
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7851
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7852
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic toot must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7853
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Seat Cushion: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 7858
Seat Cushion: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Front Seat
Driver Seat
FRONT SEAT CUSHION - DRIVER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety bell
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7861
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in the side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
- Manual seat shown. power seat similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver seat side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7862
6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7863
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7864
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track-to-floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the driver seat. 1
Remove the seat track-to-floor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7865
2 Remove the driver seat.
- If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 24. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated
grid electrical connectors.
25. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of all
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which can result in personal injury. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7866
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag-to-floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid and the seat cushion heated grid
electrical connectors.
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the driver seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7867
1 Position the driver seat.
2 Install the seat track-to-floor bolts.
- If equipped with power seats, connect the electrical connector.
5. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 6. Position the driver seat
forward.
7. Install the seat track-to-floor nuts. 8. If equipped with power seats. disconnect the battery ground
cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
10. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7868
11. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 13. Connect the battery ground
cable. 14. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 15.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7869
17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
19. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
20. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7870
injury.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
21. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 22. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
24. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7871
25. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 26. Connect the battery ground cable. 27.
Prove out the air bag system.
Passenger Seat
FRONT SEAT CUSHION - PASSENGER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safely
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnosis/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7872
the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the floor
connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7873
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7874
10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7875
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the passenger seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7876
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
22. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 23. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat
cushion heated grid electrical connector from the seat wiring harness.
24. Separate the front seat cushion trim from the front seat cushion pad.
ASSEMBLY
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collusion, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7877
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the front seat cushion trim to the front seat cushion pad. 2. Install the front seat cushion
trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid connector and the seat cushion
heated grid electrical connector to the seat wiring harness.
3. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
4. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7878
Install the passenger seat. 1
Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector.
5. Position the passenger seat forward.
6. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 7. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
8. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
9. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7879
10. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
11. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 12. Connect the battery
ground cable. 13. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 14.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
15. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7880
16. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
17. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
18. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
19. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7881
20. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
21. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
22. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
23. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 24. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
25. Connect the battery ground cable. 26. Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7882
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Rear Seat
REAR SEAT CUSHION
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: 60% split bench seat shown, 40% and bench seat similar.
1. Lift up the rear seat cushion.
2. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Pull up on release lever and slide the seat out of the floor bracket.
3. Release the J-retainer.
4. Unzip the rear seat cushion trim.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front Seat > Page 7883
5. Remove the rear seat cushion trim from the rear seat cushion pad.
6. Remove the rear seat cushion bracket.
1 Remove the two bolts.
2 Remove the rear seat cushion bracket
ASSEMBLY
1. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7888
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7889
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7890
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7891
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7892
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7893
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7894
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7895
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7896
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7897
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7898
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7899
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7900
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7901
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7902
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7903
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7904
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7905
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7906
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7907
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7908
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7909
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 7910
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Passenger Side Front > Page 7915
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7916
Seat Heater Control Module: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7917
Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT MODULE
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so may result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7918
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove the heated seat module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the locking tab and slide the module off the bracket.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar climate controlled heated power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition install the original part and
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7919
carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Install the heated seat module.
- Slide the heated seat module down over the attachment bracket until the locking tab snaps into
place.
- Connect the electrical connector.
2. Install the front seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 7920
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver
Side > Page 7925
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7926
Seat Heater Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7927
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7928
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Seat Latch: Service and Repair
REAR SEAT BACKREST LATCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear seat backrest.
2. Remove the rear seat backrest side trim panel.
3. Remove the rear seat backrest latch.
1 Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the latch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information
Seat Track: Technician Safety Information
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling all air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or test to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service Precautions >
Technician Safety Information > Page 7936
Seat Track: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or sitting
on a seat not secured in the vehicle may result in damaged components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat
Seat Track: Service and Repair Driver Seat
SEAT TRACK - DRIVER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOLS
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7939
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
- Manual seat track shown, power seat track similar.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7940
6. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7941
10. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
12. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Connect the special tool to
the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
14. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7942
15. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the driver seat rearward. 21. If equipped with
power seats, disconnect the negative battery cable.
22. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the driver seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the driver seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7943
- If equipped with power seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. If equipped, remove the seat height adjustment control.
24. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- If equipped with a power/heated seat, disconnect the electrical connector(s).
25. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
26. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7944
27. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for
installation.
Remove the front seat backrest. 1
Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
28. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
29. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector from
the seat wiring harness.
30. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7945
31. If equipped with manual seats, remove the seat adjuster.
- Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
32. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
Remove the safety belt pretensioner from the seat track. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the ail bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7946
NOTE:
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Position the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
2. If equipped with manual seats, install the seat adjuster.
- Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7947
4. Install the front seat cushion trim and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector to the
seat wiring harness.
5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips.
6. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
7. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7948
8. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
9. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
- If equipped with a power/heated seat, connect the electrical connector.
1 Install the shield.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
10. If equipped, install the seat height adjustment control.
11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the driver seat. 1
Position the driver seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7949
- If equipped with power seat, connect the electrical connector.
12. If equipped with power seats, connect the battery ground cable. 13. Position the driver seat
forward.
14. Install the seat track to floor nuts. 15. If equipped with power seats, disconnect the battery
ground cable and wait one minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
17. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7950
18. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
19. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector. 20. Connect the battery ground
cable. 21. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out the air bag system. 22.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
24. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7951
Vehicles with side air bag
25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
26. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
27. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7952
28. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 29. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
30. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
31. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
32. Install the driver air bag connector access cover. 33. Connect the battery ground cable. 34.
Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7953
Seat Track: Service and Repair Passenger Seat
SEAT TRACK - PASSENGER SEAT
Special Tool(s)
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated as per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7954
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
All vehicles
1. Position the front seats forward. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one
minute.
Vehicles with side air bag
3. Disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
4. Connect the special tool to the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
All vehicles
5. Disconnect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7955
6. Connect the special tool to the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
7. Disconnect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
8. Connect the special tool to the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
9. Disconnect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7956
10. Connect the special tool to the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
All vehicles
11. Lower the driver air bag connector access cover.
12. Disconnect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
13. Connect the special tool to the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector. 14. Lower the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7957
15. Disconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector.
16. Connect the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector. 17. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the air bag system.
19. Remove the seat track to floor nuts. 20. Position the passenger seat rearward.
21. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Remove the passenger seat. 1
Remove the seat track to floor bolts.
2 Remove the passenger seat.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7958
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat electrical connector.
22. Remove the outboard seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the electrical connector.
23. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
24. Remove the front seat backrest bolts.
25. NOTE: If equipped with a side air bag module, note the routing of the wiring harness for
installation.
Remove the front seat backrest.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7959
1 Remove the pivot nut.
2 Remove the backrest.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the backrest heated grid electrical connector.
26. If equipped, remove the under seat storage bin.
27. Disconnect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 28. Remove the front seat cushion trim and pad
from the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector.
29. Remove the front seat cushion pan.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the front seat cushion pan.
30. Remove the seat adjuster.
- Unclip the seat adjuster pins.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7960
31. NOTE: Note the routing of the wiring harness for installation.
Remove the safety belt pretensioner. 1
Remove the bolt.
2 Remove the safety belt pretensioner.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag system is being repaired the air bag system
must be deactivated per the deactivation procedure contained in Air Bag Systems.
- Restraint system diagnostic tools must be installed under the seats in the side air bag to floor
connector.
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- After diagnosing/repairing a seat system the restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed
before operating the vehicle.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7961
All vehicles
1. Install the safety belt pretensioner.
1 Install the safety belt pretensioner.
2 Install the bolt.
2. Install the seat adjuster.
- Connect the seat adjuster pins.
3. Install the front seat cushion pan.
1 Position the front seat cushion pan.
2 Install the bolts.
4. Install the front seat cushion and pad to the front seat cushion frame.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the seat cushion heated grid electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7962
5. Connect the seat cushion trim cover J-clips. 6. If equipped, install the under seat storage bin.
7. Install the front seat backrest.
1 Install the backrest.
2 Install the pivot nut.
8. Install the front seat backrest bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the backrest heated grid electrical connectors.
9. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7963
10. Install the outboard seat cushion side shield.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the electrical connector.
1 Install the shield.
2 Install the screw.
3 Install the seat backrest handle.
11. CAUTION: Use care when handling the seat and track assembly. Dropping the assembly or
sitting on a seat not secured in the vehicle
may result in damaged components.
Install the passenger seat. 1
Position the passenger seat.
2 Install the seat track to floor bolts.
- If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat connector.
12. Position the passenger seat forward.
13. Install the seat track to floor nuts.
Vehicles with side air bag
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7964
14. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger side air bag module body harness electrical
connector.
15. Connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
16. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the passenger safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical
connector.
17. Connect the passenger safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7965
18. Connect the battery ground cable. 19. With the remaining special tools still in place, prove out
the air bag system. 20. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
21. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver safety belt pretensioner body harness electrical connector.
22. Connect the driver safety belt pretensioner electrical connector.
Vehicles with side air bag
23. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the driver side air bag module body harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7966
24. Connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector.
All vehicles
25. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool from the steering column harness side of the driver air bag module
electrical connector.
26. Connect the driver air bag module electrical connector.
27. Install the driver air bag connector access cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver
Seat > Page 7967
28. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Remove the special tool to the instrument panel harness side of the passenger air bag module
electrical connector.
29. Connect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 30. Raise the glove compartment.
- Press the locking tabs.
31. Connect the battery ground cable. 32. Prove out the air bag system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
7968
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations
View 151-15
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood
Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7974
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7979
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 7982
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7985
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7986
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7987
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7991
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7992
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7993
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7994
Exterior Rear View Mirror Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-24
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7998
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7999
Power Seat Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8000
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8001
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8002
Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair
SEAT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic toot must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8003
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
4. Remove the seat control switch
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 8008
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8009
Seat Heater Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8010
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
REMOVAL
WARNING:
- Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS)
vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Carry a live side air bag module with the air bag and tear seam pointed away from your body.
This will reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
- Do not set a live side air bag module down on the cover tear seam. This will reduce the risk of
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
- After deployment, the air bag surface can contain deposits of sodium hydroxide, a product of the
gas generant combustion that is irritating to the skin. Wash your hands with soap and water
afterward. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag deployment,
which may result in personal injury.
- Vehicle sensor orientation is critical for proper system operation. If a vehicle equipped with an air
bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is involved in a collision, inspect the sensor mounting
bracket and wiring pigtail for deformation. Replace and properly position the sensor or any other
damaged supplemental restraint system (SRS) components whether or not the air bag is deployed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be
depleted before repairing or replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) components and before servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front
or side air bag sensors, such as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and
hood latches.
Refer to the appropriate component or system to determine location of the front air bag sensors.
The side air bag sensors are located at or near the base of the B-pillar.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
- The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove from vehicle prior
to road use. Failure to remove may result in personal injury and possible violation of vehicle safety
standards.
NOTE:
- Diagnostics or repairs are not to be carried out on a side air bag system or a safety belt
pretensioner (if equipped) with the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose/repair the
side air bag system or a safety belt pretensioner (if equipped) the seat must be removed from the
vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic tool must be installed in side air bag connector at the
floor connector. The restraint system diagnostic tool must be removed prior to operating the
vehicle.
- Diagnostics may be carried out on seat systems other than the side air bag system or a safety
belt pretensioner (if equipped) (lumbar, climate controlled, heated, power seat track) with the seat
installed in the vehicle as long as the restraint system diagnostic tool is installed under the seat in
the side air bag to floor connector.
- A repair is made by installing a new part only. If a new part is installed and the new part does not
correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again.
- If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seatback pad, trim cover, and side air bag module
must be installed. A new seatback frame should be installed if necessary.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8011
3. Remove the front seat cushion side shield.
1 Remove the seat backrest handle.
2 Remove the screw.
3 Remove the shield.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Roof Opening Panel Switch > Page 8016
View 151-21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Roof Opening Panel Position Switch > Page 8019
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation
INSULATION
Insulation is made of urethane, PVC, and recycled felt. Insulation is installed:
- under the roof panel.
- above and below the instrument panel
- on the cowl sides.
- over the front and rear floor areas.
- in the A, B. and D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL PANEL GRILLE
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wiper pivot arms.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Remove the wiper pivot arm.
2. Remove the driver side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the passenger side cowl grille.
1 Remove the pin-type retainers.
2 Remove the screw caps and screws.
3 Remove the cowl grille.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Weatherstrip: > 05-22-11 > Nov > 05 > Body - Door Seal Squeaking
Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Door Seal Squeaking
TSB 05-22-11
11/14/05
DOOR SEAL SQUEAKS
FORD: 2001-2005 Escape 2005 Escape Hybrid
MERCURY: 2005 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 Escape Hybrid and Mariners may exhibit squeaks from the
shedlip seal for the doors. This seal runs along the top edge of the doors, above the top section of
the individual door inner seals. This is most likely to be noticed at slow speeds and when the body
is put into a twist.
ACTION Replace the seals.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
052211A 2001-2005 Escape, 2005 0.2 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, 2005 Mariner: Replace The Shedlip Seal For Both Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7851222 41
OASIS CODES: 110000, 702000
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations >
Deactivator Switch > Page 8046
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams >
Deactivator Switch > Page 8049
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8050
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
8051
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8055
Cruise Control Servo: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Squeeze the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
3. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
4. Remove the speed control actuator assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Separate the wire harness from the bracket.
3 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8056
5. Remove the bolts and separate the speed control actuator from the bracket.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the speed Control cable from the throttle control linkage and bracket.
1 Disconnect the cable from the throttle control linkage.
2 Squeeze the tabs and disconnect the speed control cable from the bracket
2. Release the speed control cable cap.
1 Depress the speed control cable cap retaining tab.
2 Rotate the speed control cable cap.
3. Remove the speed control cable.
1 Depress the spring retainer.
2 Slide the core wire end out of the speed control servo pulley and remove the speed control cable.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
8063
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page
8064
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 8070
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 8073
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8074
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service Precautions
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8075
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the deactivator switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate counterclockwise 45 degrees and remove the deactivator switch.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Initial installation of a deactivator switch allows for one adjustment. If additional
adjustments are required, install a new switch.
1. Release the plunger lock.
^ Turn the lock knob counterclockwise until the first click is felt.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Install the deactivator switch.
1 Position the deactivator switch in the bracket and rotate clockwise 45 degrees.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal and tug moderately once the pedal reaches the rest position.
NOTE: There should be an extra click heard when tugging on the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions
Cruise Control Switch: Service Precautions
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 8079
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel.
2. Remove the steering wheel cover.
WARNING: WHEN CARRYING A LIVE AIR BAG, MAKE SURE THE BAG AND TRIM COVER
ARE POINTED AWAY FROM YOUR BODY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT OF AN ACCIDENTAL
DEPLOYMENT, THE BAG WILL THEN DEPLOY WITH MINIMAL CHANCE OF INJURY. FAILURE
TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
3. Remove the steering wheel frame.
1 Remove the nuts.
2 Disconnect the ground wire.
3 Remove the steering wheel frame.
4. Disconnect the speed control switches electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service Precautions > Page 8080
5. Remove the speed control switches.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the speed control switches.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8086
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8087
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8088
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8089
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8090
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8091
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8092
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8093
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8094
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8095
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8096
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8097
Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8098
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8099
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8100
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8101
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8102
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8103
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8104
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8105
Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
66-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8106
66-2
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8111
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8112
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8113
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8114
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8115
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8116
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8117
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8118
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8119
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8120
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8121
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8122
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8123
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8124
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8125
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8126
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8127
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8128
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8129
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8130
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8131
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8132
44-2
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8139
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8140
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8141
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8142
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8143
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8144
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8148
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8149
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8150
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8155
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8158
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service Precautions
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service Precautions
WARNING:
^ IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE SYSTEM
MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
^ TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP
POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY FRONT
OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag Disarming and Arming
Depowering and Repowering Procedure
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear safety glasses when repairing an air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) vehicle and when handling an air bag module. This will reduce the risk of injury in the event
of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the connectors on the air bag module. Doing so can result in air bag
deployment, which can result in personal injury.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not use any memory saver devices.
NOTE: If a seat equipped with a seat mounted side air bag and/or a safety belt pretensioner (if
equipped) system is being serviced, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be depowered.
NOTE: The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the RCM fuse is removed and the ignition
switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system
(SRS) fault.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. At the central junction box (CJB), located below the LH side of the instrument panel, remove the
cover and the restraints control module (RCM)
fuse F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) from the CJB.
4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag indicator will remain lit continuously (no
flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag indicator does not remain lit
continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power
supply must be depleted before repairing or
replacing any front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) components and before
servicing, replacing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side air bag sensors, such
as doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. The side
impact sensors (if equipped) are located at or near the base of the B-pillars.
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
one minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute.
Repowering Procedure
1. WARNING: The restraint system diagnostic tool is for restraint system service only. Remove
from vehicle prior to road use. Failure to
remove could result in injury and possible violation of vehicle safety standards.
Make sure all restraint system diagnostic tool(s) that may have been installed during the repair
have been removed from the vehicle and all SRS components are connected.
2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON.
3. Install RCM fuses F2.5 (5A) and F2.7 (10A) to the CJB and close the cover.
4. WARNING: Be sure that nobody is in the vehicle and that there is nothing blocking or set in front
of any air bag module when the
battery ground cable is connected.
Connect the battery ground cable.
5. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8165
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
- fail to light.
- remain lit continuously.
- flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the restraints control module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault
exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag indicator
and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool.
Seats Removed
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel on the bottom of the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector. 5. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the passenger air
bag. 7. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air
bag module electrical connector. 8. If equipped with side air bags, remove the affected front seat.
9. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the
passenger side air bag floor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect (if necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the
passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 11. Disconnect (if necessary) attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side floor electrical connector. 12. Disconnect (if
necessary) and attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Not Removed
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8166
There are two deactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
WARNING: IF THE SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) IS BEING SERVICED, THE
SYSTEM MUST BE DEACTIVATED AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE
INSTALLED.
THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED AND THE AIR
BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO AVOID
NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTE:
^ Diagnostics or repairs are not to be performed on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag with
the seat in the vehicle. Prior to attempting to diagnose or repair a seat concern when equipped with
a seat side air bag, the seat must be removed from the vehicle and the restraint system diagnostic
tools must be installed in the seat side air bag electrical connectors. The restraint system
diagnostic tools must be removed prior to operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing an SRS, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be removed
before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ After diagnosing or repairing a seat system, the restraint system diagnostic tools must be
removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
^ The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Move and tilt the front seats to their highest and most forward position. 2. Disconnect the battery
ground cable.
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS AND
BEFORE SERVICING, REPLACING ADJUSTING OR STRIKING COMPONENTS NEAR THE
FRONT OR SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS, SUCH AS DOORS, INSTRUMENT PANEL, CONSOLE,
DOOR LATCHES, STRIKERS, SEATS AND HOOD LATCHES.
THE SIDE AIR BAG SENSORS ARE LOCATED AT OR NEAR THE BASE OF THE B-PILLAR.
TO DEPLETE THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY
GROUND CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST ONE MINUTE. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT AUXILIARY
BATTERIES AND POWER SUPPLIES (IF EQUIPPED).
3. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 4. Access the driver air bag module electrical connector to the
clockspring behind the access panel in the bottom of the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver
air bag module electrical connector to the clockspring. 6. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the clockspring side of the driver air bag module electrical connector. 7. Disconnect
the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 8. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool
418-F468 to the harness side of the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 9. If equipped
with side air bags, disconnect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat.
10. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the passenger side air bag electrical
connector beneath the passenger seat. 11. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to
the passenger safety belt buckle electrical connector. 12. If equipped with side air bags, disconnect
the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the driver seat. 13. Attach a restraint
system diagnostic tool 418-F470 to the driver side air bag module electrical connector beneath the
front seat. 14. Attach a restraint system diagnostic tool 418-F468 to the driver safety belt buckle
electrical connector. 15. Reconnect the battery ground cable.
Seats Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8167
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
6. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Install the affected front seat. 8. Connect the drive and passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connectors. 9. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver and passenger side air
bag module electrical connectors.
10. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
11. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger air bag module electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
12. Reconnect the passenger air bag module electrical connector. 13. Reconnect the battery
ground cable. 14. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Seats Not Removed
There are two reactivation procedures.
^ One procedure requires removal of the front seats. This procedure will be used when diagnosing
or repairing a seat side air bag concern. This procedure will also be used when diagnosing or
repairing any in-seat or seat-mounted component of a seat equipped with a seat side air bag. The
seat must be removed when performing repairs on a seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
^ The other procedure does not require front seat removal during the diagnostic and repair
process. This procedure will be used when diagnosing or repairing a concern that is not related to a
seat equipped with a seat side air bag.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
WARNING: THE AIR BAG RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MUST BE REMOVED
AND THE AIR BAG MODULES RECONNECTED WHEN THE SYSTEM IS REACTIVATED TO
AVOID NON-DEPLOYMENT IN A COLLISION, RESULTING IN POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY.
2. Wait at least one minute for the backup power supply in the Restraints Control Module (RCM) to
deplete its stored energy. 3. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the clockspring
connector.
^ Reconnect the electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8168
VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND
POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
4. If equipped with side air bags, remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver side air
bag module electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
5. If equipped with side air bags, connect the driver side air bag module electrical connector. 6.
Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the driver seat belt buckle pretensioner electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
7. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger side air bag electrical
connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
8. If equipped with side air bags, connect the passenger side air bag module electrical connector.
9. Remove the restraint system diagnostic tool from the passenger seat belt buckle pretensioner
electrical connector.
WARNING: THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IS FOR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE ONLY. REMOVE FROM VEHICLE PRIOR TO ROAD USE. FAILURE TO REMOVE
COULD RESULT IN INJURY AND POSSIBLE VIOLATION OF VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS.
10. Reconnect the battery ground cable. 11. Prove out the system. See: Prove Out Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8169
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Air Bag System Reconnect Checklist
The checklist below should be completed following diagnosis or repair of any air bag system
concern:
1. All in-seat electrical connectors connected? 2. All air bag modules connected? 3. Restraints
Control Module (RCM) connected? 4. All safety belt pretensioners connectors connected? 5. All
sensors (side impact) connected? 6. Battery connected?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Air Bag Disarming and Arming > Page 8170
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Prove Out Procedure
Turn the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position and visually monitor the air bag indicator
with the air bag modules or restraint system diagnostic tools installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately six seconds and then turn off. If an air bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) fault is present, the air bag indicator will either:
^ fail to light.
^ remain lit continuously.
^ flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the RUN position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control
Module (RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and an
SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of five sets of five beeps. If this occurs, the air bag
indicator will need to be repaired before diagnosis can continue.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Instrument Cluster Bulb
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the instrument cluster bulbs.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Cluster Bulb > Page 8175
Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Warning Indicator Bulb
WARNING INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the desired miniature bulb by turning it a quarter turn counterclockwise and lifting
straight up.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Instrument Panel Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8179
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Figure 17) alerts the driver that the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected an OBD II emission-related component or system fault. When this
occurs, an OBD II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set.
- The MIL is located on the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or ISO standard engine symbol (Figure 18).
- Power is supplied to the MIL whenever the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position.
- The MIL will remain on in the RUN/START mode as a bulb check during the instrument cluster
proveout for approximately 4 seconds.
- If the MIL remains on after the bulb check: The PCM illuminates the MIL for an emission related concern and a DTC will be present.
- The instrument cluster will illuminate the MIL if the PCM does not send a control message to the
instrument cluster.
- The PCM is operating in the Hardware Limited Operation Strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL circuit is shorted to ground.
- If the MIL remains off (during the bulb check): Bulb is damaged.
- MIL circuit is open.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the Scan Tool must be sent, or three
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a fault.
- For any MIL concern, go to Symptom Charts.
- If the MIL blinks at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition could possibly exist.
- If the MIL blinks erratically, an intermittent open B+ to the bulb or an intermittent short to ground in
the MIL circuit exist. Also, the PCM can reset while cranking if battery voltage is low.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON, or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
The manufacturer does NOT show that this vehicle is equipped with an oil change reminder lamp.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications
Oil Pressure Sender: Specifications
Oil pressure sender .............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 8189
View 151-3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 8190
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 8191
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Oil Pressure Sender
Removal and Installation
1. Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the right side splash shield.
3. NOTE: The A/C compressor has been removed for clarity.
Remove the oil pressure sender. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the sender.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8198
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8199
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Instrument Panel Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8204
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning System
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows: ^
If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Safety Belt Warning System
The safety belt warning indicator illuminates and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten
their safety belts.
The conditions of operation for the safety belt warning indicator and chime are as follows:
^ If the driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator illuminates for 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds for 4-8 seconds.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the reminder
chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and reminder chime turn off.
^ If the driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the safety belt
warning indicator and reminder chime remain off.
Belt Minder
The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature
provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver's safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster.
To activate or deactivate the Belt Minder feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8215
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8216
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8217
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8222
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8225
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-26
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8229
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8230
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake control.
2. Remove the parking brake warning indicator switch.
^ Remove the screws.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Shift Indicator: Service and Repair
SELECTOR LEVER INDICATOR BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument cluster.
2. Remove the selector lever indicator bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 8241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Brake Lamp: Customer Interest A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Article No. 02-17-6
09/02/02
LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN
VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000
CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997
F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003
EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003
SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC
LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS
1998-2003 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR
1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle
line applications.
ISSUE
Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to
flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These
added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift
interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is
depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently
apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears.
ACTION
As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies)
that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically
interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the
emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal
service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when
the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 8250
(FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the
brakes.
Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system,
without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment
into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle
malfunction.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Brake Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling
Article No. 02-17-6
09/02/02
LAMP - BRAKE - INADVERTENT DISABLING OF BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK
FORD: 1992-1993 FESTIVA 1992-1994 TEMPO 1992-1997 THUNDERBIRD 1992-2003 CROWN
VICTORIA, ESCORT, MUSTANG, TAURUS 1993-1997 PROBE 1994-1997 ASPIRE 1995-2000
CONTOUR 2002-2003 THUNDERBIRD 1992-1997 AEROSTAR 1992-2003 E SERIES 1993-1997
F SUPER DUTY 1994-1996 BRONCO 1994-1997 F-250, F-350 1994-2003 F-150 1995-2003
EXPLORER, RANGER, WINDSTAR 1997-2003 EXPEDITION 1998-1999 F-250 LD 1999-2003
SUPER DUTY F SERIES 2000-2003 EXCURSION, EXPLORER SPORT 2001-2003 ESCAPE,
EXPLORER SPORT TRAC
LINCOLN: 1992-2003 CONTINENTAL, TOWN CAR 1993-1998 MARK VIII 2000-2003 LS
1998-2003 NAVIGATOR
MERCURY: 1992-1994 TOPAZ 1992-1997 COUGAR 1992-1999 TRACER 1992-2003 SABLE
1993-2003 GRAND MARQUIS 1994 CAPRI 1995-2000 MYSTIQUE 1999-2003 COUGAR
1993-2002 VILLAGER 1997-2003 MOUNTAINEER
Article 01-18-1 is being republished in its entirety to update the model year coverage and vehicle
line applications.
ISSUE
Corporate, municipal, or police fleets may have had their Ford Motor Company vehicle modified to
flash the brake lamps whenever the "police lights" or other aftermarket lights are turned on. These
added "police lights" have the potential to disable the brake shift interlock system. The brake shift
interlock feature prevents the vehicle from being shifted from park unless the brake pedal is
depressed. Disabling of the brake shift interlock feature may enable the operator to inadvertently
apply the accelerator instead of the brake pedal when shifting from Park to Drive or Reverse gears.
ACTION
As appropriate, dealers should advise owners (including corporate, municipal, and police agencies)
that any vehicle that has been modified with a connection to the brake circuit, or that electrically
interfaces with the brake lamps in that manner, should be disconnected IMMEDIATELY and the
emergency lighting system should be modified in a manner that does not interfere with normal
service operation or the brake shift interlock. In addition, if the high-mount stoplamp flashes when
the "police lights" are on, the modification does not conform with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Brake Lamp: > 02-17-6 > Sep > 02 > A/T - Inadvertent Shift Interlock Disabling > Page 8256
(FMVSS) 108 which requires that the high-mount stoplamp only illuminate when applying the
brakes.
Installation of warning lights should only be performed with a completely separate electrical system,
without connection to any existing vehicle wiring. Connection of aftermarket electrical equipment
into the brake lamp circuit or any other circuit which is connected to the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM), anti-lock brake computer, air bag system, or any other vehicle system, will cause vehicle
malfunction.
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE SUPERSEDES: 01-18-1 WARRANTY STATUS:
INFORMATION ONLY OASIS CODES: 203000, 203200, 205000, 301000, 503300
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8259
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8260
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8261
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8262
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8263
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8264
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8265
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8266
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8267
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8268
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8269
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8270
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8271
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8272
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8273
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8274
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8275
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8276
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8277
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8278
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8279
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8280
90-2
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the stoplamps.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause
for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step. 4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and proceed to the Symptom
Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8283
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8284
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test J
PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test J1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8285
Test J2-J3
Test K
PINPOINT TEST K: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8286
Test K1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8287
Test K2
Test L
PINPOINT TEST L: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
Test L1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
8288
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8292
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8293
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8297
Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair
CARGO LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the cargo lamp assembly from the headliner.
3. Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Remove the cargo lamp assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HIGH MOUNTED STOPLAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp assembly.
- Remove and discard the screws and washers.
2. Remove the high-mounted stoplamp bulb holder from the lamp assembly by disengaging the
snaps.
3. Remove the bulb(s).
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8306
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8307
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8308
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8309
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8310
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8311
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8312
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8313
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8314
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8315
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8316
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8317
Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8318
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8319
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8320
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8321
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8322
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8323
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8324
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8325
Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8326
Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
89-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8327
89-2
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8328
Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Interior Lighting
The generic electronic module (GEM) supplies voltage and ground to the interior courtesy lamps
when any of the following inputs are received: any door becomes ajar
- liftgate or liftgate glass becomes ajar
- remote keyless entry unlock signal is received
- a key cylinder switch is turned to UNLOCK
All interior courtesy lamps are turned off when any of the following occurs: all the doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed
- the ignition switch is turned to RUN
- a key cylinder switch is turned to LOCK
- remote keyless entry lock signal is received
The illuminated entry feature is another feature which activates the interior lamps. This feature
operates as follows:
The GEM illuminates the interior lamps at 80 percent brightness when an unlock signal is received
from a remote keyless entry transmitter, key cylinder switch, or door handle lifted when locked. If
no door ajar signal is received the GEM will time out and turn the interior lights off. The illuminated
entry feature will be canceled when any of the following conditions are met: the remote transmitter lock button is pressed and the courtesy lamp control is not activated.
- the ignition is in the RUN or START position and the interior lamp control is not activated.
Battery Saver
The GEM is equipped with a battery saver which will turn the lights off after 45 minutes of inactivity.
This feature is an internal function of the GEM software.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
Visual Inspection Chart
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage. 3. If an obvious cause
for an observed of reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step. 4. If the diagnostic tool does not power up, refer to the diagnostic tool manual. 5.
Carry out the DATA LINK DIAGNOSTICS test. If the diagnostic tool responds with:
- CKT914, CKT915 or CKT70 = ALL ECUS NO RESP/NOT EQUIP, refer to Module
Communications Network (Information Bus).
- NO RESP/NOT EQUIP for GEM, Refer to Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General
Module).
- SYSTEM PASSED, retrieve and record the continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs), erase
the continuous DTCs, and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the GEM.
6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Index to continue diagnostics. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, proceed to the Symptom Chart to continue
diagnostics. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
8. If the DTCs are retrieved that are not found in the GEM Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index,
refer to the master GEM Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Index in Multifunction Electronic Control Module (General Module). See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/General Module/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests
and Associated Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8331
DTC Index B1317 - B1571
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8332
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8333
Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Test A
PINPOINT TEST A: THE INTERIOR LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test A1-A2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8334
Test A3-A4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8335
Test A5-A6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8336
Test A6-A8
Test B
PINPOINT TEST B: THE INTERIOR LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY - DO NOT FADE OUT
Test B1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8337
Test B2-B4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8338
Test B5-B7
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8339
Test B8-B10
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8340
Test B11-B13
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8341
Test B14-B16
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8342
Test B17-B19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8343
Test B20-B22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8344
Test B23-B25
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8345
Test B26-B28
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8346
Test B29-B31
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8347
Test B32-B34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8348
Test B35-B36
Test C
PINPOINT TEST C: THE INTERIOR LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN
Test C1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8349
Test C1-C3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8350
Test C4
Test D
PINPOINT TEST D: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
Test D1-D2
Test E
PINPOINT TEST E: THE DEMAND LIGHTING IS INOPERATIVE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8351
Test E1-E2
Test E2-E4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8352
Test F
PINPOINT TEST F: BATTERY VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE
Test F1
Test F2-F3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
8353
Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair
INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens.
3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
8354
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8359
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8360
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8364
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8367
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8368
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Daytime Running Lamp Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8369
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8373
Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8375
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Page 8380
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Page 8383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: The halogen fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8389
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service Precautions > Page 8390
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
WARNING: The halogen fog lamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8394
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8395
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8396
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8400
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8401
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8402
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8407
Hazard Warning Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8408
Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID
The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by Electronic Flasher Module and Generic
Electronic Module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8412
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8413
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel removal from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1 Disconnect electrical connector.
2 Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Headlamp Bulb: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: The halogen headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8419
Headlamp Bulb: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 8420
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP BULB
REMOVAL
WARNING: The halogen headlamp bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the
glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb carefully. Grasp the bulb only
by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
1. NOTE: Make sure that the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
Disconnect the headlamp electrical connector.
2. Remove the rubber boot.
3. Depress the retainer clip and position aside.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 8421
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Control Module > Component Information >
Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8428
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8429
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8430
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8434
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8435
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8441
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8442
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8443
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8451
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8452
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8453
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8454
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8455
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8456
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8457
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8458
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8459
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8460
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8461
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8462
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8463
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8464
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8465
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8466
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8467
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8468
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8469
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8470
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8471
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8472
See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8473
License Plate Lamp: Service and Repair
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the license plate lamp assembly.
- Push the license lamp to the right and pull out.
2. Disconnect the socket from the lens.
- Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Component Information > Service and Repair
Map Light: Service and Repair
INTERIOR/MAP READING LAMP
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the interior/map reading lamp lens.
3. Remove the interior/map reading lamp assembly.
1 Remove the screws.
2 Remove the interior/map reading lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8481
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8482
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8483
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8484
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8485
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8486
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8487
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8488
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8489
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8490
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8491
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8492
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8493
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8494
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8495
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8496
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8497
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8498
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8499
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8500
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8501
See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8502
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8507
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8508
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8509
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8514
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp
Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 8515
Daytime Running Lamp Control Unit: Service and Repair
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) MODULE
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Remove the nut and the DRL module.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8519
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8522
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8523
Daytime Running Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8524
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8528
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8529
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8530
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Control Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Headlamp Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8537
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8538
Headlamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8539
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8543
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8544
Horn Relay: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8545
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Application and ID
Interior Lighting Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8552
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8553
Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8554
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 8561
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-23
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8565
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8566
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Rotate clockwise and remove the BPP switch.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: Initial installation of brake pedal position (BPP) switch allows for one adjustment. If
additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
1. To unlock, rotate the lock knob counterclockwise to the stop. 2. With the engine running, fully
depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Install the brake pedal position (BPP) switch.
1 Position the BPP switch in the bracket and rotate counterclockwise.
2 Connect the electrical connector.
4. Slowly release the brake pedal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8571
View 151-32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Liftgate Ajar Switch > Page 8574
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8578
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8579
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service Precautions
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8580
Fog/Driving Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
FOG LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
CAUTION: Do not use a screwdriver to remove fog lamp switch or damage to the finish panel may
occur. Adding tape to the end of a thin tool will reduce marring to the finish panel.
2. Use a thin tool to remove the fog lamp switch.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-18
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8584
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8585
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.
2. Position the instrument panel center finish panel removal from the instrument panel.
3. Remove the hazard flasher switch.
1 Disconnect electrical connector.
2 Remove the hazard flasher switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8589
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8590
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8591
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8596
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8597
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8598
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8599
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8600
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8601
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8602
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8603
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8604
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8605
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8606
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8607
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8608
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8609
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8610
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8611
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8612
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8613
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8614
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8615
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8616
See: Diagrams/Components/Component Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8617
Tail Lamp: Service and Repair
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear lamp assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Pull straight back to remove the rear lamp assembly.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Find Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams are presented in three main categories:
^ Power Distribution Diagrams
Circuits feeding/protecting the system diagrams
^ System Diagrams
Component Circuits that work together as a system
^ Grounds Diagrams
Circuits grounding the system diagrams
Power Distribution Diagrams
The power distribution diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are especially useful for identifying potential suspects that could be causing any
"dead/unpowered" fuses and/or for identifying potential suspects that could be the causing any
"blown" fuses.
System Diagrams
These diagrams are useful for identifying a component's power source and its direct relationship to
the other components in the same system. These diagrams may also indicate a component's
indirect relationship with components in other systems.
Grounds Diagrams
The grounds diagrams are located at Power and Ground Distribution.
These diagrams are useful for determining the interconnections of the grounding circuits of different
systems.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
How To Navigate Between Wiring Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8622
Circuits that go from one diagram to another will be marked with references indicating which
diagram the circuit went to/came from, i.e. "See Diagram ##-#".
These references will be in the form of unique diagram identification numbers (i.e. 15-3, 70-4, etc).
All diagrams are identified with this unique ID number in their captions.
Diagrams being referred to that may reside outside of the set of diagrams you are viewing can be
accessed by clicking on the hyperlink for "Diagrams By Number" which is provided with all sets of
diagrams.
PLEASE NOTE: When locating diagrams by their ID numbers, some diagrams may appear to be
missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do
not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Introduction To Ford Diagrams
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagram to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one which is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set of diagrams. Other components
which are connected to the circuit may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8623
System Overview
Each major vehicle system includes a complete system overview diagram prior to each set of
diagrams. It is important to realize that this is only a high level overview of the complete system
connectivity. It includes component operational information (1), component name and base part
number (2), and basic component internals (3). It does not include specific circuit information,
connector or pin numbers, splices or grounds. That information is found on the subsequent
diagrams in the set.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8624
Current Flow (1)
Each set of diagrams normally starts with the component that powers the circuit such as a fuse or
the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground
at the bottom of the diagram. In order to concentrate on the essential parts, power supply and
ground connections are sometimes simplified by a dashed line in the diagrams. A full
representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various
components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the
ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within the diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (as if the Ignition Switch
were OFF).
Splices (3)
A dashed line indicates that the splice is not shown completely. A reference is given to the diagram
where the splice appears in full.
Component Referencing (4)
Each component on a diagram has a reference to the component location view for that component
(i.e. 151-1, 151-10, etc.). These view references are located to the right of each component shown
in a diagram. The views themselves can be found at Vehicle Locations.
Component Names, Notes and Base Part Numbers (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component. Any notes that describe
switch positions or operating conditions follow the name. Descriptions of the internals of the
component are also included here. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses
next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function ID Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located to
the right. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8625
Fuse and Relay Information
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box in which all fuses and
relays are identified.
Power Distribution
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams show the current feed circuit. The current path is shown
from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each
fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors)
between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8626
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contain the diagrams that show the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the components are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set of diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various
items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
"Connector Views" show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector.
WARNINGS
^ Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
^ Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
^ Be sure that the Ignition Switch is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the
procedure.
^ Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
^ Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
^ Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
^ To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tailpipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
^ Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery cell. An explosion could occur.
^ Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
^ To avoid injury always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing loose
clothing.
Location Key For Connectors, Grounds, and Splices
The first digit of every connector, ground, and splice references its location within the vehicle.
NUMBER .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... LOCATION
100 .................................................................................................................. Engine compartment,
Powertrain (including: axle/differential/transmission) 200
................................................................................................................................................
Instrument Panel and Console, Steering Wheel assembly 300
.............................................................................................................................................. From
instrument panel to rear seat, below door trim panel 400 ...................................................................
............................................................................................... Behind rear seats, to rear bumper;
Truck bed 500 ......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................. Driver door 600 ..................................................
......................................................................................................................................................
Passenger door, front 700 ...................................................................................................................
................................................................................ Passenger door, left rear 800 .............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...... Passenger door, right rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8627
900 .......................................................................................................................................................
........................ Above door trim panel and headliner
Symbols and Wire Color Code Identification
Symbols Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8628
Symbols Part 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8629
Symbols Part 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8630
Symbols Part 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8631
Symbols Part 5
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8632
Systems Overview
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8633
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), utilize gold plated
terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they
must be replaced with a gold plated terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 Locked terminal
2 Male half
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 Seal
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8634
Defective insulation stripping
1 Proper crimp
2 Insulation not removed
3 Wire strands missing
4 Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 Seal
2 Displaced tab
3 Female half
4 Seal
5 Intermittent contact
6 Male half
7 Intermittent contact
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8635
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 Enlarged
2 Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Electrical short inside the harness
1 Solder coated wire to ground
2 Harness protective tape
3 Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 Grounding foil
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8636
Electrical short within the harness
Splice tape removed 1
Intermittent short
Splice covered 1
Wire strand
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8637
2 Splice tape
3 Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 Wiring harness tape
2 Wiring strand
3 Broken strands intermittent signal
4 Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8638
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use Rosin Core Mildly-Activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8639
6. Bend Wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8640
8. Use heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of heat shrink
tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8641
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailer/Camper Adapter
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams -- Other diagrams referred to by number (See Diagram ##-#, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations -- Location views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these
diagrams can be found at Component Location Views. See: Diagrams/Components/Component
Location Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the trailer tow lights. 2. Verify the exterior lighting
system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually
inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
VISUAL INSPECTION CHART
Electrical Central junction box (CJB) fuse: 21 (10A)
- 16 (10A)
- Connections
- Circuitry
- Relays
- Bulb(s)
4. If the fault is not visually evident, determine the symptom and proceed to the Symptom Chart.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8644
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8645
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Tests AB
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
Test AB1
Tests AC
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - BOTH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AC1-AC2
Tests AD
PINPOINT TEST AD: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE - RH TRAILER
TURN SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8646
LAMPS
Test AD1
Tests AE
PINPOINT TEST AE: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE-LH TRAILER TURN
SIGNALS/STOPLAMPS/HAZARD LAMPS
Test AE1
Tests AF
PINPOINT TEST AF: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMPS IS INOPERATIVE-PARKING LAMPS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8647
Test AF1-AF2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page
8648
73III Automotive Meter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
View 151-17
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8653
Turn Signal Flasher: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8654
Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID
The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by Electronic Flasher Module and Generic
Electronic Module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Position the inner fender well aside.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the pin-type retainers.
3 Remove the screw.
4 Position the inner fender well aside.
3. Remove the lamp socket from the lamp assembly.
4. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 8663
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8669
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8672
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8673
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8674
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8678
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8679
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
Rear Defogger: Technical Service Bulletins A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair
TSB 04-24-5
12/13/04
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER GRID/INTEGRAL ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR TERMINAL TAB REPAIR
FORD: 1999-2000 Contour 1999-2002 Escort 1999-2003 Escort ZX2 1999-2005 Crown Victoria,
Mustang, Taurus 2000-2005 Focus 2005 Five Hundred, Freestyle 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2005
Expedition, Explorer 2000-2005 Excursion 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2005 Escape
2004-2005 F-150, Freestar 2005 Escape Hybrid
LINCOLN: 1999-2002 Continental 1999-2005 Town Car 2000-2005 LS 1999-2005 Navigator
2002-2003 Blackwood 2003-2005 Aviator
MERCURY: 1999 Tracer 1999-2000 Mystique 1999-2005 and Marquis, Sable 2005 Montego
1999-2002 Villager 1999-2005 Mountaineer 2004-2005 Monterey 2005 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 04-18-9 to update vehicle applications and service procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may exhibit inoperative electric rear window defroster (heated back lite) grid
lines, integral antenna concerns causing radio reception issues or terminal tabs pulled from the
rear window glass.
ACTION Follow the diagnostic and repair procedures included in this article to inspect and service
rear defroster grid lines, integral antenna concerns or broken terminal tabs.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Warrantable/Non Warrantable repairs
Warrantable grid line repairs typically can be identified by one inoperative grid line with a small
discoloration at the area of concern, approximately the size of a pinhead. Grid line(s) that are
scratched or have the silver material removed are not warrantable and should be addressed with
the customer. Replacement of backglass for grid line or bus bar tarnishing is not a warrantable
repair. Tarnishing of the silver lines or bus bars is a normal condition. Please refer to the Heated
Back Lite Damageability Job Aid for additional information and examples of defects and damage.
NOTE
THE GRID LINE MATERIAL IS NOT EMBEDDED INTO THE GLASS BUT IS BAKED TO THE
GLASS SURFACE AND CONSEQUENTLY CAN BE SCRAPED OFF. INOPERATIVE LINES MAY
APPEAR TO THE EYE TO BE UNDAMAGED DUE TO RESIDUE REMAINING ON
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8684
THE GLASS AND WILL REQUIRE DIAGNOSIS WITH A VOLTMETER OR 12V TEST LAMP AS
EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE.
Examples Of Non-Warrantable Grid Line Damage
^ Ice scraper damage to grid lines
^ Animal scratches on grid lines
^ Window tint film/removal of the film which damages grid lines
^ Stickers placed over grids which upon removal, removes the grid line material
^ License plate (steel type placed against the inside of back glass) which rubs on the grid line
causing damage
^ Temporary license plate (paper stuck on to the inside of the back glass) which upon removal
removes grid line material
^ Cargo or lumber rubbing against the glass which removes grid line material
^ Cellular phone antenna installation/removal which damages grid line material
NOTE
AN UNDAMAGED GRIDLINE WILL HAVE SMALL RIDGES THAT PROJECT ABOVE THE
SURFACE OF THE GLASS AND CAN EASILY BE FELT WHEN RUNNING A FINGERNAIL
ACROSS THEM.
GRIDLINES THAT HAVE BEEN "RAZOR BLADED" WILL FEEL SMOOTH WHEN A FINGERNAIL
IS DRAGGED ACROSS THE AFFECTED AREA. THERE MAY BE SOME RESIDUE LEFT ON
THE GLASS THAT APPEARS TO BE GRID MATERIAL BUT A CHECK WITH A VOLTMETER OR
12V TEST LAMP, AS EXPLAINED IN THIS ARTICLE, WILL CONFIRM AN OPEN CIRCUIT. GRID
LINE INOPERATIVE - DIAGNOSTICS
1. Reference Workshop Manual Section 501-11 and the Wiring Diagram Section 56 to verify power
and ground to the back-glass.
2. Connect a test lamp or DVOM to a good body ground.
3. Turn the ignition key to the run position and depress and release the rear defroster button to turn
the system on. THE GRID IS ENERGIZED FOR APPROXIMATELY 10 MINUTES EACH TIME
THE DEFROSTER BUTTON IS PRESSED.
4. Starting from the top grid line at the center of the back-glass, touch the test lamp or DVOM +
lead to each grid line. (Use caution not to damage grid lines). The DVOM should read
approximately 1/2 of the battery voltage on each line at the center of the back-glass. If using a test
light, the bulb should be approximately the same brightness on each line from top to bottom. If the
DVOM or light indicates a high voltage or no voltage on any grid line, move along the concern grid
line with the + test lead or test lamp until the voltage changes suddenly. This is the area of
concern, use chalk to mark the area of concern and mark the outside of the glass at that same
area.
5. Repair per the Grid Line Repair Procedure.
GRID LINE REPAIR PROCEDURE
NOTE
LONG GAPS ARE ALMOST ALWAYS DUE TO DAMAGE AND ARE NOT WARRANTABLE,
HOWEVER THEY CAN BE REPAIRED. THE LONGER THE GAP THE MORE IMPORTANT IT IS
TO APPLY A MINIMUM SIX (6) COATS OF CONDUCTIVE REPAIR MATERIAL WITH THE FIVE
(5) MINUTE DRY TIME BETWEEN EACH COAT. APPLYING LESS COATS OR NOT ALLOWING
DRY TIME BETWEEN COATS WILL PRODUCE REPAIRED RESISTANCE THAT IS GREATER
THAN OEM RESISTANCE, RESULTING IN POOR DEFROST PERFORMANCE AND
EXCESSIVE LOCALIZED HEATING. REPAIRED LONG GAPS ARE GENERALLY NOT
VISUALLY PLEASING UNLESS EXTREME CARE IS TAKEN WHEN TAPING AFFECTED GRID
LINE AREAS.
NOTE
IF THE BROWN COLOR UNDER THE GRID LINE IS DAMAGED OR MISSING (THIS IS VERY
RARE), IT WILL BE NECESSARY TO APPLY BROWN ACRYLIC LACQUER TOUCH-UP PAINT
FOR COLOR MATCH. THIS PAINT MUST MEET SPECIFICATION ESR-M2P100-C AND
SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE GLASS PRIOR TO APPLYING THE REAR WINDOW
DEFROSTER REPAIR COMPOUND.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8685
Service inoperative grid lines on rear window glass using Motorcraft Defroster Repair PM-11 or
equivalent meeting Ford specification ESB-M4J58-A as follows:
Surface Preparation
1. Bring vehicle inside and warm it to 60° F (16° C) or above.
2. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of
the rear window glass as this may cause damage to the grid lines. Clean the entire grid line service
area with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC-23 or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry.
NOTE
THE REPAIR AREA HOWEVER SHOULD BE CLEANED WITH STEEL WOOL OR AN ABRASIVE
PAD SUCH AS SCOTCHBRITE TO REMOVE GRIME.
Mixing
The bottle of Rear Window Defroster Repair compound and touch-up paint (if needed) must be at
room temperature. Shake the bottle for at least one (1) minute for thorough mixing. Shake
frequently during use.
Application
1. Mark location of open grid on the outside of the back window glass (performed in diagnostics).
Place protective covering over the package tray as necessary.
2. Using "fine line tape", mask off the area directly above and below open grid line (Figure 1). It is
best to extend the tape 26 mm (1") beyond the concern area in both directions. The open should
be at the center of the mask and tape gap must be no wider than the existing grid line. Other types
of tape may be used but end results of the repair may not appear as visually acceptable due to
ease of application and tape edge finish.
3. If the brown layer of the grid is not broken or missing, apply only the silver grid repair compound
to the open grid line. Apply the correct coating in several smooth continuous strokes (allowing five
(5) minutes drying time between coats) across the open grid line area using the brush applicator in
the cap. Extend the service coating at least 6 mm (.25") on both sides of the open grid line area.
Apply a minimum of six (6) coats of the grid repair compound.
4. If both brown and silver layers of the grid are broken or missing, apply a coating of brown
lacquer touch-up paint across the open line area first. Take care to paint only the area missing the
color. Two (2) coats may be necessary to obtain the proper color. Allow the touch-up paint to dry at
least five (5) minutes between coats. Apply six (6) coats of grid repair compound.
NOTE
THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE GRID LINES ARE NOT PAINTED, BUT DUE TO THE SILVER
TARNISHING WILL TEND TO CHANGE THE GRID TO A GOLD OR BROWN COLOR. THE
REPAIRED AREA WILL BE BRIGHT SILVER AND WILL ALSO TARNISH OVER
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8686
TIME TO MATCH THE REST OF THE GRID.
5. After five (5) minutes of dry time of the final coat of grid repair compound, remove the tape, step
outside and inspect the repaired area. If the repair compound is visible above or below the grid, the
excess can be removed. This may be done by placing a single-edge razor blade on the back
window glass parallel to grid and scrape gently toward grid. A wider/thicker line will perform better
but may not be cosmetically appealing.
CAUTION
BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE GRID LINE WITH RAZOR BLADE. VERIFY ALL OF THE GRID
LINES FUNCTION PROPERLY WHEN FINISHED.
Curing
The service coating will air-dry in approximately one (1) minute and the system can be energized
after five minutes. Maximum hardness and adhesion occur after approximately 24 hours.
SOLDER METHOD OF LEAD TERMINAL
NOTE
THE REAR WINDOW MUST BE AT A MINIMUM OF 60° F (16° C) BEFORE A REPAIR IS MADE.
PLACE PROTECTIVE COVERING OVER THE PACKAGE TRAY AS NECESSARY.
The new terminal will cover the original terminal location, but must be placed so that the new
terminal conductive areas will be placed on a good conductive base. This area should be cleaned
with steel wool or an abrasive pad to remove grime from the buss-bar. The area should then be
cleaned with Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23, or equivalent meeting Ford specification
ESR-M14P5-A to remove all dirt, wax, grease, oil or other foreign matter. It is important that the
repair area be clean and dry and appear metallic. Depending on the buss-bar condition, rigorous
polishing with steel wool may be required. Please note that the entire buss-bar may be cleaned to
improve appearance.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE ANY TYPE OF FLAME TORCH OR FLAME HEATED SOLDERING GUN FOR THIS
PROCEDURE. TESTING INDICATED INADEQUATE HEAT GENERATION AT THE TIP AND THE
EXHAUST HEAT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO PLASTIC TRIM PARTS IN THE AREA. USE ONLY
AN ELECTRIC SOLDERING GUN WITH 100 WATTS OR MORE OF POWER.
BEFORE USING THE SOLDERING GUN, BE SURE TO MELT A SMALL AMOUNT OF ROSIN
CORE SOLDER TO THE TIP. THE SOLDER WILL ASSIST IN ACHIEVING BETTER HEAT
TRANSFER FROM THE SOLDERING GUN TIP TO THE NEW TERMINAL.
The new terminal has pre-applied solder, flux and temperature sensitive paint. The paint provides a
visual indication when the terminal has reached the proper temperature to melt the solder on the
terminal. When the proper temperature is achieved the temperature paint will liquefy and change
color.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8687
Use terminal type A (Figure 2) for all tab locations except on the Focus vehicle line. For the Focus,
use type B (Figure 3).
NOTE
DEPENDING ON THE ORIGINAL TERMINAL LOCATION, AND WHETHER THE TERMINAL IS
COVERED BY PILLAR TRIM, WILL DETERMINE WHERE TO LOCATE THE NEW TERMINAL.
SOME GRID LINE BUSS-BARS MAY ONLY ALLOW THE PLACEMENT OF THE TERMINAL
ABOVE OR BELOW THE ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, BUT FOR
MOST VEHICLE APPLICATIONS THE REPLACEMENT TAB LOCATION WILL COVER THE
ORIGINAL TAB LOCATION BUT STILL ALLOW THE REPLACEMENT TAB TO ATTACH TO THE
BUSS-BAR ON GOOD CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL.
1. Place the replacement terminal over the original tab location making sure the conductive areas
of the terminal will be on a good conductive area. Do not place the terminal tab foot on the original
location which does not have conductive material (figure 4).
2. Hold the terminal in place with an item such as regular lead pencil at a 90 degree angle from the
terminal. (Terminal type B can be held in place with tape.) (Holding at other than a 90 degree angle
may allow the terminal to slip when the solder liquefies).
3. Place the soldering gun tip on the top of the terminal but not on the painted areas of the tab.
Energize the soldering gun and watch for the painted area of the terminal to liquefy and change
color. The paint should liquefy in approximately 25-45 seconds after heating. As soon as the paint
color completely changes on either side of the terminal, de-energize the soldering gun and
continue to hold the terminal in place with the soldering gun and pencil for an additional thirty (30)
seconds.
4. Remove the soldering gun and pencil from the terminal. The terminal should be allowed to cool
for another two (2) minutes before the wiring lead is attached to the terminal.
5. Attach the electrical lead connection to this terminal, turn on the rear defroster, and verify
operation.
Parts Block
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Rear Defogger > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
A/C/Audio - Defroster/Antenna Grid Diagnosis/Repair > Page 8688
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
042405A Repair Grid Lines (Includes 0.7 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405B Replace Terminal (Includes 0.4 Hr.
Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
042405C Repair Grid Lines And 0.8 Hr.
Replace Terminal (Includes Time To Diagnose And Recheck)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7042006 28
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8693
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8696
Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8697
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Mini ISO Relay > Page 8698
Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-19
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8703
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8704
Heated Glass Element Switch: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFROST SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Push outward on the rear window defrost switch to remove it from the instrument panel center
finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8709
View 151-35
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8710
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8713
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8714
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8715
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8718
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8719
Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8720
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8721
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8722
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 8729
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8730
Front Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8731
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Left > Page 8736
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8737
Rear Door Window Motor: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8738
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8739
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side
View 151-33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8744
View 151-35
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Window Adjust Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8745
View 151-34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8748
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8749
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window/Door Lock/Unlock Switch > Page 8750
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8753
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8754
Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8755
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8756
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 8757
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the locking clips and remove the window control switch.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run
Window Frame: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Top Run
FRONT DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door window glass. 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the door glass top run bolts.
4. Remove the door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8762
Window Frame: Service and Repair Rear Door Glass Top Run
REAR DOOR GLASS TOP RUN
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window regulator.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position.
3. Remove the screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the rear door interior glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the rear door exterior belt line moulding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Frame > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Door Glass Top Run > Page 8763
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolts.
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
4. Remove the front door interior glass weatherstrip. 5. Connect the window control switch to the
door harness. 6. Connect the battery. 7. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the
screws.
8. Remove the front door window glass screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8768
9. Remove the front door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Open the liftgate glass.
2. Remove the two liftgate nut access covers (one on each side).
3. Disconnect the rear window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the two liftgate window glass cylinders. 1
Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8772
2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the two liftgate window glass hinge nuts.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
Interior Auto Glass Cut-Out Knife Kit
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering the eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glasses
and heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in personal injury.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. NOTE:
- Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
- Locating tabs need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new
quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating tabs.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top
center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass.
3. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing time at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours. (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary.) Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive will adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8776
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. CAUTION: Use caution when applying Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413. Apply a light
amount of primer. Too much primer will run
and damage the painted surface.
Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Medal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry.
4. Clean the inside of the quarter glass surface with alcohol-free cleaner, making sure the ceramic
coated area is clean.
5. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
Apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around
the glass surface to urethaned.
6. Apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification WSB-M2G314-B to the same area
that was prepped in the previous step. Allow five
minutes to dry.
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
8. NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating
tabs on the glass surface.
Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV or Essex U-216, which meets Ford specification
WSB-M2G316-B. Start at the bottom and work around to the sides of the quarter window glass.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8777
9. Install the quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. After the quarter window glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed. 11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the
quarter window glass. 12. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door glass top run.
2. Remove the rear door window glass.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Connect the battery.
All vehicles
6. Lower the front door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
7. Disconnect the battery. 8. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
9. Remove the front door window glass screws.
10. Support the front door window glass in the full up position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8785
11. Disconnect the front door power window regulator motor electrical connector.
12. Remove the front door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
13. Remove the front door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts
2 Remove the nuts.
INSTALLATION
All vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Cycle the door window glass to make sure of correct door window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL
All vehicles
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the water shield aside.
Vehicles with power windows
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the screws.
Vehicles with power windows
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8789
7. Remove the rear door window glass screws. 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up
position.
Vehicles with power windows
9. Disconnect the rear door power window regulator electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door power window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Vehicles with manual windows
11. Remove the rear door window regulator assembly.
1 Remove the bolts.
2 Remove the nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8790
INSTALLATION
All Vehicles
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Cycle the door glass to make sure of correct window glass engagement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician
Safety Information
Windshield: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glass and
heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Technician
Safety Information > Page 8795
Windshield: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION:
- After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the urethane
adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative humidity
above 50% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as temperatures
and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect the strength
of the urethane bond.
- Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8796
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
SPECIAL TOOL(S)
REMOVAL
WARNING: To prevent glass splinters from entering eyes or cutting hands, wear safety glass and
heavy gloves when cutting the glass from the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result
in personal injury.
1. Open the four A-pillar passenger assist handle covers.
2. Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Remove the four bolts.
2 Remove the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8797
3. Remove the two windshield side garnish mouldings.
4. Remove the overhead console.
1 Open the front console door.
2 Remove the screws.
3 Remove the overhead console. If equipped, disconnect electrical connector.
5. Remove the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Remove the six screws
2 Remove the sun visors and clips.
6. Remove the driver and passenger assist handles. 7. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 8.
Lower the front portion of the headliner. 9. Remove the cowl grille.
10. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8798
11. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting.
Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top
center and work toward the bottom corners.
12. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body.
13. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass.
14. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: After installing the urethane installed glass, the vehicle should not be driven until the
urethane adhesive has cured. The curing times at temperatures above 13°C (55°F) and relative
humidity above 50% is 12-24 hours (Refer to the Essex drive away chart for the cure times as
temperatures and humidity vary.). Inadequate curing of the urethane adhesive may adversely affect
the strength of the urethane bond.
1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8799
2. CAUTION: Do not scratch the pinch weld area.
Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination.
3. Use a wool applicator to apply Urethane Metal Primer Essex U-413 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G234-C to any exposed metal on the
pinch weld. Allow 6 to 10 minutes to dry.
4. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the
windshield moulding. 5. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with an alcohol-free
cleaner making sure the ceramic coated area is clean.
6. NOTE: Wipe off the glass prep immediately after each application because it flash dries.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply Urethane Glass Prep Essex U-401 meeting Ford
specification WSB-M5B280-C twice around the glass surface to be urethaned.
7. If installing a new windshield, apply Glass Primer Essex U-402 meeting Ford specification
WSB-M2G314-B to the same area that was prepped in
the pervious step. Allow five minutes to dry.
8. Apply foam dam meeting Ford specification WSB-M3G137-A to the bottom of the windshield
glass.
9. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8800
10. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV or Essex U-216, which meets Ford
specification WSB-M2G316-B to the sides and top of the
windshield glass.
11. Apply a bead of Urethane Adhesive Essex 400-HV which meets Ford specification
WSB-M2G316-B to the bottom of the windshield glass outside
the foam dam.
12. Install the windshield glass aligning it to the marks previously made. 13. After the windshield
glass is set, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 14. If necessary,
remove excess urethane adhesive from the outside surface of the windshield glass. 15. Install the
cowl grille. 16. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
17. Install the overhead console.
1 Position the overhead console. If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
2 Install the screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8801
18. Install the two sun visors and two clips.
1 Position the sun visors and clips.
2 Install the six screws.
19. Install the interior rear view mirror.
20. Install the two windshield side garnish mouldings.
21. Install the two A-pillar passenger assist handles.
1 Position the two assist handles.
2 Install the four bolts.
3 Close the four assist handle covers.
22. Install the driver and passenger assist handles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions > Page 8802
Special Tool(s)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Control Module > Component Information > Application and ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8812
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8813
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8817
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8818
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8819
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8820
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Washer Fluid: Capacity Specifications Windshield Washer Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
2.7 qts (2.6L)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 8825
Washer Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Windshield Washer Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Type Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Fluid Concentrate
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
WASHER HOSE REPAIR
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a
windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) i.d. black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose, and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Windshield Washer Pump: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8837
Windshield Washer Pump: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent component damage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Windshield Washer Pump
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the windshield washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir to prevent component damage.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8840
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Rear Window Washer Pump
REAR WINDOW WASHER PUMP
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the RH front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Remove the windshield washer pump. 1
Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Disconnect the hose.
3 Remove the windshield washer pump.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Windshield Washer Pump > Page 8841
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1
Remove the bolts.
2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Disconnect the hoses.
3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Technician Safety Information
WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Technician Safety Information > Page 8846
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
Precautions > Page 8847
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the right front wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the right front splash shield.
3. WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the
label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Position the windshield washer reservoir aside. 1
Remove the bolts.
2 Position the windshield washer reservoir aside.
4. Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
1 Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2 Disconnect the hoses.
3 Remove the windshield washer reservoir.
INSTALLATION
1. CAUTION: Do not operate the windshield washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer
reservoir.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- WARNING: Windshield washer solution contains methanol, which is poisonous. Observe all
cautions and warnings indicated on the label of the washer solution container. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Fill the windshield washer reservoir with Ultra-Clear Windshield Washer Concentrate
C9AZ-19550-AC or BC or equivalent meeting Ford specification ESR-M17P5-A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 8851
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 8852
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. NOTE: The windshield wiper/washer switch is part of the multifunction switch assembly.
Remove the steering column shroud.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the windshield wiper/washer switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor >
Page 8861
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized
to Motor
Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized
to Motor > Page 8867
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8870
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Front
WIPER PIVOT ARM - FRONT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm nut.
2. Remove the windshield wiper pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arms.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Front > Page 8873
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Rear
WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the windshield wiper pivot arm.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition to the correct locations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Adjustments >
Windshield Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment > Page 8878
Wiper Blade: Adjustments Rear Window Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within
specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition to the correct location.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Control Module > Component Information > Application and
ID
Wiper Control Module: Application and ID
For further information regarding this component please refer to Body Control Module / Generic
Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Wiper Motor: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor >
Page 8890
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm
Seized to Motor
Wiper Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm Seized to Motor
Article No. 03-20-1
10/13/03
ELECTRICAL - REAR WIPER ARM REMOVAL - SERVICE TIP
FORD: 2001-2004 ESCAPE
ISSUE Some Escape vehicles may exhibit the rear wiper arm being seized to the motor and
difficult to remove. This may be caused by an insufficient amount of anti-seize compound on the
arm/motor shaft splines.
ACTION For vehicle service requiring the removal of the rear wiper arm, the following Service
Procedure will help to free the wiper arm from the motor shaft.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE WIPER ARM BY CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WITH A
HACKSAW OR GRIND TOOL. CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT WILL MAKE THE MOTOR
UNUSABLE REQUIRING REPLACEMENT. IN ADDITION, DAMAGE TO THE LIFTGATE GLASS
MAY OCCUR. HOWEVER IF THE REASON FOR SERVICE IS DUE TO AN INOPERABLE REAR
WIPER MOTOR AND THE WIPER ARM IS SEIZED, THEN CUTTING THE MOTOR SHAFT IS AN
ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF REMOVAL. USE CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S
PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC. INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE
COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Confirm that wiper arm is seized on motor and that the wiper arm retainer latch is in the "release"
position.
2. Mark and LIGHTLY center punch the exact center of arm mount "circle" (area over motor shaft).
3. Carefully drill through wiper arm using 1/8" drill bit. Do not drill into the motor shaft.
NOTE
PREVENT METAL SHAVINGS FROM FALLING ONTO THE BODY OR PAINT AS DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR.
4. Enlarge the drilled hole using 3/8" drill bit.
5. Apply a small amount of penetrating oil at contact area of splines for wiper arm and motor.
6. Tap on joint area lightly to create vibration and facilitate penetrating oil working into splines of
arm and motor.
7. Allow the oil to sit and penetrate for several minutes.
NOTE
BE SURE THE WIPER ARM RETAINER CLIP IS IN THE "RELEASE" POSITION BEFORE
CONTINUING WITH STEP 8.
8. Install a puller with a 5/16" or smaller center screw (e.g. Battery Clamp Puller) to the wiper arm
so that jaws of puller are pulling against the arm, and center post of puller is pressing against
center of wiper motor shaft.
NOTE
ENSURE THAT JAWS OF PULLER ARE PULLING AGAINST WIPER ARM AND NOT MOTOR
SHAFT BUSHING.
9. Tighten puller in very small increments while tapping lightly on the wiper arm and center shaft of
puller.
With pressure applied to the wiper arm and shaft a light shock should pop arm off of motor shaft.
NOTE
BE CAREFUL THAT ARM & PULLER DO NOT FALL AND DAMAGE THE LIFTGATE AND/OR
BUMPER.
10. When installing the new wiper arm, remove all corrosion/rust from motor splines and apply
anti-seize compound to splines of arm and motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Motor: > 03-20-1 > Oct > 03 > Wipers/Washers - Rear Wiper Arm
Seized to Motor > Page 8896
NOTE
IF AFTER PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE THE WIPER ARM STILL CANNOT BE REMOVED,
THEN CAREFULLY CUT MOTOR SHAFT AND REPLACE MOTOR AND WIPER ARM. USE
CAUTION AS TO NOT DAMAGE THE VEHICLE'S PAINT, GLASS, BODY PANELS, ETC.
INSTALL PROTECTIVE TAPE AND/OR AN PROTECTIVE COVERING AROUND THE LIFTGATE
AREA AND BELOW REAR WIPER MOTOR.
Parts Block
OTHER APPLICABLE ARTICLES: NONE WARRANTY STATUS: INFORMATION ONLY
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Connector
Views
Wiper Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8899
Wiper Motor: Testing and Inspection
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
Use an Alternator, Regulator, Battery and Starter Tester (ARBST) to test the wiper motor on the
vehicle.
To test the wiper motor, disconnect the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft from the
windshield wiper motor; refer to Wiper Pivot Arm-Front or Wiper Pivot Arm-Rear.
Disconnect the wiper motor. Connect the (1) green lead from (2) Alternator, Regulator, Battery and
Starter Tester (ARBST) to the battery negative (-) post. Connect the (3) red lead from ARBST to
the wiper motor (4) common brush terminal (terminal 3).
Test the low-speed mode by connecting a (5) cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (6)
low-speed brush terminal (terminal 4) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 3.5 amperes, install a new windshield wiper motor.
Test the high-speed mode by connecting a cable from the battery positive (+) post to the (7)
high-speed brush terminal (terminal 5) and measure the current draw. If the current draw is greater
than 5.5 amperes, install a new wiper motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Windshield Wiper Motor
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top vent panels.
2. Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the bolts.
3 Remove the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft.
3. Remove the windshield wiper motor.
1 Remove the bolt and windshield wiper motor linkage.
2 Remove the windshield wiper motor mounting bolts.
3 Remove the windshield wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8902
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Window Wiper Motor
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the pivot arm.
1 Lift pivot arm to the upright position.
2 Slide the locking tab out.
3 Pull up and remove the pivot arm.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. 4. Open the liftgate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8903
5. Remove the rear wiper motor plastic cover.
6. Remove rear wiper motor.
1 Disconnect the electrical connector.
2 Remove the nut.
3 Remove the bolt.
4 Remove the rear wiper motor.
INSTALLATION
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor Linkage > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Refer to Wiper Motor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
View 151-20
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8910
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8911
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Introduction To Component Testing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-181 3.0L DOHC VIN 1 Duratec (2003))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8912